Home

Vegas 6.0 User Manual

1. __ Selecting all events that refer to a specific media file Right click a file in the Project Media window and choose Select Timeline Events from the shortcut menu All events that use the selected media file in the active take are selected Hold or while choosing Select Timeline Events from the shortcut menu to add the events to the current selection Selecting a time range Time selections are indicated by a shaded box and a bar that appears on the top of the timeline You can use the time Time selection 00 00 00 0000425 Only the events within selection bar for playing back a smaller portion of your project or ha _ the time selection are to apply cross track edits affected by edits or played back mnn Note Unless an event is locked a selected time range affects all events or portions of events that occur within the range a oe Dragging to select a time range 1 Position the mouse pointer above the ruler on the marker bar The mouse pointer changes to a left right arrow cursor 2 Drag to select a region All events or portions of events within the region are highlighted CHP 4 Drag the yellow handles on either end of the time selection to increase or decrease your time range selection a 4 Tip You can move the entire selection range by dragging the time selection bar eee ongoa BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 98 Selecting a
2. 3 Click the last event that you want to select Seat Selected events Tip Click the right mouse button while holding the left mouse button switch from rectangular selection time selection and track selection ES T All events between the first and last selected events are highlighted and selected Selecting a block of events 2 Position the cursor in a corner of the area that you want to select 3 Click and hold the left mouse button BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 97 4 Drag the cursor to the opposite corner of the area you want to select A rectangle is drawn on the workspace All events within this rectangle are selected Hold the left mouse button and right click to toggle through the three types of selection boxes free vertical or horizontal LE 4 Tip You may include or exclude events from a selection area by pressing and clicking an event To deselect all events click anywhere in the workspace outside of the selected events ie Selecting all events to the end of the track 1 Right click an event A shortcut menu appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Select Events to End All events on the track after the selected event are selected a gt Tip To move large blocks of events you can use Select Events to End with events selected on different tracks Press and click to select events on different tracks and then right click to access the shortcut menu N CU
3. Assigning audio to the LFE channel Once the project is in 5 1 surround mode you must decide whether a track will provide the 5 surround panning or the 1 LFE channel in 5 1 surround Initially all tracks in a surround project are set to provide surround panning but you can assign a track to the LFE channel instead You can assign an individual track to the LFE channel or you can route the track to a mixer control bus or assignable effect chain and assign the mixer control to the LFE channel To assign audio to the LFE channel right click the surround panner on the track header or mixer control and choose LFE Only from the shortcut menu The track or mixer control is assigned to the LFE channel Right click the surround panner and choose LFE Only to assign the track or mixer control to the LFE channel SH n 7 GOIF SH 07 o Vol 3 0 dE T gt Vol 3 0 dE LH LFE Bus A Inf Lill K Seles Bus 4 Inf Lill e Surround Pan nn s Pan Type To change a track or mixer control back to surround panning right click the LFE indicator and choose Surround Pan from the shortcut menu r Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format with respect to the LFE channel For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 210 SSS aaa Adjusting volume Adjusting track volu
4. oa aooaao _ _ Td Th 8 Click the Split Screen View button _ on the Video Preview window to restore the video effects The Video Preview window shows the result of the Chroma Keyer plug in Project 20x4680x32 29 970 Frame 226 Preview 160x120x32 29 9700 Display 240x 160x32 When a subject is filmed against a solid colored background in a studio you can key out the background color using the Mask Generator or the Chroma Keyer plug in You can select a wider range of colors using the Chroma Keyer plug in making it the perfect tool for less than perfect blue screens This procedure selects a small range of colors to use as a key In the example above the blue sky around the dome is far from uniform and it would be difficult to key it out with a traditional blue screen key The color is uniform enough however that a range of blues can be selected directly from the preview image Use the controls at the bottom of the dialog box to determine the sensitivity of the colors selected Since the filter selects a range of colors it is a good idea to try to select a relatively small range of similar colors Drawing a color selection area that spans both blue and red colors would make very large sections of an overlay transparent a Tip It is possible to use multiple Chroma Keyer plug ins on a single event keying out the blues with one and the reds with the other without keying out any colors between blue and red
5. 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit Source Project An ACID Vegas or Sound Forge window will open with the source project To edit a source project using a computer other than the computer where the project was created the editing computer must meet the following requirements e The software that was used to create the project must be installed and the project file extension acd acd zip veg or frg must be registered on the editing computer e The editing computer must have the same version or later of the software that was used to create the project e The project file must exist on the editing computer using the same file path as on the computer where the project was created e The project s source media must exist on the editing computer If the media files do not use the same file path as on the computer where the project was created you will be prompted to choose a new folder or replacement files 3 Edit the project as necessary 4 Render the edited project using the same name as the original media file and close the editing application If you re editing an existing track your project will automatically be updated to use the latest rendered media file CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 60 gt Working with events Events are the most basic objects in a project An event is something that happens in time has a specific duration and can be video or audio Understanding files and events The objects yo
6. The pointer changes to a hand icon La vol 0 008 cu Pan Center L 2 Right click and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu or double click to add an envelope point A square point appears on the envelope line Tip You can use ripple editing to automatically move envelope points as you edit in the timeline For more information see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 eee Thinning envelope points a 3 S z N Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade Hald Flip All Points Thin All Points Select All Reset All Thinning envelope points decreases the number of points on an envelope while retaining the envelope s overall settings Right click an envelope and choose Thin All Points from the shortcut menu to thin the entire envelope To apply thinning to a section of the envelope create a time selection right click the envelope and then choose Thin Selected Points from the shortcut menu a a Note Thinning is intended to reduce the number of envelope points created through automation recording and will have little or no effect if you create envelopes by adding and editing points manually a E CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION 164 T Deleting envelope points You can delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu If you want to delete all envelope points right click a point and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu Moving envelope points
7. Open the Event Pan Crop window by clicking the Event Pan Crop button 11 on the event p Event Pan Crop G resets Event Pan Crop DovwnHillviewS 17 01 Show Properties Preset Untitled L N Normal Edit Tool ER Position l width 635 0 Zoom Edit Tool L Height 502 4 Enable Snappin E s Center 753 5 pping Y Center 600 0 Lock Aspect Ratio a E Rotation Rotati l otation area Size About Center ma rae a s Center 753 5 Move Freely or Center 600 0 Move in X or Y only a 2 Keyframe interpolation i Smoothness 1 000 Source N T o Selection area GST B Maintain a5 Yes Smoothness Stretch to F Mo E Workspace zoom RH 12 5 X Offset Y Offset Grid spacing Handles Keyframe controller Position C 8 iii Note If any controls shown in the figure above are not visible enlarge the Event Pan Crop window by dragging the lower right corner until all controls are revealed SSS ee The Smoothness control and the keyframe controller are used when adding keyframe animation to create panning zooming or scrolling effects For more information see Animating event panning and cropping on page d d Cropping Cropping is the process of removing the outside edges from an image or video thereby re framing the subject In the following example the Event Pan Crop window on the left has been used to create a selection area around the subject
8. 3 Drag a plug in to a track bus or assignable effects chain r aai Tip You can select multiple plug ins and add them at the same time by dragging them to the desired location E 4 Confirm that the plug ins were added by clicking the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button to view the appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX You can customize the settings for the effects at this time Saving customized plug in presets Each plug in has a number of presets that you can use to set the behavior of the plug in However you can also adjust the controls for the plug in manually to create custom settings You can then save the effect settings as a new preset 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears TI Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 2 In the plug in chain at the top of the window click the plug in you want to customize 3 Adjust the settings for the effect 4 Enter a preset name in the Preset box 5 Click the Save button W to save the preset r aai Tip You can delete a saved preset by selecting it from the list and clicking the Delete button x EE S aaaaaoa _ ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 10 193 Arranging the order of plug ins Plug ins are cumulative during playback Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange
9. 2 From the shortcut menu choose Take and choose Next Take or Previous Take from the submenu Alternately choose the name of the take from the list at the bottom of the submenu _v__08 7 Tip Click an event and press T to select the next take or T to select the previous take S N ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 31 Previewing and selecting takes You can preview the takes for a given event 1 Select an event containing multiple takes 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu or from the Edit menu choose Take to display a submenu 3 Choose Choose Active from the submenu The Take Chooser dialog appears E lake Chooser Choose active take 4 Select the take that you want to preview and use the Play and Stop S buttons within the dialog enna D1 160070 5 To use a take select it and click OK The selected take is now the ai active take Deleting takes You can delete individual takes from an event at any time 1 Right click an event with multiple takes 2 From the shortcut menu choose Take and choose Delete Active from the submenu to immediately remove the active take Alternately choose Delete to open a dialog with a list of all of the takes contained in this event Working with take names Displaying take names on events Take names may be displayed on the events in the timeline From the TTEN usio boa dah View menu choose the Active Take Information option
10. Mean and standard deviation hues Displaying RGB components with RGB parade monitor The RGB parade monitor in the Video Scopes window displays waveforms for the red green and blue components of your video signal The monitor plots RGB values from 0 255 on the vertical axis and three times on the horizontal axis The parade monitor helps you determine whether the individual RGB components of your video signal are within limits and whether the total video signal is clipping 1 From the View menu choose Video Scopes to toggle the display of the Video Scopes window 2 Choose RGB Parade from the drop down list 3 Position the cursor in the frame you want to analyze If the Update Scopes While Playing button iil is selected you can monitor your video during playback 4 The waveform monitor displays the RGB values of the video signal Hover over the monitor to display the RGB value at the pointer position Video Scopes PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 e 209 Adjusting video scope settings Click the Settings button in the Video Scopes window to set your display options These options adjust the display of data in the Video Scopes window and have no effect on your data 75 IRE setup If your video hardware will add a 7 5 IRE setup you can configure the Video Scopes window so the display will be consistent with an external scope connected to a device that adds 7 5 IRE setup NTSC video in the United State
11. Tags are saved in your media library If a media file exists in multiple libraries tagging the media file in one library has no effect on the other libraries unless you save the tags to the files and use the Add Files to Media Library dialog to update tags and custom properties for all files ey Tip If you want to see which tags are associated with a file as you re adding or removing tags drag the Tags column in the Search Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time Tee Creating a tag CHP 3 Adding tags creates new tags in the current library only 1 Click the New Tag button 1 to add a new tag to the tree If a tag is selected the new tag will be added below the selected tag If no tag is selected the new tag will be added to the bottom of the tag tree 2 Type a name for the tag 3 Press Enter 4 If you want to change the icon used to display the tag right click it and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog If you want to change the tag s location drag it to a new location in the tag tree USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 79 Applying a tag to a media file You tag media by dragging a tag from the tag tree to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Apply Tag Mode button is selected ee _ Tip If you want to see which tags are associated with a file as you re adding or
12. Preference Create project file backups veg bak Use Net Notify to stay informed about Sony products Enable autosave Use linear scrub range Allow Ctrl drag cursor style scrub over events Make spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop Always draw marker lines Build 8 bit peak files Disable pop up animations Automatically hide docking area Build peaks for visible events only Keep bypassed FX running to avoid pause on bypass enable Enable joystick support Enable Windows XP theme support Allow edit cursor to be dragged Ignore fact chunk when opening compressed WAV files Save media usage relationships in active media library Enable Media Manager requires Vegas restart Use compatible method to read disc capacity CHP 18 Description Automatically create backups of your project files Select this option to have Vegas software periodically display information from Sony Media Software at startup Creates a temporary project file that can aid in crash recovery When enabled autosave occurs every five minutes The autosave process does not overwrite the original project file When this check box is selected the scrub control uses a linear range When this check box is cleared the scrub control uses a logarithmic range Vegas software allows scrubbing on empty sections of the timeline using Ctrl drag on the cursor Select this option to enable timeline scrubbing over events as well Changes t
13. e The bus letter is displayed A Bi and so on when a bus is routed to another bus e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to a hardware output LEE 4 Note You can map multiple busses to a single sound card eee _Vuaaaaaaaaaso o _ Working with busses Busses in the Mixer window are fully independent and may be adjusted separately You can adjust the bus volume change the bus meter resolution and adjust the bus fader to eliminate clipping Adjusting bus volume You can adjust a bus s volume during project playback by dragging the fader The fader on a stereo bus is split so that you can adjust the levels of the two stereo channels independently The fader can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall level of the bus or it can adjust volume automation settings on the bus track Click the Automation Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want the fader to function as a trim control The faders are locked ganged so that the left and right channels of stereo files move together Click the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button L to unlock or lock the faders You can also press while dragging a fader to temporarily override a fader s locked or unlocked state ee Tip Double click a fader to reset it to 0 0 dB If you have set each channel independently double click either the left or right fader to have the other fader match the other s volume
14. 10 CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 30 r Media Manager window Ctrl Alt 4 TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software This window displays the Media Manager which you can use to search for manage and tag your media files For more information see Using the Media Manager on page 73 EE Defauk dr S P 00 HS Match AI v o o m t B EET d Clear Basses tag or Electric Bass tag C Quick text search Name Rating Beat Count 7 3 4 Bass 01 wav a 3 4 Bass 02 way 3 4 Bass O3 way 3 4 Bass O4 way 3 4 Bass OS way 3 4 Bass 06 waw 3 4 Bass OF way 5 8 Bass wav 7 0 Bass O1 way 7 Bass 02 way I H E g Basses E amp Keyboards g ii UH bt hk EED pi pi 4 Advance iab Gl ale e Gle ade de le C AN iS Pore rere EK E E UD 803 items found out of 634 total item mer Project Media Media Manager Transitions Video FX Media Generators lt i Saving and recalling window layouts Ctrl Alt D or Ctrl D TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software A window layout stores the sizes and positions of all windows and floating window docks in the Vegas workspace You can store up to ten window layouts so you can quickly recall customized layouts for specific editing tasks Saving a window layout 1 Arrange the windows and docked windows as desired 2 Press Ctrl Alt D and then release the keys 3 Press a number on your keyboard
15. 2 When you see the envelope cursor d drag the volume envelope to the desired level As you drag the event s decibel level is displayed r 4 Note When you have multiple events selected the gain of all selected events is adjusted simultaneously enn _ SSK Decibel level B Setting an event s fade in and out The event handles allow you to change an audio event s fade in and out volume You can also change the type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade in or out 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event The pointer changes to the envelope cursor 5 2 Click the corner of the event and drag to create a fade Fade offset 0000 00 07 To remove a fade drag the end of the fade curve back to the edge of the event Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow sharp or smooth that an event uses to raise or lower the volume over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or fade out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu Right click to select the fade curve type Tip If you use the same fade curve frequently you can set it as a default for all new audio event envelopes For more information see Editing tab on page 349 WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 8 a 177 Using video event envelopes TI Velocity envelopes are only available
16. 5 Right click the time display and choose MIDI Timecode In The time display now shows the timecode being generated from your MIDI device The top of the display reads MTC Input Waiting 6 Begin generating MTC from your MIDI device The top of the time display now reads MTC Input Locked the time updates from the MIDI device and recording automatically begins Typically there is a short delay between when you begin generating MTC and synchronization Working with multiple recorded takes Clicking the Loop Playback button on the transport bar enables you to continually create takes during recording Takes are different versions of a recorded event that you can quickly switch between to choose the best one Each take within an event references a different source media file During recording with loop playback enabled the time selection continually repeats and starts recording a new take until you stop recording You can preview select rename and delete takes For more information see Working with takes on page 130 Specifying where recordings are stored When you record the event appears on the timeline while its media source file is written to your hard drive The first time you arm a track to record in a project you are prompted to identify the location where the recordings will be stored Changing where recorded files are stored when arming a track 1 Press and click the Arm for Record button on a track The Project
17. Adding velocity envelope points When combined with points envelopes can be used to animate velocity changes 1 Double click the envelope where you want to add a Envelope points point 2 Drag the point to adjust it The time and velocity level of the point are displayed as you drag 3 Right click the envelope between two points to choose a fade type linear fast slow smooth or sharp to set Velocity at 0 00 01 04 is b the shape of the curve LE 4 Tip To delete a point right click the point and choose Delete a Making a video play at twice its normal speed makes the duration of the video half as long Likewise slowing a video down makes it longer with 0 being an infinite freeze frame For example if you decrease the speed of a ten second video event by 50 only five seconds of video play played over the course of the ten second event meaning that only half as much actual footage from the original event plays On the other hand if the speed is increased 200 the ten seconds of content play in only five seconds The remaining five seconds of the event are filled either with a freeze of the last frame or with ten additional seconds of video content from the longer file You may want to resample the frame rate of an event that has been significantly slowed To resample an event right click the event and choose Properties Then on the Video Event tab select the Resample check box For more information see Res
18. After the Vegas software is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard appears This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Media Software Alternatively you may register online at http www sony com mediasoftware at any time Registering your product will provide you with access to a variety of technical support options notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive to registered Vegas users Registration assistance If you do not have access to the Internet registration assistance is available during normal weekday business hours Please contact our Customer Service department by dialing one of the following numbers Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Customer service sales For a detailed list of customer service options we encourage you to visit http mediasoftware sonypictures com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday business hours Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of technical support options we encourage you to visit http mediasoftware sonypictures com support default asp To listen to your support option
19. CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 268 Using transition effects Transition effects are more complex than a simple cut or crossfade You can replace a crossfade with a transition and then customize the transition to meet your needs ee Tip Select the Event Fade Lengths option on the View menu to display fade lengths between selected and nonselected events in the timeline You can use this display as a quick indicator of a transition s length EE Adding a transition 1 Insert a video event onto the timeline Transitions i i Preset 2 Insert another event so that it overlaps the first to create an Seelam _ 30 Fly Injuk automatic crossfade S j E Barn Door le 3 In the Transitions window browse for a transition effect If the Clock Wipe 19 3 A A E at Cross Effect Transitions window is not visible choose Transitions from the D vertical In Ne Vertical Out No Order Order View menu i F 4 Drag the effect onto the crossfade between the two events E a 9 e r Horizontal In Mo Horizontal Out Mo Border Border Note The duration of a transition is automatically T 6 determined by the amount of overlap between the two events As with other events you can control the precise duration of a transition by dragging the edges in and out You can also slide a transition for more precise control For more information see Sliding a crossfade on page 113 The or
20. Change audio track volume or video track compositing level when focus is on track Volume Up Down list track list Change track focus Mouse wheel shortcuts Description Zoom in out on timeline Vertical scroll Horizontal scroll Move the cursor in small increments Move cursor one frame at a time Auto scroll Move fader slider Move fader slider with fine control Change audio track panning or video track fade to color setting when focus ison Shift Volume Up Down Next Prev Track Keys Wheel Ctrl wheel Shift wheel Ctrl Shift wheel Ctrl Shift Alt wheel Press mouse wheel and move mouse left or right Hover over fader and use wheel Ctrl hover over fader and use wheel INTRODUCTION 38 rrr Cursor indications The cursor changes depending on which functions are available Cursor Indicates Modifier Description Standard none This is the standard arrow cursor that means events can be be dragged l Trim none Position the cursor over the edge of an event and drag to trim gt the event shorter or longer Slip Trim Alt Position the cursor over the edge of an event press Alt and drag to i trim The media within the event moves with the edge This is useful to preserve the beginning or end of an event while trimming Stretch Ctrl Position the cursor over the edge of an event press Ctrl and drag the edge to stretch or compress it This makes the media in the event play slower or faster Slip Alt Press Alt and dra
21. J au Contrast L 5 If necessary mask areas can be inverted reversing are the black and white areas with an Invert plug in or by selecting the Invert check box in the Mask Generator window For more information see Using the Mask Generator on page 263 K TIKI X Original color event Black and White Brightness and Contrast Invert plug in plug in plug in After you have created the mask place it in the highest track Add another video event to another track below the mask and click the Make Compositing Child button 4 on that track Any video that appears in a lower track below the Parent mask track and its Child shows through the areas outside of the mask The entire setup is pictured in the following illustration 00 00 17 28 Mask track 2 Parent p Masked video Child Background CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 260 Bezier masks TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use the Event Pan Crop dialog to create masks using B zier curves Use the controls in the Path heading on the left side of the Event Pan Crop dialog to create masks using B zier curves Each event can contain multiple B zier masks When you use a single setting for the duration of an event you are masking the contents of the event You can add keyframes to change the shape size or position of the mask to create an animated effect Mask Output Creating
22. K U Reba c R l a w ot 1 i k s Sw Jii Welcome C AEE Vegas software from Sony Media Software is an innovative and advanced multitrack media editing system Vegas software was designed to create an efficient audio video production environment without sacrificing the quality and processing power that you expect from Sony Media Software Whether it s the standard and familiar Microsoft Windows navigation commands or the clean and uncluttered interface you ll find Vegas software to be a tool that will be mastered in minutes Beneath the unique and customizable interface you ll find a product that is both powerful and flexible System requirements In order to use Vegas software your computer must satisfy the following minimum specifications Microsoft Windows 2000 XP Professional or XP Home Windows SP2 required for HDV 800 MHz processor 2 8 GHz recommended for HDV 200 MB hard disk space for program installation 600 MB hard disk space for optional Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library installation applicable only to the full version of Vegas software 256 MB RAM 512 MB RAM recommended for HDV OHCI compatible i LINK connector IEEE 1394DV card for DV capture and print to tape Microsoft Windows compatible sound card CD ROM drive for installation from a CD only Supported CD Recordable drive for CD burning only Microsoft DirectX 9 0c or later included on CD ROM Microsoft NE
23. Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered text Author s name when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files author information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About This Presentation from the RealPlayer s shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files copyright information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information
24. S or automation controls for output level w a Wi 34 a E panning and muting Click the button 27 T 27 e 2 and verify Show Automation Controls is 36 36 36 7 36 7 not selected if you want the bus control S a ve ane to function as a trim control Adjusting a a T bo A aa nd oi trim control affects the entire track Click E Perg i the button and choose Show Automation Input Output Lock Unlock Controls to adjust automation settings Faderand Fader and Fader For more information see Using Meter Meter Channels Automation on page 155 Mute Prevents the assignable effects chain Assignable effects Assignable effects showing from processing the track s signal When automation controls Show Automation Controls is selected the button is displayed as and you can use the button to edit mute automation on the chain s bus track Solo Plays only the output of that assignable effects chain Assignable FX Displays the Assignable FX window and allows you to adjust the plug in settings Bus Pan Drag to adjust the overall panning of the assignable effects chain When Show Automation Controls is selected the thumb is displayed as J and you can use the slider to edit pan automation on the chain s bus track Bus assignment Allows to you assign the assignable effects chain to a bus Input Fader Adjusts the input volume Output Fader Adjusts the output volume When Show Automation Controls is selected the thumb is displayed as El and
25. T ain ce iai eee ewes ES a ava Baa tase any Bean ate une E eae ae 23 PiaAC US 6 5 ga acw asta sctrgrg etna aa ane ee Ba ei ee ARR ed ORR E EEAS ENEAN 23 aC ae 255 Bite iota tose ald eden aan None ATE eo eh ats TTT 23 Transport Dak Controls 24 e620 cede Mak be hee SAG on 4 doe ai ae wha ae ee oo eae 23 SaS aT on Syste re Soe cen ttn ce hate era aaa naan a ve ee SaaS ea ain TTT 24 SCUD 6 111 L Z aa RoR aR ver mr nee er ene aPC ET ee RE oar Cena een 24 Window docking area and floating window docks 0 00 e eee eee eee 24 Saving and recalling window layouts Ctrl Alt D or Ctrl D 0002 ees 30 Keyboard command reference 0 00 c ce eee eee ee eee e eee enna 31 CURSOR INGICALOINS ies 8b 5 Medien Sire wi teens hey eae Ruts en Bw Re Gees Ae eed wg lena tite de ee So ere 38 Using adcontrol SuitaCe R a eet Gh 0 tweet Ge el ee Reet ake 38 AUIGIO SIGN al TOW eissaia ote Ae ee ON ea aaaea a eean EAE 39 video signal TOW esi ies teow wee Arce ade aecas deal ob Shay amp ah seo a8 Nh ree A te ae 40 About your rights in Vegas software lt sasse esaeen eeen 41 ADOUL YOUN FIVA iii Hig e a a elie a TTT 41 Proper Use Of SOMWANLC enadi a aa Bae oh a a EA ah ee a 41 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 y Getting Stated aie cess sects ava cen totes ae aw Ate elem ce E eA eae 43 Creating DFO GCUS eed Senet ee a ee de weed desea Ea ae arta as ey aan bases ad A 43 Using th New Project wizard 3 ii kine dno bs O9 4 O i Aare a AG See
26. Viewing on a broadcast monitor via IEEE 1394 FireWire To use an external monitor you must have the following e OHCl compliant IEEE 1394 DV card e DV camcorder or DV to analog converter box ee 4 Note Vegas software allows you to use one external video device at a time The external monitor display will be unavailable during video capture Ee While configuring your computer for DV external monitor previewing is not difficult the setup may require some troubleshooting The Vegas forum is a good resource for peer to peer system troubleshooting http mediasoftware sonypictures com forums CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 302 _____ Setting up an external monitor The diagram below shows the preferred setup for sending video from the timeline to an external television monitor Video to camcorder Analog to television Television monitor Audio to speakers Speakers The video is converted to DV format and is sent through the IEEE 1394 card to the DV device camcorder or DV to analog media converter The DV device sends analog output to the television monitor Use the Preview Device tab in the Preferences dialog to configure your IEEE 1394 card a 4 Note The DV device must support pass through in order to use an external monitor Some PAL camcorders do not support this feature A T Previewing audio External monitor previewing differs i
27. bitrate of less than 448 kbps or as stereo 48 kHz 16 bit WAV PCM files a Note AC 3 audio may not play back on some PAL DVD players To ensure compatibility with PAL DVD players use 48 kHz 16 bit WAV PCM files for audio E se WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 223 CHAPTER Using Advanced g Video Features C nS While simple to learn Vegas software is a powerful application with many advanced features This chapter covers some of the advanced video features of this powerful tool Cropping video With the Event Pan Crop window you can resize media in a video event or selectively crop media without resizing The Stretch to fill frame drop down list allows you to resize the media to fill the output frame when Yes is selected or to crop out a portion of the media without resizing when No is selected El Source Maintain aspect ratio Mo Stretch ta Fill Frame w El Source Maintain aspect ratio Yes Stretch to Fillframe No fies When keyframes are added you can use this window to create scrolling panning or zooming effects For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 a Tip If you apply plug ins to a event with panning or cropping you can choose whether to process the plug ins before or after the panning or cropping For more information see Processing plug ins on events with panning or cropping on page 245 Eee CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 224z
28. is added to the end of the filename to distinguish it from the original and adds it to the project as a take If you save it to a new file by using Save As you must manually add it as a take into the project For more information see Working with takes on page 130 CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 125 y mrang Advanced Editing Techniques This chapter builds on the techniques that were introduced in the last chapter Ripple editing pitch shifting and takes are just three of the more advanced editing topics that are covered in this chapter Snapping events Vegas software is preset to snap events into place as you drag them Events can snap to another event s edges to the cursor position or to a time selection Events are allowed to snap to grid lines and markers As you move an event along the timeline its edge automatically aligns to designated snap points At the highest level all features can quantize to individual frames Turning snapping on and off You can quickly turn snapping on and off by clicking the Enable Snapping button x You can also selectively turn snapping options on and off in the Options menu Enable Snapping controls all snapping behavior except Ren Help quantizing LO frames Quantize to Frames Alt F amp 6 Snap To Grid controls snapping to grid markers A variety of Fa Enable Snapping re grid measurements are provided For more informatio
29. o O TI Note If you cleared the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box before adding your media and your project properties are not set to 24p your 24p video is read as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i so you can choose whichever NTSC DV or PAL DV template suits your project requirements This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software S a oo 4 To preview just a portion of the project verify that Render loop region only is selected To create a prerender of the entire project clear this check box 5 Select the Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox check box when you are rendering to an output format with a slightly different aspect ratio than your project settings This will prevent black bars from appearing on the top and bottom or the sides of the output 6 Click OK A progress bar displays the progress of the render When prerendering is complete bars appear at the top of the timeline indicating the sections that have been prerendered Prerendered sections wo o nr es p i pE p 00 00 29 29 00 00 44 23 00 00 59 23 00 01 27 As a default these preview files are saved when a project is closed To delete these files when you close the project from the Options menu choose Preferences and on the General tab clear the Save active previews on project close check box You can set the location of these preview files by clicking the Project Video Properties button
30. 00 00 14 29 and to the right 00 04 00 08 00 00 14 2 Using undo and redo You are given unlimited undo and redo functionality while working on your project even to the extent of being able to undo changes made before the last time a project was saved but not closed While you are working with a project an undo history of the changes that you have performed is created Each time you undo something that change is placed in the redo history When you close the project or exit the software both the undo and redo histories are cleared Using undo Pressing Z or clicking the Undo button reverses the last edit performed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or toolbar button continues undoing edits in reverse order from most recent to oldest In addition you may undo the last edit by choosing it from the Edit menu Undoing a series of edits You can undo a series of edits by using the drop down list on the Undo button 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Undo button amp 2 From the drop down list choose the edit that you want to undo Items above it subsequent edits are selected automatically Your project is restored to the state prior to those edits ie Move Events K S Use the mouse aste Event Move Event to select a series of edits Undo 1 Action Undo 3 Actions When you undo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the redo history This feature allows you to restore your pro
31. 134 Working with 133 Trimming 103 104 Adjacent events 104 Beyond event edges 104 events with keyboard 105 selected events 103 Time and event selection 104 Time selection 104 Troubleshooting Audio 367 368 Video 367 375 Tutorials 20 U Undersample rate 174 Undo Redo commands 114 115 Clearing history 115 Vectorscope 295 Vegas Installing 18 Overview 21 38 Velocity envelope 178 Video monitoring with scopes 294 previewing on secondary Windows display 301 printing to tape 323 printing to tape using Video Capture 328 viewing on broadcast monitor 301 viewing on external monitor via DeckLink 303 Video Capture 328 Capturing video with 48 Recapturing offline clips with 49 Video CDs burning 359 Video effects 241 246 Animating 246 Keyframes 246 Modifying 246 Ordering 244 Removing 245 Window 27 Video masks 259 Video motion See Track motion Video preview split screen 292 Video previews Capturing images from 227 288 Dynamic RAM previews 291 External monitor 300 Optimizing 289 300 Prerendering 289 Previewing in a player 300 Resolution 289 Shortcut menu 288 Window 26 Video property settings 333 Video scopes 29 294 histogram 297 RGB parade 298 vectorscope 295 waveform 296 View buttons 64 65 Viewing media markers 136 media regions 136 Volume Assignable effects fader 146 188 Bus send fader 186 Event envelopes 175 Sett
32. E 3 FR sah GY Folders fij Address C EnMy Documents Surround Projects i SampleProject Center waw SampleProject Left Surround waw SampleProject Left wav SampleProject LFE way SampleProject Right Surround way File name Sample Project way SampleProject Right wavy Save as type Wave Microsoft wav w Template 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM gall busses Description Render 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM Type Scrap object Date Mi 133 KB 4 My Computer wave Files all busses Render loop region only Save project markers in media File eee 4 Note You can use an application such as the Sony Media Software 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack to encode 5 1 channel audio to AC 3 for use in DVD authoring EE Creating a DVD with DVD Architect Software If you have DVD Architect software from Sony Media Software you can create menu based DVDs music compilations picture compilations or a single movie DVD that will play back automatically in your DVD player DVD Architect software includes support for many file types and can convert your media to the formats required for DVD as needed However for best performance decreased disc preparation time and recompression render your files in the appropriate format MPEG 2 video files rendered with the DVD NTSC or DVD PAL templates will not need to be recompressed Audio will not need to be recompressed if rendered as stereo or surround AC 3 files with a
33. For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 I 1 Click the Transition Properties button en ponte z on the transition or right click the ZE Transition ris transition and choose Transition enaos Properties from the shortcut menu The Video Event FX window appears Shape Diamond 2 Change the parameters Changes Direction Iris out update in real time in the Video G S Hra Feather UJ Preview window For help on the a eis different controls in the Video FX p Repeat d indow click the Plug In Help butt Baa A window click the Plug In Help button parameters Repeat d L 7 to access online help Center 0 500 CenterY 0 500 Saving custom settings as a preset After you modify a transition you can save your settings as a preset for use at a later Baneta r Siae E E iaaa yn time You can apply presets by choosing Keyframe them from the Preset drop down list controller i 1 Modify the settings in the window to 00 00 00 00 create your desired transition effect For help on the different controls in the window click the Plug In Help button 7 to access online help 2 Click the name in the Preset drop down list The current text is highlighted 3 Enter a name for the new preset 4 Click the Save Preset button You can save any additional changes to the custom preset by clicking the Save Preset button ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 27
34. HOI ArSeOlAarSsO l Ares Float handle Inf Inf 29 3 2 a _ a bad Center PS 44 9 4 In 2 15 pa S pans L ae S E 21 337 27 J Leet 397 45 a CN 45 pao J 751 07 G7 oo oo 4 4 o0 0 0 a CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 182 gt Using the Mixer toolbar The Mixer s toolbar allows you to access project properties add busses and add assignable effects chains to the Mixer Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit ju gL Z Insert FX Z Insert Bus Button Description The Project Audio Properties button accesses the project properties dialog pg 333 bee The Downmix Output button downmixes your audio from 5 1 surround to stereo or from stereo to mono so you can ensure your mix will sound the way you intended it even when your audience s hardware has fewer channels than the original mix The button represents the current playback mode 5 1 surround output P Stereo output 4 Mono output Available only in the full version of Vegas software J The Dim Output button attenuates the volume of all busses that are routed to hardware outputs by 20 dB Click again to restore original volume Available only in the full version of Vegas software The Insert Assignable FX button adds an assignable effects chain to your project You can route tracks to the assignable effects chain pg 188 Available only in the full version of Vegas software mit am The Insert Bus but
35. Regions 118 Takes 131 Tracks 142 Nesting projects 66 New Project wizard 43 Noise texture 247 Non real time event effects 196 Normalize audio event 172 OHCI 1394 IEEE cards 234 300 375 INDEX viii he Online help 19 Via the web 20 What sThis help 20 Optimizing previews 289 300 Ordering of effects 193 244 Organizing tracks 142 143 Overlays Animating 286 Compositing modes 249 251 Masks 257 265 Position 283 Safe areas 293 Shadow 283 Transparency 264 Palettes 80 assigning buttons 81 clearing buttons 81 creating 80 Pan type Setting track default 150 Panning Pan types 217 Surround 214 Panning automation 156 Panning audio Envelope 163 Multipurpose slider 145 Panning models 145 Panning video 277 Pan and scan effect 278 Plug in processing order 245 Parent media for subclips 137 Parent child tracks 248 258 Pasting Event attributes 175 paste insert 102 paste repeat 102 Pasting events 102 Pasting events 101 Perfect Clarity pca audio format 310 Phase inverting Events 172 tracks 148 Picture in picture effect 285 Pitch shifting 127 Copying and pasting between events 175 Pixel aspect ratio 238 Custom stream properties 240 Render settings 313 INDEX Still images 226 Placing media As takes 56 Dragging dropping 56 Multiple files 56 Same track 56 Playback Buffer control 344 Event playback rate 174 Interpo
36. Ruler 22 Offset setting 330 Project property settings 334 Time formats 330 375 Ruler tab 334 Safe areas 293 Saving a project 45 305 307 Autosaving 307 Using Save As 45 306 With media files 306 Scopes histogram 297 RGB parade 298 vectorscope 295 video 294 waveform 296 Scott Studio Commands 115 120 File format 46 309 Scribble strip 64 65 142 Scrolling 62 Scrubbing 68 69 Keyboard 69 Playhead 69 Scrub control 24 69 Timeline 69 with multimedia controllers 68 Search pane autohiding 90 automatically hiding 90 Searching for media files by keyword 84 Media Manager 84 using tags 85 Searching media bins 52 Selecting all members of a group 180 Audio CD tracks 355 Envelope points 165 Events and a time range 98 Events to the end of the track 97 erouped events 180 Media files 46 Multiple events 96 Range of events 96 Regions 118 Takes 130 x time range 97 Tracks 98 SFAP files 371 Shadow 283 Show Me How 20 Shuffling events 112 Signal flow 39 40 Single session CD burning 351 Slide show creating 227 Slider Multipurpose 145 Sliding Crossfades 113 Events 108 Slipping events 107 Slip trimming events 107 Smart resample 173 SMPTE timecode 373 Changing 330 Snap offset 126 Snapping events 125 126 Quantizing to frames 125 Snap offset 126 To aselection 126 To grid lines 125 To marker lines 125 To the cursor
37. SR CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 267 CHAPTER Transitions and Motion e Want something other than a cut or crossfade between video events Vegas software provides a wide variety of transitions you can add to your project This chapter also covers track motion and keyframe animation which allows you to automate video effects media generators cropping panning and more Understanding basic transitions Transitions occur between two video events Most professional productions on television or on the big screen use only two types of transitions The first is a simple cut where one scene immediately cuts to the other without delay or effects The other is a fade otherwise known as a crossfade or a dissolve Cuts A cut is actually not a transition Instead the last frame from an event is immediately followed by the first frame of the next event This is what happens with two adjacent events on the timeline either in the same track or in different tracks This can also happen when an event is punched into another with fade edge edits turned off Adjacent events Events on different tracks Punch in events 00 00 14 29 Crossfades You can fade one event out and fade into the next event by simply overlapping the two The duration of the transition is determined by the amount of overlap For more information see Crossfading events on page 112
38. SSS Oe e To print only the portion of your project you selected in step 2 select the Render loop region only check box Click Next The Leader and Trailer dialog displays 5 Use the Leader and Trailer dialog to set up the data that will be printed before and after your project CHP 17 a From the Leader test pattern style drop down list choose a test pattern type and video format b Type a value in the Test pattern duration box to determine the length of the test pattern To print without a test pattern enter 0 c Select the Play 1 kHz tone with test pattern check box to add an audio test tone that will play along with the test pattern d Type values in the Leader black duration and Trailer black duration boxes to set the length of blank space that will be printed before and after your video To print without a leader or trailer enter 0 in the appropriate box Click Next The Device Setup dialog appears Choose the device control mode Select Manual to cue the device manually and set it to record Use this option if the application is unable to obtain device control of your deck e Select Crash Recording to cue the device automatically based on a timecode value Enter the timecode where recording should begin in the Device timecode box The application must be able to perform basic device control of your deck e Select Auto Edit if your deck supports Auto Edit Insert Edit mode Type timecode values in the Start prin
39. The status will be Offline if you did not search or browse for a replacement file oi Probable The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement Match File column A status of Probable Match indicates that the Media Manager tool found a likely replacement file when you clicked Smart Search y Found The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement File column A status of Found indicates that you chose the file you want to use after clicking the Browse button Select the files you want to resolve e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file Specify how you want to resolve the selected files e Click the Smart Search button to search quickly and allow the Media Manager tool to suggest the replacement file e Click the Browse button to choose a specific replacement file e Click the Leave Offline button to leave the file offline The file will not be added to your project e Click the Remove button to remove the file from the media library The file will not be added to your project The original media file is not deleted USING THE MEDIA MANAGER QQ 7 4 Repeat step 3 for each file in the list 5 Click the OK button to preview the files o
40. When this check box is selected the Vegas window will inherit the appearance of the current theme when using Microsoft Windows XP When the check box is cleared user interface elements will maintain the classic Windows operating system appearance Select this check box if you want to be able to drag the cursor to change its position on the timeline and in the Trimmer window When this check box is selected you can position the cursor without losing your loop region To create a time selection without moving the cursor hold the Shift key When this check box is selected Vegas will ignore fact chunks when opening compressed WAV files A fact chunk stores information about the number of samples contained in a compressed WAV file If you experience problems opening a compressed WAV file select this check box and reopen the file Note If you change the setting of this check box please delete any proxy sfapO files associated with compressed WAV files When this check box is selected the Media Manager will save information about media usage so you can perform searches for media relationships You can search for projects that use a media file projects where a media file was previewed media that was rendered with a media file and so on When this check box is selected the Media Manager will start when you start Vegas software Clear the check box to turn off the Media Manager and prevent it from starting with the application If you re
41. Y Select this button if you want to lock the vertical dimension of the selection box fall Prevent Scaling Z Select this button if you want to lock the Z axis dimension of the selection box Examples of various 3D compositing scenarios In the following examples track two blue and yellow checkerboard is rotated forward in 3D space track 4 ereen and eray checkerboard is rotated backward in 3D space and track 3 red and white checkerboard is a 2D track Track 1 is used to rotate tracks 2 through 4 so you can see the compositing interaction In the first example the 2D track is a compositing child to track 2 The 2d child is inserted in the composited output at a depth of zero on the Z axis and tracks 2 and 4 intersect in 3D space Bre SH Bre o USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 257 In the next example clicking the Make Compositing Parent button t on track 3 forces the track below at the same compositing level to be rendered in 3D and composited as a 2D image Track 4 green and gray checkerboard now has the appearance of depth the checkerboard tapers to a vanishing point but is inserted in the composited output as a 2D image at a depth of zero on the Z axis Track 2 is still rotated in 3D space m m o gt he N _i ety Dm me emo dU Bt EE S dG m tI SR Bre 0 m Bt In the next example clicking the Make Compositing Parent button t on track
42. control For more information see Scrubbing on page 68 Set playback speed Window docking area and floating window docks This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available but out of the way while you are working with a project Windows can be docked next to each other subdividing the docking area or they can be docked in a stack in the window docking area or in a separate floating docking window When stacked each window has a tab at the bottom with its name on it Click the window s tab to bring it to the top Close window Drag the handle away from the Expand window docking area to float the window N Color Corrector Preset JK ef Preview Auto H Eb Color Corrector Color Curves gt Convolution Ker Cookie Cutter ae ban 5 Pyr Deform Film Effects vertical Light Horizontal Medium Film Grain Gaussian Blur Glow Gradient Map HSL Adjust Invert Lens Flare Levels A a T S d i A Fi iFi 4 I Coa Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transitions VideoFX lt gt K Vertical Extreme 45 Degrees 30 Degrees Light Project 720x480x332 23 976p Frame 846 Preview 150x120x324 23 976p Display 240x160x32 To dock a window drag it to the docking area Drag the handle on the left side of a docked window to remove a window from the docking area and float It e To preven
43. displays the available drive space where recorded audio is stored Item Description Master bus mode Choose Stereo to create a two channel stereo project Choose 5 1 Surround if you want to perform advanced 5 1 channel mixing Available only in the full version of Vegas software Number of stereo busses Enter the number of stereo busses that you want in your project You may add up to 25 additional busses The busses appear in the Mixer Available only in the full version of Vegas software Sample rate Hz Choose a sample rate from the drop down list or enter your own rate The sample rate range is 2 000 Hz to 96 000 Hz Higher sample rates result in better quality sound but also mean larger audio files Bit depth Choose a bit depth from the drop down list A higher bit depth results in better quality sound but also means larger audio files Resample and stretch quality Choose Preview Good or Best to determine the accuracy with which audio files will be resampled to match your project settings This setting also determines the quality of processing when time stretching audio events Enable low pass filter on LFE Applies a low pass filter to each track in a 5 1 surround project that is assigned to the LFE channel Available surround projects only only in the full version of Vegas software Cutoff frequency for low pass Choose a frequency to set the frequency above which audio will be ignored by the LFE channel Available only filter Hz in t
44. do not want to have to spend the time getting it back for later use save it as a preset Presets appear in the top of plug in windows in Vegas software Pulldown In telecine conversion fields are added to convert 24 fps film to 30 fps video In 2 3 pulldown for example the first frame is scanned into two fields the second frame is scanned into three fields and so on for the duration of the film 2 3 pulldown is the standard for NTSC broadcasts of 24p material Use 2 3 pulldown when printing to tape but not when you intend to use the rendered video in Vegas software Removing 2 3 pulldown is inefficient because the pulldown fields that are created for frame 3 span two frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 pulldown fields bottom Use 2 3 3 2 pulldown when you plan to use your rendered video in Vegas software as source media When removing 2 3 3 2 pulldown Vegas software simply discards frame three and merges the pulldown fields in the remaining frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 2 2 pulldown fields bottom Pulse Code Modulation PCM PCM is the most common direct binary representation of a level of an uncompressed audio signal This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage Punch In Punching in during recording means automatically starting and stopping recording at user specified times In Vegas software shorter events can be punched i
45. ei fl aH z S o fiw G lere 550 i Ea T c E SB SK 6691 mnn LR ES L 4 Tip Press and click the Solo button to solo only the S x2 5l selected track and restore any other soloed tracks If the c EE SH EO selected track is already soloed press and click the Solo a d tF n to restore all tracks S button to restore all tracks T ELETTY see o r j r E 4 i i oki Z 2n 86 When you have multiple levels of parent and child tracks clicking the Solo a S c L button on a parent track solos the parent track and its compositing children Sz So enol Other nonsoloed tracks at the same compositing level are bypassed love 100 0 Atg In the sample track list soloing track 1 will solo tracks 1 through 6 Soloing track 4 will solo tracks 4 through 6 Tracks 2 and 3 are bypassed and tracks 1 and 7 play normally Setting default track properties You can use the settings of a selected track to determine the Pe efaultelackaProperties default settings for all new tracks n your project Properties Select the properties to use as Future defaults For new tracks These that can e set appear in the Set Default Track Properties properties will default to the values of the current track Audio track properties Video track properties dialog volume Composite mode 1 Set up a track in your project with the properties to use as Fleer ipe Y Height default settings for new tracks Height Track Fx Track Ex
46. or other rectangular variations Using the wrong pixel aspect ratio can result in distortions or stretching of the video You can set the pixel aspect ratio in the Project Properties dialog or when rendering in the Custom Template dialog You should choose the aspect ratio based on the final movie s destination Consult your hardware manual if you are in doubt about the appropriate ratio The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio Plug In An effect that can be added to the product to enhance the feature set Vegas software supports DirectX compatible plug ins The built in EQ Compression and Dithering effects are also considered plug ins because they work in other DirectX compatible applications Plug In Chain Plug ins can be strung together into a chain so that the output of one effect feeds into the input of another This allows for complex effects that couldn t otherwise be created Pre roll Post roll Pre roll is the amount of time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll is the amount of time after the event The time selection defines the pre and post roll when recording into a selected event Preset A snapshot of the current settings in a plug in Presets are created and named so that you can easily get back to a sound or look that you have previously created APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 384 a A preset calls up a bulk setting of a function in Vegas software If you like the way you tweaked that EQ but
47. playback will begin automatically e If the Auto Preview button is not selected click the Start Preview button to begin playback If you have multiple files selected they will be played back sequentially Each file s icon will change to a play icon during playback USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 89 ______ 3 Click the Stop Preview button 211 to stop the preview or turn off the preview feature by deselecting the Auto Preview button If the file is offline you ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement a Tip To preview a media file in its associated media player right click the file and choose Open with lt Application Name gt from the shortcut menu SV rT Media relationships When vou re searching or browsing the contents of your media library you may be overwhelmed by the amount of media you ve amassed How can you possibly remember how and where you ve used your media No problem The Media Manager tool takes care of the details Media relationships are maintained only when the Save media usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the Vegas Preferences dialog 1 Right click a media file in the Search Results pane 2 Choose Find Related Items from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu Command Description Used with Displays all media files that use the selected media Previewed with Disp
48. removing extraneous information from the outside of the video This creates a zoom effect that is similar to zooming in with a camcorder The Video Preview window on the right displays the event after cropping Crop Area Event Pan Crop x ZH Event Pan Crop DownHillviewS 17 01 ideo Preview Preset Untitled vi oO E ak ee Best Auto Ht SR Position Width 685 0 AS Height 502 4 C 1 x Center 753 5 Y Center 600 0 Rotation Preview fa Keyframe interpolation output Source lG Maintain aspect ratio Yes FS Stretch to fill frame Yes i Workspace 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 Position gt L F gt spProject 720x480x32 29 970 Frame 268 4 K Preview 160x120x32 29 970p Display 240x160x32 BE IAD 00 00 00 00 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 n E 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 1 on the event 2 Drag the handles small boxes located around the perimeter of the selection area to change the size 3 Move the mouse to middle of the selection area until the cursor changes to a move icon TY Drag the selection area to reposition it Be aware of the following as you crop a video event To keep the selection area centered as you resize select the Size About Center button To maintain the proportion of the selection area select the Lock Aspect Ratio button To prevent distortion of the source media file ensure that
49. 0 255 To get acquainted with the histogram use an external monitor to preview your video and watch the video output and histogram as you use plug ins to modify the colors 1 From the View menu choose Video Scopes to toggle the display of the Video Scopes window 2 Choose Histogram from the drop down list 3 Choose a histogram type from the menu Luminance charts the luminance or brightness of colors in your video Red charts the red tones in your video e Green charts the green tones in your video Blue charts the blue tones in your video Alpha charts the alpha channel transparency in your video Luminance R G B stacks luminance and RGB charts 4 Position the cursor in the frame you want to analyze If the Update Scopes While Playing button i is selected you can monitor your video during playback 5 Use the histogram to evaluate the colors in your video The Mean value indicates the average intensity of all pixels in the graph and the Standard Deviation value indicates the average percentage by which pixels in the graph vary from the Mean value CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 298 j ___ 6 Use plug ins such as Brightness and Contrast Broadcast Colors and Levels to adjust the color For more information see Using video effects on page 241 Frame Histogram display of frame ideo Scopes Histogram o M w En fia Histogram Luminance Graph
50. 126 Solid color event 247 Soloing Assignable effects chains 187 Busses 186 Solo button 64 65 Tracks 150 Sorting media with bins 51 Split screen previews 292 Splitting 105 107 All events at cursor 106 Selected events 106 Time selection 106 Status bar 24 153 Stills removing red eye 137 Streaming media commands 120 RealPlayer 120 Windows Media 120 229 Stretching events 129 Subclips 136 Subtags 80 Summary tab 334 Surround 209 222 Automating panning 218 221 Hardware setup 210 Keyframes 218 221 LFE channel 209 212 Panning 214 Rendering 221 Surround panner 29 Surround Panner window 216 Switches 171 173 Invert phase 172 Lock 171 Loop 171 Maintain aspect ratio 173 Mute 171 Normalize 172 Reduce interlace flicker 173 Resample 173 Sync tab 344 Advanced control settings 344 Synchronization audio video alignment problems 109 Synchronizing MIDI timecode 200 206 System requirements 17 T Tagging media files 77 loops and samples 81 Tags applying to media file 78 arranging in the tag tree 80 creating 77 creating palettes 80 deleting from library 79 editing names or images 80 removing from library 79 removing from media file 79 saving to media files 81 subtags 80 viewing palettes 80 Takes 130 Adding files as 130 Deleting 131 Displaying names of 131 Placing media as 56 Previewing 131 Recording audio as new 203 Renaming 13
51. 3 Using keyframe animation Keyframe animation is a technique that computer artists use to quickly make complex animated sequences Instead of drawing every frame of a title scrolling in from top to bottom by hand an animator simply has to set a starting and ending position for the animation and let the computer interpolate the intermediate frames The animation pictured on the right has three keyframes a starting middle and ending keyframe More complex animations use more keyframes While keyframing motion may be the most obvious use for keyframe animations just about any parameter of an effect can be animated with keyframes Keyframe animation techniques are used in many areas including transition effects video effects event panning and cropping generated media and track motion You can animate color brightness transparency motion size perspective and many other parameters with keyframes These three frames show the progression of a title across three keyframes Understanding the keyframe controller The keyframe controller appears at the bottom of the Video FX window used for transitions effects and generated media the Track Motion window and the Event Pan Crop window Cursor position Keyframes Each effect b Deform b Light Rays in a video effects b Black and White l chain can have its own keyframes Si aie IR TH E o 00 00 00 25 U Delete Sync T First Create Previous
52. 4 Page Peel B UC Eu Understanding track layers If you want you can view and modify transitions in an A B roll mode Right click the track header and choose Expand Track Layers from the shortcut menu to expand the track to reveal three layers within the main track These layers are called the A roll the B roll and the transition roll A roll L S Transition roll N B roll The concept of an A B roll is fundamentally different from the multitrack philosophy Every track is in some way mixed composited into the final output in a multitrack system but events are not mixed on the A B roll Instead either the A roll or the B roll is playing with the two trading places during a transition You could mix the two for as long as you want with a transition but they do not blend without an intervening transition Transitions move from one roll and into the other This could be from A to B Transition direction arrow or from B to A The direction of the transition is automatically set The small arrows on the side of the transition event indicate this direction As the sequence at the right shows the video output can shift from the A to the B and nana back to A many times during a production but there is only one video output from any particular roll at a time This means that the A and B rolls are not composited ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 a Y A Converting a cut to a transition The
53. 96 eo Oo send levels and assignable effects send levels The options for vol 1 7 dB the multipurpose slider depend on what your project contains Click the slider 9 i l label to select Pan Center e g busses assignable effects etc You can select what the a control eek 1 LAP slider controls by clicking the slider label Each item s slider S position is independent from the others a Tip If you do not see this slider on a track increase the track height For more information see Resizing a track on page 143 You can move the slider by pressing Shift the right or left arrow keys eS Adjusting stereo panning The multipurpose slider in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall panning of the track or it can adjust track panning automation settings For more information see Adjusting volume or pan automation settings on page 157 The trim level is added to the pan automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 9 left has the same effect as moving every envelope point 9 to the left 1 Click the Automation Settings button 7 and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected n lt lt lt Note The Automation Settings button is not available in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software In these versions of the software the Pan control in the track header always func
54. Add to Project Media list from the shortcut menu Explorer Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transitions Video FR Trimmer window Alt 2 The Trimmer window is a good place to edit any media file When a media file is placed in the Trimmer window you can place portions of the file on separate tracks by dragging and dropping For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 132 City Pan avi C Media files Wegas_Projects S ample Pre lt n 2 x IR L DIT 024e 01 24 19 20 I o gt gt HW KH A aa 02419718 Trimmer Media Manager amp Explorer Transitions Mixer window Alt 3 The Mixer window gives you access to your project s audio properties bus assignments output levels and plug in chains For more information see Using the Mixer window on page 181 S Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit ZK ja gL bin Output 2g Insert FX 27 Insert Bus CHP 1 Preview Master LK Bus 4 Bus B Sk Reverb eS reo lAarsO l Argo Inf Inf 25 3 2 S 7 T S E l Center Center Center 92 ji l2 li mut 1 6 j R R mj 715 4 i 21 i ve 33 391 S T 45 514 t Bs L oo oo 34 0 0 0 INTRODUCTIO
55. Adding media as CD tracks to a new project 00 cee eee 353 Marking tracks in an existing Project 0 ccc cee ee eee eee eee ee eee eens 354 Working with tracks and indices 00 0c ees 355 Navigating to and selecting tracks and indices 0 ce es 355 Moving track and index markers lt o 2420ac ede uswe las ede dat kod edhe ae ieee yy 355 Renaming track and index markers lt e e e e eee eee eee eens 355 Deleting track and index markers 000 cece eee eee eee eens 355 Editing markers using the Edit Details WINdOW e ees 356 Copying a track list from the Edit Details window 0000 cece eee eens 356 Burning audio CDs 0 0000 eee eee eee eee eee nennes 35 7 Burning single tracks track at OnCe 00 cc ee eee eee eens 357 Burning a disc disc at once saa nedes bad dneecade diabetes utes eews ones 358 Burning video CDS 2 0 cod 4 4 nee ost eed Gee ates aig alent a sd Seeded areas 359 Creating a multimedia CD 0 0 c cece annn rnnr nnna nnmnnn 360 ISIC THEIR ane ees eee Ih we aed Eee ene cet 363 RUNNING 2 SCH DE sie sci Awe T ae eed oe oe aes a ee 363 Adding scripts to the Scripting MENU 00 eee 364 Creating a SCD cacao daiwa ete ee Gace ee eh ae a eee 364 ECGING al exiSliNG SCHDE vais 44 anette eee ee ete bet ae We ea ee ee 364 TPOUDICSNOOUNG iaxcaacaeeeaeda de cae see tea eee es 367 Troubleshooting resourceS lt nunan an
56. Automation mode Input monitor Automation mode 2 Right click the track number and choose Set Default Track Properties The Set Default Track Properties dialog appe ars Restore original defaults t 3 Select the check boxes that you want to set as defaults 4 Click OK Any new tracks created in the project will have these defaults To return to the original settings for new tracks select the Restore original defaults check box in the Set Default Track Properties dialog Track automation envelopes WORKING WITH TRACKS Track automation envelopes allow you to control volume audio panning opacity and fade to color effects of a particular track over time For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 163 n Note Automation recording is available only in the full version of Vegas software In Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas movie Studio Platinum software you can insert volume mute and panning envelopes and edit the envelopes in the timeline S N CHP 6 L 1 BT Using audio bus tracks TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software From the View menu choose Audio Bus Tracks to toggle the display of audio bus tracks at the bottom of the track view An audio bus track exists for each bus or assignable effects chain in your project and serves as a timeline representation of each bus or assignable effects chain You can use bus tracks to automate volume panning and effect
57. Brightness and Contrast In the following illustration you can see how the order of plug ins is important 4 K USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 Yideo Track FX laal ideo Track Fx video O Black and White Brightness and Contrast 1 0 ideo Track FX T ideo Track F video o Brightness and Contrast F Black and White L The goal of the above example is to use video effects plug ins to create a very high contrast mask out of a video clip of fire In the image on the left a Brightness and Contrast plug in is applied first and then a Black and White plug in In the image on the right the Black and White plug in was applied first removing the color and then the Brightness and Contrast plug in was applied The mask created by the second example is much cleaner even though all of the settings of the two plug ins are identical Processing plug ins on events with panning or cropping When you add a plug in to a video event that has panning or cropping applied to it you have the choice of processing the plug in before or after the pan crop For example you might want to apply a Radial Blur plug in before the video is cropped and then a Noise plug in is applied after the cropping is complete You can choose whether an effect is applied pre or post pan crop in the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Video FX window Click the Before After Pan Crop button to the left of the e
58. CHP 14 Using the Mask Generator 263 The Mask Generator is a plug in that controls the transparency of events to be used as masks when you use events that are not grayscale Apply the plug in to an event or a track in the same way as any other plug in just drag and drop The Mask Generator plug in can be found in the Video FX window from the View menu choose Video FX Preset ey Luminance Mask a Levels Light Rays gt Linear Blur z Mask Generator Median Min and Max Mirror News Print Pinch Punch Pixelate Quick Blur Radial Blur Saturation Adju Blue Channel Mask TY Simulator Threshold Timecode Unsharp Mask z MAJ avie ziu gt How the Mask Generator works vy Pep Red Channel Mask Green Channel Mask R Ep Alpha Mask The following illustration demonstrates some of the effects of the Mask Generator The background image is the original mask There are five ellipses on the mask white red green blue and an invisible alpha channel Note especially the checkered ellipse in the lower left of the mask this is the alpha channel You can base the alpha channel on a color or define the alpha channel in a graphics program that supports alpha channel creation Masks with alpha channels must be saved in a format that supports this method of transparency such as PNG or TGA As in this example the alpha channel may be invisible in the actual mask Mask track
59. Deleting a preset Click the Delete Preset button x to delete the current preset Working with keyframes in track view You can move and modify track keyframes in track view These keyframes are used in the following three track level effects e Track effects plug in pg 242 e Track motion pg 281 e Mask generator plug in on a parent compositing track pg 263 Viewing and moving track keyframes Once you have added keyframes to one of these track level effects the track keyframes appear at the bottom of the track on the timeline Click the Expand Track Keyframes button to view the keyframes You can drag a keyframe on the track in the same way you would in the keyframe controller To move several keyframes at once use the Envelope Edit tool s to select and drag multiple keyframes Expand Track Keyframes button S R g With track keyframes se 2 4 sie gt l l y KR mM e gt drn drn darpa ies collapsed keyframes GO d Ea ou E are minimized Collapse Track Keyframes button l l l With track keyframes 2p Se L en E R EE R R expanded each Ea T 9 Ss i J al on set of keyframes Sr displays You can move any keyframe by dragging it toa new position c Position 20 Shadow 20 Glow Keyframe Tip You can use ripple editing to automatically move track keyframes as you edit in the timeline For more information see Applying post edit ripple
60. Export to PSP PlayStation Portable dialog is displayed U U Note If you want to render an H 264 video without transferring to a PSP use the Render As dialog and choose Sony AVC AAC mp4 from the Save as Type drop down list Name the rendered file in the format MAQOnnnn MP4 where nnnn is a number to conform to the PSP file naming convention SSS OOOO T 4 The Title box displays the title of your project from the Summary tab of the Project Properties dialog This title will be displayed on the PSP Editing the title in the Export to PSP PlayStation Portable dialog will also update the Project Properties dialog 5 The File path box displays the folder and file name that will be used to render your movie If you want to replace an existing movie choose its name from the File path drop down list Click the Refresh button if you need to rescan the device 6 Choose a setting from the Template drop down list to specify the settings that will be used to save your file You can choose to encode with QVGA or QVGA widescreen frame aspect Both settings create 320x240 video but the widescreen templates use anamorphic widescreen encoding which is properly decoded on the PSP system When you use the Automatic frame size templates the video is encoded using the Pixel aspect ratio setting from the video tab of the Project Properties dialog When using these templates set your project aspect ratio to DV for 4 3 c
61. J to turn the knob to the left or K L to turn the knob to the left Press K again or to return to normal mode CHP 2 GETTING STARTED Os Previewing to media player A project can be previewed in a media player by mixing and rendering the project according to the project s properties and playing back using the media player associated with the file type you select 1 From the Tools menu choose Preview in Player The Preview dialog appears 2 Select the file type from the drop down list 3 Click OK to begin the mixing and rendering process A progress dialog appears indicating the percent complete of the new file a Note You may cancel the preview by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar EE ee When mixing is completed the associated media player opens and begins playback Prerendering video previews Playing a project using the transport controls can instantly show how a project is progressing but it does not actually render your project in its final form The preview you see in the Video Preview window may be different from your final project in a number of ways frame size frame rate and quality In most cases the Video Preview is all you need for checking the timing of events in your project Eventually however you may need to output a full quality preview of a section of your project To do this from the Tools menu choose Selectively Prerender Video For more information see Prerendering video on page
62. L 1 61 Adjusting effect automation settings You can adjust automated effect parameters by editing the envelopes in the timeline or by recording automation with the controls in the Audio Plug In Window If you ve enabled the Bypass parameter for a plug in you can click the Bypass button in the plug in s banner to toggle the Bypass envelope at the cursor position SONY F ee O Note When you automate an effect s frequency parameter such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies This is because frequency scales in track EQ and other plug ins use a logarithmic scale but effect automation uses linear interpolation To make the automated frequency changes sound more natural change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points For high to low frequency sweeps use a fast fade curve for low to high frequency sweeps use a slow curve For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 164 S ee Composite level automation video only You can use the composite level automation envelopes to adjust the opacity of a track over time Adding or removing composite level automation 1 Select a video track 2 From the Insert menu choose Video Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu 3 Choose Track Composite Level f
63. LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE HTTP MPEGLA COM Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Main Concept encoder Main Concept plug in is a trademark of registered trademark of Main Concept Inc in the United States or other countries All rights reserved Macromedia Flash Macromedia and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macromedia Inc in the United States and or other countries Madison Media Software Inc A subsidiary of Sony Corporation of America 1617 Sherman Avenue Madison WI 53704 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Madison Media Software Inc in any way All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Media Software web site located at http www sony com mediasoftware The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly des
64. Magnified area If your source footage is good and the captured video file is also of high quality color keying is an easy process Uncompressed video 1 Insert a video with a blue or any solid colored background into a track This is the overlay video Compressed video 2 Insert the background video that will show through the blue areas into the next lower track A 4 Note You do not need to set the lower track as a child track when using the Chroma Keyer plug in as you would with a mask eee T 3 Click the overlay video foreground higher track to select it 4 Drag a Chroma Keyer plug in from the Video FX window onto the overlay video The Video Event FX window displays 5 Click the down arrow to the left of the Split Screen View button B on the Video Preview window and choose FX Bypassed This will bypass the effect of the Chroma Keyer plug in until you are ready to view the effect USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 e 206 B 6 In the Video Event FX window click the Eyedropper button The cursor changes to an eyedropper icon OO 00 01 29 OO 000329 Se _ 7 Draw click and drag a small rectangular selection area around the color s to key out Although you can select the color range from just about anywhere the Video Preview window is the best location a 4 Note Other effects that can change the color of the event should be bypassed when using the Eyedropper tool EE
65. Once you have added envelope points you can raise and lower them to different levels along the timeline or you can adjust the envelope s location along the timeline by dragging it right or left You can move one point at a time even during playback and check the results in real time If snapping is enabled the envelope point snaps to time divisions as you drag Hold while dragging to override snapping EE ss Tip You can move multiple envelope points at once using the Envelope Edit tool For more information see Using the Envelope Edit tool on page 165 Se CO TF 1 Place the mouse pointer on an envelope point The pointer changes to a hand icon Ja 2 Drag the point to the desired position As you move an envelope point a ToolTip displays both the point s location on the timeline and its decibel level percent pan al Music Ghee GQ il a Web Maag am Volume at 0000 0408 33 dB Dan Center BI Luj Am _ oe 3 Click the Play gt or Play From Start button to play the project and check the timing of the envelope eee reer eeeeeemmeermmersesesmmmerdilll Tip You can also set the value of the point by right clicking Gees an envelope point and choosing a setting from the shortcut enr menu NE T Set o Delete Changing envelope fade curves You can set the type of fade curve used after each envelope point linear fast slow smooth or sharp You can select either a
66. P is selected Alt drag the pan point only when Move Freely is selected Alt mouse wheel Constrain motion to the maximum circle that will fit in the Alt Shift drag the pan point only when Move Freely is selected Surround Panner pias Alt Shift mouse wheel Move the pan point forward back when the pan point is Up down arrow selected Page Up Page Down Mouse wheel Move the pan point left right when the pan point is selected Left Right Arrow Shift Page Up Page Down Shift mouse wheel forward back Move the pan point to a corner edge or center of the Numeric Keypad Surround Panner when the pan point is selected Move the pan point to a corner on the largest circle that will Ctrl Numeric Keypad 1 3 7 9 fit in the Surround Panner when the pan point is selected INTRODUCTION CHP 1 nne Z Miscellaneous commands Description Keys Description Keys Online help Fi Shortcut menu Shift F10 What s This help Shift F 1 Rebuild audio peaks F5 Change relative keyframe Alt drag Move both region markers or audio CD Alt drag region spacing keyframes track region markers marker Make fine fader slider Ctrl drag adjustments fader slider Multimedia keyboard shortcuts Description Keys Play Pause Play Pause Play from start Shift Play Pause Stop Stop Mute track Mute Mute track and remove other tracks from mute group Shift Mute Solo track Ctrl Mute Solo track and remove other tracks from solo group Ctrl Shift Mute CHP 1
67. Results Properties pane 92 searching for media files 84 showing hiding columns 90 thumbnail view 91 using with multiple computers 94 Media markers adding 135 viewing in event 136 Media region viewing in event 136 Media regions adding 135 Media Relationships 88 Metronome 203 342 MIDI clock output 345 MIDI control surface setup 348 MIDI timecode Input devices 345 Output devices 345 Time Display window 332 Triggering from 206 Mixer 25 181 Busses 147 183 186 Preview fader 182 Toolbar 182 Viewing hiding 181 Mixer setup external 200 Mixer window Automating controls 188 Routing surround through 211 Mixing Multiple tracks to a new track 153 Video tracks 248 251 Monitoring chrominance 295 color content 295 color levels and contrast 297 luminance 296 RGB components 298 Monitoring video with scopes 294 Motion blur automation 162 Mouse scroll wheel shortcuts 37 62 95 Movie exporting to PSP 314 MTC See MIDI timecode Multimedia CD burning 360 Multimedia controller scrubbing 68 Multiple takes Previewing 131 Recording 206 Selecting among 130 Multipurpose slider 65 145 Assignable effects send level 146 147 188 Bus send level 147 186 Panning 145 368 Mute automation 156 Muting All audio or video tracks 149 Busses 186 Events 171 Mute button 64 65 Tracks 149 MXE 57 Naming Busses 186 CD layout markers 355 Markers 116
68. Select the Include movie player installer check box to include a media player installer on the CD Click the Browse button to locate the installer file e From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to record The Max option records using the fastest speed possible with your drive Decrease the speed if you have difficulty recording 3 Click OK CHP 19 BURNING CDS BURNING CDS CHP 19 363 ete 2 S Using Scripting oo ene vera Using the scripting features Vegas software becomes an even more powerful and flexible tool You can use scripting to streamline repetitive tasks integrate with external applications and implement customized features To use scripting you ll need to install the Microsoft NET Framework This component is available from the Microsoft Windows Update site Choose Windows Update from the amp Start menu ee Note To use scripts that were created for Vegas 4 0 software you ll need to revise the script s namespace from SonicFoundry Vegas to Sony Vegas For example the line that includes import SonicFoundry Vegas should be changed to import Sony Vegas before running the script i TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Running a script 1 From the Tools menu choose Scripting and then choose Run Script from the submenu The Run Script dialog is displayed Run Script arp Res OE S Ha is era is
69. Seow Pease sea Ree ee nde die eee sole aaan 125 OuantizinG tO rames cu tere hee eke E E E ha eerie toe ee ees aioe ed Dee 125 Using the event snap offset socssier ase shee etwas t ede eek A ee ee 126 Snapping to the cursor Or a selection e e e cece ee eee eee eens 126 Pitch shifting audio eventS 0 0 eee eee eens 127 Editing irom the timeline 2 042455 c2 0ste seh aehiwtise indeed oewskesdles deed sede ebue dees 127 Editing in the Event Properties dialog nananana annn eee eens 128 Time compressing stretching events e ees 129 Time compressing stretching video 00 c cc eee eee 129 Working With TAKES inci sdued poet bea da oda bbe Ones oe eee thane eane teres 130 ALS Tsis ke TT deca arte r Sake Baise esha tauuars e ae el aeeeud acdad Sate ane Se ave baie eM 130 Selecting LAKCS E setae ie ee ee ohn Oe el Oe ee a ew a he ee aes oe 130 Previewing and selecting lakeS c lt cs d0 lt ticle tesian icra dse diana edeedseesuse reese utc 131 DGIGUING TAKES R E pitta ts bekiew ai eames ee eet dee eres eee euw ewe bees 131 Working With take NAMES e ib dad dw Sed Sed oi ee eee eh nrnna 131 Using the Trimmer WINdOW e eee eee 132 Opening a file inthe Trimmer e lt ce ee eee eee eee eens 132 Moving frame by frame in the Trimmer WINdOW 00 00 eee eee ee eens 133 Making selections in the Trimmer lt e e eee eee 133 Adding selections to the timeline 0 0 eee
70. TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Vegas Edit Decision Lists EDL are text lists of all of the media files used where they are placed and how they are trimmed Vegas EDLs are not the same as those used in traditional linear editing suites and are not intended as a project interchange for other editing applications Creating an EDL 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 From the Save as type list choose EDL Text File txt 3 Enter a name for the file and browse for a destination 4 Click Save You can open EDLs created in another application in order to work with a rough copy of a project For example you could create an EDL from a project in a third party editing application and then import the project into Vegas software via the EDL For best results save the EDL file and source media files in a single folder before opening the EDL Opening an EDL 1 From the File menu choose Open 2 Locate the EDL file select it and click the Open button If you are working on another project you are prompted to save your work before a new project is opened ee a Note EDLs do not contain any information about the location of source media Therefore the EDL file should be saved in the same directory as the source media If it is not or if media is stored in a number of different locations you are prompted to relink these files when the EDL is imported eS A Because
71. Time Display Color dialog appears 3 Choose the color setting that you want 4 Click OK to set the text or background color or click Cancel to keep the existing color settings and close the dialog ee O V Tip To return the time display s text or background color to its default settings choose either Text Color or Background Color from the shortcut menu and choose Default from the submenu pnn T Setting the time display to monitor MIDI timecode You can use the time display to monitor the status of incoming or outgoing MIDI timecode Vegas software can monitor MIDI timecode being generated from an external device or monitor MIDI timecode and MIDI clock information generated by Vegas software From within Vegas software the time display settings work in conjunction with your project s properties and MIDI setup options For more information see Sync tab on page 344 1 Right click the time display 2 From the shortcut menu choose the type of MIDI monitoring to be displayed 00 00 17 01 e Time at Cursor MIDI Timecode In MIDI Timecode Out Monitors MIDI timecode generated by Vegas softw MIDI Clock Gut Monitors incoming MIDI timecode Monitors MIDI clock generated by Vegas software Time Eormat Text Color K Background Color Once you have made your selection the time display displays both the MIDI timecode being input or output and a status message CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 a 333 Working w
72. Tools and then choose Captions from the submenu In Windows Media Player 9 from the Play menu choose Captions and Subtitles and then choose On if Available from the submenu e Create an HTML page with the Windows Media Player embedded in it See the online help for a sample HTML page Resampling video Resampling allows Vegas software to interpolate frames in an event when the frame rate of a media file is lower than the project s frame rate With resampling the intervening frames are interpolated from the source frames much like a crossfade between the original frames You can instruct Vegas software to resample the video of a single video event or to resample the entire project at the time of final rendering e To resample an event right click a video event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu In the Video Event tab of the Properties dialog choose the Smart resample Force resample or Disable resample radio button For more information see Accessing event properties on page 174 e To resample the project choose Render As from the File menu In the Render As dialog click the Custom button to access custom rendering settings Select the Resample the frame rate of all video check box For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 The original media file looks something like this over three frames e E To convert these three frames into nine frames for a faster frame rate Vegas sof
73. Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Mer Mn MP gt Video 720x480x224 29 970 fps 00 00 45 24 Alpha None Field Or Explorer Trimmer Project Media INTRODUCTION Media Manager Transitions e CHP 1 SSS et 27 CHP 1 Edit Details window Alt 6 This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software This window serves as a highly detailed and customizable database of all of the events in a project The database can be organized and sorted according to a large number of attributes For more information see Using the Edit Details window on page 138 Edit Details Show Events vif x Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 39 00 00 24 62 00 00 42 01 00 01 39 27 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 25 00 01 24 31 00 00 10 00 00 00 30 35 00 00 42 01 00 00 52 01 00 01 52 07 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 11 00 01 28 06 Length 00 00 10 00 00 00 14 71 00 00 17 14 00 00 10 00 00 00 12 55 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 61 00 00 03 50 Number of Takes Active Take Name Text 2 horses icefield capitol with people kayak2 Music Recording 6 Music Recording 7 Music Recording 2 OO Take Start 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 25 00 00 00 00 Timecode In Timecode Out 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 25 00 00
74. When deleting media in the Explorer or Project Media windows Vegas software warns you if any events in the still in use project are using these files Double click on media file loads The default Explorer double click behavior is to insert an event at the cursor position on the timeline Select into Trimmer instead of tracks this option to open the media file in the Trimmer instead Show Trimmer history with file The Trimmer history drop down list displays the media file s name first followed by the folder it is in Select name first then folder this to reverse the names Automatically save Trimmer Markers and regions created at the media file level in the Trimmer can be saved to the file markers and regions with media file Show progress in Video Preview Frames can be displayed in the Video Preview during a render This will slow a render somewhat window while rendering Save active prerenders on project Full quality preview renders are cleaned up and deleted when a project is closed Select this if you want these close prerendered files to be available later Close media files when not the This allows media files to be edited in external editors audio image etc while they are contained in events active application Close audio and MIDI ports when Select this check box if you want Vegas software to close audio and MIDI ports when you switch to another Vegas is not the active application application Enable multimedia keyboard This al
75. a Set up your XDCAM device as a drive that your editing computer can access Please refer to your XDCAM device documentation for specific setup information b Using the standard Windows file copy procedures copy the entire contents of your XDCAM Professional Disc s to your local hard drive 2 Add the MXF files to the Vegas timeline a Using the Vegas Explorer window navigate to the Clip folder where you copied your MXF files in step l b Select the MXF files you want to use in your project c Drag files to the timeline to create events MXF files will behave like any other piece of media in a project E aaas Note Essence markers from the MXF files are displayed as named media markers media markers are visible in the timeline events and in the Trimmer window a CHP 2 GETTING STARTED BS 3 Edit your project as you would any other project no special treatment of the MXF files is required For more information see Basic Editing Techniques on page 95 4 You can now render your project to a file or print to tape For more information see Saving Rendering and Printing Projects on page 305 ee O V Note The XDCAM deck is not available for external monitor or print to tape via iLink while in file access mode Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the Windows system tray and choose your XDCAM device from the menu to turn off file access mode and enable external monitor and print to tape functionality e
76. a B zier mask 1 From the Tools menu choose Video and choose Video Event Pan Crop or click the Event Pan Crop button i on the event The Event Pan Crop window is displayed 2 Select the Mask row in the keyframe controller When the Mask row is selected B zier curve drawing tools are displayed so you can create your mask 3 Select the Mask check box to apply the mask so you can see the results of your masking in the Video Preview window or clear the check box to bypass the mask Position Boe J Mask oe iy Ii i S 4 s Ta b S gt E T oo 00 00 00 4 Select the anchor creation tool 4 on the left side of the Event Pan Crop window and click in the workspace to create a mask See the following table for a description of the tool s behavior LEE 4 Tip Right click the curve choose Initialize Tangents and choose a command from the submenu to smooth the path or portions of the path to help you get started with your editing EE asaoau_ oaaaoa qo_ lt S USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 a DG Editing the path Use the tools on the left edge of the Event Pan Crop window to edit your mask Icon U CHP 14 Tool Description Normal Edit Use to select and edit control points and tangents Anchor Creation Anchor Deletion Split Tangent Click a point to select it or drag to move the point Hold while clicking to select deselect multiple p
77. a simple process to reorder tracks to fit your needs You may reorder one or more tracks at a time a 4 Note Track hierarchy can be critical in video compositing For more information see Compositing on page 248 ee 1 In the track list place the mouse pointer on the track that you want to move 2 Drag the track to the new position in the track list a Tip When moving a track you may want to place the mouse pointer on the track number when dragging This helps avoid accidental modifications to other track list controls ESS WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 L 143 Changing track color When you add a track it is automatically assigned a color This color is easily changed This feature is useful if you want to use color to organize similar tracks 1 In the track list right click a track to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Track Display Color and choose a color from the submenu a To change the available colors use the Display Tab in the Preferences dialog T eeeeeSF Changing track height You can control track height by dragging the bottom edge of a track in the track list You can also change track height by clicking the buttons on the track list Action Button Resulting Track height Minimize co SBA OG dev G a A Restore Track Height ie Lead ctr Ghee J vol 10080 Pan Center D Restored Track Height Maximize c RST Lead etr
78. also jump to a marker by pressing the number keys along the top of the keyboard not the numeric keypad a Tip Jump the cursor to the next or previous marker by pressing gt or eS E BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 117 Deleting markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker that you want to delete The pointer changes to a hand dh 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The marker is removed from your project The tags are not renumbered as you remove them For example if you have five markers in your project and delete markers 3 and 4 the remaining markers will be listed as 1 2 and 5 However as you add markers again Vegas software begins numbering the missing sequence first in this case 3 and 4 then 6 7 8 etc Deleting all markers and regions 1 Right click the marker bar 2 From the shortcut menu choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu Working with regions Regions identify ranges of time and provide a way to subdivide your project A region is defined as the area between two region markers that share the same number Regions can function as semi permanent time selections You can view region information in the Explorer by clicking the arrow next to the View button SR and selecting Region View Inserting regions 1 Make a time selection For more information see Selecting a time range on page 97 2 From the I
79. and click each file 2 Click the Remove Tag Mode button in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s The tag is removed from the file s Deleting a tag from a library Deleting the selected tag s affects the current library only 1 In the Search pane select the tag s to be removed e To select a single tag click the tag e To select multiple consecutive tags click the first tag hold the key and then click the last tag e To select multiple tags that are not consecutive hold the key and click each tag 2 Click the Delete Selected Tag button to delete the tag from the current library A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected tags from the library The tag is removed from the library and from all media files in the library However if the tag had been saved to the media file it will be added to the library again the next time the file is added to the library if the Add tags and custom properties from files check box is selected in the Add Files to Media Library dialog CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 80 ___ Merging subtags Merging tags combines a selected tag with its subtags and removes the subtags from your library permanently To merge a tag with its subtags right click the tag and choose Merge Subtags into Selected Tag from the shortcut menu All subtags are combined with the main tag and the subtags are removed from the library All media
80. ane 343 SDV iG hal e EEEREN pace ea ace Sc Sate eas a Pa Pee SEES RE Sate S ie hen cee ee a Saas oe 344 KY DOarG lab wuss e ie ta a ANA Er bene hee eases ia add NNE wee eee aw es 345 External Control amp Automation tab n n eee eee eens 346 MIDHAD 1 ei he R dh ee ie TR ae ea ee HN aes Sela ok aid edd E aoa 348 Vo ENEC taD ced St cet ah te a tht hee Oe eo ee i de Sk ea te te aretha ahs 348 Ssss taD sctocivelsseswesretnctvabscincdeeuweeteddedansineeeaedetseatiasedede pete 349 LISA CAND ce 0 cas 01a s a wate gerard N E E E acd EE ease angen EEN art ari E E EE BAe Ghee Se 349 CD Settings labs rn aah hae ge ek he Pe ee he hs oe ee oe ade ae 350 BUAIN CDS ene ee ee AT 351 Understanding track at once and disc at OnCe 000 cece cece ee eeeees 351 LFACK AlL ONCE an au d an dw be die eae alee aa o hed hee he ee ie ee es eee dee ee 351 Disc at once Single Session or Red Book cece eee eee eee eee eens 351 Understanding tracks and INdiCeS 0 000 cece eee eee eee 351 Setting Wp to DUM aUCIO CDSiis 4 cost E e N e T e NTN NK AN l RTE aa 352 Viewing the ruler and time display 0000 eee eens 352 Setting Project see es 2 5 vee ee tae See PEN RRR Ee bee aa dee ee a eee UN Ee ade 352 DEMING PFCIChENCeS 0 bce Gea T bad bes Ros Ged thd RE a ee de 2 0 352 importing CD Arcnitect fles 0 00 s o 0sei eae tute eee hws a add Seaman EEA 352 TABLE OF CONTENTS r 18 Creating audio CD layout projects ee cc eee 353
81. are automatically determined based on the properties of the source media file In addition to the event switches mute loop etc described in the previous section event properties include playback and undersample rates for video and pitch shifting for audio 1 Right click an event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Properties dialog appears The first tab in the dialog either Audio Event or Video Event contains the properties that are exclusively related to your Vegas project The second tab the Media tab contains many properties that are an inherent part of the media file itself In addition to the event switches discussed in this chapter event properties on the Audio Event Video Event tab include the following e For video events the Playback rate box sets the rate of playback For example a playback rate of 1 plays at normal speed while a playback rate of 0 5 plays at half speed For more information see Time compressing stretching events on page 129 e For video events the Undersample rate box allows you to simulate a lower frame rate For example an undersample rate of 0 5 plays the event at half its original frame rate Each frame plays twice as long as in the original media file creating a strobe effect e For audio events the Time stretch pitch shift section of the dialog allows you to change the pitch duration or both pitch and duration of an audio event For more information
82. assignable FX chains that you have created Dragging the fader to the left a cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume S E F i 4 5 dE Bus A 6 0 dB A You can hold while dragging a fader to adjust the setting in finer increments or double click the fader to return it to 0 dB If multiple tracks are selected the trim level of all selected tracks is adjusted mnn Note Bus sends are pre volume by default To change to post volume right click the multipurpose slider and choose Post Volume from the shortcut menu eee For more information see Adjusting a bus send level on page 186 or Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains on page 188 a Note Multiple busses and assignable effects are only available in the full version of Vegas software T CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 148 gt y Adjusting the composite level video only The Level slider in the track header determines the opacity of the video track The slider can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall opacity of the track or it can adjust track composite level automation settings For more information see Adjusting the composite level automation settings on page 161 The trim level is added to the composite level automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 1 Click the Automat
83. be the size and position for the start of the animation 5 Click the timeline of the keyframe controller at a later time to move the cursor to that position ee a Tip With the Sync Cursor button Tel enabled you can also navigate to a new position on the main timeline The cursor is automatically moved on the keyframe controller to the same location pms 6 Reposition the overlay A new keyframe is automatically added to the keyframe controller at the new cursor position When you preview the video the position of the overlay interpolates between the two keyframes with a smooth animation ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 287 Previewing and Analyzing Video As you work in Vegas software you can preview your video by using the Video Preview window or by connecting to an external monitor You can optimize previews by adjusting preview quality prerendering video or building a dynamic RAM preview The Video Preview window also provides features such as safe area overlays grid overlays and isolated color channel displays to further enhance your productivity Understanding the Video Preview window The workspace for editing video can get quite crowded so the Video Preview window can be configured in a number of ways to make it more useful The Video Preview window can be used on a separate monitor or Windows display if your video hardware supports this feature docked at the bottom of the workspace or floa
84. because you have to decide exactly which computer it is going to be played back on how fast it is what software is installed and how you are going to get it there e g burn to a CD Your biggest concern with creating a video file is compatibility When you create a movie you must select a specific codec to compress the video That same codec must then be used to view the movie This is not a problem if you are viewing the movie on your own computer since the appropriate codec is already installed To ensure that your audience has the appropriate software you should use a fairly universal codec Intel Indeo Cinepak and QuickTime which is not a codec but installs with a number of different codecs are all widely available Internet When video on the Internet is discussed people almost always mean streaming There are two streaming media formats that come with Vegas software RealMedia and Windows Media Format There is nothing particularly magical about streaming video and the three rules of creating video files for the Internet are as follows compress compress and compress The smaller the file size the better and this inevitably results in a loss of quality There are two main places where you can save space frame dimensions and frame rate Typical Internet video files should be about 160X120 and should rarely exceed 320X240 This is not very big and video with lots of detail does not translate well to this frame size The frame rate s
85. between panning keyframes The smoothness setting appears only when you are automating panning using keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 220 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 r 217 Moving the pan point A variety of methods are provided to help you position the pan point in the Surround Panner window Method VN Double click Ctrl drag Shift drag Alt drag Shift Alt drag Arrow keys Ctrl Arrow keys Page Up Page Down Shift Page Up Page Down Numeric keypad 1 9 Ctrl Numeric keypad 1 3 7 9 Mouse wheel Shift mouse wheel Ctrl mouse wheel Ctrl Shift mouse wheel Choosing pan types Description Click to toggle through three options for constraining pan point motion as you drag Move Freely Move Left Right Only and Move Front Back Only T Double clicking the pan point resets it to the center front of the surround panner Double clicking in the Surround Panner window moves the pan point to the double click location Makes fine adjustments Constrain m otion to a line through the center of the surround panner Constrains motion to a constant radius from the center of the surround panner Constrains motion to the maximally inscribed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround panner Moves front back left right Makes fine adjustments Moves front back Moves left right Jumps to a corner edge or center of the
86. button amp Removing a plug in from the chain in the Plug In Chooser dialog 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears TI Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 2 Click the Plug In Chain button The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top 3 Select the plug in that you want to remove and click Remove to remove it from the chain 4 Click OK to close the Plug In Chooser dialog Saving plug in chains You can save and edit the plug in chains that you add to tracks or busses or create as assignable effects chains Saved chains retain the order of plug ins and the settings that you have applied These chains are stored as effect packages for use in future projects If you use the same plug in chains regularly saving them as packages is faster and more consistent than recreating the chain manually Once you save a chain as a package you can use it as either a track bus or assignable effects plug in chain Saved plug in chain packages appear in the Plug In Chooser dialog ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 10 Plug In Chooser Track 3 o frack Noise Gate Track EO Track Compressar o He He CES 4 Enter a name for the package 5 1 Audia Custom Hange Aud custom fl G all GDhHeavy reverb e a N Plug in chain packages that anny Leme you h
87. button 7 to access online help ideo Track FX E ideo Track FX Video o Film Effects Sepia 4dd Noise o Preset MENEE Grain Colo Convert to greyscale Enable particles Amour Film Effects Sepia Add Noise a iii MEE 457 0000 00 00 Changes you make are automatically updated in the Video Preview window using the current cursor position as the example To see the effect as applied to the video in motion create a time selection looped region and preview in loop playback Saving custom plug in settings as a preset 1 Click the Preset text box The name of the current preset is highlighted 2 Type a new name for the preset and click the Save button mnn Tip To use a saved custom preset simply choose it from the drop down list S oY Using keyframe animation with plug ins You can use keyframe animation to control a plug in over time Keyframes are added to the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Video FX window Since a number of plug ins can be added to a single event track or project click the plug in s button in the chain and modify the particular attributes and keyframe controller for that plug in For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 and Animating video effects plug ins on page 279 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 Using generated media Generated media plug ins are a special class
88. can be assigned to a single bus using bus level audio effects is an efficient method of applying carefully customized chains of audio effects to multiple tracks If plug ins are assigned at the track level the track s signal flows through the track s plug in s before the bus plug ins For more information see Using busses on page 183 a Note Multiple busses are available only in the full version of Vegas software SS SC COR Assignable effects allow you to send various levels of multiple tracks to a single effect chain Like busses these controls reside in the Mixer window and support plug in chains In addition assignable effects outputs can be routed to busses Click the Insert Assignable FX button sie in the Mixer window to add an assignable effect chain to your project For more information see Using assignable effects chains on page 187 a TI Note This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software S N CHP 10 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 190 7 Using plug in chains A plug in chain is a sequence of plug ins to be applied to Audio Plug In tracks busses or assignable effects A plug in chain can BE track t oe k contain one or more plug ins The same plug in can be added lenad noise Gate Trakea JH to a chain more than once Track Compressor l 0 Plug ins in a chain After the plug in chain is created the audio is processed by each plug in in order The plug ins are cumulative
89. can be used to set the normal rate playback speed This is the speed at which the project Scrub control slider plays when you click the Play button on the transport bar Scrubbing on the timeline The second way that a project can be scrubbed is by positioning the mouse 0000 45 ets pointer over the timeline cursor at a location that is not over any events and pressing Ctr The cursor changes to a speaker icon Now when you left click the cursor icon changes again to a pan scrub icon Drag the mouse left or right to scrub the timeline T ar Press Ctrl over Left click and timeline cursor drag to scrub ee UB Tip You can also choose to enable timeline scrubbing when the mouse is positioned over events From the Options menu choose Preferences and select Allow Ctrl drag cursor style scrub over events on the General tab SS eee Scrubbing with the keyboard Three letters JKL are used as a keyboard scrub control LEE 4 Note Choose a setting from the JKL shuttle speed drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to control the scrub speed and range Reverse Pause Forward Ee eT Press J for reverse and L for forward playback Press K to pause playback Keyboard scrub letters There are several ways to adjust playback speed e Adjust the JKL shuttle speed selection on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog e Hold kK while pressing J or L to emulate a shuttle knob mode Press K
90. can choose which frame you want to use as a thumbnail for video files 1 Right click a thumbnail in the Search Results pane and choose Choose Thumbnail from the shortcut menu The Thumbnail Chooser dialog is displayed 2 Drag the slider in the Thumbnail Chooser dialog to set the frame you want to use 3 Click the OK button CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER S Using the Properties pane The Properties pane displays extended information about the selected file in the Search Results pane You can view and edit file attributes and view a listing of all tags that have been applied to the file a Note Properties that are editable are displayed in black in Right click a file in the Search Results pane and choose Show Properties Pane from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the window Automatically hiding the Properties pane Click the push pin button J in the title bar of the Properties pane if you want to save space in the Media Manager window by automatically hiding the pane The push pin is displayed as a J when the Properties pane is anchored in the Media Manager window The push pin is displayed as a F when the Properties pane is set to hide automatically When the Properties pane is set to hide automatically you can hover over the Properties tab on the right edge of the Media Manager window to show the pane When you move your mouse away from the pane it hides automatically Moving the Properties pane Drag the
91. cannot create a ruler offset in an audio CD layout project eee 1 Position the cursor at the desired location along the timeline 00 00 00 00 I l l L O S 2 Right click the ruler and choose Set Time at Cursor from the shortcut menu The current ruler value is highlighted 3 Enter a time value 4 Press to set the ruler s time The value that you enter at the cursor s position affects the entire ruler CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 335 Changing grid spacing Grid spacing is different from the ruler and provides an alternate method of subdividing a project s time This can be useful if you want the ruler to display SMPTE video timecode but you need to create your music in terms of beats and measures You can display the grid spacing in time frame measure or note units The erid can also be set to match the ruler s time format The grid appears across all tracks in your project and the erid s lines can be used as snap points Ruler and grid increments can be different This new project is set with Ruler SMPTE non drop and Grid Quarter notes 00 00 17 01 r DUDUDU O DU00041272 i DU00021272 sm mere oO m t SH SS 091 DH amp t9 SEE G dG Q U Vol 0 0 dB BIR Pan Center BIR To change grid spacing choose Grid Spacing from the Options menu and choose the desired time unit from the submenu The grid spacing changes to reflect your selection a Note In
92. change how the final file is rendered but controls the grid lines and how snapping behaves Right click the ruler and choose a time format from the shortcut list For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 329 Preferences dialog timecode settings From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Video tab to adjust the Show source frame numbers on event thumbnails as drop down list These settings take precedence over those found in the source media Properties dialog see the next topic and are displayed on events inserted into the timeline None means that no numbers are displayed on events Frame Numbers marks frames in the media file starting with 0 Time displays the time in seconds and Timecode allows the source media s timecode to be detected or selected TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A e 375 Source media timecode format Right click an event choose Properties and click the Media tab to view these properties By default Use timecode in file is selected se Note You can override these settings by choosing different settings on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog Select Timecode from the Source frame numbering list to allow event level specification ee Render media file format The timecode of a final rendered media file is determined by the specified format The frame rate of the project ultimately determines the timecode and is often constrained by the type of media file being rendered or the co
93. click the color swatch to display a color picker where you can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls or click the eyedropper to sample a color from your screen Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the Vegas window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it Drag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the Vegas window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 3850 r CD Settings tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software The CD Settings tab allows you to set preferences for burning CDs and extracting audio from your own CDs Preference Description Burn drive Sets the device where you burn CD R discs Burn speed Sets the speed at which the device burns the CD R disc Extract optimization Sets the amount of buffering and restitching done to recover audio from older CD drives Adjust this setting if your extracted CD audio has occasional gaps or glitches Autoname extracted tracks Automatically names extracted CD tracks based on the ISRC number the track number and the number of times the track has been extracted Use strict Red Book specification Select this check box if you want to be notified prior to burning a disc at once CD if anything about your CD for DAO val
94. compliant or if the application is unable to obtain device control of your HDV recorder You will need to cue the tape and press the Record button on your DV recorder before recording e Select Crash Recording if you are using an OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 HDV device and the application is able to obtain device control of your HDV recorder Recording will begin automatically at the specified timecode position when you click Finish SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 327 9 Click Finish Your project will be rendered to the file you specified in step 6 e If you re using Manual mode a dialog will be displayed after rendering is finished You can specify a delay time in the Delay playback countdown timer box and select the Beep each second during countdown check box if you want to count down before sending video to your device e If you re using Crash Recording mode your DV recorder will start and begin recording after rendering is finished Printing a rendered file to HDV tape TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software and in Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software Use this procedure when you have a rendered MPEG 2 transport stream that you want to print to HDV tape Oo O UU N S Important If you are printing a rendered file to HDV tape the file must precisely conform to the target HDV device and file type requirements or the print to tape operation will fail Rendering using th
95. during a render making it difficult or impossible to create video with the wrong field order Solving interlacing problems in Vegas software If your hardware s documentation does not contain any information about the proper field order you must determine this information for yourself It is not a difficult process and involves rendering one video file with an upper first field order and another with a lower first field order Source material that dramatically and clearly demonstrates the improperly interlaced video is important use a media file with a lot of motion in it and then slow the event down with a velocity envelope or by time stretching the event Timecode Timecode is a method of labelling frames with a unique and searchable identifier It is primarily important for synchronizing video in frames per second with time in the real world and in the case of Vegas software with other media in a project Changing the timecode used to measure a video file does not alter the contents of the file For example no frames are ever dropped or removed when using SMPTE 29 97 drop frame timecode Instead specific frame numbers are periodically dropped to compensate for differences between timecode and time in the real world Confusion between using drop versus non drop timecode can cause synchronization problems between video and audio For very short periods of time the error would be unnoticeable After about a half an hour you might notic
96. e The Tape name box displays the name of the tape for media feces e cry eae files captured in Video Capture You can edit the name here or ae gues in the corresponding column in the Edit Details window S am Pixel aspect ratio TI Note The Edit Details window is available only in the full d version of Vegas software e o Setting timecode media properties These properties appear in the Timecode section of the Media tab e The Use timecode in file radio button is the default setting where the media file s timecode is used e The Use custom timecode radio button allows you to set the media file s timecode manually e If you have selected the Use Custom timecode radio button a drop down list contains the available timecode formats SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video for example is the timecode format for NTSC DV Changing the timecode format does not change the source media file in any way It merely changes how the file is measured in time For more information see Timecode on page 373 CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 240 r Setting custom stream properties Media files are opened with a set of default values based on the media file type When you change any of the values for a media file these changes are saved for that file in the current project only If you want to change the default settings for a particular type of video file whenever that type of file is used click the Save settings to video profiles for future auto det
97. editor from Vegas software All events in your project are references to media files on a storage device When you edit an audio event in an audio editor you can choose to open the original media file or a copy of the file Opening a file in an audio editor You can directly edit the media file to which an audio event is referenced Any changes you make and save in the audio editor are permanent and are reflected in the event in your project 1 Select the event to be edited 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio and choose Open in Audio Editor from the submenu Your selected audio editing application opens the event s referenced media file Make the necessary changes and save the file in the audio editor If you keep the media file name and location the same its event is updated immediately in your project However if you change the media file s name or location by using Save As you must import the edited new file into Vegas software Opening a copy of a file in an audio editor You can also create a copy of an audio file and open it in an audio editor Opening a copy of a file has the advantage of preserving the original file unchanged The modified copy is inserted into the event as a take and is automatically added to the Project Media window 1 Select the event to be edited 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio and choose Open Copy in Audio Editor from the submenu When you are finished editing save the file Take X
98. ee eeeeees 163 Hiding track envelopes 2c kee eke hase eeeneeds deeded eteaies Heaths aeebee eee eA a 165 REMOVING rack CNVEIODES auv a ot ee we eS a ee tks eat Whe eae a aah Re korse edo eit a 165 USING the Envelope Edit aea ens os ese wha She ie ea ls SA i a ess 165 LOCKING envelopes to events lt wis Wid 69 saa wee Maa wD dew ae nS a Gio ale ww Bed de SR 166 Automating 5 1 Surround projectS 000 c eee eee eee 167 Automation recording modes sssaaa sassen eens 167 Recording automation settings lt e dmas eee ceeer se ebemes ener eee ce peeeceeans 167 Editing sections of your recorded settings in Touch mode 000cc eee cence 168 Overwriting recorded settings in Latch mode 000 cece ee eee eens 168 Editing individual envelope points or keyframes 00000 cece eee ee eee 169 Setting the automation recording mode for a track 000 cee eee eee eens 169 Working with Events e cece eee eee eee ees 171 Setting event switches e cee eee eee eens 171 Mule TTT 171 LOCK TTT 171 TE n r O N AAEE a E Ra S a 171 Invert phase audio Only 640 outset cee oe a a e a a a Mea aa a aa a a 172 Normalize audio oNV meert atana aen e a eee aa ee EE 172 Maintain aspect ratio video only 0 0 cece eee eee eens 173 Reduce interlace flicker video Only 0 0c cece eee ee eee eee eee teenies 173 Resampl video only eg ace R a he Se ah aR Swed RRR a a Seb ded EAE a a
99. fill the extra frame area letterbox This option is useful when the desired output format does not match the frame aspect ratio of your project e Select the Save project markers in media file check box to save any regions and markers in your project to the final rendered file TI e Select the Render using networked computers check box available only in the full version of Vegas software if you want to queue multiple renders on a single computer or to harness the power of those other computers to speed up your rendering times For more information see Rendering with networked computers on page 316 7 Click Save A small dialog box appears displaying the progress of the render You can cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button in the dialog box You can also view the progress of the render or cancel the render using the status bar in the lower left corner of the window SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 309 Selecting a file format The following table describes the formats available for rendering your project Format Name Audio Interchange File Format Dolby Digital AC 3 MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 MPEG Layer 3 OggVorbis QuickTime RealMedia Perfect Clarity Audio Wave64 Video for Windows Wave Microsoft Wave Scott Studios Windows Media Audio Windows Media Video Extension Definition T a ac3 mpg mp3 09g Mov rm pca w64 avi WaVv W
100. first track on the CD For more information see Audio CD tab on page 334 Setting preferences From the Options menu choose Preferences to access the Preferences dialog On the CD Settings tab you can select the CD drive or set the speed at which you will burn the CD For more information see CD Settings tab on page 350 You can also enter the number of seconds added between tracks when adding Project Media window files as CD tracks In the same Preferences dialog click the Editing tab and enter a value in the Default time between CD tracks box Finally you may want to turn off the Quantize to Frames command in the Options menu When quantizing to frames is active your edits are limited to the starting edge of frame boundaries In a CD layout project you can turn this feature off to allow greater precision in editing and track placement For more information see Quantizing to frames on page 125 Importing CD Architect files TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use Vegas software to open projects created in CD Architect version 4 0 software 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears 2 Browse to the location of the project file 3 In the Files of type drop down list select CD Architect Project Files cdp 4 Select the file 5 Click Open BURNING CDS CHP 19 353 Creating audio CD layout projects Several ways are provided to create an audio CD layout
101. formerly associated with the subtags is associated with the main tag Arranging tags in the tag tree Tags are displayed in a tree view in the Media Manager window You can organize tags hierarchically click the Expand button in the Search pane to expand a list or click the Collapse button El in the Search pane to hide an expanded list You can drag copy and paste tags within the list to arrange them and create parent and child tags You can also display tags in a palette view by clicking the Change Tags View button l Editing tag names or images 1 Double click a tag or right click a tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog 2 In the Tag name box type the name you want to display for the tag 3 Select a thumbnail image to choose the icon that will be displayed for the tag in the Search pane and in the Search Results pane when the tag is added to a media file 4 Click the OK button to apply your changes and close the Tag Editor dialog Viewing or creating palettes The palette view provides another way of working with tags that can be useful for more focused searching You can use a palette to concentrate on a portion of the current tag tree In the palette view tags are displayed as a grid of buttons instead of the standard hierarchical tag tree 1 Click the Change Tags View button to toggle the display of the tag tree and palette view 2 Click the down arrow
102. from drifting from real time The time is adjusted forward by two frames on every minute boundary except 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 For example when SMPTE Drop time increments from 00 00 59 29 the next value is 00 01 00 02 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Non Drop Frame timecode runs at a rate of 29 97 fps This leads to a discrepancy between real time and the SMPTE time because there is no compensation in the counting system as there is in SMPTE Drop Frame Use SMPTE Non Drop format for NTSC D1 projects that are recorded on master tapes striped with Non Drop timecode SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio SMPTE 30 is an audio only format and runs at exactly 30 fps SMPTE 30 is commonly used when synchronizing audio applications such as multitrack recorders or MIDI sequencers This format should not be used when working with video SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps The SMPTE Film Sync time format runs at 24 fps frames per second This frame rate matches the standard crystal sync 16 33 mm film rate of 24 fps Timecode in Vegas software Video timecode crops up fairly frequently in Vegas software Being a multimedia production tool time in the application can be measured in real world time hours minutes seconds in video timecode involving frames of video or in musical time measures and beats Ruler format and timecode The ruler in Vegas software can be set to measure time in any way that is convenient This setting does not
103. from the submenu r a Note Events can only be in one group at a time Adding an event to an existing group essentially clears the old group and creates a new one that includes all of the selected events E EN Removing events from a group You can remove individual events from a group without affecting the other members of the group An event you remove from the group is not deleted from the project and remains on the timeline 1 Right click the event you want to remove from the group 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and choose Remove From from the submenu The event is removed from the group The rest of the grouped events remain intact Clearing a group You may ungroup all events by clearing the entire group Clearing a group does not remove events from your project 1 Right click one of the members of the group 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and choose Clear from the submenu Selecting all members of a group While grouped events move together within their tracks selecting one member of a group does not automatically select every member of that group 1 Right click one of the members of the group 2 From the shortcut menu choose Group and choose Select All from the submenu With all events in a group selected you can move the group to other tracks or cut and paste the group to a new location Suspending grouping temporarily You can temporarily suspend the grouping behavior of all groups including
104. ignores any alpha channel information in the file None Either there is no alpha channel or there is an alpha channel but it s completely opaque solid Straight unmatted Transparency information is maintained in only the alpha channel Alpha information must be applied to the RGB channels before compositing Premultiplied The standard method of handling alpha information Transparency information is maintained in the alpha and RGB channels and the image is ready for compositing No RGB component exceeds the alpha value Premultiplied dirty Similar to Premultiplied but RGB components may exceed the alpha value This option is used mainly for images created by 3D applications involving compositing of 3D images over a non solid color image background Modifying output properties You can adjust final output properties when you render your movie For more information see Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files on page 312 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 241 CHAPTER gt Using Video FX 61 4 i Compositing and Masks d ae Video plug ins in Vegas software include effects and generators Effects cover a broad range of electronic modifications that can be used to improve substandard video or artistically enhance a production Generators can be used to create custom video events such as credit rolls or gradient overlays A variety of options are provided in compositing video and using masks Composit
105. in a video are actually composed of two fields each for a total of four fields These fields can be referred to as field one F1 and field two F2 Obviously it is critical that these two fields are paired together to create a whole frame What may not be so obvious is that the actual order of these two fields is not particularly important In other words F1 could be scanned first and then F2 or F2 could be scanned first and then Fl Both situations would create a perfectly valid error free frame of video While that may sound like good news in reality this is the source of all of the problems associated with field order Since both methods are technically correct both methods have been used It is important to use the correct order when rendering video files for your particular hardware capture card APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 372 Fi F2 Fi F2 frame 1 frame 1 frame 2 frame 2 The next illustration shows the effects of incorrectly interlacing a frame of video In this case F2 from frame one is combined with F1 from frame two Remember that there is nothing inherently right or wrong with a field order of F2 F1 it just happens to be wrong in this case At a minimum this can create slightly blurry or hazy video In most situations the video is jumpy or jittery and is unwatchable Interlacing problems can be especially noticeable when two adjacent frames are significantly different for example at a cut or in video with fast mov
106. in many home DVD players and on computers with a CD ROM drive and VCD player software and multimedia CDs that can be played in any computer with the appropriate player Understanding track at once and disc at once Two ways are provided for recording audio to a CD R disc track at once and disc at once Track at once Track at once writing records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However the CD R disc remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once writing is that you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire project as a single track Disc at once Single Session or Red Book Disc at once writing is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Understanding tracks and indices You are ready to burn a CD If you plan to use track at once to record a single track you can proceed right on to writing the entire project to a CD However you are more likely to set up tracks and perhaps indices within your project and burn several tracks at once Tracks distinguish songs in the project and have a starting and ending point Tracks
107. in the full version of Vegas software Video envelopes allow you to control an event s opacity or velocity over time Envelopes appear as lines on an event With a velocity envelope you have the added control of being able to create and edit envelope points mnn Note Event envelopes only affect an event Track envelopes affect the entire track For more information see Composite level automation video only on page 161 SS E Using opacity envelopes Opacity envelopes set the overall opacity and cL allow you to fade video events in and out This s s9 ae BD R TE affects the transparency of the event in relation ae to background events on lower tracks These background events can be other video events or background colors For more information see Using generated media on page 247 OOOO 30 Setting a video event s opacity When you place the mouse pointer at the top of the event the pointer changes to a hand cursor i that you can use to lower the event s Project 720x480x32 29 9701 Frame 955 overall opacity 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event 2 When you see the envelope cursor d drag the opacity envelope to the desired level As you drag the event s opacity level is displayed a 4 Note When you have multiple events selected the opacity of all selected events is adjusted simultaneously a as Setting an event s fade in and out The event handles allow you to change a video e
108. in your studio In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize the appearance of Vegas software set a project s properties and set the application s preferences Displaying frame numbers You can display frame numbers on video events Once you 00 00 00 00 00 00 0125 have enabled frame numbering a small box appears at the bottom of the event thumbnail with the frame offset time or timecode The small black arrow marks the exact position of that frame in time When the workspace is zoomed in far enough each thumbnail represents a single numbered frame in the source video file At intermediate zoom levels marks between the frame numbers show the location of intermediate frames These frame marks are not visible at lower magnifications 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Video tab 3 Choose an option from the Show source frame numbers on event thumbnails as drop down list 4 Click OK Changing the ruler format You can customize the ruler to display a number of different standard formats The format that you select affects how the ruler and time display window display time units For more information see Timecode in Vegas software on page 374 To change the ruler s format right click the ruler and choose the desired time format from the shortcut menu or from the Options menu choose Ruler Format and choose the desired time unit You can also change ruler
109. inserted event ends the original event continues playing as if it had never stopped You can choose the duration of crossfades for punched in audio events 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Editing tab 3 Select Quick fade length of audio events Specify a duration for each transition BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 023 Events that have previously been inserted or punched in are not affected by this change The concept of punching in and out only applies when you are inserting an event that is shorter than the event that it is being inserted into In the following illustration every frame is numbered so that you can see how the original event continues after the inserted event ends as if it continued to play underneath the original nana mnnm mmn mnan mwana ampan Punched in event Duplicating events Duplicating is a combination of copying and pasting in one action The process is like moving the event to a new position while leaving a copy behind 1 Press Ctrl 2 Drag the event you want to duplicate to the place where you want the new event to be positioned Inserting empty events and time You can insert events into the timeline that do not have any contents and are not references to any media files Empty events are useful as placeholders in the timeline that can be filled with media or recorded into at a later time In either case the new media
110. introduces Vegas 6 0 software a full featured Information Using Scripting nonlinear editor NLE for video and multitrack digital audio designed for Customizing the Vegas Interface video postproduction and multichannel audio recording and mixing pane Troubleshooting This help file contains information about Vegas Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software T Information or features unique to the full version of Vegas software are indicated by this icon C Information or features unique to Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software are indicated by this icon ga Information or features unique to Vegas Movie Studio software are indicated by this icon What s new in version 6 0 A V synchronization detection and repair Full screen preview to a secondary Windows display including DYI monitors Ability to save keyframe presets in the Track Motion and 3D Track Motion dialogs gt Mad nn sem len tnd ee mon Se tale Lll annnm oh The Contents tab provides a list of available help topics Double click a closed book to open the pages and then click a topic page 211 The Index tab provides a complete listing of the help topics available Scroll through the list of available topics or type a word in the Type in the keyword to find box to quickly locate topics related to that word Select the topic and click Tis The Search tab allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topics in the online help that
111. is cleared edited frames will not be passed to the device 6 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button Configuring an OHCl compliant IEEE 1394 DV device If you have an OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV device you can configure it to work with Vegas software 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the Preview device tab 3 In the Device drop down list select OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV Information about the device displays in the Details area 4 If your source media does not conform to DV standards choose a setting from the If project is invalid for DV output conform to the following drop down list to adjust the video to display properly on your external monitor 5 Select the Recompress edited frames check box to recompress any edited frames in your project before previewing When the check box is cleared edited frames will not be passed to the device 6 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button Configuring a Windows Secondary Display If you have a Windows secondary display device you can configure it to work with Vegas software 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the Preview device tab 3 In the Device drop down list select Windows Secondary Display Information about the device displays in the Details area 4 From the Display
112. is located number pg 60 Start Displays when on the timeline the Enter a different value to cause the event to begin playback sooner or event starts playback later in the project pg 60 End Displays when on the timeline the Enter a different value to cause the event to end playback sooner or event ends playback later in the project pg 60 Length Displays the total length of the Enter a different value to increase or decrease the event s playback event time Number of Takes Displays the amount of recorded Cannot be edited display only takes contained in the event Active Take Name Displays the event s current take Enter a different name for the current take pg 131 name Take Start Displays the offset into the source Enter a different value to cause the take to playback sooner or later media file when the placed event from the source media file begins playback Timecode In Displays the media file timecode at Display only cannot be edited the start of the event Timecode Out Displays the media file timecode at Display only cannot be edited the end of the event File Path Displays the path of the event s Enter a new media file reference path for the event to use media file Tape Name Displays the name of the source Change the tape name here or in the properties dialog for the media media tape name file pg 239 Select Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s selection by clicking the check box A c
113. is very similar to u Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Glossary j ry Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example the ADPCM algorithm from Microsoft is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM Aliasing A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear alias frequencies in the low end of the spectrum To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate Amplitude Modulation AM A process whereby the amplitude loudness of a sound is varied over time When varied slowly a tremolo effect occurs If the frequency of modulation is high many side frequencies are created wh
114. line under the track number and shading in the track list indicates a track has focus CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES sy Making selections You have the flexibility to select one or more events a time range or events and a time range All selection options can apply to a single track or to multiple tracks To select an event click it Selecting multiple events You can select multiple events in your project using several methods 4 Tip Once you have selected multiple events you can group them together For more information see Grouping events on page 179 ae a Note You can select multiple video events multiple audio events or a combination of both video and audio events However you can only use commands and operations that apply to both types of events for selections composed of both audio and video events EE lt _ Selecting nonadjacent events 1 Hold the key Selected events oe em whee 2 Select the events by clicking them SR xa z i To deselect an event simply click it again to lt i toggle the event selection on or off SR OO H RL 4 z Selecting a range of events bn Efa ek SO I vol 0 0 dB I 1 Hold the key L S Center M b SH Geo 2 Click the first event that you want to select Val 1 6d8 L Pan Center ME
115. long format productions e Perfect Clarity Audio is a compressed format that is completely lossless Unlike MP3 and other highly compressed formats which are lossy 100 of the quality of your audio is maintained by using the PCA format More about video formats When you create a final movie you will find that there are dozens of formats to choose from each having many customization options The destination of your final movie is the most important factor in selecting a format Movies created for broadcast television must be of the highest quality but for many other destinations such as a CD ROM or the Internet you may have to sacrifice some quality when you render the file Heavy compression may create visible artifacts in the video such as when you create streaming video for the Internet Every case is different and it is necessary to experiment to obtain the best results VCR or television If you are creating a movie that you want to send back out to a television a VCR or a camcorder there is only one choice use the same settings as the original video There is no way to improve upon the quality of your original video as far as compression is concerned If you have captured your video at 640X480 at 24 fps in an MJPEG codec then that is how you should set up your final movie This is the only way to maintain 100 quality For more information see Working in DV format on page 234 Computer This can be the most complicated case
116. more information see Video tab on page 333 ee ee ea ara eae eer ee ee ee a K K he A he N 4 V 4 V V N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Safe title Safe action CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 294 yz Viewing the grid The Video Preview window can display vertical and horizontal lines over your video You can use the grid to help you align objects To view the grid click the down arrow next to the Overlays button 7 and choose Grid Set the grid spacing using the Horizontal grid divisions and Vertical grid divisions settings on the Video tab in the Preferences dialog Isolating color channels The Video Preview window allows you to select a specific channel to be isolated and whether the channel should be displayed in grayscale only To display a channel click the down arrow next to the Overlays button and choose a color channel a Note Use the Alpha as Grayscale setting to isolate the Alpha channel mask and display it in grayscale S TY Monitoring video with scopes TI Video scopes are only available in the full version of Vegas software From the View menu choose Video Scopes to toggle the display of the Video Scopes window Broadcast video uses a narrower range of color than the RGB you see on your computer When you broadcast a project that contains out of range colors you can introduce image problems or even noise into the audio st
117. multiple computers If you have multiple computers in your production environment you can easily share media libraries The following guidelines will help you make the most of your media libraries in a multicomputer setup e Save your media in shared folders where all necessary users have access e Use common drive letters or UNC universal naming convention paths for the folders where your media files and libraries are stored on all computers For example your media files could be in a shared folder called studio_a media studio a is the computer name and media is the name of the shared folder or you could map the shared folder media to drive letter M for all computers e After tagging your media or otherwise changing properties save the metadata to the media files by clicking the Save Tags and Properties to Files button Saving this information in the files makes the information more portable across computers USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 CHAPTER 95 gme Basic Editing _ Techniques Vegas projects are multitrack compilations of events that occur over time The events in your project are references pointers to source media files Vegas software is a nondestructive editor so editing events in your project does not alter the source media files in any way Getting around When editing and playing back the project the cursor identifies where you are along the project s timeline Moving the
118. next to the button to choose a saved palette or create a new palette Creating a palette 1 Click the down arrow next to the Change Tags View button and choose New Palette from the menu The New Palette dialog is displayed 2 In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the palette 3 In the Rows box specify the number of rows of buttons you want to display in the palette 4 In the Columns box specify the number of columns of buttons you want to display in the palette 5 Click OK to create the palette The palette is displayed as a grid with empty buttons USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 ES I Assigning palette buttons 1 Perform either of the following actions to display the Tag Chooser dialog e Click an empty palette button e Click an existing button and choose Choose Tag from the shortcut menu 2 Select the tag you want to assign to the button 3 Click the OK button Clearing a button Right click a palette button and choose Clear from the shortcut menu Deleting a saved palette 1 Right click a palette button and choose Delete Current Palette from the shortcut menu 2 Click the OK button when prompted to delete the palette from your library Saving tags and properties to media files Saving tags and properties to files makes all your tagging work portable if tags are saved to files those tags will be preserved in the files and can be added to the library by selecting the Add tags and cus
119. not the numeric keypad to save the layout in that space Recalling a saved layout 1 Press Alt D and then release the keys 2 Press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to recall the layout saved in that in that space INTRODUCTION CHP 1 a 31 Keyboard command reference CHP 1 ee Important Some keyboard commands listed below are associated with features that are not available in all versions of Vegas software For information on a specific feature and its availability please refer to the description of the feature in this manual a Project file commands Description Keys Create new project Ctrl N Create new project and bypass Project Ctrl Shift N Properties dialog Open existing project or media file Ctrl O Save project Ctrl S Open project s properties Alt Enter Close current project Ctrl F4 Exit Vegas software Alt F4 Window view commands Description Keys Description Keys Focus to track view Alt 0 Media Generators Show Alt 9 hide window if not docked Explorer show hide Alt 1 Plug ins show hide window Ctrl Alt 1 window if not docked if not docked Trimmer Show hide Alt 2 Video Scopes show hide Ctrl Alt 2 window if not docked window if not docked available only in the full version of Vegas software Mixer Show hide window if Alt 3 Surround Panner show hide Ctrl Alt 3 not docked window if not docked Video Preview show hide Alt 4 Next window F6 or
120. of plug in that creates virtual media files contained in events on the timeline These virtual files are stored Media Generators Credit Roll in the Project Media window where their properties feise Texture ef oll olor can be viewed and modified Test Pattern Text s L Plug In Text Large Tiles Small Tiles Generated media provide an easy way to add text E a backgrounds or test patterns to your project You can view the generators by choosing Media Generators from the View menu to display the Media Generators window Vertical Blinds Generated media events can be animated using keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 and Animating generated text on page 280 Generated media Description Checkerboard Creates checked and striped patterns Color gradient Creates gradient colored events to be used behind overlays as masks or for fades Credit roll Creates events that format your text into credits Text can be formatted within the Video Event FX dialog in Vegas software or pasted into this dialog from a word processing processing program Noise texture Creates realistic looking textures Solid color Creates solid colored events to be used behind overlays or for fades Test pattern Creates standard test patterns that can be used to calibrate your video output stream Many studios and broadcast facilities require a color bar pattern at the beginning of your video so that engineers c
121. own features and controls While tracks can be organized and mixed in any order track hierarchy can be important in determining the final output for video Because tracks are containers for events effects that are applied to a track apply to every event in that track Managing tracks Once you have added a track to your project you may perform basic editing tasks on it such as duplicating deleting and renaming Inserting an empty track Tracks are created for you when you drag events to empty spaces in the timeline You can also add empty eventless tracks to a project You can record into these tracks or use them as placeholders for specific media that you will add later For example you may want to create an empty track and then record a voiceover directly into a project 1 Right click in the track view or the track list to display a shortcut menu 2 Choose Insert Audio Track or Insert Video Track You may also add an empty track from the Insert menu by choosing Audio Track or Video Track An empty track is added at the bottom of the track list Duplicating a track You can duplicate a track in your project including all of the events contained on it When you duplicate a track the duplicate is placed directly below the original track You can duplicate one track or select multiple tracks to duplicate 1 Click the track that you want to duplicate To select multiple tracks click each one while pressing to select adjacent track
122. parameters using envelopes For more information see Bus automation audio only on page 158 Adding envelopes to an audio bus track Adding volume panning and effect automation envelopes to a bus track is just like adding an envelope to a standard track For more information see Composite level automation video only on page 161 Adding effects to audio bus tracks Click the Bus FX button in the bus track header to add or edit bus effects If there are no effects on the bus clicking this button displays the Plug In Chooser If an audio bus already has effects assigned clicking this button displays the Audio Plug In window Clicking this button has the same effect as clicking the button on a bus control in the Mixer window or the Video Preview window If the bus effects chain includes plug ins with automatable parameters the Bus FX button is displayed as a l Muting or soloing an audio bus track Click the Mute or Solo button in the bus track header to mute or solo a bus Clicking these buttons on a bus track has the same effect as clicking the buttons on a bus control in the Mixer window Resizing audio bus tracks You can drag the horizontal splitter between the track list and bus tracks to increase or decrease the space allocated to bus tracks Perform any of the following actions to resize individual bus tracks e Drag a bus track s bottom border to set its height Click Minimize to minimize a track vertic
123. plug ins in a certain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next plug in on the chain There is no right or wrong way to order plug ins but some plug ins work better when arranged in a particular order You can arrange the order of plug ins in a chain in either the appropriate FX window or the Plug In Chooser dialog Arranging the plug in order in the FX window 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 2 On the plug in that you want to move right click and choose Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu Alternately drag a plug in to a new position Audio Plug In mee Track 3 E e Track Moise Gate Track EQ Track Compressor Rele Threshold level f InF to 0 dB 3 Once the chain s plug ins are in the order that you want click the Close button E3 in the upper right corner to close the window Arranging the plug in order from the Plug In Chooser dialog 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 2 Click the Plug In Chain button The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top 3 Drag a plug in to a new locati
124. point or a portion of the envelope to set the fade curve If you select a portion of the envelope the fade curve is applied to that envelope segment If you select a point the fade curve is applied to the segment of the envelope after the selected point 1 Right click a point or a portion of the envelope to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose the curve type _Cco sss sss Tip If you use the same fade curve frequently you can set it as a default all new audio or video envelopes For more information see Editing tab on page 349 S OY USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 C165 Hiding track envelopes After you have set your envelopes on the tracks you can hide them from the track view Hiding track envelopes does not affect playback The points that you set still automate the controls even though the envelopes are not visible 1 From the View menu choose either Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes A submenu appears Envelopes that are currently displayed are selected in the submenu 2 From the submenu choose an envelope name All envelopes in your project of that type no longer appear in the track view a Tip From the View menu choose Show Envelopes or press Ctrl Shift E to toggle the display of all envelopes in the timeline ee If you ve added effect automation envelopes to a track the track can get cluttered Click the down arrow next to the Track FX button and choose an envelope
125. portion of the Vegas window Using an external audio editing program Vegas software is a nondestructive editing environment which means that the original source files remain unchanged by any editing done in the software Destructive constructive edits that modify the actual source media file may be done in a separate application such as Sound Forge software from Sony Media Software By setting up a separate audio editor you can quickly access the program from Vegas software via the Tools menu or by pressing E BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 123 Setting up an audio editing program If you already have Sound Forge software loaded on your computer when you installed Vegas software the installation should have detected it and made it your default audio editing program However if you do not have Sound Forge software or want to specify a different audio editor you may do so in the Preferences dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 In the Preferences dialog click the Audio tab 3 Click the Browse button to the right of the Preferred audio editor box The Preferred Audio Editor dialog appears 4 From this dialog navigate to the application to use for editing audio files 5 Select the application s executable icon exe and click Open to set the application as your default audio editor The application s path displays in the Preferred audio editor box Opening an audio
126. post roll duration During recording the selected event s edges serve as the punch in and out points You can create multiple punch in and out points by selecting more events within the time selection You may need to split an existing event into three pieces so that you can select a smaller portion of the event to record into For more information see Splitting events on page 105 1 Click the Arm for Record button on the desired track s 2 Select the event to record into a Tip You may record into multiple events by pressing and making your selections EE oaoaaaoaocaaaaaa a__ u 3 On the marker bar drag a time selection You may adjust the time selection by dragging the selection bar s starting and ending points Make the time selection start before the event for a pre roll 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording If input monitoring is turned on the track s original audio is played until the cursor reaches the selected event When the cursor plays through the selected event you ll hear your recording input and the track s original audio is played again when the cursor moves past the selected event Using pre roll The previous technique allows you to define the playback region with a time selection and sets the punch in and punch out points in the recording to the event boundaries When you click the Record button playback begins at the beginning of the ti
127. project If you have a set of audio files you wish to burn to a CD you can add the files as tracks to a new audio CD layout project Or if you want to burn an audio CD from an existing project you can mark the tracks in your project either automatically or manually Track markers CD layout bar T Track 1 Glass of punch Track 2 Anywhere but somewhere Track 2 Can you see why 01 00 08 58 SG oade G bse Q vol oode HU Pan Center Ill Adding media as CD tracks to a new project You have a collection of completed audio files that you want to write to a CD An audio CD layout project can quickly be assembled from sound files in the Project Media window You can add the tracks one at a time or use the Project Media window to sort them into track order and add them all at once 1 Create a new project 2 Add all the media to be included in the project to the Project Media window For more information see Using the Project Media window on page 47 3 To add all tracks at once use the following steps to sort the files into track order e In the Project Media window click the arrow on the Views button 1 and choose Details from the menu The Project Media window changes to Details view e In the Comments column enter the track number for each media file 01 02 etc e Click the Comments column header to sort the list into track order e Select the sorted files in the Project Media window 4 Right click a medi
128. purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Vegas software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 2y INTRODUCTION CHP 1 43 CHAPTER Getting Started Vegas software is a new way of creating multimedia productions Whether you are an experienced multimedia author or a budding novice the powerful features and capabilities of Vegas software are organized to increase your creativity and productivity The following chapter summarizes the software s basic functions and operations Creating projects The process of creating a multimedia production can be a complicated undertaking involving hundreds of shots takes voiceovers music beds audio tracks and special effects Organization is a critical issue in this process In the software organization is handled by a small project file VEG that saves information about source file locations edits cuts insertion points transitions and special effects This project file is not a multimedia file but is instead used to create render the final file when editing is finished Because Vegas software edits a project file and not the original source files you can
129. recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 167 Assignable effects automation audio only Ti This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use assignable effects automation to vary the level of a track sent to an assignable effects chain Adding or removing assignable effects automation Before you can add an assignable effects envelope you ll need to add an assignable effects chain to your project For more information see Creating an assignable effects plug in chain on page 190 1 Select an audio track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu 3 From the submenu choose the effects chain where you want to send the selected track A check mark is displayed for each assignable effects chain that is automated for the selected track CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION 158 y Adjusting assignable effects automation levels 1 Click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose an assignable effects chain from the menu Ey ri E G he Yol 0 3 dE Fx i 0 00dB pe Pan Center Fe 1 0 0 dB Bus A 0 0 dE 3 Drag the FX fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have
130. removing tags use the Properties pane in the Search Results pane or drag the Tags column in the Search Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time For more information see Using the Properties pane on page 92 ps a a Note Tags are saved in your media library If a media file exists in multiple libraries tagging the media file in one library has no effect on the other libraries unless you save the tags to the files and use the Add Files to Media Library dialog to update tags and custom properties for all files S oY 1 Select media files to tag in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 2 Click the Apply Tag Mode button 2 in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s E 3 4 Bass Ud Wav E 3 4 Bass OS way TTT _e V Tip You can also right click a selection in the Search Results pane and choose Apply Tag from the shortcut menu to add a tag to all selected media The Tag Chooser dialog will be displayed Select the tag you want to add and then click the OK button a USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 e 7 9 When you add a subtag to a media file the tag s hierarchical position in the tag tree is applied implicitly P I
131. see Pitch shifting audio events on page Lif Adjusting audio channels A stereo audio event has two channels right and left You can adjust how these channels are played by right clicking an event choosing Channels from the shortcut menu and choosing one of the following commands from the submenu Both plays both channels in stereo This is the default setting Left Only plays only the left channel Playback is mono and is centered between the two channels Right Only plays only the right channel Playback is mono and centered Combine adds the two channels into a single channel and divides the level in half to prevent clipping Playback is mono and is centered between the two channels e Swap exchanges the right and left channels stereo playback You can also pan from one channel to the other using either the multipurpose slider or a pan envelope For more information see Adjusting stereo panning on page 145 WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 8 L 17 B Copying and pasting event attributes You ve set up one event exactly the way you want it and now you want to apply the same attributes to another event A quick way to copy the attributes of one event and paste them onto another is provided You can copy and paste multiple event attributes including Properties pg 174 including audio pitch shift pg 127 and video playback rate pg 129 Switches pg 171 Video event plug ins pg 241 Cropping pg 223 Click
132. see Selecting events and a time range on page 98 3 Press CT TT or from the Edit menu choose Trim Only the portion of selected events outside the time selection is trimmed Unselected events remain The time information space between events is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not placed on the clipboard 0000 24 29 _ 00002928 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 08 Edge trimming events using the keyboard With this method you can quickly jump through your project and adjust cuts until they re perfectly synchronized If you have an external multimedia controller it s even easier T If you want downstream events to ripple as you trim click the Auto Ripple button d to turn on Auto Ripple mode 2 Select the event you want to trim 5 Press 7 or 9 on the numeric keypad to move the cursor to the event edge you want to trim 7 selects the beginning of an event or moves to the previous event edge 9 selects the end of the event or moves to the next event edge A red bracket is displayed to indicate which event edge will be trimmed a Note You can also perform this step using the or keys nnn nnn E Use the 1 3 and 4 6 keys on the numeric keypad to trim the current event edge e Press 1 to trim one video frame left or press 3 to trim one video frame right or hold Ctri Shift Alt while rolling the mouse wheel e Pre
133. sequence using AnimationOne_00001 tga to File type TARGA Streams 1 AnimationOne_00120 tga Audio Length Video b640x460n32 Length Still 6 Click Open The still image sequence is added to the Project Media window range U Sorting media with bins The detailed view of the Project Media window helps you sort your media files using their attributes but for more control you can create bins Bins are folders within projects that you can use to organize your media files Media bins are virtual folders that are saved with your project They do not affect the way media is saved on your computer Creating bins Right click the parent bin where you want to create a new bin and choose Create New Bin from the shortcut menu CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 52 p Adding media to a bin 1 Browse your existing bins to find the media file you want to move The All Media Folder contains all media files in your project 2 Drag a file from the right hand pane to a bin Searching media bins 1 Right click in the Project Media window and choose Search Media Bins from the shortcut menu The Search Media Bins dialog is displayed 2 Use the drop down lists in the Search Media Bins dialog to set your search conditions and click the Search button The selected bin and all sub bins will be searched 3 Click the Search Results icon to view the matching files a 4 Hint Right click the Search Results icon and choose Save as Bin from
134. should be set to balance RAM usage and playback buffering The rule is to set this slider as low as possible without introducing gapping 1 Open a project that has multiple events 2 On the Audio device tab move the Playback buffering seconds slider to 0 25 Playback buffering seconds c Fei H 0 25 3 Start playing back the project 4 If the playback still gaps increase the Playback buffering seconds slightly You may have to experiment to find the correct settings If you continue to experience gapping you can try the following to control the gapping e Decrease the number of events you are trying to play back This may mean muting tracks or soloing a couple of tracks RAM is mostly affected by the number of unique events that are playing back simultaneously e Use the Render to New Track command on the Tools menu to combine all the events into one event For more information see Rendering to a new track on page 153 Sync tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software These preferences are used to set up Vegas software to generate or trigger from MIDI timecode from external MIDI devices For more information see Synchronizing MIDI timecode on page 200 Preference Description Generate MIDI Timecode settings Sets the output device and frame rate used when generating MIDI timecode Generate MIDI Clock settings Sets the output device used when generating MIDI Clock information You can choose the
135. some cases the grid lines and the ruler do not match This is because they are two independent functions ooo E Using the Time Display window The Time Display window reflects the cursor s position on the timeline and the end point of a time selection You can customize the time display s settings including what time the window displays and what colors it uses You can move the Time Display window from its docked position above the track list to float on the workspace In addition you can dock the time display in the window docking area For more information see Window docking area and floating window docks on page 24 E 00 00 17 01 Changing the time display settings The time display always reflects the ruler settings that are selected You can change the ruler settings via the time display or vice versa For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 329 1 Right click the time display A shortcut menu appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Time Format and choose the desired time format from the submenu Both the time display and ruler display the chosen time format CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 332 J Changing the time display colors You can change the background color and text color used in the time display 1 Right click the time display to display the shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Text Color or Background Color and then choose Custom The
136. sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it Sample Rate The sample rate also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates Sampling rate is to time as quantization is to level Sample Size See Bit Depth Sample Value The sample value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample In 16 bit audio these values range from 32768 to 32767 In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or O dB sfapO Sony Media Software audio proxy file For more information see Audio proxy files sfapO on page 371 stk See Peak File Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu that appears when you right click certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in Vegas software for quick access to many commands An example of a shortcut menu can be found by right clicking any event along the timeline Signal to Noise Ratio The signal to noise ratio SNR is a meas
137. surround panner Jumps to a location on the maximally inscribed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround panner Moves front back Moves left right Makes fine front back adjustments Makes fine left right adjustments When you pan a track or mixer control you can choose among several pan types to determine how to pan the audio The current pan type appears at the bottom of the Surround Panner window Right click the Surround Panner window and choose a pan type from the shortcut menu e The Add Channels pan type makes the audio appear to move as a unit among the surround channels As you move the pan point toward a channel speaker icon more and more of the signal from the other channels are folded into the channel you are panning towards until at the extreme all channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the channels In this pan type as you move the pan point from the center to a channel the signal in the channel you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to 0 dB The signal in the channel you are panning away from starts at a base dB level either 0 dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level For example when you pan fully to the right only the right channel is audible This pan type
138. the Explorer window drag a Vegas project file veg to the timeline The project is added to the timeline where you drop it a 4 Tip You can also drag files from the Windows Explorer and drop them on the Vegas timeline EN e From the File menu choose Import and then choose Media to browse to the veg file you want to nest Using any of the methods above the Vegas project file is also added to the Project Media window Once a nested project is in the timeline you can then edit the its events just as you would any other event in your project GETTING STARTED CHP 2 a DB7 Notes e The output from the nested project s master bus is used to create the audio event If you nest a 5 1 surround project the audio event will be a stereo downmix of the surround master bus e Audio events from nested projects cannot be edited in a sound editor e The audio from a nested project will require that a proxy file be built To avoid building proxy files delete audio from nested projects and use the master project to create your audio e Markers and regions in the nested project are displayed in the timeline as media markers in the event e Prerendered video from a project will be used when that project is nested in another project s timeline e You can edit a nested project by right clicking the event in the timeline and choosing Edit Source Project from the shortcut menu A new Vegas window will open to allow you to edit the project Playi
139. the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved Enter a new name for the project in the File name box From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired file format oF WN Choose 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM from the Template drop down list if you want to render six monaural files or choose an appropriate 5 1 channel template if the selected file type supports it 6 If necessary click Custom to customize the rendering settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 7 Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the loop region Loop Playback does not need to be selected on the workspace for this option to work 8 If the selected file type supports it you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers regions and command markers in the rendered media file If the information cannot save in your media file it will create an sfl file using the same base name as your media file CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 222 p 9 Click Save Rendering the surround project SampleProject wav results in six WAV files Render As x Surround Projects Slee Fi Save in Surround Projects RE a gt file le Edt View Favorites Tools Help ae
140. the event with the attributes you wish to copy and click the Copy button 2 To paste the event attributes to multiple events select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 96 3 Right click an event and choose Paste Event Attributes from the shortcut menu The attributes are pasted onto the selected event s Using audio event envelopes ASR You may apply envelopes to individual events Envelopes also known as ASRs attack sustain and release give you the ability to control an audio event s fade in fade out and overall volume level mnn Note Event envelopes only affect an event Track envelopes affect the entire track For more information see Composite level automation video only on page 161 N aaa Tip If you want to display fade lengths in selected events select the Event Fade Lengths option on the View menu When you add an event to your project handles are added that are used to set the envelope As you use these handles on audio events a volume envelope appears indicating how the event is being affected Envelope Audio event handles envelope CHP 8 WORKING WITH EVENTS 176 r Setting an audio events volume When you place the mouse pointer at the top of the event the pointer changes to a hand cursor Ja that you can use to lower the event s overall volume 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event T QI i H 11 a a Gan is 0 9 d R TRE T
141. the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http mp3licensing com Microsoft DirectX programming interface Portions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright 1999 2006 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media 9 Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media technologies Copyright 1999 2006 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Real RealMedia RealAudio and Real Video applications 2006 RealNetworks Inc Patents Pending All rights reserved Real Real Media RealAudio RealVideo and the Real logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of RealNetworks Inc in the United States and other countries MPEGLA and MPEG 2 USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA LLC 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 Manufactured under license from MPEG LA Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dolby Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the produc
142. the right channel is the LFE channel Three stereo Connect powered speakers to your sound cards Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on sound cards outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of a six channel amplifier nome theater receiver Connect front channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is the rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier center channel the right channel is the LFE channel Setting up surround projects You can configure a Vegas project to use 5 1 surround in the Project Properties dialog You can also choose to apply a low pass filter for the LFE channel Applying a low pass filter approximates the bass management system in a 5 1 decoder and ensures that you re sending only low frequency audio to the LFE channel 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 Click the Audio tab 3 From the Master bus mode drop down list choose 5 1 surround 4 To limit the audio sent to the LFE channel do the following e Select the Enable low pass filter on LFE check box and enter a value in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box The low pass filter isolates the audio sent to the LFE channel by limiting it to frequencies lower than the value entered in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box e Choose a setting from the Low pass filter quality drop down list to determine the sharpness of the filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve Se eeEs__ioiHesesss
143. the shortcut menu to save the results of your search as anew media bin eee Automatically adding recorded files to a media bin Select a media bin if you want to automatically add your recorded audio to a media bin Deleting media from a bin 1 Select a media file 2 Press on your keyboard 3 If the All Media Folder is selected the file will be removed from your project 4 If a media bin is selected the file is removed from the bin but remains part of your project The file is still available in the All Media Folder Configuring 24p pulldown removal TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Right click a DV AVI file in the Project Media window and choose File Format Properties from the shortcut menu to edit file settings from the file format plug in associated with the media file type For 24p NTSC DV AVI files with 2 3 pulldown you can use this dialog to configure removal of pulldown fields In most cases you will not need to edit pulldown removal settings However if the settings were not properly set in the DV header when your video was captured you can fine tune pulldown removal without recapturing your video 1 Right click an AVI file in the Project Media window and choose File Format Properties from the shortcut menu The AVI DV Media Properties dialog is displayed This command is not available for non 24p NTSC video or for 24p NTSC video using 2 3 3 2 pulldown 2 Select the Enable 2
144. the track header and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want to adjust trim levels Select Show Automation Controls if you want to adjust volume automation The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode Adjusting channel levels Use the Surround Master bus control in the Mixer window to adjust the individual levels of the 5 1 channels The faders in the track bus control can function as trim controls that adjust the overall level of each channel or you can automate the master volume of the Surround Master bus individual channel levels cannot be automated Click the Automation Settings button in the bus control or bus track and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want to adjust trim levels Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit ZK DIO a Din Output 2 Insert EN 2 Insert Bus G D Surround Master Bus 4 EU Track EO 661 EHO Hee O I Center Inf Mixer controls in trim mode Select Show Automation Controls if you want to adjust volume automation The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode Miner 44 100 Hz 16 bit be 9L bin Output 2g Insert Fx 2 Insert Bus DL Surround Master FAT Bus 4 a Track EQ gt oh Sh E ode ST El oe S Front Rear Cntr F Inf Inf Inf Inf i E W m p IR A Inf Inf LL CG Mixer controls in automation mode CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 214 Panning audio You can pan
145. the various tabs For more IP information see Working with project properties on page 333 video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CD e The Video tab allows you to select the video format and Iempiste EST other video parameters width Field order Lower field first e The Audio tab allows you to set up the basic audio Height 480 Pixel aspect ratio settings Frame rate e The Ruler tab allows you to choose the way the ruler is ee Full resolution rendering quality co delineated beats seconds etc e The Summary tab allows you to enter any relevant information and reminders about your project Prerendered Files Folder TI The Audio CD tab allows you to enter information for CADocuments and Settings Administrator application Dat aison burning audio CDs This tab 1S available only in the full Free storage space in selected folder 15 562 4 Megabytes version of Vegas software a IIIMIM i Tip The easiest way to set the often complex properties on the Video tab is to select a template that matches your media e g NTSC DV 720x480 29 970 fps S a 3 Click OK Start all new projects with these settings 4 From the File menu choose Save Enter a name browse for a location and click Save to save your project VEG file You can change project settings at any time while working on a project From the File menu choose Properties to change any of these settings Setting video p
146. then resize the event to its original length Creating keyframe presets The 2D and 3D track motion dialogs allow you to create save and recall keyframe presets Keyframe presets save the settings of the selected keyframe row at the cursor position n o V Notes Presets for the Position 2D Shadow and 2D Glow keyframe rows are saved separately Presets for 2D and 3D track motion are saved separately presets you create in the 2D Track Motion window will not be available in the 3D Track Motion window pes Saving a preset 1 Adjust your Position 2D Shadow or 2D Glow settings as desired to create a keyframe 2 Type a name in the Preset box 3 Click the Save Preset button S a Note Presets for the Position 2D Shadow and 2D Glow keyframe rows are saved separately NNN LE CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 276 r E Note Presets for 2D and 3D track motion are saved separately presets you create in the 2D Track Motion window will not be available in the 3D Track Motion window SS ER Recalling a preset 1 Click in the Position 2D Shadow and 2D Glow keyframe row to select a row and position the cursor where you want to apply the preset 2 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list If no keyframe exists at the cursor position one is created using the settings from the preset If a keyframe exists at the cursor position the keyframe s settings are replaced with the settings from the preset
147. title bar of the Properties pane if you want to move it from its current position You can float the pane over the Media Manager window or drag to one of the edges of the window to dock it in a different position USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 a 03 Setting Media Manager options Use the Media Manager Options dialog to set options for working with the Media Manager tool To display the Media Manager Options dialog click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Options from the menu General tab Preference Description Reference library Choose the library you want to load when you click the Switch to Reference Library button in the upper right corner of the Search Results pane For more information about using reference libraries see Opening a Reference Library on page 83 Search results limit Type the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Note Increasing the Search results limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high Double click in Search Results Select this check box if you want to add files to the current project by double clicking a file in the Search pane adds media to project Results pane Shut down database service on Select this check box if you want to stop the database service when you close Vegas software exit Note Stopping the service can conserve system resourc
148. transition between two events that are adjacent to each other on the same track is instantaneous and is called a cut However if the first event is trimmed back from the end and the second event is trimmed back from the beginning in other words both have enough media to overlap you can transform the cut into a transition effect using this extra media 1 Right click the line between two adjacent events at the cut position 2 From the shortcut menu choose Transition and then choose the transition that you want to insert e g Insert Sony Iris You can also drag a transition to the cut from the Transitions window The duration of the newly inserted transition event is determined by the Cut to overlap conversion time set in the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog To access this dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu This event s media is After the conversion both events are longer than the trim T longer and extend into the transition a peoi l 0000 19 29 l ooo sds 29 ooo Fe ooo Tae F l T d l dp _ fore E This event s media extends before the beginning a Note There must be enough media in the respective events to cover the transition e g the end of the first event must not be the end of the media file Ne ee Tip You can also convert cuts between audio events to crossfades Click the cut and press 7 on the numeric keypad to create a crossfade There must be enough media
149. updated everywhere e Create a complex composited element that can be used as a single media event in multiple locations or projects e Create a transition across multiple events by placing the events in a nested project and applying the transition to the nested events project e Create a musical composition with its own tempo and bus structure that can be used in another project Create an individual project for each scene in a video and place those projects in a master project You can apply color correction to each project individually and then apply color correction to the master project as well e Use master projects to deliver a single project in multiple formats without time and disk consuming intermediate renders for example you could add your 24p 16 9 HD high definition project to a master project to reformat the project as widescreen SD standard definition for DVD letterboxed SD for VHS 4 3 pan and scan SD or 25p ee Note In order to use network rendering with nested projects the nested project must contain only media from folders that do not require remapping Before nesting your Vegas project update the project so that all media in the project is added from a network folder or a local shared folder that is mapped to the same drive letter on all renderers and the render host eee Adding a project to the Vegas timeline Use one of the following methods to nest an existing project in your current timeline e From
150. video clips 49 Recapturing video 48 Recording 199 207 Arming tracks 201 Into a time selection 204 Into an event 204 Into an event with time selection 205 Multiple takes 206 Previewing takes 131 Selecting track input devices 202 INDEX N Specifying storage folder 206 207 Starting and stopping 203 Stereo left right channel options 202 Red book CD burning 351 358 Red eye removing from stills 137 Redo Undo commands 114 115 Clearing history 115 Multiple 115 Reduction red eye 137 Reference library 83 Sony Sound Series Loops and Samples 84 Region 117 Regions Adding as takes 135 Deleting 118 Inserting 117 media adding 135 media viewing 136 Moving 117 Naming 118 Navigating to 118 Ripple editing 111 Selecting 118 Removing Events from a group 180 Plug ins 245 plug ins 194 Track envelopes 165 Velocity envelopes 179 Renaming Busses 186 CD layout markers 355 Markers 116 Projects 45 306 Tracks 142 Rendering 70 71 307 314 controls and templates 311 Custom settings 311 File formats 70 309 Surround projects 221 To anew track 153 Reordering tracks 142 Resampling 232 233 At final render 232 Event 173 178 232 Reversing a video event 179 Reversing events 136 RGB components 298 Ripple editing 102 Automatically 111 Cutting 100 INDEX Deleting 109 Manually 111 Pasting 101 Post edit rippling 111 Shuffling events 112
151. video media files with included audio streams by clicking the Ignore Event Grouping button Cutting copying or deleting grouped events 1 Select the events you want to cut or delete 2 From the Edit menu choose Group and choose Cut All Copy All or Delete All from the submenu The selected events and any events that are grouped with the selected events are deleted or copied cut to the clipboard WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 8 181 CHAPTER v E ear Using the Mixer The Mixer window is where you control the project s busses and assignable effects chains TI Multiple audio busses and assignable effects chains are only available in the full version of Vegas software Using the Mixer window The Mixer is a dockable window where you can control audio busses and assignable effects chains within your project and adjust the outgoing signal s volume and routing Viewing the Mixer window The Mixer window appears in the window docking area by default when you first start Vegas software However you can drag the Mixer within the workspace at any time to float it For more information see Window docking area and floating window docks on page 24 To hide view the Mixer window choose Mixer from the View menu or press Alt 3 Preview display optional Busses Assignable effects Miner 44 100 Hz 16 bit Ew ja a bin Output 2g Insert FX 27 Insert Bus Preview DL Master L Bus A Bus B Reverb
152. want to include chroma color or C component information in the waveform monitor choose Composite from the drop down list at the top of the monitor window When you choose Luminance chroma information is omitted 1 From the View menu choose Video Scopes to toggle the display of the Video Scopes window 2 Choose Waveform from the drop down list 3 Position the cursor in the frame you want to analyze If the Update Scopes While Playing button iil is selected you can monitor the waveform during playback 4 The waveform monitor displays the luminance of the video signal Frame Waveform display of frame Video Scopes Luminance PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 a 297 5 Hover over a portion of the monitor to display the luma value at the pointer position ideo Scopes a m Waveform Luminance lt Luma value SS ane ae Se k naan a a A Displaying color levels and contrast using the histogram monitor The histogram monitor in the Video Scopes window allows you to monitor color levels and contrast of your video Use the histogram before rendering your project to find and correct out of range values that could cause problems on the destination playback device The bar graph plots the number of pixels that exist for each color intensity For example when using the Blue setting the vertical axis represents the number of pixels and the horizontal axis represents the RGB color range from 0 0 0 to 0
153. you have multiple busses you can use bus to bus routing to create subgroups 1 Add busses to your project For more information see Adding busses to a project on page 183 2 In the Mixer window click the Playback Device Selector button on the bus you want to route and choose a bus from the menu e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to the master bus e The bus letter is displayed A Bi and so on when a bus is routed to another bus e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to a hardware output Routing busses to hardware You can assign busses to use specific hardware for output When you installed the software it automatically detected the hardware available for output on your computer For more information see Audio tab on page 342 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio device tab 2 From the Audio device type drop down list choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or an ASIO driver a Note If you select Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop down list on the Audio tab you will not be able to assign the bus to a different device _ Saaoaaoao aaoaoaog T USING THE MIXER CHP 9 L 1 8 B 3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog 4 In the Mixer window click the Playback Device Selector button on the bus you want to route 5 Choose a hardware device from the menu e The button is displayed as a when a bus is routed to the master bus
154. 0 20 18 I Chords Jaa a gt Eg E amp pd dl amp of BestAuto Ht GL Q gt Loops and Samples a Major Chord wav E Major MEE D Master S Sonic Excursions fore A Minor Chord wav 215 Minor X 0 Ebow vibrations QB Major Chord wav F Major Elements 1E Minor Chord wav IE Minor Window m GC Major Chord wav G Major docking G oe IS C Minor Chord way G G Minor area Lan oas p Major Chord way gt Loopettes S Minor anal HE Sonic Grab Bag y LZ LiL gt Explorer Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Trang Maen og RA Sira S Record Time 41 19 35 Ai Status bar Transport bar Toolbar The toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar to specify which buttons are displayed CHP 1 Create new project td Enable automatic crossfades E Open existing project J Enable automatic ripple editing Save project de Lock envelopes to events E Open project properties Ignore event grouping Ag Cut selected events or time range 4 Normal edit tool G4 Copy selected events or time range d Envelope edit tool Paste items from clipboard into TA Selection edit tool project i Undo Zoom edit tool T Redo ww What s This help si Enable snapping to grid lines INTRODUCTION 22 hr Time display The Time Display window reflects the cursor s position on the timeline MTC input MTC output or MIDI clock output time You can cust
155. 00 00 Transitions window Alt 7 00 00 10 00 00 00 14 71 00 00 17 14 00 00 10 00 00 00 12 55 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 11 00 00 03 50 Tape Name TT Select Mute l The Transitions window contains all of the transitions available The thumbnails display animated examples of each transition You can drag transitions from this window to replace the crossfade between two video events or to replace the fade in or fade out region of a video event For more information see Understanding basic transitions on page 267 Video FX window Alt 8 a 3D Blinds 30 Cascade 30 Fly Injuk 30 Shuffle Barn Door Clock Wipe Cross Effect Dissolve Flash Iris Linear Wipe Page Loop Page Peel Page Roll s wu E Vertical In No Vertical Out Mo Border Border 2 95 Horizontal In Mo Horizontal Gut Mo o Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transil lt gt The Video FX window contains the video effects available The thumbnails display animated examples of each plug in preset You can drag plug ins from this window to an event track or to the Video Preview window video output effects For more information see Using video effects on page 241 Black and White Border Media Media Manager Preset Black Restore Brightness and Broadcast Color Bump Map Channel Blend Chroma Blur Chroma Kever Color Balance Color Corrector Color Corrector
156. 1 Selecting 130 Technical support 17 Test pattern Event 247 Text INDEX PT AA Credit roll event 247 Keyframing 280 Media Generators window 28 Text event 247 Titles 228 Thumbnails 91 Time compressing events 129 Time Display window 22 331 332 Changing color 332 Changing time format 331 MIDI timecode settings 332 Time selection 97 Copying 100 Cutting 101 Recording into 204 With events 98 Timecode MIDI 200 206 344 345 Video 373 Timeline Adding media to 56 Moving events along 60 Playback on external monitor 300 printing to DV tape 323 printing to HDV tape 326 Titles Creating 228 Fading 229 Safe areas 293 Text generator 247 248 Toolbar 21 adding buttons 335 customizing 334 hiding showing 334 removing buttons 335 reordering buttons 335 Track automation 155 158 Track automation envelopes 163 Track effects Setting default 150 Track envelopes 163 166 Adding points 163 Changing fade curves 164 Colors 163 Deleting points 164 Envelope Edit Tool 165 Hiding on track s 165 Locking to events 166 Moving points 164 Removing from track s 165 Types 163 Track FX button 64 65 Track list 23 64 65 INDEX Track list audio CD Creating from events 354 Editing in Edit Details window 356 Exporting 356 Track motion 281 286 Button 64 Glow 284 Keyframes 283 Picture in picture effect 285 Position 283 Shadow 283 Shortcut me
157. 138 Audio CD track list category 138 Closed captioning 230 231 Commands category 138 Customizing 140 Displaying 138 Edit functions 138 Editing a CD layout 356 Events category 139 Markers category 139 Regions category 139 Selected events category 139 Edit history clearing 115 Edit source project 58 Editing audio in external editor 123 Editing events 99 INDEX vd Editing tools Envelope 178 Selection 96 Zoom 62 Effects fine tuning with split screen previews 292 Effects See Plug Ins Empty events 103 Envelope Edit Tool 165 178 Envelopes 163 166 175 179 Adding points 163 ASR 175 Changing fade curves 164 Deleting from track s 165 Deleting points 164 Event envelopes 175 179 Fade in and out 176 177 Fade types 176 178 Hiding on track s 165 Mixer controls 188 Moving points 164 Opacity 177 Ripple editing 111 Track envelopes 163 166 Velocity 178 Video 177 Volume event 176 Volume track 163 Equipment setup for recording 199 200 Basic 199 mixer 200 With digital multitrack 200 With MIDI option 200 Event editing 99 Event properties Copying and pasting 175 Displaying names 131 Name changing 131 Pitch shifting 127 Event switches 171 173 Copying and pasting 175 Invert phase 172 Lock 171 Loop 171 Maintain aspect ratio 173 Mute 171 Normalize 172 Reduce interlace flicker 173 Resample 173 Event takes 130 Adding files as 130 Chan
158. 2 Select the Split Screen View button The cursor is displayed as a 3 Choose a preset selection or drag in the Video Preview section to create a selection This selection will display the unprocessed video In the following example the Add Noise plug in was applied to the event and the selection displays the original video a Tip Double click in the Video Preview window to select the full window or drag again to replace the existing selection Yideo Preview Frame 2 215 Project 720x480x32 29 970i Previews 360x240x32 29 970p Display 360xe40x32 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 A 2023 Showing the video at the cursor position and the contents of the clipboard 1 Position the cursor on the timeline and click the Copy Snapshot button amp in the Video Preview window to copy a frame to the clipboard 2 Position the cursor at another point on the timeline 3 Click the down arrow next to the Split Screen View button _ and choose Clipboard from the menu 4 Select the Split Screen View button B 5 Choose a preset selection or drag in the Video Preview section to create a selection This selection will display the contents of the clipboard sss ss Tip Double click in the Video Preview window to select the full window or drag again to replace the existing selection E T Changing the selection for displaying split screen views Click the down arrow next to the Split Screen View butt
159. 2 EA E 203 RECODO A a dasa a pee Aula ae baa Rea ENR ena eee 203 Recording IntO an GMply track Sie cieXdsdd Mee eee aw Waa WA ae Ba a ee kk 203 Recording into a time SeIECtION 0 eee eens 204 Recording into an event soi 42 5c Ge i te bette Ae ea ah et hoe adhe deh on dee 204 Recording into an event with a time Selection 2 lt 0c ee eee eens 205 Triggering from MIDI timecode 0 0 eee eee eee 206 Working with multiple recorded takes ccc eee eee eee eee eens 206 Specifying where recordings are stored 0c eee eee es 206 Changing where recorded files are stored when arming a track onns nna nannu nnna 206 Changing where recorded files are stored when starting to record 2220000eees 207 Changing where recorded files are stored in the Project Properties dialog 207 Monitoring audio levels ese eevee Peete eee ene Bee keene es ee bs Beet een eee eee ea ws 207 Using record input monitoring out oy ee Se ee ee tee Sw ee eet ed ace aes eed ane 207 Working with 5 1 Surround 0000 eee es 209 Whats o 1 SUIfFOUNG scas53 teeter ian ini Or eu TATE et enacts enews 209 Setting up Surround hardware 000 cece eee eee eee eee eens 210 Setting up surround projects lt 34 stcs site anita eines dace amend aeees 210 Routing to hardware in the mixer 0 cc eee eee 211 Assigning audio to the LFE channel 00 cece eee eee ee eens 212 Adjusting v l ME si ia 8S e
160. 289 Rendering a project Rendering refers to the process of creating a new media file from a Vegas project The project file is not affected overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You may return to the original project to make edits or adjustments and render it again The following table describes the formats available for rendering your project Format Name Extension Definition AC 3 ac3 Encoded Dolby Digital surround sound format This option creates six mono files WAV or AIFF that your authoring application can use to create DVD Video or 5 1 channel music projects Audio Interchange File Format aif The standard audio file format developed by Apple and used on Macintosh computers MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation are supported through the use of MainConcept MPEG technology MPEG Layer 3 mp3 Compressed audio format You may render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in OggVorbis 099 A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology QuickTime mov Apple QuickTime multimedia format RealMedia rm The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Scott Studios Wave wav Standard audio format used with Scott Studios systems Perfect Clarity Audio pca A proprietary format from Sony Media Software that is compressed and completely lossless Wave64 w64 A Sony Media Software proprietary f
161. 29 00 00 0 323 a OO 00 00 00 K ba specific events to edit and then select a time Selected Unselected range event event 1 Select the events you wish to edit For more Unselected N Selected information see Selecting multiple events on page event evert 70 Selected Unselected 2 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the event event marker bar The mouse pointer changes to a left right arrow cursor f 3 Drag to select the region Notice that events that were not initially selected in step 1 remain unselected not highlighted Selecting tracks Click a track header to select it Hold or to select multiple tracks BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 99 Selecting groups of composited tracks Click the vertical bar below a parent track to select a group of composited tracks For example clicking the area marked A in the following track list to select tracks 2 through 6 Clicking the area marked B selects tracks 5 and 6 60 ra SRM dG SO I Level 100 0 llL at 4 me O J JLevel 67 8 AH t3 i A SB Re 6 atl G0 al Ill Bau TL SH Ree ot LU mts SH Reso eS LU BS L 1 B BE SRM 6 et d I RS the RE ee O Level 59 1 l Ext 4 Editing events Copying events You can copy events or portions of events to the clipboard and paste them into your project You may copy a single event or multiple events Copying preserves th
162. 3 comarkers is CreateEnvelopes is CreateTracks js 2 DirectoryConverter js 4 UU File name Batch Render js 000 Render Batch Render js 000 e Files of type ScrptFiles js vb 0 M Files s wb v Script Fies TR ll Caca 2 Browse to the script file vb or js you want to run 3 Select the file and click the Open button The script runs CHP 20 USING SCRIPTING 3684yz Adding scripts to the Scripting menu When you start the program Vegas software looks at the Script Menu folder in the Vegas program folder to determine which scripts appear in the Scripting submenu This folder is c Program Files Sony Vegas 6 0 Script Menu by default 1 Add or delete scripts in the Script Menu folder to change the contents of the submenu a 4 Note To prevent duplication of script files you can use shortcuts in the Script Menu folder a ae 2 From the Tools menu choose Scripting and then choose Rescan Script Menu Folder to update the menu Creating a script The Microsoft NET framework is used for scripting You can write scripts in JScript or Visual Basic NET For more information on JScript see http msdn microsoft com library en us jscript7 html jsoriJ Script asp For more information on Visual Basic NET see http msdn microsoft com library en us vbcn7 html vaconProgrammingWithV B asp Editing an existing script All you need to edit a script is a simple text editor an
163. 3 again forces the track below at the same compositing level to be rendered in 3D and composited as a 2D image However in this case the 3D rotation that was applied as parent motion on track 1 is not applied to tracks 3 and 4 ali mo O m ty Z amp te 0 m iy TL 1 mo dG gt m Ht Sa Brea u 958 T Ea eeu In the next example all tracks are compositing parents The 3D track on track 2 is on top the 2D track in track 3 is composited below track 2 and the 3D track in track 4 is composited below tracks 3 and 4 1 a R dde G G l SEB R t RU R de G l d HU fy T 4 S SR t JU mt 1 Creating masks Masks are used to create overlays limit the effects of a filter and to create transparent titles In their simplest form masks work by making a particular color in an image or video transparent More complex effects can be created with gradients smoothly blending transparent areas together and by altering the sensitivity of the mask CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 258 Creating image masks You can use media generated by Vegas software to create simple masks You can also create masks from just about any image file a Masks created using color gradient generated media events 1 Create an image of a solid white circle on a black background in any paint program This will be the mask 2 Add the mask image file as an event into the top most track on the
164. 3 pulldown removal check box o O V Note You can clear this check box if you want to override pulldown removal for individual files when the Enable pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog ae GETTING STARTED CHP 2 nnn 53 3 Choose a setting from the Starting frame timecode offset drop down list to indicate what timecode numbers represent which frame in the video sequence For example if you have an NTSC DV file with 2 3 pulldown created on a Sony JH3 HDCAM deck the default settings for timecode offset use O for the Starting frame timecode offset If you have changed the timecode offsets on the deck or if you have material with pulldown from another source you will have to experiment with the settings to determine the correct offset Check for interlacing a In the Project Properties dialog choose a NTSC DV 24p template from the Template drop down list b Choose the Best Full setting in the Video Preview window to show full frames c Step though the clip and look for interlace lines in moving objects or backgrounds d If you see interlace lines repeat from step 3 and choose a different offset value e When no interlace lines appear the offset is set correctly Importing media Importing media allows you to add media to the Project Media list for use in your project without adding it to the timeline Vegas supports the importing of a wide variet
165. 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo 00 00 09 05 Uncompressed Project 720x480 29 9701 Frame 133 Previews 160x120 29 970p Display 180x120 32 Video Output FX Yideo Previey Ex E pest auto Hy 2 In the Plug In Chooser dialog select the effect that you would like to apply and click OK 3 Modify the effect in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button to access online help USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 a Dh Adding a plug in from the Video FX or Plug In Manager window TI The Plug In Manager is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 If the Video FX or Plug In Manager window is not currently visible choose either Video FX or Plug In Manager from the View menu to view the appropriate window E Plug In Manager Black Restore Black and White Border vR Z e E Plug Ins B Filter Packages Brightness and Contrast Audio th Sony Legacy Plug In Broadcast Colors Broadcast Colors Raa E video Ta Sony Add Moise Bump Map pee Channel Blend F io o 1 Transforms R Sony Black and white Chroma Blur Bo f Sony Black Restore 1 Filter Package Media Generators E Transitions Chroma Kever Color Balance Color Corrector Color Corrector Secondary i Sony Border th Sony Brightnes
166. 6 228 Selecting type for media file 226 Animation 246 Arming tracks to record 65 201 ASR See Envelopes Assignable effects 187 188 189 Assigning tracks to 146 188 Automation 157 Routing to busses 188 Volume adjustment 146 188 Volume envelope 163 Attributes Copying from one event to another 175 Audio CD tab 334 Audio channels 174 Audio Device preferences 343 Audio Display preferences 349 Audio editor program 122 123 Opening from Trimmer 136 Opening from Vegas 123 Setting up 123 Audio effects 189 196 Adding via Plug in Chooser dialog 191 Adding via Plug Ins window 192 Assignable effects 187 188 Automation 159 Bypassing plug ins 194 Creating a plug in chain 191 Plug Ins window 28 Rearranging chain order 193 Removing plug ins from chain 194 Audio preferences 342 Advanced control settings 343 Playback buffering slider 344 Audio property settings 333 Audio proxy files 371 Audio tab 333 Audio video alignment problems 109 Auto crossfades converting to transitions 268 Automating Mixer controls 188 Surround panning 218 221 Automation Assignable effects automation 157 Bus automation 158 Composite level automation 161 Editing envelopes 163 Hiding envelopes 165 Latch mode 167 Modes 167 Motion blur automation 162 Mute automation 156 Recording 167 Removing envelopes 165 Showing or hiding controls 155 Touch mode 167 Track automation 155 Track effe
167. 7 x Preset x Source Alpha E Be S a al E fi YU lt ZD Shadow E BIurL E 1 Intensikyi o Color Ce l E Position ali a RG Cropped video Yi width Height Orientation i Angle l piatan E Rotation Angle Position 17 2D Shadow 2D Glow lS lls IB AE H L 00 00 00 00 4 To animate the shadow click in the 2D Shadow row of the Keyframe Controller to set the cursor to a later time and adjust the shadow settings 2D Glow Glow is a bright haze surrounding an overlay In general light colors are used for glow effects but you can emphasize bright text on complex backgrounds by using a very small black glow with little or no feathering and 100 intensity 1 Select the 2D Glow row in the keyframe controller When the 2D Glow row is selected glow controls are displayed in the Track Motion dialog Select the 2D Glow check box to apply the glow so you can see the results of your shadow in the Video Preview window or clear the check box to bypass the glow O00 929 Position 2D Shadow 17 2D Glow ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 gt A A 288 2 Use the 2D Glow controls on the left side of the window to set the color and appearance of the glow Blur type a number in the box or click the button to display a slider you can use to soften the edge of the glow effect Set to 0 for a hard edge or increase the setting to feather the edge of the glow e Intensity ty
168. 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort Codec An acronym for COmpressor DECompressor A codec is an computer algorithm that is used to compress video and audio data shrinking file sizes and data rates Compositing Compositing is the term used to describe the way separate video sources are mixed together Overlay titles are composited onto a background video sequence Crossfade Mixing two pieces of overlapping audio or video by fading one out as the other fades in Cutoff frequency The cutoff frequency of a filter is the frequency at which the filter changes its response For example in a low pass filter frequencies greater than the cutoff frequency are attenuated while frequencies less than the cutoff frequency are not affected DC Offset DC Offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current causes the audio signal to alternate around a point above or below the normal infinity dB center line in the sound file To see if you have a DC offset present you can zoom all the way into a sound file and see if it appears to be floating over the center line Decibel dB A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equa
169. Adapter drop down list choose the device where your preview monitor is connected You can click the Identify Displays button to determine which display corresponds to each setting in the drop down list A number will be displayed on each monitor ss ee Note If the monitor number is displayed in red the graphics card does not support 3D acceleration or acceleration has been turned off In Windows you can go to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display gt Settings gt Advanced gt Troubleshoot to turn on acceleration if your adapter supports it SSS ss CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 e 341 5 From the Display Mode drop down list choose the frame size and refresh rate you want to use for the secondary display Setting Description Use current settings Video is displayed using the monitor s resolution and refresh rate specified in the Windows Display Properties control panel Automatic size settings The software will attempt to choose the optimum resolution and refresh rate This setting overrides the Windows Display Properties setting as long as the secondary display window is active Use custom settings You can choose the resolution and refresh rate you want to use This setting overrides the Windows Display Properties setting as long as the secondary display window is active 6 Select the Scale output to fit display check box if you want the video preview to fill the display 7 Select the Apply deinterlace
170. Applying a post edit ripple automatically 000 ees 111 SNOIN Te asics 6 heehee tines Genes Gao Sind Gite Viet Se a he ee ah eh ae O 112 Crosslading CVEMtS ious Vine shee va ee ee NO RUA EE ERS 112 Using automatic crossfades tee eee eh Chet is es dads eee ded eta oe aes 112 Manually setting a crossfade 2 ccc eee eee eee eee 113 Changing crosstade CuIVeS K N TR T Ka wee ZR RR RE AT E eed R A E RARE TRR r 113 Siding a ClOSSIAOG 6 N Sew e a ZAR dale NAA E Bale an cha EE RTE 113 a eR undo le TOC arre bss ied aio nth Sees NOG Ao doe eS pen we ae eee PON ee 114 9 Tas deiae e E E E E E E E E E A E E 114 USING e e THT E a E E E NE 115 Clearing the edit ael 115 Adding project markers and regions e 115 VV OFKIING AWAN TIIARKONS reesi medea hieran ei Sake Rui Sue a e aE TENi EE ap 116 Working With TEGIONS TTT 117 Working with command markers e e donb baddeedtadiedstaeawereeeeeees os 119 Working with CD layout markers lt e cee eee eee eee eens 122 Working with the marker tool 0c eee eens 122 Using an external audio editing program eee eee eee eee 122 Setting up an audio editing program lt e e eee eee eee 123 Opening an audio editor from Vegas software 0c cence 123 TABLE OF CONTENTS B Advanced Editing Techniques e e lt e eens 125 SMADDING R osu 22 6 eens siete ie tn are ew ae ee ade ae eee Ea ak eel ee 125 TUFHING snapping on an Ol sss sae
171. Choose the location for saving prerendered preview files in the Prerendered files folder box For more information see Prerendering video on page 289 e Select the Start all new projects with these settings check box to always use these settings for new projects Deinterlace method Blend Fields Prerendered Files Folder Ci Documents and Settings spfeiffer Application Datal Sony vega Free storage space in selected Folder 24 303 2 Megabytes Start all new projects with these settings USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 nS LCT Modifying media file properties Vegas software tries to automatically detect the properties of your media files In most cases these properties do not need to be modified but there are times when you may need manual control over some of these attributes depending on the type of file and your specific hardware configuration 1 Right click a file in the Project Media window or an event on the timeline and from the shortcut menu choose Properties 2 Modify the parameters on the Media tab as needed See Setting C cise general media properties on page 239 and Setting custom stream properties on page 240 Video Event Media File name CH Media ihorsed avi 3 Click OK ee nanet J Timecode Setting general media properties ae eta Cec The following general properties appear in the top of the Media tab Stream properties e The File name box displays the file name cannot be edited T KL 8
172. Clipboard contents Events after cut Events after cut in post edit ripple mode 00 00 13 23 00 00 24 2393 L Pasting events Once information is copied to the clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items Items are always pasted from the cursor s position along the timeline When post edit ripple mode is enabled material is pushed down the track to make room for pasted material The exact behavior of the ripple depends on what is being pasted and the type of ripple edit you chose to perform If one or more events are pasted only those tracks where pasted material appears are ripple edited a Tip You can apply a ripple edit after pasting For more information see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 _ nnnennrrrE 1 Move the cursor to the desired location on the timeline 2 Click either the track number or within the track where you want to paste the event This track is the focus track there can be only one focus track at a time r 4 Note If you are pasting multiple events from different tracks new tracks are automatically created as needed Te ae CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 102 j 3 Click the Paste button Clipboard events are pasted at the cursor position on the track Existing track events can be overlapped with newly pasted information Using paste repeat Use paste repeat to specify how many times clipboard events are pasted at th
173. Color Curves Convolution Keri Cankia EE er am A Kn Merv Bright Kie Brighter More Contrast jedia Media Manager Transitions i ideo FX Media Generators Transitions Z INTRODUCTION 28 Media Generators window Alt 9 The Media Generators window contains the different media generators provided Media generators make it easy to create events containing text credit rolls test patterns color gradients and solid color backgrounds You can drag a media generator to the timeline to create a new generated media event For more information see Using generated media on page 247 a Checkerboard a Color Gradient gt Credit Roll SE Moise Texture Solid Color Test Pattern Text Legacy Plug In Te Legacy Plug In wic Preset Puffy Clouds Media m Media Manager Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 1 TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Blood Cells Transitions Video Fx Camouflage Media Generators This window organizes all of the plug ins available including video and audio effects media generators and transitions The plug ins which are organized in a folder structure can be dragged into the project For more information see Using audio effects on page 189 or Using video effects on page 241 INTRODUCTION Plug In Manager B Audio G all L Third Party Automatable Track Optimized F G 5 1 Fx L FX Pac
174. Ctrl Tab window if not docked Project Media show hide Alt 5 Previous window Shift F6 or Ctrl Shift Tab window if not docked Edit Details show hide Alt 6 Toggle focus between track Tab window if not docked list and timeline and bus track list and timeline if bus tracks are visible Transitions show hide Alt 7 Show hide audio bus tracks B window if not docked available only in the full version of Vegas software Video FX show hide Alt 8 Show hide video bus track Ctrl Shift B window if not docked available only in the full version of Vegas software INTRODUCTION 32 pS Playback recording and preview commands Description Start stop playback Play from start Stop playback Looped playback mode Play pause Record Arm track for record Arm for record and set recording path Play back from any window Ctrl Spacebar or Fi2 Edit commands Description Undo Redo Cut selection Copy selection Paste Paste repeat Paste insert Keys Spacebar Shift Spacebar or Shift F 12 Esc Qor Ctrl Shift L Enter or Ctrl Fi2 Ctrl R Ctrl Alt R Ctrl Alt Shift R Keys Ctrl Z or Alt Backspace Ctrl Shift Z or Ctrl Y Ctrl X or Shift Delete Ctrl C or Ctrl Insert Ctrl V or Shift Insert Ctrl B Ctrl Shift V Cursor placement commands Description Go to beginning of selection or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view if no selection Go to beginning of project Go to end of pr
175. EDITING TECHNIQUES 106 _____ Splitting all events at the cursor All events are split at the cursor s position unless an event is locked The split occurs across all tracks if no events are selected Events before splitting Events after splitting DU DWZ129 Splitting selected events Only the selected events are split at the cursor s position Events before splitting Events after splitting Splitting a time selection Unless locked all events within the time selection are split at the starting and ending points of the time range meaning that two splits are made The split occurs across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting iz 00 00 24 29 ea Ll a F BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 107 Splitting a time selection across selected events Only selected events within the time selection are split at the starting and ending points of the time range Events before splitting Events after splitting O0 00 24 29 Slipping and sliding events To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to adjust the media that is played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the
176. ENT Changing take names PETE TE ill ETE ETT Changing the name of a take does not affect the source media file in Without take name With take name any way Typically you may want to change an event s name after recording multiple takes into a track or event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 2006 1 Select the take to be renamed For more information see Selecting takes on page 130 2 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Properties dialog opens 4 Type the new name in the Active take name box 5 Click OK to set the new take name CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 132 Using the Trimmer window The Trimmer allows you to work with and edit one media file at a time The entire file is opened into the Trimmer in contrast to events on the timeline that may only contain a portion of the actual source file The main function of the Trimmer window is to allow you to trim a media file and place portions of it on a track You can also add regions and markers to a file preview the media file or open it in an external audio editing program Clear Trimmer Remove Current Media From History Trimmer History Trimmer Sort Trimmer Save Markers Regions history History Open in Audio Editor x City Pan avi C Media flesYegas_Projects S ample Pre lt n 2 N iy i Select Parent Media P 1 S Marker Playhead TE Create s
177. EesHs______8__ _ Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format Some encoders require a specific cutoff frequency and rolloff while other encoders require that no filter be applied before encoding sA WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 a 21 1 5 Click OK The track list and Mixer window switch to 5 1 surround mode The Master bus becomes the Surround Master bus which contains faders for each of the six surround channels Surround panners appear on tracks and mixer controls Tracks routed to mixer controls busses or assignable effects do not have surround panners panning for these tracks takes place on the mixer control Track list in 5 1 surround mode Mixer in 5 1 surround mode BY main video SU Rl ok G CO 1 Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit ZK fe g4 Dim Output 3g Insert FX 2 Insert Bus Level 100 0 0 il T 4 gt G Surround Master LK Bus Bus B L PHO Elk QO 1 Eee 7 Sl a7 IT a Front Rear Eq vs vol 0 0 de rill gt i Surround Inf InF ia Bus 4 Inf l x panner on Sx El G Bt 23 Lel lt Lp Track routed co 21 vol 0 0 dB Ill LFE 59 l Lazi Bus A Inf to LFE 33 33 al 7394 7334 A eS Track routed 45 45 Vol 0 0 dB LI S ine 54 to Bus L L Bus 4 0 0 dB 57 4 LI Lez a Front L R Rear L R Center LFE Surround panners Routing to hardw
178. Forge to perform permanent edits to the media file After you make the necessary changes and save the file in the audio editor the event is automatically updated Make sure that the media file s name and location remain the same For more information see Using an external audio editing program on page 122 To open the audio editor from the Trimmer click the Open in Audio Editor button Creating a subclip TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 Create a selection in the Trimmer window 2 Click the Create Subclip button K The Create Subclip dialog is displayed a Tip You can also right click an event in the timeline and choose Create Subclip from the shortcut menu T 3 In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the subclip in the Project Media window For more information see Using the Project Media window on page 47 By default the file name is used with a subclip number appended ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 NNa 4 Select the Reverse check box if you want the subclip to be played backward when you add it to your project 5 Click OK to create the subclip You can then create events from subclip via the Project Media window Selecting a subclip in its parent media TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software iP Right click a subclip in the Project Media window and choose Open i
179. G he v GK Restore Yoli 0 0086 _I Track Height pene T i You can also use several different keyboard shortcuts to change all track heights at once e Press Td or 4 to change the height of all tracks in your project at once e Press to minimize all tracks Press the key again to restore the tracks to their previous height e Press to make all tracks the default height Resizing a track You can resize a track by dragging its bottom or right border Place the mouse pointer at the bottom of the track The cursor turns into an up down arrow Drag up or down and release the mouse to set the desired track size You can resize the width of the track list in a similar way R Lead Gtr G dev Lead ctr G het Vol 00d Vol 00d lt I d Pan Center Ill Pan Center Ill t F Drag to change track height or to change track list width CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 144 r Using the track list Each track in your project has its own controls faders and sliders that are contained in the track list on the left side of the track You can work with these controls to affect the events on the track The controls in the track list can function as trim controls or automation controls for track volume panning assignable effects send and bus send levels Adjusting the trim control affects the level of the entire track When a track does not use envelopes or when the trac
180. INTRODUCTION Select previous take Convert cut to transition Convert transition to cut not numeric keypad Ctrl Shift Ctrl Shift or Ctrl Shift 5 Shift T Numeric Keypad Numeric Keypad Numeric Keypad Ctrl Numeric Keypad CHP 1 arno E T Track commands Description Keys Description Keys New audio track Ctrl Q Group selected events G Enable disable snapping F8 Ignore event grouping Ctrl Shift U Snap to markers Shift F8 Select all events in group Shift G Auto ripple mode Ctrl L Remove track volume envelope Shift V Normal edit tool Ctrl D Remove track panning envelope Shift P Previous tool Shift D Show hide envelopes Ctrl Shift E Change the track that has focus Alt Shift Up Down Adjust envelope point left right by one pixel Select envelope point Arrow and hold the mouse button press 4 or 6 on the numeric keypad Mute selected tracks and remove other Shift Z Make normal envelope point or segment Ctrl Alt drag tracks from mute group adjustments without changing envelope envelope point or points timeline positions segment Solo selected track and remove other Shift X Insert region R tracks from solo group Change audio track panning or video track Shift Left Right Arrow Insert command marker C fade to color setting when focus is on track list Bypass snapping Shift drag Insert audio CD track index Shift N Post edit ripple affected tracks bus tracks Ctrl F Inse
181. If you re prompted to log on type your username and password SE oS Creating file mappings automatically 1 Right click the icon in your system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the Sony Vegas Network Render Service window 2 Select the File Mappings tab The tab displays a list of local folders and their universal paths 3 From the Action menu choose Auto Fill File Mappings Shared folders on the local machine are added to the list as universal paths However no mappings will be added in the following circumstances e If all shared folders are already listed in the table e If the computer does not have any shared folders e If your user account does not allow you to create or modify folder sharing Removing file mappings 1 Right click the icon in your system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the Sony Vegas Network Render Service window 2 Select the File Mappings tab The tab displays a list of local folders and their universal paths 3 Right click a mapping and choose Delete File Mapping from the shortcut menu to delete it Click a blank row in the table Choose Delete All File Mappings to delete all file mappings Setting render service options 1 Right click the icon in your system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the Sony Vegas Network Render Service window 2 Select the Options tab Item Description Enable rendering Select this check box if you want the local comp
182. Kaw Hae eee eS ee een 43 Startingsa NeW PlO CCl aa Zo E 79 eae ae Salk eee eae eRe Wenn eee owe he BE ee ee aed 43 Setting video properties based ona media hle 0 00 cee eee eee eee eens 44 Saving a eal shou ha eee a Ma a oh ote eae aes 45 Renaming a project using Save AS 200 c cece eee eee eee eee eee 45 SetinG media TH E K aR E RTE a Rew abe ee aE dt ee eae 45 SEICCUING Medid e arose ne da Gee eee Ote eee buen E tout addons 46 Previewing a media file 020 eee eee eee eee e eae eeeeeeees 47 Using the Project Media window 000 c cece cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 47 IMDOMING MEd Ssed cisedecdentdtdiceiseias i tasdedanetesteedwadiidedeeiteitedobhs 53 Adding media to the timeline 0 cc eee eens 56 Project references in rendered media files 0 00000 cc es 58 WOrKino With CV SIS asco hous een ese diese decal chsh ae ha ak ae at a th Wotan allot let 60 Understanding files and events 000 cece eee ee eee eens 60 Moving events along the timeline 0 ccc eee eens 60 WOKING WWITRITRACKS deci datratiuia ha el hb ahh ig ae ore ak a ee ee 62 Using the RACK VIEW rearea Fist doses ent capes atin an hin wl eee rece eae acme rece oe ata dt wig eee a ere ea 62 BST ken e 0 S ip te tae aps eee ecole eaten a EP eh OA Ne SE Nt cena at acetate i ho acs 64 NESIN Drole Smece sw grach aaah aed oe aerate bia ae ee Be 66 Adding a project to the Vegas timeline 0 000 ees 66 Playin
183. Last Next The cursor position is marked by a flashing line on the controller This position can also be automatically updated on the timeline with the Video Preview window also updating in real time to reflect changes Click the Sync Cursor button Ia on the keyframe controller to sync the keyframe cursor with the timeline cursor CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 274 Adding keyframes Every effect has a starting keyframe at the beginning left side of the keyframe controller This sets the initial parameters for the effect In order to animate the effect you must add another keyframe to the effect and change some of the parameters When you first add a new keyframe it has the same settings for the transition effect pan crop etc as the first keyframe You can then modify the settings of the new keyframe to create the animation from the first keyframe settings to the second 1 Click the keyframe controller timeline to move the cursor where you want to add a keyframe The current position is marked by a blinking cursor 2 Click the Create Keyframe button 3 Modify the settings in the window for the new keyframe as desired ey Tip You can also add a new keyframe by positioning the cursor in the keyframe controller and changing any parameters in the window A keyframe is added with the new settings at the cursor position eS Deleting keyframes 1 Select a keyframe in the keyf
184. Luminance 264 monitoring 296 Mackie Control Universal 347 Main window 21 Make compositing child 64 249 258 259 Make Movie wizard 307 Marker bar 22 Markers CD layout markers 122 Command markers 119 Deleting 117 Inserting 116 media adding 135 media viewing 136 Moving 116 Navigating 116 Renaming 116 Ripple editing 111 Snapping 125 Markers and regions 115 122 Snapping events to 125 Masks 257 265 B zier 225 260 Fine tuning 262 Image 258 Mask generator 263 Video 259 Match media settings 44 238 Media importing 53 Media bin adding recorded files automatically 52 Media bins 51 adding media 52 creating 51 deleting media 52 searching 52 Media files adding from Media Manager 89 Auto preview setting 47 Inserting 56 MXE 57 Previewing 47 project references in 58 Properties 239 resolving offline 89 searching 84 tagging 77 tagging loops and samples 81 Media generator Adding 247 Duplicating 248 AHT window 28 Media generators 247 248 Media libraries tagging files 77 Media library adding media files 75 backing up 83 creating new 73 opening 74 removing media files 77 Media Manager 30 73 adding custom columns 91 adding media from 89 automatically hiding Search pane 90 customizing view 90 media relationships 88 moving columns 90 Moving the Search pane 90 options 93 resizing columns 90 resolving offline media 89 Search
185. Macintosh Interchange File Format computers File MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg MPEGs files compressed using a lossy audio video compression method can be used with Vegas software MPEG Layer 3 mp3 Highly compressed audio file Ogg Vorbis Ogg A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology Photoshop psd Adobe Photoshop proprietary image format flattened Portable Network Graphic png True color or indexed color lossy or lossless Internet image format QuickTime mov qt QuickTime standard audio video format Perfect Clarity Audio pca A proprietary lossless audio compression format from Sony Media Software Shockwave Flash SWf Multimedia file format developed by Macromedia TARGA tga True color lossless image format that supports alpha channel transparency TIFF tif Tagged Image File Format a common bitmap format You must have QuickTime installed to use TIFF files in Vegas software Vegas project file veg File used for organizing media within a Vegas project Available only in the full version of Vegas software Vegas Movie Studio project vf File used for organizing media within a Vegas Movie Studio or Vegas file Movie Studio Platinum project Video for Windows avi Standard audio video format used on Microsoft Windows based computers Wave 64 w64 Sony Media Software proprietary Wave64 audio file that does not have a limited file size unlike Windows WAV files that are limited to 2GB Wave Microso
186. Maintain aspect ratio is is set to Yes To restore the selection area to full frame right click the image and choose Restore from the shortcut menu e To set the selection area to a standard aspect ratio proportion choose a preset from the Preset drop down list e When using photographs or other media that is not the same frame aspect as your video you ll see black bars on the sides or above and below the image To create a crop rectangle that matches the project frame aspect right click the image and choose Match Output Aspect from the shortcut menu The cropping occurs instantly and the results are updated in the Video Preview window Cropping applies to the entire event and can be animated with keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 Bezier masks TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use the Event Pan Crop dialog to create masks using B zier curves For more information see B zier masks on page 260 Rotating Yideo Preview Ex a IR Rest Mko H L You can also rotate the selection area in the Event Pan Crop window If you rotate the entire frame the background behind the video shows through Position size and rotation can all be animated with keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 1 on the event 2 Resize and move the selection area as desired For more
187. Mute button to change the track s mute automation state The button behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the button mutes the entire track e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the button changes state to reflect the envelope setting during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a mute envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the button edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If you click the Mute button during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 167 Volume or pan automation audio only You can change a track s volume or position in the stereo field throughout a project using automation envelopes Adding or removing volume or pan automation 1 Select an audio track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 L 1 B7 3 From the submenu choose Volume or Pan A check mark is displayed for the automation types that are used on the selected track LEE 4 Panning envelopes will use the current panning mode for the Pan slider in the track list For more information see Adjusting stereo panning on page 145 eee 4 If yo
188. Muting allows you to temporarily suspend playback of the bus When a bus is muted the word Muted appears at the bottom of the meter You can mute more than one bus at a time The Mute button can mute the bus or it can adjust mute automation on the bus s bus track To mute the bus click the Automation Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected Click the Mute button to mute the bus and click it again to restore playback To adjust mute automation click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls The Mute button is displayed as S in Automation mode Click to turn mute automation on or click it again to turn mute automation off For more information see Adding or removing mute automation on page 156 Soloing a bus Soloing isolates a bus s playback so that you can focus on a specific output You can solo more than one bus at a time To solo the bus click the Solo button Click the button again to turn off soloing Naming or renaming a bus Every bus in the Mixer window has an editable name 1 Double click the bus name 2 ype a new name U il 3 Press to save the name wae aia oh 3 Panning a bus Like volume the pan slider in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall panning of the track or it can adjust track panning automation settings For more information see Adding or removing volume or pan automation on page 156 Ass
189. N 26 SSS Video Preview window Alt 4 This window displays a project s video during project editing and playback For more information see Previewing and Analyzing Video on page 287 En sda 16 Preview Auto HH S e Default Background Black Background white Background Video appears during project playback or as Show Toolbar the cursor is moved show Status Bar during editing Project 720x480x332 29 970 Preview 180x120x32 29 970p Project Media Alt 5 Simulate Device Aspect Ratio Frame Display 240x160x32 Right click to change Video Preview settings The Project Media window helps you organize the media files you re using in a project The information about these files is displayed in a highly flexible database that can be instantly sorted You can also use the Project Media window to apply effects and plug ins to media files and set the specific properties of these files For more information see Using the Project Media window on page 47 FEBRPSQQ XR bK aE B All Media Name 0 Media Bins 1 Gms 2 000 wav 2 ey 57Owsl O14 3 eh S7Owsl 013 4 eh S7Owsl 012 OOO way 6 eh 57Owsl 014 7 eh S7Owsl 013 a ey S7Owsl 012 O00 avi 10 57Ows 009 5 ey 57Owsl O11 9 ey S7Owsl 011 lt OOO wary OOO wary OOO wary O00 awi O00 awi O00 avi O00 awi Use Count pa S Kek Fe YS SS Kek ESF ES bek Type Wave Sound Wave Sound
190. NG APPENDIX A e 373 In the application you can select the field order of a project by choosing Properties from the File menu and clicking the Video tab The pre configured templates should work for almost everyone e g if you are editing and outputting DV video in the US select the NTSC DV template If you have problems you can manually select a different field order on the Video tab You can also override the project settings and set the field order when you render a video file From the File menu choose Render As Then click the Custom button and choose an option from the Field order drop down list on the Video tab You can also set field order at the level of the media file or event Right click a media file in the Project Media window or an event on the timeline and choose Properties The Field order drop down list appears on the Media tab Interlacing problems only manifest themselves on television monitors Video that is going to be played back on a computer does not need to be interlaced and you can select None progressive scan for the field order Rendered video must be displayed on a television monitor to identify any problems The only way to see interlacing problems is to record print a rendered video file out to tape and play back the tape on a television Problems are most apparent in video that has a lot of motion or that has been modified in some way for example a slow motion effect Some codecs force the correct field order
191. NTING PROJECTS CHP 17 L 317 Se R a Note In order to use network rendering with nested projects the nested project must contain only media from folders that do not require remapping Before nesting your Vegas project update the project so that all media in the project is added from a network folder or a local shared folder that is mapped to the same drive letter on all renderers and the render host Ee T Setting up a rendering computer 1 Install Vegas software as a render only client You can install Vegas software as a render only client on two computers for each Vegas license you purchase However certain file formats such as MPEG 2 AC 3 and MP3 cannot be used on render only clients Start the Vegas Network Render Service application VegSrv60 exe The service must be running and you must be logged into the computer before you can use it for rendering If necessary you can change the TCP port the render service uses to communicate with other renderers a Exit the Vegas Network Render Service application if it is running b Open the NetRenderService config file in a text editor This file is located in the Vegas installation folder c Edit the lt channel ref tcp port 53704 gt tag in the file to reflect the port you want to use d Save the file e Restart the Vegas Network Render Service application Adding renderers to a host 1 CHP 17 Start the Vegas Network Render Service applica
192. Noise Gate ep 5 1 FX Mi Graphic Dynami TS vibrat 27Graphic Dynamics ef vibrato fad FX Packages iy Graphic EQ Hy Wave Hammer 5 1 CBS Multi Band Dynamics ie Multi Tap Delay His Noise Gate Hy Paragraphic EQ iy Parametric EQ Hy Pitch Shift ff Resonant Filter PS R averb hd Simple Delay hd Smooth Enhance Plug In Chooser Track 3 3 Select a plug in and click Add 4 Repeat step three to add as many plug ins as you need to create the desired effect 5 Click OK to close the Plug in Chooser dialog The plug in chain appears just below the title bar in the appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX CHP 10 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 192 r Adding plug ins via the Plug In Manager TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software The Plug In Manager is a dockable window that allows you to view and choose plug ins to be added to a track bus or assignable effects chain 1 If the Plug In Manager is not displayed press 0 2 In the Plug In Manager navigate to the Audio folder and select one of the FX folders Plug In Manager C Plug Ins hd Amplitude Modulation Hie Graphic EQ EHS Audio TS Chorus efi Multi Band Dynan C3 E HS Distortion ik Multi Tap Delay D Sony ity Dither Hy Noise Gate CQ Third Party CBS Flange vah wah HR Paragraphic EQ L Automatable HS Gapper Snipper Hy Parametric EQ wo G i Graphic Dynamics RS Pitch Shift jill S gt 4 U
193. R Project references in rendered media files When your project uses media that was rendered with an embedded project path reference you can easily open the source project in the associated application if you need to edit the media later ACID 5 0 Sound Forge 8 0 and Vegas 6 0 software allow you to save the project path reference when you render files For example imagine that you have an audio file on the Vegas timeline that was rendered from an ACID project In previewing your Vegas project you discover that you d accidentally rendered your ACID project with a critical track muted You could simply right click the event on the Vegas timeline and choose Edit Source Project from the shortcut menu to reopen your ACID project unmute the track and then rerender it The project information in the rendered file is a reference to a project file only If you modify the project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer 080808 cs Tip For more information on saving project path references in rendered files see Rendering a project on page 307 E Editing a referenced project 1 Perform one of the following actions e Right click a media file in the Explorer window e Right click a media file in the Project Media window e Right click an event on the timeline GETTING STARTED CHP 2
194. RNING CDS 360 r 3 Select recording options for your CD recordable drive a Choose a burn mode Burn CDs begins recording audio to your CD immediately e Test first then burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only do not burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD b From the Burn speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to record Max will record using the fastest speed possible with your drive decrease the speed if you have difficulty recording 4 Your movie is recorded to the CD When recording is finished you can select the Save movie file check box to keep the MPEG file that was rendered or you can clear the check box to delete the file 5 Click Finish Creating a multimedia CD From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Multimedia CD from the submenu to render your project and burn it to a data CD The rendered project can be played in any computer with the appropriate player 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Multimedia CD from the submenu The Burn Multimedia CD dialog appears Burn Multimedia CD S Render Format File path E Wideo Final Renders Untitl
195. Recorded Files Folder dialog appears 2 Browse for the location where you want to save recorded files 3 Click OK RECORDING AUDIO CHP 11 a 207 Changing where recorded files are stored when starting to record 1 Press and click the Record button on the transport bar The Project Recorded Files Folder dialog appears E aaas Tip You can also press d R to specify the location for recorded files when starting to record T 2 Browse for the location where you want to save recorded files 3 Click OK Changing where recorded files are stored in the Project Properties dialog 1 From the File menu choose Properties The Project Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Audio tab to display the project s audio properties 3 Click Browse The Recorded Files Folder dialog appears 4 Browse for the location where you want to save recorded files 5 Click OK a 4 Tip You can select Start all new projects with these settings in the Project Properties dialog to store recorded media source files to the same location in every new project Se Monitoring audio levels While you re recording a responsive meter is provided in the track e uac a TSI G he x B T header to monitor the incoming signal level of the selected recording ike Sak yg FS device It is important that you record with the highest signal possible aiaa without clipping A reading of O dB is the maximum for a digital signal Clipping occurs wh
196. S 380 r Editing markers using the Edit Details window TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software The Edit Details window provides a way to adjust the settings for a track or index 1 From the View menu choose Edit Details The Edit Details window displays 2 From the Show drop down list choose Audio CD Track List The track settings display 3 Double click a setting to edit it e In the Position column adjust the track starting position or index position e In the End column adjust the track ending position e In the Length column adjust the track length 6 in the Name column enter the name of the track or index e In the Prot column select the check box to apply copy protection to the track e In the Emph column select the check box to enable a simple noise reduction process that is implemented by a CD player For more information see Emphasis on page 380 e In the ISRC column enter the ISRC number for the track if used Copying a track list from the Edit Details window TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use the Edit Details window to copy your track list and Edit Details td paste it into another application Show ES DIR Gx 1 Click the gray box in the upper left corner of the Edit renee ener nase O0 00 02 66 00 03 LE Details window to select all the cells 2 Press Ctri C to copy the cells 3 Switch to another application
197. S Tip It is best to use images that are the same size as your project s frame size You may also need to change the pixel aspect ratio of an image file to get it to display correctly For more information see Correcting images for DV pixel aspect ratios on page 226 and Modifying media file properties on page 239 x T USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 n LCT Creating video masks You can also use video files to create masks although the process can be more complicated than using an image as a mask The key to any mask is contrast You can increase the difference between the light and dark areas of a video file using video effects plug ins 1 Insert the video that you want to use as a mask into a video track 2 Drag a Black and White plug in from the Video FX window to the event to remove the color For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 242 3 Drag a Brightness and Contrast plug in from the Video FX window to the event 4 Adjust the Brightness and Contrast to create the eee mask Watch the Video Preview window for a real Video Event FX Event 1 time preview of the mask Adjust the effect so that ess and white lprightness and Contrast kliver o fle ole P parts of the video are completely black opaque en x and other parts are completely white transparent 7 This can often mean increasing the contrast while ES L OE sank decreasing the brightness Brightness
198. Select the appropriate option Copy Media Options e Select the Copy all media radio button to copy all media files to the Rony soles ee same location as the Vegas project file e Select the Create trimmed copies of source media radio button to optimize media storage by saving only those portions of media files used in events and discarding unused takes Audio files are saved as Wave format if under 2 GB as Wave64 if over 2 GB and DV video is saved as AVI Non DV video files are copied in full Enter an Extra head and tail seconds value to indicate how much time should be included before and after the trimmed media For example if the project contains a 2 minute media file but the event on the timeline for that file lasts only from 1 00 to 1 20 you could enter 5 seconds in the Extra Head and Tail box to have the media file saved from 0 55 to 1 25 5 seconds added to the head and tail of the event Including this extra material allows space for future edits 7 Click OK The project file is saved and the related media files to the location you specified SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 307 Autosaving a project A backup copy of your project is automatically saved every five minutes If your system crashes you are prompted to open the backup file the next time you start the program Backup files are saved in the location specified in the Temporary files folder box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog F
199. Setting the time display to monitor MIDI timecode ccc eee 332 Working with project properties 0 000 ees 333 NM ICG OWN 46 5 2G a Bit tse Gs eae aaa Wibod wade te ar ara wg we ea tigi cuedead be Fb G 4c he Gee 333 PRUIGHIO 1 enti ete e Wee ee ee Bete ce Le telah aah aia tek at Ded ea Lala eds 333 PRUNE VAD Oe dey ele eae AO en pe We eh hee ee eee ee aud bay ars Wg aa ak oa 334 SMITA Way T oe 2e toes TE E ce tte ene Sten Sud ee ane E EE EEA E E A EA E E E A EE 334 Audio CD TAD ere ho E Se tad ete ens ah Ghat ARRE a echt ee a Oo ta 334 USING Ue eeil eT cave eo eee AS ee i ES ieee ee ee ah We ce 334 Hiding and displaying the toolbar 0 ccc eee eee 334 Reordering toolbar buttons Ain din deeb eek eke ee hose heh ae ae ete the ee Paleo 335 Adding bullons to Ine Toolbar ecesna ennen a dhe dinstaetheew eee ede ees 335 Removing buttons from the toolbar 0 00 eee eens 335 SEUNG DFEIEFENICCS niser R TH E TE aang eae aed ae ae a eee aa Ae 336 Generdl tab scavsevc tere aa ee Ba bela eae TT 336 VIGCO LAD 4 ai as a eed dace ee ewe wae ee Ok A ne CS ea eae Gea ee ae 338 Preview device tab actin T NE E OFS Eee EERE REE wees i ee Aes he ee 339 Prin s L Le T eat ie ie heehee ee ee ne a ee ea eh eh hoe eae Ae 342 PUN OF CANO a9 dia cea paste areas enters 6 8 eet fede Sane Sd aaa ap eG ene arto ocho anes gage edo dea de aoe p Saat aa 342 A dio Device taD 205 bn a ss asians wie ace Se ghee ee ES BAG eee ae RNa Gea Rae Ble
200. T Framework 1 1 SP1 required only for the full version of Vegas software and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum included on CD ROM e Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 1 or later included on CD ROM Please note Some features may require product registration i LINK is a registered trademark of Sony Electronics used only to designate that a product contains an IEEE 1394 connector All products with an IEEE 1394 connector may not communicate with each other Technical support The Web site at http mediasoftware sonypicutres com support default asp has technical support reference information program updates tips and tricks user forums and a knowledge base CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 18 Installing Vegas software 1 Insert the CD ROM The setup screen appears if CD ROM AutoPlay is enabled If CD ROM AutoPlay is not enabled click the aasan button and choose Run In the Run window that appears type the CD ROM drive s letter and add setup exe Click OK to start the installation 2 Click Install The installation process begins 3 Follow the screen prompts and enter the necessary information when required 4 At the last screen prompt click Finish to conclude the installation mnn Note Windows Installer is used for all versions of Windows Windows Installer is installed and then you are asked to restart your system Using this manual This manual is provided to assist users of Vegas Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Stud
201. The Audio Plug In window displays with your selected plug in as the first in the new plug in chain 3 Adjust the settings for the plug in to create the desired effect and click the Close button E in the upper right corner to close the window The new assignable effect control appears in the Mixer window ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 10 L 191 Adding plug ins to a plug in chain There are two ways to add plug ins to a chain via the Plug In Chooser dialog and via the Audio Plug In window Adding plug ins via the Plug In Chooser dialog You can access the Plug In Chooser dialog from the track bus or assignable effects chain to which you are adding the plug in 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 3 GS amp Audio Plug In vol 1 7 08 KET 7 Pan Center Track Fe 2 Click the Plug In Chain button on the window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears Plug ins already in the chain appear at the top of the dialog Plug ins already contained in ec aaas STER TS Compressor 0 ag Audio ih Amplitude Modulation BS sound Forge Pan 3 all CBS chorus BS Sound Forge Volume L Sony BS Distortion Time Stretch 0 Third Party RS Dither BS Track Compressor Automatable hd Pange ah wah Pi Track EO 0 Track Optimized Fx Hy Gapper Snipper Pi Track
202. Z Working with track envelopes Envelopes represent volume audio panning opacity and fade to color automation settings in the timeline Track Type Envelope type Description Audio Volume Controls track volume Audio Bus send volume Controls track level sent to bus Available only in the full version of Vegas software Audio Assignable effects send volume Controls track level sent to assignable effects control Available only in the full version of Vegas software Audio Pan Controls the position of a track in the stereo field pan Video Composite level Controls track opacity transparency Video Fade to color Controls fading of a track to color Designate a top and bottom color by right clicking the track choosing Fade Colors from the shortcut menu and choosing Top or Bottom from the submenu Video bus Motion blur Adds a motion dependent blur to each frame to smooth computer generated animation Available only in the full version of Vegas software Video bus Video supersampling Calculates intermediate frames between the project frame rate to create smooth motion blurring Available only in the full version of Vegas software Adding envelope points Color Blue Lilac Green Red Blue Red Lilac Rust Once you add an envelope to a track you may add points to it These points are used to edit the envelope line in order to automate the control 1 Place the mouse pointer on the envelope s line Sgro we Sy 8
203. a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time NN 4 Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit If an image file exists when you open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image SS 7 Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before burning 8 Select the Eject when done check box if you want the CD to eject automatically when burning has completed 9 Click OK to start burning BURNING CDS CHP 19 L SBF Burning video CDs Video CDs can be played in many home DVD players and on computers with a CD ROM drive and VCD player software 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Video CD from the submenu The Burn Video CD dialog is displayed Burn Video CD File path E Wideo Final Renders Untitled mpg Format MainConcept MPEG 1 mpq Template VCD NTSC Description Audio 224 Kbps 44 100 Hz Layer 2 Video 29 97 fps 352x240 Use this setting to create an NTSC YCD compliant MPEG 1 File Render loop region only Estimated size 1 47MB C Stretch video to fill output frame Free space 18 55GB Fast video resizing O Use an existing file Burn mode Burn CDs C Test first then burn CDs Test on
204. a file or the selected media files and choose Add as CD Track from the shortcut menu The files are added to a new track and the audio CD tracks are marked on the CD layout bar The name of the media file is used to name each track If necessary you can edit the information for the new audio CD tracks using the markers on the CD layout bar or using the Edit Details window For more information see Working with tracks and indices on page 355 Right click files in the Project Media window to add them as CD tracks to a audio CD layout project Open in Trimmer 2aBBaSBQ gt ra All Media Perdido Select Timeline Events Media Bins H Take Thi Explore Containing Folder A Don t Ge A Sophisti E Satin De Remove From project Delete capiro Remove From project and delete file s Joome Search Media Bins Imaget El Sony CT Rename El Sony CT Sony Oc El Sony Cc El Sony Cc Replace Recapture All Offline Media A Audio 160 Transitions Explorer Tri Properties CHP 19 BURNING CDS 384 r Marking tracks in an existing project Once you have laid out your audio project with the appropriate pauses you can mark tracks and indices either automatically or manually ee Note In DAO CD burning Vegas software burns from the beginning of the timeline to the last track marker regardless of the location of the first track marker Material before the first marker is included as a hidden track on the di
205. a single unit when moved or otherwise edited You can ungroup the events to move them independently For more information see Clearing a group on page 180 E OOOO 00 ul E Z MEY Video S Oh ke O Two events that contain the video top Eae AE Gu h t and audio bottom streams from a single multimedia video file each event is E IS a Zuuc a s r 4 O yol SiE TE inserted on a separate track Fan Center LI Automatically crossfading inserted events When inserting multiple events across time the events both video and audio may be set to automatically crossfade Two options must be enabled in order to create crossfades automatically when adding multiple events First verify that a check mark appears next to Automatic Crossfades in the Options menu Second from the Options menu choose Preferences and on the Editing tab select Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added For more information see Using automatic crossfades on page 112 Working with MXF files TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software The full version of Vegas software includes a full resolution MXF reader for Sony XDCAM that allows you to use full resolution MXF files on the timeline You can use MXF files just like any other supported media type We recommend the following workflow for efficient editing 1 Copy the files from the XDCAM Professional Disc to your local hard drive
206. aVv wma WMV An audio file format developed by Apple Available only in the full version of Vegas software Encoded Dolby Digital surround sound format This option creates six mono files WAV or AIFF that your authoring application can use to create DVD Video or 5 1 channel music projects Available only in the full version of Vegas software Some versions of Vegas software also support MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation through the use of MainConcept MPEG technology see notes following table Compressed audio format You may render up to 20 mp3 files without registering the optional plug in A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology Apple QuickTime multimedia format The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file A proprietary format from Sony Media Software that is compressed and completely lossless see notes following table A Sony Media Software proprietary format that allows wave files that are practically unrestricted by file size see notes following table The standard video file format used on Microsoft Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file The standard audio file format used on Microsoft Windows based computers Standard audio format used with Scott Studios systems Available only in the full version of Vegas software The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for strea
207. ace during playback For more information see Using Automation on page 155 Applying non real time event effects Non real time event effects are a different method of applying audio effects In all other cases event editing is nondestructive meaning that edits and effects are applied to events in real time and not to the source media files which remain unaltered There may be times however when you want to create a permanent file using an effect or effects This may be useful in a very complicated project or when a slower computer cannot process the effects quickly enough for a real time preview By applying non real time event effects you can make a new copy of a media file with the effects applied to it This new media file is saved and added to the project as a take For more information see Working with takes on page 130 1 Select an audio event 2 From the Tools menu choose Audio and choose Apply Non Real Time Event FX from the submenu 3 In the Plug In Chooser dialog add plug ins to create a plug in chain For more information see Adding plug ins via the Plug In Manager on page 192 4 Click OK 5 In the Take window adjust the settings for the plug in s to create the desired effect 6 Preview the effect by clicking the Preview button LS in the Non Real Time Event FX window Take Music Recording 8 amp gt A ena Preview Preview IL v wt 7 Click OK 8 In the Take dialog cl
208. aeRO ea eee a eae be 248 Understanding the parent child track relationship 00 0c ee ee eee eee eee eens 248 Selecting compositing modes deus scented sear nrnna nanenane 249 Using a 2 to 1 transform plug in to customize compositing 2 cece eee eee eee 252 SD COMPOSING casatu tee ee AL te R oe one RN ete el ee OW ak Na GRAS 252 Singletrack SU vae e 4464 6 duu aneen ee a be ba See eee esa os oad ae eed ae 253 Composited group 3D MOtION de Mavi ta bee ea a ce eed he bade wes 255 Changing CditinG ODIONS 2 20044 52 dau deyecdacdoredateasees de a thee eee eee 256 Examples of various 3D compositing Scenarios e cette eee 256 GF SUIT ANAS ICS erein Sega Sot Sarat ces eras ely sina dn age cee Scr Rok wr a er De 257 Creating H Tnne e Masks 26642546005 bteo td aaa a sh eae eee eae ee eee eee es 258 CrealinG Ke ea oseere rannan ee bale eS ye eee eee aes Bee Bee eee neee es 259 BEZIER MaSK sewer heed ae eee ee E eet eae webs shee atts Cae eee ete ee 260 FING CUMING ea sirri pee Ree le eh ee Mae eh eet oh Oi a AEA E i Ae 262 Using the Mask Generator 0000 c cc eee eee ee ee eee een eennee 263 Chroma Keying 22s 6 eco omaet ots ates eee bce bdet wus cape estieeetant eta a D 264 Understanding basic transitions 00 0c cee eee eens 267 CS a tats EE E tn E see tse aso a te gs Stace re eed een ae eee AE A aes 267 OSS ASS as A eh i ei ate E a a av haw ees os ance whe gi telesales eo as 267 Using transition ef
209. ain to restore the track s lt a lt lt lt lt amp lt lt lt Tip Press and click the Mute button to mute only the selected track and restore any other muted tracks If the selected track is already muted press and click the Mute button to restore all tracks pms When you have multiple levels of parent and child tracks clicking the Mute Ne SS E lt button on a parent track mutes the parent track and its compositing children eS Chlew 50 0 ii Ea t rr In the sample track list muting track 1 will mute tracks 1 through 6 Muting Sa we so 2 track 4 will mute tracks 4 through 6 R aty S BB x Lat ES TL 4 Muting all audio or video tracks SH Rose i Z m ti You may mute either all audio or all video tracks in a project From the Options R S s N menu choose Mute All Audio or Mute All Video sahara i a SER znry i to 7 OL ee Level 100 0 oh it F CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 180 r Soloing a track The Solo button 1 in the track list isolates a track s events for playback This allows you to focus on a track s contents without the distraction of other tracks You can solo more than one track at a time To solo a track click the Solo button on that track To solo several tracks select the tracks and click the Solo button on any of the selected tracks Click the Solo button again to restore the track s for playback
210. al event H_Y____ Event with pitch shift of 12 or one octave speeds up Event with pitch shift of 12 or one octave slows down Editing from the timeline 1 Select an event 2 Use the and keys on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to adjust pitch Key Result Raise pitch one semitone Ctrl Raise pitch one cent Shift Raise pitch one octave Ctr Shift Reset pitch z Lower pitch one semitone Ctrl Lower pitch one cent Shift Lower pitch one octave Ctr Shift Reset pitch If the Active Take Information option is selected on the View menu the event s pitch shift is displayed in the bottom left corner of the event If the media has a known root note the new root is displayed in parentheses N F Repeat strum riff 1 yt CE og 118 3 120 001 CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 128 yz Editing in the Event Properties dialog 1 Right click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu 2 On the Audio Event tab choose a setting from the Method drop down list to specify how you want to pitch shift the event or choose None if you want to preserve the event pitch Properties Pl Properties ag Audio Event Media Audio Event Media Active Lake name 01 Funk Groove 03 Active Lake name Time stretch f pitch shift Time stretch f pitch shift Original length Original tempo New length New tempo Pitch chang
211. all increments To move an event more precisely click the event and press 4 or 6 on the numeric keypad to nudge it by small increments The amount of movement caused by each nudge is determined by how far the timeline is zoomed in or out You can also click the event and press 1 or 3 on the numeric keypad to nudge the event by frames Moving grouped events Groups allow you to move multiple events within their tracks as a single unit While you can create your own groups as needed groups are automatically created for you when video files with associated audio e g AVI are added to a project When you add these video files the audio portion of the video file is inserted into the timeline as a separate audio event The video and audio events are grouped and can be moved as a single unit within their respective tracks To move grouped events drag any event in the group to a new position For more information see Grouping events on page 179 CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 2 Working with tracks A project consists of multiple audio and video tracks The track view is the timeline in which all events appear The track list provides information about the track and contains controls that affect all events in the track Using the track view Numerous options are provided for viewing and navigating in track view Scrolling and zooming There are several ways to scroll and zoom in the track view e Click the scroll bar arrows or drag the scroll
212. ally Click Maximize to zoom in vertically so a bus track fills the lower portion of the timeline After minimizing or maximizing a bus track click either button again to return a bus track to its previous height Press Ctrl Shift 4 when the bus track area has focus to resize all bus tracks at once CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1352 gt Using video bus tracks TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software From the View menu choose Video Bus Track to toggle the display of the video bus track at the bottom of the track view A single bus track exists as a timeline representation of the main video output You can use bus tracks to animate video output effects using keyframes add motion blur envelopes or video supersampling envelopes Adding keyframes to the video bus track Adding keyframes to the video bus track is just like working with any other video track Use video bus track keyframes to animate video output effects For information on adding keyframes see Using keyframe animation on page 273 Adding envelopes to the video bus track You can add fade to color motion blur amount and video supersampling envelopes to the video bus track to affect your video output For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 163 Adding effects to video bus tracks Click the Video Output FX button in the bus track header to add or edit video output effects If there are n
213. ame value Make Square Aspect sets selection box to a square aspect Changing editing options Use the toolbar at the top of the Track Motion window to change your editing options Icon Command Description Enable Rotation Select this button if you want to be able to rotate or spin the video When the button is not selected video is locked so you can move it horizontally or vertically but the track cannot be rotated w Enable Snapping to Grid Select this button if you want your editing to snap to the grid EZ Edit in Object Space Select this button if you want to edit in the object s space rather than the camera s space For example if a track is rotated its X axis may not correspond to the X axis of the of the Video Preview window Selecting the Edit in Object Space button in conjunction with the Prevent Movement buttons allows you to move the object along its own X and Y axes D Prevent Movement X Select this button if you want to prevent horizontal movement of the track at Prevent Movement Y Select this button if you want to prevent vertical movement of the track S Lock Aspect Ratio Select this button if you want the selection box to retain its aspect ratio during resizing o When the button is not selected the height and width can be resized independently S Scale About Center Select this button if you want the selection box to retain its center point when you resize the box by dragging its edges When
214. amp and choosing a Prerendered files folder in the Project Properties dialog Ideally this folder should be on a different physical drive from where Windows is installed You can delete prerendered preview files from your hard disk by choosing Clean Up Prerendered Video from the Tools menu PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 a 291 ee CU Note Each prerendered section will consist of no more than 10 seconds approximately 40 megabytes Because selective prerendering creates multiple files minor editing on the timeline will not invalidate all of your prerendered video only the sections you modify will need to be rerendered E E _ lt o X S Building dynamic RAM previews Video frames are automatically dropped when previewing if the computer can t keep up with processing demands This means that you may not be seeing all video frames as you preview your project If you prefer not to prerender your project there is another option for improving previews of selected portions of a project A portion of your RAM is dedicated to cache video frames that Vegas software cannot render in real time A cache of 16 MB is automatically maintained for dynamic RAM previews To change the cache amount choose Preferences from the Options menu and change the Dynamic RAM Preview Max value on the Video tab a Note Although not all frames appear in previews of a project all frames are included when you rende
215. ampling video on page 232 Using the Envelope Edit Tool While you can edit envelopes using the Normal Edit tool you can limit your editing to envelopes only by clicking the Envelope Edit Tool button You cannot move trim or otherwise modify events with this tool which allows you to edit envelope points without making any other unwanted changes For more information see Using the Envelope Edit tool on page 165 WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 8 L 17 9 Reversing a video event Setting the velocity to a negative value reverses the video working backwards from the point where the negative value occurs An event that has been reversed plays backwards until it gets to the first frame and then holds that frame for the duration of the event 1 Right click an event choose Insert Remove Envelope and then choose Velocity from the submenu 2 Trim the beginning of the video event to the place where you want the reversal to begin e g the last frame in the media file that you want to play if it were playing forward 3 Drag the velocity down to 100 for a normal speed reversal 10 00 02 10 00 04 10 00 06 10 00 08 50 00 10 10 00 12 00 00 00 This is the original untrimmed event The horses run from left to right 00 00 00 10 00 02 10 00 04 10 00 06 I 10 00 10 10 00 12 L The event is edge trimmed to the frame where the reversal will begin 00 00 00 10 00 02 10 00 04 10 00 06 I 10 00 10 ee L The velo
216. an avi file that uses the Sony YUV codec The frame rate and over SD SDI frame size should match your master 24p DVD Render an avi file that uses one of the following codecs Sony YUV offers the highest quality but requires a high performance drive array CineForm HD offers excellent quality with good playback performance Sony NTSC DV Widescreen use the NTSC DV Widescreen 24p 2 3 3 2 pulldown avi template Windows Media HD Render an avi file using one of the following templates Choose the template that matches your HDV source HDV 720 30p intermediate HDV 720 25p intermediate HDV 1080 60i intermediate HDV 1080 50i intermediate USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 a 237 Replacing intermediate files with HDV source for HD delivery ees Tips If you don t want to convert all clips in their entirety create regions to indicate the portions of the captured HDV clips that you want to convert to an intermediate format and then the Batch Render script to render the regions to the desired format Remember that Vegas software supports multiple instances You can use one instance of the application to render your intermediate files while you continue editing in another instance Use network rendering to queue multiple render jobs Using DVD Architect software you can create a DVD that contains an SD version of your project and place an HD Windows Media version in the Extras folder on the disk When you b
217. an calibrate their equipment Text Creates events containing text for titles or simple credits Text can be formatted with color shadows and other effects Adding a generated media event 247 Horizontal Blinds ec R R EHA SP wa DE ans tr E Fence You can add a generated media event by choosing Generated Media from the Insert menu This adds the event at the cursor position in the selected track However perhaps the simplest way to add generated media is through drag and drop 1 From the View menu choose Media Generators The Media Generators window displays 2 Drag a generator from the Media Generators window to the project The mouse cursor changes to indicate when you can drop the generator 3 Modify the generator in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished To modify settings at a later time click the Generated Media button gj on the event For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button to access online help mnn Tip A generated media event is ten seconds long as a default However you can trim the event to any length For more information see Trimming an event on page 103 a Generated Media button CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 248 r Duplicating a generated media event Once you have added a generated media event and modified its settings you can duplicate it For more information see Duplicating
218. and paste the information into a document or spreadsheet BURNING CDS CHP 19 NNN Burning audio CDs You can burn either single tracks track at once or the entire disc disc at once Burning single tracks track at once You can burn your Vegas project as a single track track at once Once you have burned all your tracks to the CD you must close the disc before it can be played Burning a track at once CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Track at Once Audio CD from the submenu The Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog displays the length of the current file and the amount of time remaining on the disc in your CD recorder 2 Choose a setting from the Action drop down list Burn audio begins recording audio to your CD when you click the Start button You will need to close the disc before it can be played in an audio CD player e Test then burn audio performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns Recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD Close disc closes your disc without adding any audio when you click the Start button Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Erase RW disc erases your rewritable CD when you click the Start butto
219. ansparent but there is nothing below these tracks so it appears black By text mG oh oO l PA Level 100 0 U At 4 Parent track oe B r OOI Make Compositing Re 3 fat Child button Child track In the third example a generated media event was added to the track below the first two tracks which are already paired in a parent child relationship The color gradient event in track three shows through the transparent area of the top two paired tracks Sie Rete ca bevel 100 0 dU Ht 4 D C kaad S cre me dG m ft ES mF dd G GQ Level 100 0 dU B T 1 Selecting compositing modes The Compositing Mode button a determines how the transparency in a video track is generated Since lower tracks show through higher tracks it is the compositing mode of the higher track that determines how much of the lower track shows though a 4 Note The compositing mode of the lowest video track is a special case Selecting a mode for the lowest track affects its transparency against a black background oT To select a compositing mode click the Compositing Mode button and choose a mode from the menu that appears or choose Custom to customize compositing with a 2 to 1 transform plug in TI Custom compositing modes are available only in the full version of Vegas software CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 250 The sample below uses a generated text event that
220. ap offset flag to the new position in the event As the flag moves a time display appears This time display indicates where the snap offset flag occurs in time in the event 3 Release the mouse to set the snap offset flag Snapping to the cursor or a selection You can snap two clips in the same track end to end but how can you snap two events on separate tracks You can easily snap to specific event boundaries in any track by making a time selection for the event 1 Double click the event you want to snap to The time selection area on the ruler sets to the length of the event 2 Drag another clip in a different track near the end of the first clip It snaps into position In this example the second event snaps to the edge of the time selection Because events also snap to the cursor you could accomplish the same task by pressing Alt gt or Alt to position the cursor on the edge of the first event Once the cursor is on the event edge you can snap the second event to the cursor ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 127 Pitch shifting audio events A pitch shift is a way to raise or lower the pitch of an audio event The semitone range is 24 to 24 Twelve semitones equal one octave so you may increase or decrease the pitch of an event within a two octave range Within each semitone is a finer pitch adjustment called cents There are one hundred cents in one semitone Change length and pitch Origin
221. apturing offline clips 49 Capturing video 48 CD Burning audio CDs 351 multimedia 360 CD Architect files 352 CD layout bar 23 CD Settings tab 350 CDs video 359 Channels audio 174 Checkerboard 247 Child tracks compositing 248 258 Chromakeying 264 Multiple keys 265 Chrominance monitoring 295 Clean up prerendered video 290 Clearing the edit history 115 Closed captioning 229 232 Adding from a script 230 231 Adding line by line 230 Displaying 232 Color Time Display window 332 Track 143 Color channels 294 Color gradient event 247 Color key 264 Color levels monitoring 297 Command markers 119 Closed captioning 229 232 Command bar 22 Editing 121 Inserting 121 Scott Studios 120 Composite level automation 161 Composite level envelope 163 Composite level slider 64 148 161 251 Composite mode Setting default 150 Compositing 248 251 Compositing modes 64 249 251 parent child tracks 248 258 Constant power panning model 146 217 INDEX R iI Contrast monitoring 297 Control surface setup 346 Converting format See Rendering Copying events 99 Event attributes 175 Time and events 100 Time selections 100 Creating a movie 71 307 314 Creating a multimedia CD 360 Creating bins 51 Creating DVD with DVD Architect 222 Credit roll event 247 Credits 228 Cropping video 223 225 Copying and pasting cropping settings 175 Plug in processin
222. arch and then perform the following steps ae Tips You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify the results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches a T 1 Add your search criteria a Click the Add New Search Criteria button in the Search pane The Search Criteria Chooser is displayed b Double click an item in the Search Criteria Chooser or drag it to the Advanced section of the Search pane USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 a 87 aa Tips If an item in the Search Results pane displays a button you can click it to find related media For example clicking the button in the following example adds an item to the Advanced section to help you find other media with a beat count of 16 You can also drag a column heading from the Search Results pane to the Advanced section of the Search pane mnn Search Results OoO rFat Clear Bit Depth 24 ACID T
223. are in the mixer You must route the surround audio to the correct output in the mixer 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Audio tab 3 From the Audio device type drop down list choose an audio device type other than Microsoft Sound Mapper such as Windows Classic Wave Driver 4 Choose the playback devices for the six surround channels e From the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the front left and right surround channels e From the Default Rear playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the rear left and right surround channels e From the Default Center and LFE playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the center and LFE surround channels 5 Click OK Overriding the default device routing By setting up the device routing in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog you have set the defaults for surround routing However you can override the default device routing at any time using the Surround Master bus in the Mixer window 1 In the Mixer window click the Audio Device Selector button 4 on the Surround Master bus A menu of surround channels Front L R Rear L R and Center LFE appears 2 In the submenu match a surround pair with the appropriate output 3 Repeat steps one and two to match each surround pair to the appropriate output CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 212 z
224. are used to indicate to the CD R device where to mark the beginning and ending of a track during the writing process Indices are single markers that subdivide a track Indices are useful for navigating to specific areas within a track For example a sound effects CD may have one track of breaking glass The track is then indexed to allow navigation to a specific glass breaking effect within the track However be aware that not all CD players allow navigation to indices Tracks and indices are identified in a track list which is a chronological text list of all tracks and indices defined in the audio CD project CHP 19 BURNING CDS 3852 r Setting up to burn audio CDs You can set the project properties and adjust preferences to better accommodate writing audio CDs The ruler and time display are set up for you automatically Viewing the ruler and time display The ruler and time display are automatically changed to audio CD time for you when you mark CD tracks in a project Audio CD time formats are as follows Display Format Ruler hh mm ss hours minutes seconds or hh mm ss ff hours minutes seconds frames with fos 75 when zoomed in tightly Time display tt mm ss ff track number minutes seconds frames with fps 75 Setting project properties Click the Properties button amp to access project properties On the Audio CD tab you can set the Universal Product Code Media Catalog Number UPC MCN or set the number for the
225. as software are referred to as events An event is actually a window into a media file and is a reference or pointer to the file It can display all or part of a media file and can be edited without altering the source media nondestructive Field Order Video that is displayed on a television is interlaced This means that every frame of video is actually composed of two fields each of which is made up of half of the lines that make the final frame These two fields are woven together in alternate lines but which of the two fields is displayed first the field order can be important You can set the field order for video in the Project Properties dialog or when rendering a project in the Custom Template dialog For more information see Interlacing and field order on page 371 File Format A file format specifies the way in which data is stored on your floppy disks or hard drive In Windows for example the most common audio file format is the Microsoft WAV format However Vegas software can read and write to many other file formats so you can maintain compatibility with other software and hardware configurations Frame Rate Audio Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio Frame Rate Video The speed at which individual images in the video are displayed on the screen A faster frame rate results in smoother motion in the video However more times than not frame rate is associated with SMPTE
226. ase information see Phase inverting a track audio only on page 148 Available only in the full version of Vegas software ols lt Track FX Adds track effects plug ins For more information see Using audio effects on page 189 G Mute Temporarily mutes playback of the track so that you can focus on other tracks For more information see Muting a track on page 149 il Solo Isolates a track for playback by muting the other tracks For more information see Soloing a track on page 150 yo 0 0dB m Volume fader Controls the audio track volume relative to the other tracks Drag the fader left or right to adjust the volume For more information see Using the volume fader audio only on page 144 il Multipurpose Controls several features including track panning bus send levels and assignable slider effects send levels Select what the slider controls by clicking the label Each item s Slider position is independent from the others For more information see Using the multipurpose slider audio only on page 145 Pan Center CHP 2 GETTING STARTED GG r Nesting projects TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software With Vegas software you can simplify and organize complex projects by adding multiple projects to the timeline of a single Vegas project Using project nesting you can e Create a single element that can be used in multiple locations or projects If you update the project it is
227. at and effects used CPU speed is also important for more advanced compression codecs such as MPEG and newer streaming formats TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A 37 1 Audio proxy files sfap0 Working with certain types of media files with particular audio compression schemes can be inefficient and slow To compensate for this Vegas software creates audio proxy files for formats that are known to dramatically impact performance There are two cases where this occurs Multimedia video files often contain both video and audio information In certain formats these two streams can be packed together in such a way as to make editing slow and inefficient Vegas software therefore takes the audio stream from these files e g type 1 DV QuickTime and saves it to a separate and more manageable audio proxy file QuickTime audio only files can also be compressed in a way that makes editing slower Vegas software also uses audio proxy files in this situation as well While audio proxy files may be large because they are uncompressed the performance increase is significant The file is saved as a proprietary sfapO file with the same name as the original media file and has the same characteristics as the original audio stream So movie avi yields a movie avi sfapO audio proxy Additional audio streams in the same file are saved as movie avi sfap1 movie avi sfap2 etc This is a one time process that greatly speeds up editing The conversion happens
228. at the project level to mark locations or sections in the project Media Control Interface MCI A standard way for Microsoft Windows programs t o communicate with multimedia devices like sound cards and CD players If a device has a MCI device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Microsoft Windows software Media File A media file or multimedia file is any image audio or video file on a computer In Vegas software you can browse for these files in the Explorer window You can drag media files to the timeline or insert them into the Project Media window Media files that have been dragged to the timeline are referred to as events MIDI Clock A MIDI device specific timing reference It is not absolute time like MIDI timecode MTC instead it is a tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to do tempo changes mid song MIDI Port A MIDI Port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI gear This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI port to output MIDI timecode to an external device or to receive MIDI timecode from an external device MIDI Timecode MTC MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 Specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications Basically it is a MIDI representation of SMPTE timecode Mix The process of combining multiple audio events and effe
229. at timecode can be lost before the Free wheel playback time starts A longer time is more tolerant of losses in the incoming timecode Free wheel playback time Specifies the amount of time that Vegas software plays back after the Free wheel slack time has been exceeded seconds Synchronization delay time Specifies the amount of time required for Vegas software to synchronize itself to incoming timecode On slower seconds computers this time should be set to around two seconds On faster computers it may be set lower Offset adjust quarter frames If Vegas software is consistently behind or ahead of the MTC generator enter a value to adjust a synchronization offset with quarter frame accuracy If Vegas software is behind the MTC generator enter a negative number such as 4 If Vegas software is ahead of the MTC generator enter a positive number such as 4 MTC Output This tab displays only if you choose a device in the Generate MIDI Timecode settings drop down list on the Sync tab Preference Description Full frame message generation Specifies when Vegas software sends full frame timecode messages Full frame messages are used by some external audio synchronizers to seek a proper location prior to synchronization For example tape based recorders benefit from seeking to full frame messages because of the time required to move the transport to the proper location However full frame messages are ignored by some devices and may actually c
230. audio in a 5 1 surround project in two ways e Pan tracks individually using the Surround Panner window e Route tracks to mixer controls busses assignable effect chains and pan the mixer controls using the Surround Panner window Panning tracks 1 Click the Automation Settings button gt 1 on the track you want to pan and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected 2 Double click the surround panner on the track you wish to pan The Surround Panner window appears ey main vided Eu Sd oj GT Surround Panner Level 100 0 Fat 4 SH ewe dG Ol vol 0 0 dB LI R Buea L Double click to display 5 EG et OI the Surround vol 0 0 dB i LFE Panner window Bus 4 Inf ll Sl A SGO vol 0 0 dE jm Bus 4 0 0 dE LIL Center d IH 3 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 216 4 Close the Surround Panner window SS 4 Tip You can also use the surround panner in the track header to pan your track SS eee WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 nS Panning mixer controls You may choose to route tracks to busses or other mixer controls such as assignable effect chains and pan them as a group rather than panning each track individually E Note When you route a track to a bus stereo two channel output is sent to the mixer control and the mixer control sends 5 1 six channel output to the Surround Mast
231. ause unexpected behavior in other devices Check your hardware documentation to find out if it supports full frame messages MIDI Clock Output This tab displays only if you choose a device in the Generate MIDI Clock Settings drop down list on the Sync tab Preference Description Send Start instead of Continue When selected Vegas software sends a Start command rather than a Continue command Normally Vegas when beginning playback software sends a Continue command to allow the chasing device to start at a specific time However some older MIDI sequencers do not support the Continue command and must start from the beginning every time Song Position Pointer generation Specifies when Vegas software sends Song Position Pointer messages Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to seek to a proper location prior to starting the synchronization process Keyboard tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Keyboard tab to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the Vegas interface The Current Key Bindings box displays the currently assigned shortcut keys Choose a setting from the Context drop down list to choose which shortcuts you want to see CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 346 r Editing shortcuts 1 Select a command in the Available commands box Choose Global from the Context drop down list to display all
232. automatically and does not result in a loss of quality or synchronization The original source file remains unchanged the entire process is nondestructive Audio proxy files can be safely deleted at any time since the application recreates these files as needed E Note Vegas software saves audio proxy files to the same folder as the source media If the source media folder is read only e g CD ROM the files are saved to a temporary directory nnn T Interlacing and field order Field order in interlaced video is an important parameter that can severely impact the quality of video on a television monitor While the concept is easy enough to understand the lack of standards in both technology and terminology clouds the issue The path of the electron gun across the screen is fundamentally different between television monitors and computer monitors Computer monitors scan every line in order from left to right and top to bottom This is known as progressive scanning On a standard television monitor the electron gun scans every other line from top to bottom twice for every picture or frame For example the first scan from top to bottom might scan all of the odd numbered lines first then jump back to the top of the screen and in the second scan draw all of the remaining even numbered lines completing the frame The two fields are said to be interlaced together to form a single frame The illustration that follows shows how two frames
233. ave created and saved 7 Sutomatable 1 Track Optimized Fx 3 5 1 FX 3 FX Packages Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software Click the Plug In Chain button The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the plug in chain displayed at the top Click Save As The Save Plug in Package dialog appears Taala Click OK or press to save the package Editing saved plug in chains You can add delete or rearrange plug ins in a saved package at any time You can then save your changes to the package or enter a new name to save the chain as a new package 1 2 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software Click the Plug In Chain button The Plug In Chooser dialog appears with the package in the chain area Add delete rearrange or change the settings of plug ins in the package chain 4 In the Plug In Chooser dialog click Save As to save the modified package 5 To save the package with a new name enter a name in the Name box To save the changes to the existing 6 package choose the name of the package from the Name drop down list Click OK or press to save the new settings O
234. background color values This makes overlay colors weaker and less present and results in a gt lighter video image The opposite of this mode is Multiply Available only _ in the full version of Vegas software USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 251 Compositing mode Sample Description Overlay Heightens contrast by using Multiply mode on darker colors and Screen mode on lighter colors Available only in the full version of Vegas software Hard Light Adds overlay colors as if the overlay were lit by a bright focused spotlight Available only in the full version of Vegas software Dodge Brightens the background based on the overlay color values Available only in the full version of Vegas software Burn Darkens the background based on the overlay color values Available only in the full version of Vegas software Darken Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and selects the darker color value for each pixel Available only in the full version of Vegas software Lighten Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and selects the lighter color value for each pixel Available only in the full version of Vegas software Difference Compares the overlay and background pixel by pixel and subtracts the darker color value from the lighter color to generate a new color value difference Available only in the full version of Vegas software Difference Squared Remaps color values along a parabolic c
235. bars to move up and down the tracks or to move forward and back along the timeline Click the Zoom buttons to reveal more or less of the timeline Drag the edge of the scroll box found on the scroll bar to zoom Press 4 and to zoom in and out along the timeline Editing Tool and then choose Zoom In this mode drag on the timeline to draw a rectangle that defines the zoom region Zoom S Scroll box tools Tip You can also access the Zoom Edit Tool from the lower right corner of the track view aj ae Mouse wheel control is also supported The default behavior of the wheel is to zoom horizontally Shift wheel scrolls horizontally through time ctrl wheel scrolls vertically Ctrl Shift wheel moves the cursor in small increments Ctrl Shift Alt wheel moves the cursor in one frame increments Clicking the mouse wheel turns auto panning on and off Zooming directly controls the accuracy of your editing Each video event has thumbnail representations of the frames within the event Depending on how far you have zoomed in on a video event a thumbnail can represent the entire event or a single frame in the event a Tip You can choose to display frame numbers time or timecode on video event thumbnails For more information see Displaying frame numbers on page 329 eEeEOEO S GETTING STARTED CHP 2 l D 3 Changing track height You
236. bea EEE A het oad eek VA oy 225 Working with still images 0 cee eee eee ee eee e ee eee e eee e eee eeaaes 226 Creating still images for use in Vegas software 000 eee eens 226 Capturing a timeline Snapshot e i eis Hee tee eh eke eee 227 Creating a SIIGG SNOW reres ooo tes Sh ee eee at ak a aE ods deat BHK AHER tae 227 Creating UtleSkirerriereri iri oe bee arated aw aeeted es pedsdedbate dee 228 Creating titles from Mages ska ie ae Oe a he A a ee d ee NE 228 OCG HUIS s2 a 6 para paras wees Gh one oe a trace a aha earee tee atic aaa a a amp dea eh a de dete Soke 229 Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files 229 Adding closed captioning line by line 00 eee eens 230 Adding closed captioning from a script e e eee eens 230 Displaying closed captioning lt e e e ews kwaeiaee annann 232 Resampling VIGO tess eee ahs hale RA eR eos ee here eed 232 Using Edit Decision Lists EDU ceeded bead oa bare b aire Sites 233 E AUG AM We LL a ards ea ad ca sa esa ee a ah eee oe ate ate nage Dae Bee ee Wale we 233 Opening EDL a E easel ieee ete el eka ele be TE taste laces 233 WOKING DV TOMA is cere dtd cee a tee cea ia a saa eee wens 234 Selecting source media ned hehe aimee qn Gs BRE RS Rae oe a gee kene we 234 Setting project DrOPeMleS iriiri r wei whee Mie Foon pew ee see Gees Ree aewae eee eee 234 Selecting Templates sent ia 2t bee Oe he Sat oe eee th eee te
237. beat Start all new projects with Use the project properties that you have specified whenever a new project is created these settings Summary tab This tab allows you to enter information about the project You can leave the boxes on this tab blank or if information exists you can change it at any time Property Description Title Enter the name or title of the open project Artist Enter the name of the narrator band or artist s being recorded into the project Engineer Enter the name s of the people who mixed and edited the project Copyright Enter the date and ownership rights of the project Comments Enter information that identifies and describes the project Start all new projects with Use the project properties that you have specified whenever a new project is these settings created Audio CD tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software This tab allows you to enter information used when burning audio CDs Property Description Universal Product Code Media If your CD R device supports writing UPC MCN codes you may specify the value in this field If you leave the Catalog Number field blank no UPC MCN value will be written to the CD Otherwise the value consists of 13 digits First track number on disc This sets the number for the first track on the disc Using the toolbar The main toolbar is automatically displayed below the menu bar However you may hide and customize the toolbar to suit your pr
238. by adding envelopes or keyframes to your tracks including bus tracks or you can record automation parameters by adjusting controls in the Vegas interface or on a control surface during playback Automation recording is available only in the full version of Vegas software In Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software you can insert volume mute and panning envelopes and edit the envelopes in the timeline Showing or hiding automation controls The controls in the track list can function as trim controls or automation controls for track volume panning assignable effects send and bus send levels Adjusting the trim control affects the level of the entire track To display trim controls in the track header click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls Track automation CHP 7 Track automation will always affect all events on the track This means that any event envelopes will be calculated after the track automation For more information see Using audio event envelopes ASR on page JD ee O Tip Choose a fade type from the Audio default drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to set the default fade type that will be used when you add volume and panning envelopes This setting is used only when you create new envelopes when you add a point to an existing envelope the new point always uses the same fade type as the preceding envelope point Also th
239. can print directly from the timeline to DV or HDV tape you can print a rendered file to HDV tape or you can use the Sony Video Capture application installed with Vegas software to print your finished video to tape Printing to DV tape from the timeline You can print either a portion of your project or the entire video right from the project timeline to a camera or deck Your project is examined any complex portions are prerendered and then printed to DV tape all in one action For more information see Prerendering video on page 289 eee V Note Printing to tape from the timeline can require significant drive space for temporary prerendered files Set the Prerendered files folder on the Video tab of the Project Properties dialog to an A V capable drive with sufficient space Prerendering a DV project uses approximately 228 MB minute so plan accordingly SSS T Printing to a DV device I Establish a connection to the capture card a From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears b Click the Print Device tab c From the Device drop down list choose OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 DV d Click OK The Preferences dialog closes 2 To print just a portion of your project make a time selection in the timeline 3 From the Tools menu choose Print Video to Tape The Conform Timeline to Device Format dialog CHP 17 displays Complete the following information e In the Template drop down list ch
240. can change the height of individual tracks by dragging their borders in the track list In the example below the main video track is fairly large to show the details of the scene while the two tracks above it which are overlays have been resized to a shorter height For more information see Changing track height on page 143 BB O xe ee Poa BE Or EH voiceover IS amp de lt La A Vol 15d I _ Pan Center m E 1 s pe ay M il i Hele E kd G iti ou E Vol 216 TOT we era Pan Centers m k eee A T ee CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 64 7 Using the track list This section describes the different controls in the track header of each track Some controls are specific to either video or audio tracks Video track header E Video S K ote G d T Ep b Level 100 0 Pa ae T I l Button or Name Description Control 5 Make Creates a parent child compositing relationship with the track above Used when creating compositing masks For more information see Understanding the parent child track relationship on child page 248 Track number Track numbers and colors help organize a multitrack project For more information see and color Managing tracks on page 141 Minimize track Minimizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page 143 height E Maximize track Maximizes track height For more information see Chan
241. can provide Automation recording is available only in the full version of Vegas software In Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software you can insert volume mute and panning envelopes and edit the envelopes in the timeline Automation recording is available for the following settings Audio track envelopes using the controls in the track header Audio track effect parameters for automatable effects using the controls in Audio Plug In window Surround panning keyframes Video track envelopes using the controls in the track header Video track effect parameters using the controls in Video Track FX window Parent track overlay mode plug in settings using the controls in Parent Track Overlay window Track level mask generator plug in settings using the controls in Video Mask FX window a o 7V Note If you want to thin envelope points after recording automation you can select the Smooth and thin automation data after recording check box on the External Control amp Automation tab of the Preferences dialog or right click the envelope and choose Thin Points from the shortcut menu EE Recording automation settings CHP 7 1 Add an envelope or automatable keyframeable effect to a track For automatable audio track effects you must add and effect automation envelope for each parameter you want to automate 2 Click the Automation Settings button in the track header and select Show Automation Con
242. capture card using the cable provided with the card 2 From the File menu choose Capture Video or click the Capture Video button in the Project Media window The Capture Video dialog displays 3 Choose the option you want to use for capturing video e Use external video capture application select this option to capture DV or Video for Windows footage using the video capture application specified on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog e Use internal video capture application select this option to capture HDV or SDI footage using the Vegas video capture application GETTING STARTED CHP 2 n a 4 Tip Select the Always use the selected method check box to bypass this dialog in the future and always use the method specified on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog SESS DT sN 4 Click OK The specified video capture application starts 5 Capture your video For information on capturing video with the Sony Video Capture application please see the Vegas online help To access help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu Once you have captured your video Video Capture adds the file s to the Project Media window If any captured clips go offline you can recapture the clips using your video capture application Right click an offline file in the Project Media window and choose Recapture from the shortcut menu Getting images You can bring images directly into the software from your scanner digita
243. ce that you want to use for playing sound data in your project Available only in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software Choose the device that you want to use for playing stereo sound data and the front left and right channels of a 5 1 surround project Selecting the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows Windows to select an appropriate device to use for the current sound data Note If you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper you will not be able to assign busses to different devices Available only in the full version of Vegas software Choose the device that you want to use for playing the rear channels of a 5 1 surround project Available only in the full version of Vegas software Choose the device that you want to use for playing the center and low frequency effect channels of a 5 1 surround project Available only in the full version of Vegas software Sets the amount of memory used during project playback For more information see Adjusting the playback buffering slider on page 344 Sets the default device for recording into a track Select the check box to automatically compensate for offset between the time you initiate recording and when your sound card starts recording Clear the check box and drag the User offset samples ms slider to specify an offset value Restores all audio device preferences to the default settings Advanced audio preferences You can access advanced settings by clicking the Advance
244. cenes Since an event is just a container of a specific length and at a specific location the actual content media file is easily changed Adding takes You can add multiple media files to the timeline at the same time to a single event as takes You can also add regions within media files as takes For more information see Adding regions as takes on page 135 Adding media files to the timeline as takes 1 Locate the media files that you want to insert as takes in the Explorer and select them Select a range by pressing and clicking the first and last file in the range or select nonadjacent files by pressing and clicking the various clips individually 2 Right click and drag one of the selected clips in the group to the timeline 3 From the shortcut menu choose Add as Takes a Tip To add either just the audio or just the video portions of files as takes choose Video Only Add Video as Takes or Audio Only Add Audio as Takes from the shortcut menu oo Adding takes to existing events You can add media files to existing events as takes 1 Right click a media file in the Explorer and drag it to an existing event 2 From the shortcut menu choose Add as Takes Selecting takes When you add an event with multiple takes a single event is inserted into a track The length of the event is set according to the last clip that was selected This last clip is set as the active take 1 Right click an event with multiple takes
245. ces The preferences options are different from project properties Project properties are unique to each project while preferences affect how Vegas software functions Any changes that you make to the preferences remain set until you change them again or reset Vegas software to use the default presets You can access the Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains tabbed pages The following sections explain the settings on each tab a Important Not all preferences listed here are available in all versions of Vegas SSS General tab The General tab includes a variety of settings The following is a list of these preferences and their meaning Preference Description Automatically open last project When Vegas software is run the last project saved automatically opens on startup Show logo splash screen on Briefly shows the Vegas software logo while the program is loading The logo does not increase loading time startup Animate video frames in Animates the thumbnail representations of frames in a media file opened in the Trimmer This can visually aid Trimmer trimming Prompt to keep files after Opens a dialog where you can enter a name and select a location where audio will be saved after recording recording into a track Create undos for FX parameter Allows you to undo changes made in the FX Transition Event Pan Crop and Track Motion windows changes Confirm media file deletion when
246. ch The tag name will include the date and time of the search and all files that were added or updated in the library are marked with this tag USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 a 77 Removing media files from a library You can remove a reference to a media file from a library without affecting the media file itself 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to delete e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file Right click a selected file and choose Remove from Library from the shortcut menu or press the key on your keyboard A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected files from the library Tagging media files Tagging helps you classify your media files For example if you wanted to keep track of loops played by a specific instrument you could create a tag with the name of the instrument and apply it to the appropriate loops Similarly you could create tags for genres moods seasons client names locations scenes performer names and so on When you create a new library a default tag tree is displayed in the Tags pane You can create your own tags to customize the tags for your needs Tags are the fastest way to search a media library and they require very little disk space
247. choose Publish and then follow the on screen instructions to choose a publishing provider and save your the current project to the Web so you can share it with others CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 72 h GETTING STARTED CHP 2 73 CHAPTER S mira Using the Media E Manager c v a pe Te arel a Mom kK P This chapter covers the management and tagging of your media files in Vegas software using the Media Manager feature TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Creating a new media library You can create multiple media libraries as necessary to organize your media Each media library is maintained by the Media Manager software as a separate database that stores information about the media contained within it You might want to use separate libraries for example to distinguish media from different computers or to create separate libraries for multiple users of a single computer ee ee Tip For very large media collections using multiple media libraries can improve performance nnn 1 If the Media Manager window isn t already visible choose Media Manager from the View menu 2 In the Media Manager window click the Media Library Actions button i and choose New Media Library from the menu The New Media Library dialog is displayed 3 In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 4 The Folder box displays the path to the folder where the l
248. city envelope is added and set to 100 The thumbnails reflect the change an the horses run backwards The event can now be repositioned to fit the project Removing a velocity envelope To remove a velocity envelope and all of its settings right click the event choose Insert Remove Velocity Envelope and then choose Velocity from the submenu Grouping events You are allowed to group events together within tracks or across separate tracks Once you create a group you can move all the events in the group within their tracks as a unit and apply event specific edits at the same time You can still edit properties of individual events within a group without affecting the other events in a group Dragging one event in a group moves all events in the group Creating a new group Grouping is useful when you want to preserve timing of events and move events together along the timeline 1 Select the events you want to group For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 96 2 From the Edit menu choose Group and choose Create New from the submenu CHP 8 WORKING WITH EVENTS 180 Adding an event to an existing group 1 Right click an event in the existing group choose Group from the shortcut menu and choose Select All from the submenu to select all of the members of the group 2 Press and click the event to be added to the group 3 Right click the event choose Group from the shortcut menu and choose Create New
249. colors are too hot or if you Broadcast Colors _ o want to be sure that your video stays within legal eee x broadcast levels apply the Broadcast Colors effect to E Ee EE specific events or the entire project Luma Be aware that applying the Broadcast Colors effect Min Smoothness L results in recompression of the video As a result Max Smoothness j render times can increase significantly when the Chroma Mav Smoothness RN Composite Mir Smoothness P May Smoothness B effect is applied to the entire project 0000 15 00 00 00 122122 ERRER E H IT i Bless 00 00 00 00 CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 236 r Working in HDV format 1 This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software and in Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software HDV cameras record high definition video to standard DV tapes using a highly compressed variation of the MPEG 2 format Because of this compression you can capture HDV clips at data rates that are no higher than DV capture However editing and previewing this highly compressed video is impractical without a very powerful computer that is optimized for working with high definition video We recommend converting your HDV files to an intermediate format for editing Depending on your final delivery format working with HDV source material requires some adjustments to your workflow This section will help guide you through the decisions to streamline the
250. commands in the Available commands box or choose a different command to filter the list You can type a word in the Show only commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain the word you typed 2 Click the Press new shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command 3 Click the Assign button to assign the key combination in the Press new shortcut keys box to the command selected in the Available commands box Importing a keyboard map Click the Import button and browse to a Vegas Keyboard Map File ini file to load an existing keyboard map Exporting a keyboard map Click the Export button and specify a file name and location to save your current keyboard shortcuts to a file that you can use as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other Vegas users Resetting the default keyboard map Click the Default All button to restore the default configuration External Control amp Automation tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software Use the External Control amp Automation tab to set up and customize control surfaces To display this tab choose Preferences from the Options menu then click the External Control amp Automation tab Preference Description Smooth and thin automation When recording automation Vegas software creates as many envelope points or keyframes as possible to data after recording represe
251. compositing parents and children at various levels W St When you have multiple levels of parent and child tracks clicking the Make Sn Rerse CO Compositing Child button 4 moves the track in one level and clicking the 4 L 1 Make Compositing Parent button X 1 moves out one level Si AmO p Ais l Sa Hold while clicking the Make Compositing Child button to move a track PS SLT and all its child tracks in one level 7 Sip Rare 61 The following three examples demonstrate different compositing relationships 8 mt 4 The first example shows two independent tracks The top track contains a eB Qe Ol generated text event that has a transparent background The second track Levei Sis E AET therefore shows through the transparent areas in the Video Preview window Since the second track does not have any transparent areas any tracks below it would be completely obscured Sra Ro oe ee OI If Level 100 0 dU Get 4 San pice Level 100 0 i ft 4 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 249 In the second example track two is the child track of track one the parent track and the compositing mode of track one is set to Mask This parent child relationship was set up by clicking the Make Compositing Child button 37 in the track list for track two This makes the text in track one act as a mask over track two allowing the fire to show through the mask i e the text The region outside of the text is still tr
252. contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the Type in the word s to search for box and click vases Select the topic from the list and click Ssss The Favorites tab allows you to keep topics that you revisit often in a separate folder To add a topic to your favorites click 444 on the Favorites tab CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 20 r VVhats This help What sThis help allows you to view pop up descriptions of menus buttons and dialog boxes 1 Click the What s This Help button s in the toolbar or the question mark E in the upper right corner of a dialog box Alternately you can shoes What s This from the Help menu or press Shift Fi The cursor changes to a question mark icon YZ 1 2 Click an item in the program s interface A pop up description of the item appears Help on the Web Additional help and information is available on the Sony Media Software Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web to view a listing of Web pages pertaining to Vegas software and Sony Media Software Show Me How tutorials a This feature is available only in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software You can learn more about many of the features in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum by using the interactive Show Me How tutorials installed with the software By default Show Me How tutorials display upon startup of the application However you can access them at any time
253. cording Into an Event Resampling Event Gain ASR Processing Normalize Event Invert Track Invert Event ASR Input Monitor On or Auto Recording Into an Event Track FX Track Volume amp Mute Pre Post Post Pre Track Pan Bus Send Level Bus Master Send Level From FX FX Volume FX Chain L M aster To Bus Bus Volume FX Chain FX Chain Hardware Output Master Bus FX Chain FX Chain Hardware Output CHP 1 TI Multiple audio busses and assignable effects are only available in the full version of Vegas software 39 INTRODUCTION 40 Video signal flow Video Media on Track Velocity Envelope Media Interpretation Field Order Frame Rate Alpha Channel etc Media FX Pre Pan Crop FX Event Pan Crop Post Pan Crop FX Video Transitions Pre Compositing Track FX Track Fade Envelope See Compositing Diagram Track signal flow Track Motion Parent Track Compositing Mode See Track Signal Flow Diagram including 2 to 1 transform plug ins Composite Level Parent Motion Post Compositing Track FX Parent Composite Mode Track Motion Child Track Compositing Mode See Track Signal Flow Diagram including 2 to 1 transform plug ins Composite Level Post Compositing Track FX Track Motion Child Track Compositing Mode See Track Signal Flow Diagram including 2 to 1
254. created The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the send level of the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has an assignable effects envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelope one will be created when you adjust the fader If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 167 Bus automation audio only TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use bus automation envelopes to vary the level of a track sent to a bus Adding or removing a bus automation envelope Before you can add a bus envelope you ll need to specify the number of busses for your project 1 Select an audio track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope fro
255. cribed in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Madison Media Software Inc Copyright 2006 Madison Media Software Inc Program Copyright 2006 Madison Media Software Inc All rights reserved 1 Table of Contents INWTOGUCHON 2422 4ue eudd edged oes date saws Da 17 VUZ Te e 2345 2 e ah heed hoe ie cases ca ee ae he bee eee eee es 17 System FEQUITEIMMICING 42556 in Wed irie Se Od ae eee ee tae eee ees 17 h RZ e aile E aelel sare talosea os dae Lalonde ene eel ews a ee aes 17 Installing Vegas Software 2 ccc eee eee eee eee eeeenes 18 USING this MANU as ia 8S ee eed Gow ao we N SU re EEA De ee 18 BIS ONG Nel sure rerea tae tale e a ae Se ne ee ea hee a a ote Bee 19 SNOW Wie HOW tutorials 2 oc0 scu uawuenweane ose ended ween ded ved ded edad a E ana 20 OVINE oases acct H ected eve eave ea alee ree etc eee a ids wee eS 21 Man WINGQOW S 2 Z aden Vande a T A T TE ties beta wa hear tena coed ewan aes 21 e eee pha nen eae eae Pad tiie ree ae ea hee eet tae bn ae Bee tee 21 MEUM CASON a ta aca ae ag LL wt Whar hac sea hic at aca a tase tos ke esa 22 FRU le E i ata i EEE at ety ae ascent eae io E leo We he T a A D TEE S 22 Marker Dar Bay Artech lash ky Ee ee ee eh a a ee ocho ok a a ee ee 22 OMI Tae b A TT a Ree a eee Sree Ent pata et Syne aia cee a 2 Goats acinacaae ee mathe 22 CDilayOut aT SR
256. ct automation 159 Volume and panning automation 156 Autosaving 307 AVI Bit depth 314 Channels 314 Creating a movie 71 Format 309 314 Frame rate 313 Frame size 312 Sample rate 314 Template 312 INDEX i e Video compression 313 Balance panning model 146 217 B zier masks 225 260 Bins media 51 adding media 52 adding recorded files automatically 52 creating 51 deleting media 52 searching 52 Blue screening 264 Broadcast wave importing 54 Burning 5 1 channel audio to DVD 222 Burning audio CDs 351 Adding pauses between tracks 354 Creating a CD layout 353 Disc at once burning 351 358 Exporting a track list 356 Importing CD Architect files 352 Marking tracks and indices 354 Settings and preferences 352 Track at once burning 351 357 Burning CDs proper use of software 361 Burning video CDs 359 Bus automation 158 159 Bus tracks 188 Busses 147 183 186 Adding to project 183 Adjusting for clipping 185 Adjusting volume 185 Assigning plug ins to 189 Assigning tracks to 65 147 186 Automating parameters 158 159 Automation 158 Bus send volume envelopes 163 Controls 183 Deleting from project 184 Meter resolution 185 Muting 186 Naming renaming 186 Panning 215 Routing to hardware 184 Soloing 186 Bypassing Audio plug ins 194 Video plug ins 244 C Capturing images From a scanner 49 From the Video Preview window 227 Capturing Video Rec
257. ction in the Trimmer window 3 Right click the file in the Trimmer window and choose Sync Track View Selection Time from Cursor or Sync Track View Selection Time up to Cursor from the shortcut menu A time selection is created in the file in the Trimmer window to match the time selection in the timeline 4 Adjust the location of the time selection in the Trimmer as needed by dragging the time selection the area between the yellow triangles on the Trimmer marker bar 5 Drag the event from the Trimmer to the timeline and allow it to snap into place within the time selection Adding selections from a media file with audio and video You can open a file in the Trimmer that has both audio and video streams e g AVI When you add a selection from this type of file to the timeline both streams are added e If you select a video track before adding the selection the video is added to the selected track and the associated audio is added to the track below it e If you select an audio track before adding the selection the audio is added to the selected track and the associated video is added to the track above it New tracks are created for the added media if necessary ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 C135 Adding and saving regions and markers to a media file CHP 5 The Trimmer allows you to add markers and regions to a media file in the same way that you add them to your project Media file markers and regions are different from p
258. cts into a final output The analogous process of combining video events together is called compositing Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to stage equipment can be controlled via MIDI Vegas software utilizes MIDI for synchronization purposes Noise shaping Noise shaping is a technique that can minimize the audibility of quantization noise by shifting its frequency spectrum For example in 44 100 Hz audio quantization noise is shifted towards the Nyquist Frequency of 22 050 Hz See also Dithering Nondestructive Editing A type of editing used by Vegas software that involves a pointer based system of keeping track of edits When you delete a section of audio in a nondestructive system the audio on disk is not actually deleted Instead a set of pointers is established to tell the program to play the active sections during playback Nonlinear Editing NLE A method of editing video non sequentially or in random order Editing video in Vegas software is nonlinear as opposed to editing video tape which is linear GLOSSARY APPENDIX B l 383 Normalize Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use this function to make sure you are fully utilizing the dynamic range available to you Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Fr
259. cursor Use the following keyboard commands to move the cursor in the timeline Description Keys Go to beginning of project Ctrl Home or W Go to end of project Ctrl End or E Go to beginning of selection Home or view if no selection Go to end of selection or view End if no selection Move right by grid marks Page Down Move left by grid marks Page Up Go to Ctrl G Sm video PEL ee OT LU Gat 4 8 d Mfr Event edit point cursor jumps Changing focus Description Mowe left right to marker s Move to marker Move left right to event edit points including fade edges see figure below Nudge cursor on timeline Move left right one frame Move left right one frame Center in view Keys Ctrl Left Right Arrow 0 9 keys not numeric keypad Ctrl Alt Left Right Arrow Left or Right Arrow Alt Left Right Arrow Ctrl Alt Shift Mouse wheel Focus is used to describe which objects have the attention of a program For example when you click a file in the Project Media window that window has focus To instantly switch the program s focus to the track view timeline press 0 or from the View menu choose Focus to Track View In Vegas software it matters which track has focus when you perform a task For example when you double click a media file in the Explorer it is inserted into the track that has focus You can click a track on its track number to make it the focus track A blinking white
260. d the event loops as a default A notch indicates where the looped event repeats Alternately you can turn looping off and make the last frame of an event s media repeat for the duration of the event a freeze frame A notch appears at the point in the event where the video ends and the freeze frame begins For more information see Loop on page 171 Trimming adjacent events You can trim adjacent events simultaneously Press while dragging the common edge between two adjacent events The trim adjacent cursor appears Z Press Ctrl Alt over the boundary between two events and drag left or right to trim both events at once 00 00 17 29 Trimming a time selection Trimming events removes all media outside the time selection The removed information is not placed on the clipboard Trimming is different from cutting in that the events within the time selection are preserved 1 Select a time range For more information see Selecting a time range on page 97 2 Press T or from the Edit menu choose Trim The material outside the time selection across all tracks is removed from the project However the time information space between events is not removed Events before trim Clipboard contents Events after trim Trimmed information is not pg placed on the clipboard 1000 2423 00002828 Trimming a time and event selection 1 Select the events to be trimmed 2 Select a time range For more information
261. d a working knowledge of JScript or Visual Basic NET scripting The scripts that are included are fully commented to help you find and edit the parameters you need 1 Create a copy of the script vb or js file you want to edit assigning a descriptive name to the copy 2 Open the new copy of the script in your text editor 3 Edit the script as needed The comments in the script will help you find the parameters you need to edit Comments are indicated with double forward slashes For example the AddEffectToAlIMedia js script includes the following lines This is the full name of the effect plug in you want to add var plugInName Sony Timecode This is the name of the preset you want Set this to null if you want the default preset var presetName SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps The default script applies the Sony Timecode plug in to all video media in your project using the SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps preset If you wanted to apply the Broadcast Colors plug in s Extremely Conservative 7 5 Setup preset to all audio media you could edit the script as follows changes appear in red This is the full name of the effect plug in you want to add var pluginName Sony Broadcast Colors USING SCRIPTING CHP 20 L 3068 This is the name of the preset you want Set this to null if you want the default preset var presetName Extremely Conservative 7 5 Setup The plugInName variable should use the pl
262. d angle of rotation for the crop rectangle This is the start position first keyframe 5 Click in the keyframe controller and press End This moves the cursor to the end of the event 6 Click the Create Keyframe button A new keyframe appears in the keyframe controller at the end of the event 7 Change the position size and angle of rotation This is the final position last keyframe ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 379 8 Preview the event Add and adjust keyframes as needed to create the desired effect You can adjust both temporal and spatial interpolation for each keyframe e Temporal interpolation how the pan occurs over time is controlled by the keyframe interpolation curve type Experiment with temporal interpolation by right clicking a keyframe to change the interpolation curve type hold linear fast slow smooth and previewing the result For more information see Changing the interpolation curve on page 275 e Spatial interpolation how the pan occurs within the video image is controlled by the Smoothness setting of each keyframe A smoothness value of O makes the movement linear from one keyframe to the next A higher smoothness value makes the path of the pan more curved Select a keyframe and change the Smoothness value to adjust spatial interpolation Animating video effects plug ins You can use keyframe animation to smoothly and gradually apply an effect to an event This example use
263. d button on the Audio Device tab The Advanced Audio Configuration dialog displays all of the audio devices that are installed on your computer and allows you to set the controls for each device Preference Audio devices Interpolate position Position bias Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Audio buffers Buffer size Samples Priority Enable input monitoring CHP 18 Description This list contains all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer Selecting one from the list allows you to set the options below for that device During project playback you may notice that the cursor position is different than what you are hearing This problem stems from inaccuracies in some audio devices Select this control s check box to have Vegas software attempt to compensate for the inaccuracies by interpolating the cursor s correct position during playback or recording The position bias control gives you additional cursor control when it is inaccurately displayed during project playback and recording If you have enabled the Interpolate position control and are still experiencing cursor position inaccuracies move the Position bias control forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the audio device When this option is not selected Vegas software begins storing buffering project audio information prior to playback This storing is very fast and unnoticeable in most cases However some audio d
264. d command markers in the project All Tracks Markers and Regions ripples all tracks and all keyframes and envelopes on those tracks This command also ripples any markers regions CD layout markers and command markers in the project Perform one of edits discussed above Above the timeline an arrow indicates E l l l S 2 Spot star where the post edit ripple will occur the direction the affected events will oaa move and the distance the events will move eee ee 3 The timeline is rippled after the edit according to the ripple type you choose CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 112 Shuffling events A quick way to change the order of a sequence of events in a track is provided Right click and drag an event to anew location in the track and choose Shuffle Events from the shortcut menu that appears The events are shuffled into the new order The original four events 00 0 1 25 27 4 00 0 1 25 27 00 0 1 44 26 ha Move Here Copy Here Shuffle Events Cancel The four events after the shuffle Crossfading events You are allowed to crossfade between two events on the same Fade in track For audio events crossfading fades out one audio event s volume line volume while another event s volume fades in For video events crossfading creates a transition between two events one das volume line fading out while the other fades in Lines appear indicating how and when the event s vol
265. d fe cae bi tins nok e heh ate Raa he a Ree eb ak eed 152 Adding keyframes to the video bus track 000 cece eee eee ee eee eee eens 152 Adding envelopes to the video bus track 00 000 e eens 152 Adding effects to video bus tracks 2 ccc cee eee eee eee eeeees 152 Muting the video output lt whos tt eek ewe oes Meee ee eee ewe ees 152 Bypassing video effects and envelOpeS 22 nonn nnna eect eee eee ee ee eeeeees 152 Resizing video DUS TACKS oa e552 Ooh ae eee ee ee el eee ee ee eee baw EA 152 Rendering to a new track 0c c eee 153 USING B ee ye 240444 46 02 66a paddtawe tues dann dane Saad 155 Showing or hiding automation controls 2 00 anann nanan 155 heze AULOMAUON acc sew 4 8 eee bok Wk We ie aS Bon oe eae ee at ek we be 8 ice 155 Mute automation audio and video 2 ccc ee eee eee eas 156 Volume or pan automation audio only 2 0 cee ee eee eee eens 156 Assignable effects automation audio Only cee eee eee eee eee eens 157 Bus automation audio Only 220222 04 e008 nos went eid dite R ZK dai tin dined ees 158 Adding or removing track effect automation 00 ees 159 Composite level automation video Only 02 cece ee eens 161 Adding a motion blur envelope e ee eee eens 162 Adding a video supersampling envelope 222000 00 eee eens 162 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 Working with track envelOpeS 0 0 ee eee eee
266. d the the Z axis Use the buttons at the top of the dialog to allow or prevent movement or scaling For more information see Changing editing options on page 256 a aC Tip Right click the workspace to display a shortcut menu that displays commands to restore center or flip the selection box You can also force the box to match the source media s aspect ratio or your project s output aspect ratio Matching the output aspect ratio can prevent black bars from appearing when you use source media that does not match your project s aspect ratio EE eee 7 The 3D track motion occurs instantly and the results are updated in the Video Preview window 8 Use the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Track Motion window to establish distinct track motion CHP 14 settings throughout the duration of the track During playback immediate frames are interpolated to create smooth motion Expand the Keyframe interpolation heading on the left side of the window and drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the interpolation For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 256 JR Changing editing options Use the toolbar at the top of the Track Motion window to change your editing options Icon Command Description Enable Rotation Select this button if you want to be able to rotate or spin the video ke When the button is not selected video is locked so you can move it alon
267. d to generate thumbnail files for each media file Store thumbnails in common folder and with media files choose this setting if you want to duplicate thumbnail files in a common folder and with the media When you add media files the Media Manager will not need to generate thumbnails for media files that already have thumbnails in the media folder existing thumbnail files are copied to the common folder Do not store thumbnails choose this setting if your disk space is limited and you do not want to store thumbnails Thumbnails will be generated as needed Common Thumbnail Folder Displays the path to the common thumbnail folder Click Browse to choose a different folder Limit Common Folder Size Select this check box and type a value in the box if you want to limit the amount of storage used for thumbnail files Click the Empty button to clear all thumbnails from the common location Enable Thumbnail Zoom Select this check box if you want to zoom thumbnails when you select them in the Search Results pane Delay before zooming thumbnails Type a value in the box to set the delay before a thumbnail image is zoomed when you select it Smooth thumbnail zooming Select this check box if you want to animate thumbnail zooming About tab Use the About tab to view information on the version of the Media Manager that is currently installed This information can be useful when troubleshooting issues with the Media Manager Using the Media Manager with
268. d wed as Gale Seen ee eRe eee eae eed wate Ewha wes 182 Using the Mixer Preview fader 2 000 cece eect eee eee eee eee e a 182 USING DUSSCS 46th i cee t heed eee eae eet taek iiss 183 Adding busses to a DIOJECL c5 sscaa acme tate e8 Oa sel seo ee as ORES A ae ee Re 183 Deleting busses from a project e e e eee eee ee n eee eeees 184 Routing a bus to another DUS 22 0340 lt e e e 35 4 opin Seer nrnna nananana 184 Routing busses to hardware e e e eee eens 184 VVOFKING WITMDUSSES o44 neues ieee he eed eke ahd oid halts ules uaa tn ate ae chtheretbe aos 185 Assigning audio tracks to busses 000 ce eens 186 Using assignable effects chains lt e cc eee eee eee eee eee eee 187 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects Chains 0 00 c cece nann nnne nenn 188 Routing assignable effects chains to busses 20 2c cece eee 188 Automating busses and assignable effects 000 rnrn nn eee eee 188 Viewing DUS rle 326 66 iitn oie ci etoetess bet bekine ei wane eee ected mew eaes ween d 188 Adding track envelopes 42342502 08ix ddd heb i2b ih hk td gad ad et et kee os et eae 188 Modifying track envelopeS 0 ccc eee eee eee a eee ee A 188 Adding Audio Sne 62s ne a3 oe dee andes saben dalsas 189 Using audio GINECIS a it os oe es a N N Ste ee Ee oe BAe Re Oe 189 USING DIUGHIN CHAINS errereen eea Satake Deo ees tan ae ee oe S848 190 Creating aplugir Chaim 2463 02c deine ste eta
269. dec being used for compression For example NTSC DV is typically limited to a frame rate of 29 97 fps and uses SMPTE drop frame timecode Time formats in Vegas software A variety of time formats are provided in the application For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 329 Troubleshooting DV hardware issues Vegas software is designed to integrate seamlessly with OHCI compliant EEE 1394 DV video capture hardware and DV camcorders While most people never have any problems the vast number of hardware configuration possibilities makes this a potentially complex issue There are a number of resources at the Sony Media Software Web site that may be able to assist you More detailed information is available at http www sonymediasoftware com Support Productinfo OHCl asp You can also visit the Vegas Updates Web page to access a troubleshooting document for OHCI compliant devices From the Sony Media Software home page go to the Download page and click Updates Click the Vegas Update link to access the update page APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A L 4 APPENDIX 377 zN 3 ke i Tas Lo Mr B A Law A companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in United States telecommunications A Law
270. deck connected to a DeckLink card TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 Establish a connection to the capture card a From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears b Click the Print Device tab c From the Device drop down list choose Blackmagic Design DeckLink d Click OK The Preferences dialog closes 2 To print just a portion of your project make a time selection in the timeline SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 L 328 3 From the Tools menu choose Print Video to Tape The Conform Timeline to Device Format dialog displays Complete the following information e In the Template drop down list choose the appropriate template for rendering your video or click Custom to select custom settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 e Notes If you are working with a 24p progressive scan project or you have the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you will need to insert pulldown by choosing the appropriate 24p DV template from the list To use the video footage later choose the NTSC DV 24p inserting 2 3 3 2 pulldown template If you are not working with a 24p progressive scan project and you cleared the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you can use any DV template
271. deo track is generated For more information see Selecting compositing modes on page 249 Level 100 0 OU Composite level slider BZ Compositing mode GETTING STARTED CHP 2 65 Audio track header 5 E Musi E s eC l Yol 0 0 08 Pant Center ll Button or Control Name Description Track number Track numbers and colors help organize a multitrack project For more information and color see Managing tracks on page 141 G Minimize track Minimizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page height 143 re Maximize track Maximizes track height For more information see Changing track height on page height 143 Music Track name Allows you name a track To name a track double click the scribble strip and type the scribble strip Tracks name For more information see Naming or renaming a track on page 142 Arm for record Prepares a track for recording You may record directly into audio tracks A track is ready when you see the recording meter appear on it For more information see Arming the track for recording on page 201 E Bus assignment Assigns an audio track to a specific output bus This option is available for projects being mixed for multiple stereo busses For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 186 Available only in the full version of Vegas software G Invert Track Inverts the audio track at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity For more Ph
272. digital multitrack recorder with an optional MIDI synchronization component Usually you would have a mixer a microphone etc connected to these components Your particular setup will vary depending on your equipment Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Digital card MIDI card Digital multitrack The dashed line indicates an option if you are synching Vegas software to tape via a MIDI timecode MTC converter Synchronizing MIDI timecode TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Vegas software can generate output MIDI timecode to synchronize external devices with project playback or can be triggered by MIDI timecode generated by an external device To output MIDI from the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu To allow Vegas software to be triggered by an external MIDI device choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the same submenu For more information see Triggering from MIDI timecode on page 206 and Sync tab on page 344 RECORDING AUDIO CHP 11 01 Preparing to record Before you record you must arm the tracks into which you will record the new audio You must also select the recording settings for the tracks You have the additional options of using a metronome or turning off playback during recording You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selecti
273. dio data in the project before playing Peaks are only built for those files on screen If all peak files are not build you can encounter gapping when the screen scrolls as it plays and the application must build peaks on the fly Press F5 before playback to rebuild peaks for all of the events on or off of the screen Why do mono events increase 6 dB when panning a track hard In Vegas software all audio events are treated as stereo A mono audio event is interpreted as a stereo event with the same data in both channels If you re using the add channels panning mode this duplication doubles the amplitude and results in a 6 dB increase in volume when you pan a track hard left or right Try using the constant power panning mode instead Right click the multipurpose slider and choose Constant Power from the shortcut menu For more information see Adjusting stereo panning on page 145 Why do buffer underruns occur during a test or real write to a CD Buffer underruns occur when data transferred to the CD R is too slow This may be caused by a variety of factors relating to optimizing your system Try writing the CD at a slower speed or prerendering the audio For more information see Burning a disc disc at once on page 358 TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX A 369 Why can t work with footage captured using an MJPEG card Vegas software requires that you have the MJPEG codec for the MJPEG card used to capture the video installed locally on y
274. dow Creating a slide show A slide show composed of still images and an accompanying soundtrack can be an excellent way to show off your pictures You can insert multiple images to instantly create a slide show complete with crossfades Importing high resolution still images and using panning cropping and track motion tools can add interest to an otherwise static slide show For more information see Cropping video on page 223 and Adding track motion on page 281 1 In the Options menu verify that Automatic Crossfades is selected 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences Adjust the following settings on the Editing tab e Enter the length for the still images in the New still image length box e Select Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added e Enter the length of the automatic overlap in the Amount box in the Cut to overlap conversion section of the dialog Click OK The Preferences dialog closes Select all of the images you want to use in the Explorer Right click and drag these files to the timeline oO a fk O From the shortcut menu choose Add Across Time CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 228 If you want you can replace the crossfades between images by dragging transitions to the crossfade regions at a later time For more information see Using transition effects on page 268 E Note When using photographs or other media that is not the same frame aspect as your video
275. dvice A dedicated physically distinct hard drive is almost a requirement for any type of serious video work This means that you have one primary C drive or wherever your operating system is installed and a separate drive for video You can use your dedicated drive for other purposes especially storage but it is a good idea not to run any applications from it and to keep Windows virtual memory off of it It is very important that the drive only be used for video when playing and capturing and that other programs including Windows are not trying to access it Since video files are so large a dedicated drive is not an unreasonable item even if digital video is just a hobby You can never have too much hard disk space e Buy a faster hard drive Older 5400 RPM hard drives may not be fast enough for capturing and playing back video for any length of time while newer 7200 RPM drives are almost always adequate Be careful manufacturers are usually talking about burst transfer rates when they talk about the speed of a drive A drive that can transfer data at 80MB sec is worthless for video if it cannot sustain a much slower rate of S8MB sec for thirty minutes or more without dropping a frame Look to other computer video enthusiasts for additional advice Again the RPMs are a very good indicator because 7200 RPM IDE drives are usually newer c 1998 and older 7200 RPM drives are usually SCSI which are already higher quality drives to begin with
276. e Lock to stretch Pitch change Lock to stretch Stretch Attributes oe 3 If you selected Classic from the Method drop down list indicate the new event length and amount of pitch shifting you want to apply a Type the desired event length in the New length box b Type the desired pitch shift in semitones in the Pitch change box If you want to change the event length without changing pitch type O in the box If you want the pitch to be determined by the amount of time stretching select the Lock to stretch box For example doubling an event s length will raise its pitch by one octave c Choose a setting from the Stretch Attributes drop down list to specify how you want to divide and crossfade the file to prevent artifacts Depending on your source material you may need to experiment with different crossfade types 4 If you selected ACID from the Method drop down list indicate the new event tempo and the amount of pitch shifting you want to apply a Type the desired event length in the New tempo box b Type the desired pitch shift in semitones in the Pitch change box If you want to change the event length without changing pitch type O in the box If you want the pitch to be determined by the new event tempo select the Lock to stretch box For example doubling an event s tempo will raise its pitch by one octave 5 Click OK ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 29 Time compressing stretching eve
277. e choose a setting from the Motion blur type drop down list on the Video tab in the Project Properties dialog This setting determines the shape of the blur and the opacity of the frames Adding a video supersampling envelope TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Video supersampling can improve the appearance of computer generated animation by calculating intermediate frames between the project s frame rate allowing you to create smoother motion blurring or motion from sources such as track motion event pan crop transitions or keyframable effects r aaa Note The effect of video supersampling is less apparent with video that contains fast motion and supersampling cannot improve the appearance of existing video T 1 Right click the video bus track choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and then choose Motion Blur Subsampling from the submenu 2 Add and adjust envelope points as necessary to indicate how many frames will be calculated between frames using the project s frame rate to create the blur p Note Video supersampling significantly increases your rendering time For example when you set the video supersampling envelope to 2 Vegas software renders twice as many frames as it would without supersampling Adjust the envelope to apply supersampling only where necessary a _ _ Ss SsassasS T USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 L 1 E
278. e 316 Troubleshooting initiation problems e e e e e eee eee 318 Using nondistributed network rendering lt eee 319 Using distributed network rendering cee eee 320 Monitoring rendering progress acc s2cecteite des oo aeteee eee Reece mie oe eens awekeeaeeucns 321 Settling Mle MaDDINGS lt v24256 cde cobalt E E pao eae Z abo Sind ee ONY bebe oe EO eee Ae 321 Setting render Service ODIONS corosar aak seeker ioe Gibes eee beta ha eke A 322 Punung video TO TA DCs 4 Sewn ere we ori eticinae seid a Bk ah ate Boe at So ee bees 323 Printing to DV tape from the timeline 0 0c c cece eee eee eens 323 Printing to HDV tape from the timeline 0c eee eee eee 326 Printing a rendered file to HDV tape 2 Ng cece eee eee eee eee ene 327 Printing to tape using Video Capture e e cece eee eee eee eee 328 Customizing Vegas software 0c eee ee ees 329 Displaying frame numbers e e eee ees 329 Changing the ruler format 00cc cece cece cece eee e eee rnnr rnrn 329 Editing the Muller Onset im do2 6 tego a ed oe beth ek dead Set do se eee a ee eas 330 Changing Grid Spacing sain wie vc es ee a eee ee ee ey ee Oe A ee 331 TABLE OF CONTENTS 14 n Using the Time Display WINdOW s e eee eee eee eee eens 331 Changing the time display settings 00 cece eee eee eee eee eee eens 331 Changing the time display Colors 2c e eee eee ee eee eee eaees 332
279. e Ee rd ic wate e eG Ge eee newer cada 212 Ad stno track VOIUIMG lt lt 4cccnturehuheii aioe tet See OU oe oo ee EN cde tease 212 Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels 00220 cece cece eee eens 213 AQGJUSUING ChannelievelS s 22 0ieestebs Bouse stoneewse ssc dan Gis asu ass Seen denee kewl 213 Pane 6 a N eter ash arta E arta NE Se gr alte anys EA hg ete ROA ae 214 TEE TETE rie cet ep ome tea kee tee hs ene AE oe eee ate 214 Panning Mixer CONWOIS lt Hscidscwandase hs bores tae cames sles tee eee aca dae eer eee eden as 215 Using the Surround Panner WINdOW 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 216 Automating DANMING 5 4364 nx ow Me Betis See ee VE a oo hee ek ee ee 218 Turning on panning KkeyiraMeS 2 0 05 0 50 lt e e dee ete se aid rnanan 218 Adding panning keyframes lt ccc eee eens 218 Working with keyframes 2 s2 ct cot see tt eine dvs So cateerieeneniestd eee wee seuwanmeens 219 Rendering surround projectS 00 ccc cece eee eee teens 221 Creating a DVD with DVD Architect Software 2 000 cee ees 222 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10 y Using Advanced Video Features e 223 Ge 6 8 Ta Kee eee mare a Oe an Oo ae 223 CLODDING stabs tees thee beastie a eeo eae se hear eel ee ee eens Oe 224 B zier MASKS erene eaea ena eer eee eee Saar Se RG eee ea ewes Bee oe eee 225 MOLING amet 0 aca eee soled elec eA NE ee Se ae te ee ee ek eae dts oe aaah atch a 225 Adding animalon resres era eet eae be
280. e IDE vs SCSI While this was a big issue just a few years ago it has fortunately faded in importance Hard drives can be hooked up to your computer in a number of ways with the two largest divisions being IDE and SCSI This interface simply determines how much data can be transferred to and from the drive in a second The interface almost always far outstrips the performance of even the best hard disks and even the slower interfaces exceed the transfer requirements of video data SCSI hard disks are usually more expensive and require a special controller and while SCSI 2 promises 80MB sec transfer rates this is overkill for most people Newer IDE hard disks with designations of EIDE DMA Ultra 7DMA ATA 33 and ATA 66 and newer drives that came out after this writing can all handle most sustained video requirements CPU and RAM memory While the CPU and the RAM are probably the most important overall aspects of a PC s speed and performance these factors are only third on the list for video For the most part these critical components do not affect the capture or playback of video This does not mean that a faster CPU or more RAM will not help because bigger and faster is always better CPU and RAM definitely impact rendering speeds Creating a final AVI file especially in a movie project that uses a lot of effects and transitions can take a long time A thirty minute movie could easily take six or more hours to render depending on the form
281. e Surround Panner window 4 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 216 D 4 Note You cannot automate muting including channels nnn HT WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 219 5 Close the Surround Panner window A keyframe with the pan settings you created appears below the track at the cursor position E OG 6 SLF Xel vol 0 0908 S Bus A 00d d G E E E 4 ew keyframe o O V Tip You can also add keyframes by double clicking the keyframe row or by right clicking the row and choosing Add Point from the shortcut menu Once you ve added the keyframe double click it to adjust panning settings in the Surround Panner window As you add keyframes to a track or bus track the Surround Panner window shows the path of the panning keyframes The Smoothness slider controls the smoothness of the interpolation path between the keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 220 E E TTT T L THH lll IHH EE aT HHHH ID IT eee TTT Pan Add Channels 0 dB Center he rN Add Channels 0 dB Center RT Add Channels 0 dB Center th The Surround Panner window shows the path of the panning keyframes Working with keyframes After you add keyframes you can work with them in much the same way as envelope points For more information see Composite level automation video only on page 161 Moving keyframes Drag a keyframe t
282. e cursor position on the selected track and to specify the space between pasted events 1 Copy a selection to the clipboard Paste Repeat 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Repeat The Paste Repeat Number of times to paste 5 dialog appears Paste spacing End to end 3 Specify the number of times to paste the clipboard contents Even spacing and the space between successive copies paste every 1 000 SCE Using paste insert When using paste insert clipboard events are placed at the cursor position on the selected track and existing events on all tracks are moved further down the timeline by the total length of pasted information This action differs from post edit ripple mode because pasting in post edit ripple mode affects only the tracks in which material is pasted while paste insert affects all tracks in the project 1 Copy a selection to the clipboard 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste Insert Clipboard contents Events before paste insert Events after paste insert 00 00 19 29 ald i a d HIR adaa T T ii it bi Events on all tracks not just tracks with pasted material are pushed down the timeline DU 0UZ129 f E 0000 29 24 E a DUDU 29 l l l __1 __ 00 00 19 29 O0 00 24 29 Punching in and crossfading events You can insert events into the middle of on top of existing events without altering the timing of the project When the
283. e detent eotaxin 234 Eliminating out of range Colors lt eee eee eee ees 235 Working in HDV Tomat cece eee cece cece e teen eee e eens eeeaaes 236 Choosing a capture elan iia oie ee ee a le ee 236 Creating intermediate files 0 0 0 ccc eee e 236 Replacing intermediate files with HDV source for HD delivery 22220000ee cues 237 Modifying video properties 0 eee eee eee eee 238 Modifying project video properties 2 ccc eee eee ees 238 Modifying media file properties 000 eee eee eae eeeees 239 Modifying output properties anna nnr rannen 240 Using Video FX Compositing and Masks 241 WISIN VICE Ol CMCCLS iain data bette i clae a ues ea aid tional bab Awtal ai hahaa gial hag he ia eee 241 Adding a video effects pIUG IN 0 ccc eee eee teen eee eens 242 Working with video effects plug in chains lt lt e cece cece eee eee eee eeeees 244 Modifying a video effects plug in n annona nannan nenn 246 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 11 Saving custom plug in settings as a preset e cece ees 246 Using keyframe animation with plug ins e c eee teens 246 Using generated MCCA rsrsrsrsrs ednewe tae eats eae yaw Oise eee aoe 247 Adding a generated media event 2 ccc ee ee ee eee eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeaneees 247 Duplicating a generated media event 0 0 cece eee ee eee eee e eee e eee e eens 248 COMPOSING 2iaintsances 6
284. e eee eee eee eee 96 Selecting a lime range 223 ete lOa la sieede Geld a a en i ee i es 97 LOOPING AVI ACIGe bite ahetreotea a ee amp addy atoms e uses eranted ceded tre ure dedia asd eat eece 98 Selecting events and a time range 2 ccc eee eee eee eee 98 IG OC UIMIG ha CKay E E E AT EEE E aA eke Stes eee aus Sopa oe AT OD Qe eee eeu oa 98 Selecting groups of composited tracks ssas asnan oorr eee eee eee eee 99 Sesi CV Cl lisateaased teat aes ah ee owen ete eee Be a eae Re ee 99 CODYINO CVENS tenra rnEeE great sree aca atais See Pe a a ee a eee a oe oe a ea ee ae Ee 99 CUHING CVENIS cs0 een neua Meee eee tee dee Fema owmet dade aSe enw mereiwae dee eased 100 Pasting EVENS 2 o6c cee cease Bee ee eee et ote ote a E oe 101 D plicatng SCV CIS csc Adee te Eke eke Seton Siew a a Sat ent aE e give ea doa da a deta oe ene 103 Inserting empty events and time 0000 cece eens 103 B baisais iiae Rn 44 6026 sso deudiacied eet setae tashuaaneieeiaedwedeidieeteiteite id 103 SPIUNG COVEN Z 4 6 R de Sou R R E EA Smt REER bce Bache RR ava we AR eee 105 Slipping and sliding events eee eth tee ide eer a hea ed Gee bee perder dee gs 107 Detecting and repairing audio and video synchronization problems 000000 109 Deleting Oven 0 cits TE aR bent aa pan attests pee eT a a a tes TE Ea TE ds 109 Applying post edit rippleS 0 ccc eee eens 110 Applying a post edit ripple manually e e nanan n nnnm annn 111
285. e files on disk to look for updated media properties If the values stored in the media library and the files on disk do not match the Media Manager will prompt you to choose the values you want to keep Select the Ignore file dates when checking for changes check box if you want to scan all files When the check box is cleared only files that have been modified since the last update will be scanned You can also use the Update button to check your media library for offline files CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER gy Thumbnails tab Thumbnail sftb files are used to represent image and video files in the Media Manager Use the Thumbnails tab to edit settings for saving and using thumbnails Preference Description Thumbnail Caching Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate how you want to store thumbnails for image and video files Store thumbnails in common folder choose this setting if you want to store all thumbnails in a single folder When you store thumbnails in a common location you can view media thumbnails even if the media is not available if you store media on a removable drive or network folder for example Store thumbnails with media files choose this setting if you want to store thumbnails each media file s thumbnails in the same folder as the media When you store thumbnails with media files adding media files from a removable drive or network folder can be much faster because the Media Manager does not nee
286. e in the timeline or track view This area contains all of a project s events For more information see Using the track view on page 62 Le P are ene alr her rar oar ire er array pr E rary hr a re rp gay pppn Transport bar controls The transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on and previewing your project se Record into track gg Pause project playback T Loop playback m Stop playback Ip Play from beginning of project iq Move cursor to start of project Play project from cursor position p Move cursor to end of project CHP 1 INTRODUCTION jj Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the main program window and displays Record Time 015235 information about roughly how much space is left on your computer to record audio Record Time During the rendering processes the left side of the status bar also contains information about the progress of the render The Video Preview window also has its own status bar that displays project specific information For more information see Understanding the Video Preview window on page 287 Scrub control The scrub control is used to play your project forward or Drag either forward or backward for editing purposes You may adjust playback speed pae aon PR backward for playback by setting the speed control marker located beneath the scrub A
287. e original event information edits and other modifications 1 Select the events to be copied For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 96 2 Select a time range if applicable 3 Click the Copy button Copying selected events When copied selected events are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not change 00 00 19 23 O0 00 24 23 CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 100 Copying a time selection Events within the time selection and across all tracks are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not a g change be 4 i LUN ii Copying atime selection and events Events and portions of selected events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy The original events are not affected and do not x Chande Cutting events Cutting events removes them from their respective tracks but places the cut information events and time on the clipboard Once on the clipboard you may paste the information into your project Tip You can apply a ripple ed
288. e placement size and orientation of the overlay video through time The blue and gray rectangular overlay in the middle represents the video on the track The selection box in the workspace is used to represent the orientation of the track You can also use 3D compositing to move tracks through space For more information see 3D Compositing on page 252 Track Motion Track 2 Preset Untitled Keyframe presets EET Source Aha TOI St iSi Y Controls ee E Position A xi 0 00 Y 0 00 Width 720 00 Track area Height 480 00 s te ar S E we ote Orientation Angle Rotation Angle x Offset Y Offset Keyframe Smoothness 10 00 00 00 00 29 29 00 00 59 28 00 01 29 29 00 A H H H H H H H H H H H H ll J T H H H ll ell H ell H H ell ral T H el el ll el el el ll ell aol ll i T H ee ee ee eee Laas Position M 2D Shadow M 2D Glow Keyframe controller 00 00 00 00 Controlling track motion 1 Click the Track Motion button m on the track that contains the overlay that you want to animate The Track Motion window is displayed 2 Adjust the selection area to change the viewable area of the track and its position in space Guides are displayed in bold to indicate how the track will be moved or rotated Moving closer to or farther Dragging the track Rotating around the from viewer Drag across Z axis corners to flip the track 3 Use the buttons at th
289. e provided HDV MPEG 2 render templates unmodified in any way is required to successfully print to HDV tape nnn Load your HDV project To print just a portion of your project make a time selection in the timeline From the Tools menu choose Print Video to HDV Tape The HDV Print to Tape Device page is displayed Choose your HDV camera or deck from the Device drop down list Click Next The HDV Print to Tape Select Format File page is displayed Choose the file you want to print a Select the Use an existing file radio button b In the File path box type the path to the file you want to print or click the Browse button to choose the file you want to print 7 Click Next The HDV Print to Tape Device Control page is displayed 8 Select the Manual or Use device contro radio button to indicate whether Vegas software will have control of your HDV recorder e Select Manual if your HDV device is not OHCI compliant or if the application is unable to obtain device control of your HDV recorder You will need to cue the tape and press the Record button on your HDV recorder before recording e Select Crash Recording if you are using an OHCI compliant EEE 1394 HDV device and the application is able to obtain device control of your HDV recorder Recording will begin automatically at the specified timecode position when you click Finish 9 Click Finish CHP 17 e If you re using Manual mode a dialog w
290. e rate is determined by the final destination of the movie See your video capture card s manual for more information The final rendered multimedia file can have a different frame rate from the project itself Field order Video that is displayed on a television monitor is interlaced This means that every frame of video is actually composed of two fields each of which is made up of half of the lines that make the final frame These two fields are woven together in alternate lines but which of the two fields is displayed first can be important Choose None progressive scan to ignore interlacing for video to be displayed on a computer For video on a television most hardware supports Lower Field First If the output is jittery or shaky on a television or your hardware s manual specifies it choose Upper Field First Pixel aspect ratio A pixel is a single picture element or dot on a television or computer screen Computers display pixels as squares 1 0 Televisions display individual pixels as rectangles 0 909 0 899 or anything other than square Using the wrong pixel aspect ratio can result in distortions or stretching of the video Select the aspect ratio for the final movie s destination Consult your hardware manual if you are in doubt about the appropriate ratio The pixel aspect ratio and frame size determine the frame s aspect ratio Video format Codec which stands for COmpressor DECompressor is the mathematical algorithm
291. e routed among the five main speakers or to an additional subwoofer CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 210 r Setting up surround hardware Before you create surround projects you should set up your system to provide 5 1 surround playback To play a 5 1 surround project you must have an appropriate speaker setup such as e Six powered speakers e Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier Your system must also have an appropriate sound card setup such as e 5 1 compatible sound card e Sound card with three stereo outputs e Three stereo sound cards There are several ways to set up your system depending on the sound card and speaker setup you are using Six powered speakers Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier 5 1 compatible Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s front rear and center subwoofer sound card outputs as indicated by your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on a six channel amplifier documentation home theater receiver Connect front rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier Sound card with Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on three stereo outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of a six channel amplifier nome theater receiver Connect front outputs channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is the rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier center channel
292. e that mouths and words do not quite match in shots of people speaking Longer stretches of time show larger discrepancies in synchronization Changing the timecode displayed on an event is not equivalent to converting a video to another format You cannot convert NTSC video at 29 97 fps to PAL video at 25 fps by simply changing the timecode To convert NTSC video to PAL video in Vegas software you need to re render the video in the new format In this situation the conversion process necessarily results in some frames of video actually being removed from the original sequence SMPTE timecode types The following are descriptions of each of the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE timecode types SMPTE 25 EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE 25 EBU timecode runs at 25 fps and matches the frame rate used by European Broadcasting Union EBU television systems Use SMPTE 25 EPU format for PAL DV D1 projects APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 374 _ SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Frame timecode runs at 29 97 fps and matches the frame rate used by NTSC television systems North America Japan Use SMPTE Drop Frame format for NTSC DV D1 projects Both SMPTE Drop and SMPTE Non Drop run at 29 97 fps In both formats the actual frames are not discarded but they are numbered differently SMPTE Drop removes certain frame numbers from the counting system to keep the SMPTE clock
293. e to choose a different shape for the interpolation curve The shortcut menu provides six options Linear Fast Slow Smooth Sharp and Hold Selecting Hold from the shortcut menu prevents any animation from being interpolated between two keyframes The color of the keyframe indicates which interpolation curve is being used O00 00 00 OOOO 0129 OOOO S29 OOOO 0529 oo ES Sue rr i ham Linear gray b Light Rays t Black and white CUL BBE meee COPY Tal kE D O O Fast green S Slow gold OO 00 00 27 Delete Smooth lilac Linear poet Sharp pink Slow KA Hold red Sharp Hold Changing the relative spacing of keyframes You can change the relative positions of the keyframes as a group This can be useful if you need to change the overall length of an animated sequence or if you need to copy a set of keyframes to another event that has a different duration than the original 1 Click on the first keyframe hold the key and click on the last keyframe in the sequence to select all of the keyframes 2 Hold Alt and drag the first or last keyframe to scale the keyframes When copying keyframes from longer events to shorter events you must temporarily lengthen the duration of the shorter event so that all of the keyframes appear on the keyframe controller Once you have pasted the keyframes you can rescale the keyframes using the above procedure and
294. e top of the dialog to allow or prevent movement or scaling For more information see Changing editing options on page 282 4 The track motion occurs instantly and the results are updated in the Video Preview window CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 282 p ___ 5 Use the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Track Motion window to establish distinct track motion settings throughout the duration of the track During playback immediate frames are interpolated to create smooth motion Expand the Keyframe interpolation heading on the left side of the window and drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the interpolation For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 Using the track motion shortcut menu When you right click anywhere in the Track Motion window a shortcut menu appears Restare View Restore View returns the workspace display to its original state Restore Rotation p L H E Si N Restore Box returns the overlay to its original state size rotation and hee position l Flip Horizontal Restore Rotation returns the overlay to its unrotated state Flip Vertical Match Output Aspect Restore Size returns the overlay to its original size Make Square Aspect Restore Center moves the overlay to the center of the frame Flip Horizontal flips the overlay backwards or left to right Flip Vertical flips the overlay upside down Match Output Aspect sets the aspect ratio to the fr
295. e you d like to display as a column heading 4 Select the Type box and choose Text or Integer from the drop down list to indicate whether you ll store text or numeric data in the column 5 If you want to remove a custom column select an entry in the list and click the Delete Selected Columns button XI The column and all data stored in the column is removed from the library 6 Click the OK button The column is added to the media library and the Search Results pane is scrolled to the right to display your new column Editing a column s contents Some columns in the Search Results pane can be edited When an entry in the Search Results pane is selected click a box to make it editable You can then type new information in the box Changing a column s contents affects only the entry in the current media library Click the Save Tags and Properties to Files button to save the properties with the media file Showing thumbnails If yow re working with videos or still images the thumbnail view helps you see the files that match your search criteria To switch to thumbnail view click the down arrow 7 next to the Change Search Results View button and choose Thumbnail You can drag the slider at the bottom of the Search Results pane to adjust the size of the thumbnails When you select a file the thumbnail is magnified You can change the zooming behavior on the Thumbnail tab of the Media Manager Options dialog You
296. each sample The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Channels You can render a project in either stereo or mono Exporting a movie to a PSP TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software If you want to render your project to Sony AVC AAC format and transfer it to a USB connected PSP PlayStation Portable system you can do this using the Vegas Export to PSP feature UD Note PSP firmware version 2 0 is required to use this feature To check your firmware version choose Settings gt System Settings gt System Information on the PSP For the latest firmware go to http us playstation com in the United States or http www playstation com outside the United States a SSG a aa a a a T ee O Note If you re using high resolution video choose Best from the Full resolution rendering quality drop down list on the Video tab of the Project Properties dialog before exporting your movie to prevent resizing artifacts ps 1 Click in the timeline to position your cursor on the frame you want to use to represent your movie This image will be displayed as a thumbnail on the PSP navigation system SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 CN 2 Connect the USB cable and AC adapter to the PSP system and place it in USB mode 3 From the Tools menu choose Export to PSP PlayStation Portable The
297. ecessarily recorded with the new audio Recording does not alter any of the source media files in your project Even when recording into an existing event you are not overwriting the data in that event Instead the data is recorded into a new take for that event and saved to a media file on your hard drive Setting up your equipment There are numerous ways to connect your equipment to your system Refer to your equipment s documentation for specific setup instructions The following are some possible general configurations Basic setup This setup includes a simple microphone and speaker that are connected to the computer s sound card With a more sophisticated microphone you would typically want to use a preamplifier for input to the sound card Sound card out Sound card in CHP 11 RECORDING AUDIO 200 7 Setup with mixer This setup includes a mixer where the speaker and microphone connect The mixer is then connected to the computer s sound card Mixers usually have pre amps built into them This diagram does not show you an instrument or a physical preamplifier such as a rack mounted component The reason for this omission is because these types of setups vary widely based on your mixer instrument and pre amp type Refer to your components documentation for specific setup configurations Mixer out Sound card out Sound card in x Mixer in Setup with digital multitrack This setup includes a
298. ect avi D My Network Save as type Video for Windows avi NN 4 Tip If your source media is in DV format select a DV Template NTSC DY Description Audio 48 000 Hz 16 Bit Stereo PCM template For more information see Working in DV oe ee format on page 2 3 4 C Save project as path reference in rendered media a You can customize the rendering settings by clicking ee aoa aia ait E S Save project markers in media file C u sto mMm v For more information 1 See Cus ctomizing the 4 Render using networked computers rendering process on page 311 6 Select any check boxes as needed e Select the Save project as path reference in rendered media check box to save the path to your Vegas project in the rendered file Saving the project path allows you to easily return to the source project if you use 1 your rendered file in another project The check box will be unavailable if vou haven t saved your project or if you re rendering using a third party file format plug in For more information see Project references in rendered media files on page 58 e Select the Render loop region only check box to render only the portion of your project within the loop selection e Select the Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox check box to adjust the aspect ratio so the output frame is filled on all edges Clear the check box to maintain the current aspect ratio and add black borders to
299. ect elements or everything in the timeline The power lies in the fact that you can apply this post edit ripple to a wide variety of editing tasks such as trimming crossfading cutting pasting and deleting events You can also choose to apply your ripple edits manually or automatically You can ripple the contents of the timeline following an edit after performing these tasks trimming pg 103 slip trimming pg 107 and sliding pg 108 events time compressing stretching events pg 129 cutting events pg 100 pasting events pg 101 deleting events pg 109 Ripple editing also affects how material is added from the Trimmer window For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page 132 The original four events ee acne geca Se wena seas ue eee Le a Q ae N Trimming the second event EERE e E dope E ee yell F 9 N After applying a post edit ripple the third and fourth events close the gap renee EERO T ee Le N ha 9 3 A quick and easy method is also provided for shuffling a sequence of events on a track Decide that the third event in a series should really be the second instead You can drag the event to a new position and instruct the software to shuffle the events into their new order BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 11 1 Applying a post edit ripple manually 1 Perform one of edits discussed above Above the timeline an arrow indicates Se T pot star where the post edit ri
300. ected envelope points to a new position To deselect envelope points click anywhere in the event that is not part of Drag to select envelope points the envelope di CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION 166 r Cutting copying and pasting envelope points 1 6 Select the Envelope Edit Tool button Click within a track to select it Drag along the timeline to select envelope points 2 3 4 5 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy Click to position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points Click within a different track if you want to paste envelope points to another track From the Edit menu choose Paste The envelope points are pasted in the new position Copying an envelope to another track 1 Select the Envelope Edit Tool button The Envelope Edit tool is active 2 Click within a track to select it The original 3 From the Edit menu choose Select All EHS HHE P 4 From the Edit menu choose Copy and the newly Aem See pasted copy S 5 Click within a track to select it 6 Click Go to Start _ if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original track or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste The envelope is pasted on the track Locking envelopes to events Track envelopes extend for the length of a track and are independent of the events on the track This means that the en
301. ection button to the right of the Stream list This adds an entry to a file called vegas video profiles ini that can be referenced for future use The following properties appear in the Stream properties section of the Media tab e If the file has more than one stream of the given type you can choose the particular stream for which you want to view properties from the Stream drop down list e The Attributes Format and Frame rate boxes display basic information about the file e Choose an option from the Field order drop down list to control how the video field order is handled on a television monitor Choose None Progressive for video to be viewed on a computer monitor For DV output choose Lower Field First If the output is jittery or shaky or your hardware s manual specifies it choose Upper Field First For more information see Interlacing and field order on page 371 e While you can choose a different value from the Pixel aspect ratio drop down list this value should always match the source video s properties e The option selected in the Alpha channel drop down list determines how transparency is handled in a file The default alpha channel setting for most video files is None PNG image files can have an alpha channel that is automatically detected The options in this drop down list are described below Alpha channel option Description Undefined Because the image format provides no alpha channel information this setting
302. ed wm Format Windows Media Video Y9 OF wmv wt Template Description 4udio 96 Kbps 44 100 Hz Stereo Video 30 fps 640x480 WMV Y9 Compression Use this setting For high quality video playback From a CD ROM Render loop region only Estimated size 3 3 7MB Stretch video to Fill output frame Free space 19 5566 Fast video resizing Use an existing File Play movie inside web page Include movie player installer IES Burn mode CS Burn CDs Test First then burn CDs Test only do not burn CDs Burn speed 4 0 w BURNING CDS CHP 19 a 361 2 Select the options for burning the multimedia CD e Choose the appropriate format and template for rendering the project from the Format and Template drop down lists e Select the Render loop region only check box to burn only a portion of your project e Select the Stretch video to fill output frame check box to have your video reformatted so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area letterboxing e Clear the Fast video resizing check box if you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but it increases rendering time significantly e Select the Play movie inside web page check box to create an HTML page and embed the finished video in it
303. edia projects can be very complex and since Vegas project files are so small saving a number of different versions of a project is a low risk way to try new techniques 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 3 Type a new name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button on the Save As dialog Saving a project with media The option of saving both the project file VEG and the media files to a common location is also provided You can choose to save all media files along with the project file or allow Vegas software to consolidate and trim the media for you With this second option media storage is optimized by saving only those portions of files that are used in the project and by eliminating unused takes aaaea Note Peak files sfk and audio proxy files sfapO are not saved with the project when Copy and trim media with project is selected Because these files can regenerate as needed they do not need to be archived For more information see Peak File sfk on page 383 or Audio proxy files sfapO on page 371 S a From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project Type the project name in the File name box Select the Copy and trim media with project check box Click Save The Copy Media Options dialog appears Oo oR U N
304. edit without worrying about corrupting your source files This not only gives you a strong sense of security but it also gives you the freedom to experiment the New Project wizard This feature is available only in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software A Vere Movie Studio can help you get started quickly and easily with your new project the New Project wizard This wizard guides you through the process of creating your project file specifying a location selecting your desired ouput standard NTSC or PAL and your output format if you know it These selections help Vegas Movie Studio to ensure that your project is set up appropriately To start the New Project wizard choose New from the File menu and follow the steps to set up your project You can click the Finish button on any dialog to end the wizard and use the current settings You can change project settings at any time while working on a project From the File menu choose Properties to change any of these settings Starting a new project CHP 2 1 From the File menu choose New If you are using the full version of Vegas the New Project dialog appears Continue to step 2 If you are using Vegas Movie Studio the New Project wizard starts Follow the steps to set up your project a Note The first time you run the software a new project will automatically be started for you aa E GETTING STARTED 4y 2 Enter your project settings on
305. eee 133 Adding and saving regions and markers to a media Tile cece eee eee eens 135 Opening a file in an external audio editor from the Trimmer e eee 136 Creating a SUID UI ss Se Fhe cy hrc aa reat ela td es eel cg cre A aig cide a caters 136 Selecting a subclip in tts parent Media 0 00 cee eee eee eens 137 Removing red eye from stillS e 137 Using the Edit Details window 2 0 eee eee eens 138 Viewing the Edit Details WINdOW 000 ccc eee eee 138 Customizing the Edit Details WINdOW 0 ccc eee eens 140 VVOMKING WILT R ce 4006 vane ot erae dade dnengeonad we 141 Managing TRACKS or tira Sonhdirsinsh ice took hh a lee gene aes E GM Ach she ny ti lie ein 141 Inserting an empty track vasa ca lt ne as eae een alee She ose and We eee eee ee ews 141 EIPIGAMING Ka e ssyssku ei oh ele he a hie etka tad oh ta chien ae eae 141 Deleting a Te sate te hte host he pee teed eee cee eed eat ee eet a eos 142 Naming OF FENAMING A TACK gas 5cnriccce aha 6 6g eet ss eodeird ecard eaadd anedd apdrane dara E deeds deen dears 142 Organizing Sel vias eed pds eria ebs6 6608 Sen eee toed e Od E a E 142 FREORGEMING TRACKS seoser Bb Mates ond S02 as es er tiem Se boda eed ee 142 Changing Wack Color 2a veaticse ca ee eS eh ae de ues Stee tae eee etek tek Gaetano ee 143 TABLE OF CONTENTS G Changing track el 143 Using the Tack IS tee cts Seth wh R Jer es Steed Sean heh e la pect le Wee E Nee 144 Using the volu
306. eferences The settings that you apply to the toolbar remain set until you change them again Hiding and displaying the toolbar If you prefer to use shortcut keys when working with your project you may hide the toolbar to create more workspace Choose Toolbar from the View menu to hide it The check mark next to the command is removed and the toolbar disappears The toolbar remains hidden until you choose Toolbar from the View menu to display it again CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 r 338 Reordering toolbar buttons You can change the main toolbar s button order to suit your preferences The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available on the main toolbar You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears Customize Toolbar Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Separator Separator nave As JE Normal Edit Tool I Render As 29 Envelope Edit Tool W Delete Trim Crop G Lock Event Separator gt Play a What s This Help 1 Pause Separator 4 2 In the Current toolbar buttons list select the button that you want to move and click Move Up or Move Down 3 Click Close to save the toolbar changes and close the dialog Adding buttons to the toolbar A series of buttons are included that you may add to the main toolbar These buttons are li
307. effects 147 Bus send 147 186 Pan 145 track 144 Fading in out Mixer controls 188 Field order 238 371 Filters See Video effects Focus 95 Force resample 173 Frame freeze 104 172 178 Frame numbers 329 Frame by frame cursor movement 95 Freeze frame 104 172 178 General editing 95 123 Event vs file 60 General preferences 336 Generator Adding 247 Duplicating 248 window 28 Generic control surface setup 348 Glossary 377 388 Glow 284 Grid lines Safe areas 293 Snapping events to 125 Spacing 331 Grouping events 179 180 Adding to groups 180 Clearing groups 180 Creating new groups 179 Moving grouped events 61 Removing events from a group 180 Selecting events in groups 180 Suspending grouping 180 Hardware Routing surround to 211 Setting up for surround 210 HDV format 236 HDV tape printing to 323 326 Hiding showing Bus tracks 188 Toolbar 334 Histogram 297 Hold keyframe 275 IEEE 1394 DV capture cards 234 302 375 Ignore event grouping 180 Image masks 258 Images Automatically crossfading 227 Capturing in Vegas 227 288 Correcting for DV pixel aspect ratios 226 Creating for use in Vegas 226 Creating masks from 258 Creating titles from 228 Default length 227 Working with 226 Zooming in on 277 Importing AAF files 54 Audio CD tracks 50 broadcast wave files 54 CD Architect files 352 from DVD camcorder 55 Media 48 media file
308. eful for panning mono source material As you move the fader from side to side this model creates the illusion of the source moving around the listener from one side to the other in a semi circle This model uses a constant power panning curve You can add a pan envelope to automate panning changes For more information see Composite level automation video only on page 161 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Assignable effects chains are made up of one or more plug ins that are used to add audio effects to a track s signal You can adjust the level of a track that is sent to an assignable effects chain using the multipurpose slider in the track list The multipurpose slider can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall assignable effects send level for the track or it can adjust assignable effects automation settings For more information see Adjusting assignable effects automation levels on page 158 1 Click the Automation Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected Ao eo 6 2 Click the label on the multipurpose slider to display a drop down list ores a 3 Choose the assignable effects chain that the track will use Sle ase 4 Drag the slider to adjust the level of the track sent to the assignable effects Bus A Inf chain a Note Assignable effect sends are post volume by default To change t
309. el or in mono from the right channel If you are using the Microsoft Windows Classic Wave Driver you also must select the device from which the track will record Selecting recording settings for Sound Mapper 1 Click the Record Device Selector button ba A menu appears 2 From the menu choose the recording method Stereo Left or Right BB music bl G dh TE 3 Stereo a Selecting recording settings for Windows Classic Wave Driver 1 Click the Record Device Selector button 1 1 A menu appears 2 Choose either Stereo or Mono from the menu 3 From the submenu choose the input device SH 1 OG dG OC Input Monitor K Vol 0 0 dB v Stereo Default Input Analog Mix L Default Input Analog Mix F Input 1 f4nalog Mix L Input 1 Analog Mix R Input 2 Mix L Input 2 Mix R Input 3 Mix FL Input 3 Mix FR Input Mix RL Input Mix RR RECORDING AUDIO CHP 11 203 Using the metronome A built in metronome marks time to help with the timing and tempo when recording a performance The metronome s sound is not mixed in the final rendering of the project Use the Preview fader in the Mixer window to control the metronome volume For more information see Using the Mixer Preview fader on page 182 To use the metronome from the Options menu choose Metronome r aai Tip You can customize the sound of the metronome in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more informat
310. en the incoming signal is too high to be represented as a digital value The result is distortion in the recording A clipped signal will be indicated by a red Clip warning at the top of the meters Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu to adjust the display of the meters Using record input monitoring TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software If you re using an ASIO audio device and you want to hear your recording signal with real time track effects you can turn on input monitoring To turn on input monitoring click the Record Device Selector button 4 or 1 and choose Input Monitor from the menu and then choose Auto or On from the submenu During recording your signal will be played back with the current track effects chain but a dry unprocessed signal is recorded When Auto is selected you will hear the input monitor signal when playback is stopped and during recording If you re recording into selected events you ll hear the input monitor signal only when the cursor passes over the selected events CHP 11 RECORDING AUDIO 208 y When On is selected the behavior is similar to Auto mode but you will always hear the input monitor during recordinge monitoring is not toggled on and off when recording in to a selected event SH 1169 80 Input Monitor OFF Yol 2 1 dB Stereo K On Mona K Auto a Note Your ability to monitor effects in real time is dependen
311. ended Make sure that you save the alpha channel information for TGA and PNG which is used for transparency 6 Enter a name and click Save 7 Insert the image in a track just above the one with the video that will be in the background USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 229 8 Click the Compositing Mode button 8 on the title track and choose Source Alpha if your image has an alpha channel associated with it If it does not you may need to add a chroma key filter to the image and key out the background For more information see Chroma keying on page 264 ideo Preview En ee Best Auto H GO Project 720x480x32 29 970i Frame 75 Preview 360x240x32 29 970p Display 360x240x32 p Note The alpha channel is saved as a selection area in some programs If you cannot save the alpha channel use a black background and a mask will be created from the background The alpha channel of TGA images may not be detected automatically For more information see Modifying media file properties on page 239 SR Fading titles Another common technique is to fade a still title in and out You can create this effect by using an opacity envelope on a title event For more information see Using opacity envelopes on page 177 You can also create multiple title images and then use crossfades or custom transitions between them For more information see Using transition effects on page 268 Adding closed captionin
312. enu choose Render As 2 In the Render As dialog choose the format e g Video for Windows avi 3 Click Custom The Custom Template dialog appears a 4 Note Built in templates cannot be edited eee 4 Adjust the settings in each of the tabs as desired D 4 Note When determining bit rates 1K 1024 SS eS 5 Click OK to close the Custom Template dialog 6 Enter a name and location for the new file and click Save CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 312 p Saving custom settings as a template You can save customized rendering settings for future use One of the most important reasons to save a new template is to save the specific compression codec used to create the final media file since this is not predetermined by the project properties 1 Modify the parameters in the Custom Template dialog a Note When determining bit rates 1K 1024 EE T 2 In the Template drop down list enter a name for the new template mnn Note Built in templates cannot be edited ee 3 Click the Save Template button To use the new template in the future choose it from the Template list in the Save As dialog a Tip To delete a template select it from the drop down list and click the Delete button X aaa TN Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files The options that appear in the Custom Template dialog depend on which format you choose for your rendered file T
313. equency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz produce aliasing distortion in the sample if an anti aliasing filter is not used while recording OPT Plug In A plug in that uses Open Plug in Technology OPT standard from Yamaha OPT plug ins provide tools for working with MIDI such as edit views effect processors and filters arpeggiators and real time panel automation Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers Peak File sfk Vegas software displays the waveform of audio files graphically on a computer monitor This visual information must be generated by Vegas software when the audio file is opened and can take a few seconds Vegas software then saves this information as a peak file sfk This file stores the information for displaying waveform information so that opening a file is almost instantaneous The peak file is stored in the directory in which the file resides and has an sfk extension If the peak file is not in the same directory as the file or is deleted Vegas software regenerates it the next time you open the file Pixel Aspect Ratio Computers display pixels as squares 1 0 Televisions display individual pixels as rectangles 0 9091 NTSC DV D1 1 0926 PAL DV D1
314. er If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 167 Adding or removing track effect automation Ti This feature is only available in the full version of Vegas software If a plug in supports automation you can dynamically adjust effect parameters over time Adding or removing effect automation envelopes If a plug in supports automation you can use envelopes to adjust effect parameters over time The appearance of the plug in in the Plug In Chooser window indicates whether the plug in supports automation Plug ins with this icon 4 support automation while plug ins with this icon 5 1 do not In addition you can quickly locate plug ins that support automation in the Automatable subfolder 1 Click the Track FX button sff on a track to open the Audio Plug In window If no track effects exist clicking the Track FX button displays the Plug In Chooser Use the Plug In Chooser to create an effect chain including an automatable plug in 2 Click the Configure FX Automation button gt 1 to display the FX Automation Chooser 3 Click a plug in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser A list of the effect s automatable parameters appears CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION 160 r 4 Select the check box for each parameter that
315. er bus S N 1 Add a bus or assignable effect chain to the project For more information see Using the Mixer on page 181 2 Route tracks to the bus or assignable effect chain For more information see Using the Mixer on page 181 3 Click the Automation Settings button gt 1 on the mixer control you want to pan and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected 4 Double click the surround panner on the mixer control to display the Surround Panner window gt Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 bit EN RL age Insert Fx Z Insert Bus Surround PAnner TS a am nemmmninil CA Bus A Double click to display HHO E i O I the Surround Front Rear rt Panner window Inf Inf Inf Inf si 4 3 Inf Inf SS 15 BE 15 7B 1 21 15 4 27 2r S re 33 33 ae 39 39 ea 45 4 42 7 St 51 Lei lt 57 57 o B 0 0 of 0 0 od 00 5 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 216 6 Close the Surround Panner window a 4 Tip You can also use the surround panner on the mixer control to pan your track nnn CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 216 r Using the Surround Panner window Whether you re adjusting track panning or mixer control panning you use the same controls in the Surround Panner window View the Surround Panner window by double clicking a surround panner on a track header or mixer control Once the Surround Panner window is open you can dock it in the workspace For more in
316. es ET CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 22 JIII Deleting command markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the command marker The pointer changes to a hand icon d 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The command marker is removed from your project Working with CD layout markers Markers on the CD layout bar indicate the locations of tracks and indices in an audio CD layout project These markers are discussed in a later chapter For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 351 Working with the marker tool You can use the marker tool to navigate the marker bars and edit multiple selected markers 1 Click the Marker Tool button p in the top right corner of the timeline 2 Select the markers you want to edit e Press the Left Arrow Right Arrow keys to move to the previous next marker in the active bar marker region bar CD layout bar or command bar e Press Shift Left Arrow Right Arrow keys to extend the selection to the previous next marker e Press Shift while clicking two marker tags to select all markers between the two tags e Press Ctrl while clicking marker tags to select or deselect individual markers 3 Edit your markers e Dragging any selected marker will move all selected markers in the active bar as a group e Pressing Delete will remove all selected markers in the active bar The marker tool is inactive when you change focus to another
317. es dialog For more information on project properties see Working with project properties on page 333 For more information on preferences see Setting preferences on page oe ES S aaocaoaaaoaaajoaaoaoaaaaoaaooaoaoao _ GETTING STARTED Qe Selecting media Vegas software supports a wide range of media file types You may select any of the media file types listed below to add to your project Format Extension Definition Advanced Authoring aaf Multimedia file format that can be exchanged across products and Format platforms and retains metadata Available only in the full version of Vegas software CD Architect cdp CD Architect version 4 0 or higher project file Available only in the full version of Vegas software CD Audio cda Audio format used on compact discs Dialogic VOX ADPCM VOX The Dialogic audio format used in voice response systems Available only in the full version of Vegas software Edit Decision List txt A text file containing a master video recording s list of edits and corresponding timecode locations Available only in the full version of Vegas software GIF gif 256 index color lossless image and animation format widely used on the Internet Intervoice VC A proprietary audio file format from Intervoice Available only in the full version of Vegas software JPEG jpg True color lossy Internet image format Macintosh Audio aif Standard audio format developed by Apple and used on
318. es for keyframe animation 0 000 cee ees 277 Animating event panning and Cropping e e e e e e ee eee ees 277 Animating video effects plug ins 0 ccc eee eee eee eens 279 Animating Generated text ssri e elie het ea tea ed beet eet a eee adie 280 Adding Tack alet el io co tee eee Cotas oa oe Es ee EE OS 281 CONTOIMNO rack IMOUOM ic ine hese oid ce Shae 605 5 ate e E a dt oat a eee 281 Using the track motion Shortcut MENU 0 ees 282 Changing eding OOUONS 4 4 0nscmetadi tered occa cess ae Rie ee eee aeresuns tae ermes 282 Using keyframes in track MOTION lt eee eee eee eee ees 283 Creating a picture in picture effect 2 0c ccc eee eee eee eens 285 Anmating theoverlay sce Sc caaca ds diets s DiS Dpat ei Neni mi aiei cathe ea doe Goa dade ae eran 286 Previewing and Analyzing Video e cece eee 287 Understanding the Video Preview window e 287 Using the Video Preview window shortcut Menu lt e e eee 288 Optimizing the Video Preview WINdOW lt lt e cece eee eee eee e tenes 289 Reducing preview quality eat een See iw eee eae ee ee ee eee 289 Prerendennd VIGO 4 tate saweduee eed a eee res eee eas eee ese eet eda bee Reese AE 289 Building dynamic RAMI previeWS 000 cece cece cece eect ee eee eee eee 291 Using split screen previewing 0 ccc eee eee eee tenes 292 Previewing affected and unprocessed video 200 cece eee nenn nnmn
319. es when you aren t using any applications that use the Media Manager tool However the application will take longer to start when the check box is selected Add tags and custom properties Select this check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For from files more information about tagging media see Tagging media files on page 77 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 91 Use file and folder names to Select this check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path apply tags automatically For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d loops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved automatically If you need to modify the pattern matching you can edit the AutoTagPatterns xml file which is created in your My Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts Media Library tab Preference Description Delete Click this button to remove information about media relationships from your database Media relationships are maintained only when the Save media usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the Vegas Preferences dialog Update Click this button to scan the media files in your library and compare them to th
320. etched or compressed By maintaining the aspect ratio of the original the video is kept from becoming distorted by letterboxing or pillarboxing around the edges This is the default setting Reduce interlace flicker video only This switch can be useful in cases where the source material didn t originate as video and contains extremely high spatial or temporal frequencies When you watch the rendered interlaced output on video of this sort of media you may see flickering or crawling edges if this switch is not applied Resample video only CHP 8 Resampling allows Vegas software to interpolate frames in an event when the frame rate of a media file is significantly different from the project s frame rate Resampling may solve some interlacing problems and other jittery output problems For more information see Resampling video on page 232 Three options are provided for event level resampling 6 Smart resample Only resamples the event when the event frame rate does not match the project output frame rate This can occur either because the event has a velocity envelope or because the frame rate of the original media is different than the project frame rate Smart resample is the standard setting Force resample Always resamples the event regardless of its frame rate or the project s frame rate Disable resample Does not resample the event WORKING WITH EVENTS 174 r Accessing event properties The properties of an event
321. etting SS eee Scrubbing Scrubbing is a type of timeline playback that gives you precise control over the speed and direction of playback Both linear and logarithmic scale scrubbing are allowed For more information see General tab on page 336 The use of multimedia controllers is supported for scrubbing For more information on using the software with multimedia controllers please see the online help To access help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu i a Tip Choose a setting from the JKL shuttle speed drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to control the scrub speed and range when using the keyboard or multimedia controllers ee Four methods of scrubbing are provided GETTING STARTED CHP 2 69 Scrubbing with the playhead The playhead J above the timeline can be dragged back and forth to shuttle prag playhead to scrub forward or backward from the cursor position to locate an edit point 1000000 0000 15 00 UU 1001231272 mw Aa iaaa aaa a aaa jaa Tip Set in and out points while dragging the playhead by pressing the I and 0 keys SS a 4 Note The playhead is also available in the Trimmer window SS C TT Scrubbing with the scrub control slider The scrub control slider can be dragged back and forth The farther from the center that the slider is dragged the faster the playback both forward ee and in reverse Below the slider is a small yellow marker that
322. etting the automation recording mode for a track 1 Click the Automation Settings button in the track header and select Show Automation Controls 2 Click the Automation Settings button gt and choose a command from the menu to choose the automation mode Mode Track Icon Description Off X Automated parameters are ignored during playback When you switch to Off mode the control setting from the cursor position is used as a static setting and the envelope keyframe is dimmed to indicate that it is unavailable Read Gy The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control reflects the envelope keyframe settings at the cursor position Adjustments to the control are not recorded Automation Write Touch er The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control follows the envelope keyframe settings during playback and when you position the cursor Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope points keyframes are unaffected Automation Write Latch w The envelope keyframe value is applied during playback and the control follows the envelope keyframe settings during playback and when you position the cursor Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the co
323. event Selected event after before loop loop is applied Drag the right edge to extend the event CHP 8 WORKING WITH EVENTS 172 For video events turning off the Loop switch makes the last frame repeat for the duration of the event beyond its original length creating a freeze frame effect as in the middle example below The Loop switch is enabled for the event in the last example below PA a o S a a a a e T E TE The original three frame clip peeta R a S L N N a E Looping is off The elongated event repeats freezes the final frame epa E ca I le Looping is on The entire event repeats Invert phase audio only N This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software This switch inverts the audio event at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting an event while creating no audible difference is occasionally useful for matching transitions when mixing audio on separate tracks or fine tuning a crossfade You can also phase invert a track If a track is inverted and you invert an event on the track the event is doubly inverted restored to its original state For more information see Phase inverting a track audio only on page 148 ormalize audio only You may normalize an event to maximize its volume based on the waveform s highest peak without clipping the event during playback F Selected event Selected event after before normalize normalize is a
324. events on page 103 When you duplicate a generated media event you have two options e Select the Create a new copy of the source media radio button if PEDO you want the new event to be modified on its own The new event is completely independent of the original event e Select the Create a reference to the original media radio button to keep the new event linked to the original generated media event Any change to either event is mirrored in the other One or more events you have chosen to paste contains generated media What do you want to do Compositing Compositing is the process of mixing visual elements together into a final output In Vegas software this means mixing tracks together vertically Masks generated text and chroma keying all involve compositing Understanding how compositing works is important to understanding these and many other video track mixing techniques Understanding the parent child track relationship The key to understanding overlays masks transparency and compositing isto 557 SRM oh understand the parent child relationship between tracks In general terms the Level 100 0 00 Gt 4 parent track is the highest track in a group of tracks often only two and the _ behavior of the child tracks i e how they are composited together is _ S Cy oe g x l determined by the parent track Seh e R Ea You can also produce complex compositing by creating nested parent child Sm SR reo eroups with
325. every envelope point by 3 dB 1 Click the Automation Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected Tel Note The Automation Settings button is not available in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software In these versions of the software the Volume control in the track header always functions as a trim control for track volume envelopes pn T 2 Drag the Vol fader to control how loud a track is in the mix If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted As you drag the fader the volume level displays to the left of the fader Double click the fader to set it to 0 0 dB or double click the current volume value to enter a specific number Soundtrack Eo ert 1 Soundtrack EG ere OI Soundtrack EG het S 1 Voal 6 0 dB gK Voal 0 0 dB y vol WEA H Pan Center lt LIL Pan Center lt LIL Pan aan i Drag to change volume Double click the fader Double click the current level to to set to 0 0 dB enter a value WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 L 1 A 4 Tip Press while dragging or use the mouse wheel for finer control of the fader You can also move the fader by using the right or left arrow keys E Volume envelopes allow you to automate track volume changes For more information see Volume or pan automation audio only on page 156 Using the multipurpose slider audio only This slider controls several features including panning bus a
326. evices stutter when you begin playback as a result of the buffering process If your audio stutters when you start playback select this check box to prevent buffering audio information prior to playback Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used Adjusting this setting can help you synchronize the input and output for record input monitoring Record input monitoring is only available in the full version of Vegas software Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate the buffer size you want to use Choose MME to use the Playback buffering setting on the Audio Device tab in the Preferences dialog Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the priority that is assigned to your audio buffers Increasing the buffers priority can help you attain smoother playback but it can also adversely affect other processes Select this check box to enable the monitoring of your recording input through Vegas software while you are recording CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 344 yz Adjusting the playback buffering slider The playback buffer controls how much memory is used when playing back your project This preference is useful but must be carefully adjusted If you set the buffer size too high you may experience gapping during playback Conversely if you set the buffer size too low you may experience gapping as well because Vegas software has too little memory to work with during playback The playback buffer slider
327. extracted into one new file in the Project Media window nae Note If you want to extract multiple tracks to a single file choose Read by track from the Action drop down list to select your tracks and then choose Read by range from the Action drop down list The appropriate time range for the tracks you selected will automatically be inserted and the time range will be extracted to a single file ee 5 From the Drive drop down list choose the drive containing the audio CD from which you want to extract GETTING STARTED CHP 2 N 6 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to extract the audio If you experience any problems extracting audio you can try decreasing the selected speed or you can click Configure to adjust the Audio extract optimization setting aaas Note To eject the CD at any time prior to beginning the extraction process click the Eject button S N 7 Click OK The Save As dialog appears 8 Select a name and location for the new WAV file 9 Click Save to begin extracting the audio The track is extracted and a progress meter is displayed to indicate the percent complete Once extraction is complete the new WAV file appears in the Project Media window The option of automatically naming extracted tracks is provided for you To enable this option choose Preferences from the Options menu and on the CD Settings tab select the Autoname extracted tracks check box For more informatio
328. fectS 2 0c eee eee eee ees 268 Adding a thanSwlOn sieneen osina e ooe heat aint oa T E fot eeee tend ieee 268 Adding a transition to the end of an event 2 cee eee eee eee 269 Adding a transition to all selected events cc cee cette nent nent eeeaeee 269 Adding a transition progress envelope 2 eee e nnmnnn 270 Understanding track layers See Sak ele ie ORE SES Le EER Ghee ede ede eek dete ws 270 CONVENING aCut loa IraMSIVOM occtuakor hee ee eee eee ehhh each et actteg ieee a edt Se 271 Converting a crossfade or transition to a CUL e eens 271 PREVIEWING A AMNSIVOMN S c lt Sead had ein a eaten Gag back Shee Se dented aeaa ected d eR ei 272 MOGUVING a eler aaee 2 45 56 j heb a bok eh Se hee eae id ed le oe dad Goede 272 Saving custom settings aS a preset lt cc eee eee eee eee eeeees 272 Using keyframe animation 000 cece eee eee eens 273 Understanding the keyframe controller 0 00 cece eee eens 273 Addmnmg key rame s 1 2 5 lt 05 c13 ater tient on ade ce ce ei AGES hie ea eR eS eA O RNS 274 DeletinG KeEViraINeS lt lt 0sessarea ate eho A E A vee e r ET cae R E RTT 274 Navigating in the keyframe controller 00 0c cece eee eee eee eee eens 274 TABLE OF CONTENTS 12 y Modifying h a TTT 274 Creating keyframe presets lt e ccc eect eee ee eee eee eee ee eeees 275 Working with keyframes in track view lt e e cc eee eee eens 276 Sample us
329. ference Library drop down list in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine which library is opened when you click the Switch to Reference Library button w 1 Click the Switch to Reference Library button m The reference library specified in the Media Manager Options dialog is opened Media in a reference library is displayed in gray text to indicate that the files are not available on your computer a Tip To view the Media Manager Options dialog click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Options from the menu E Oo 2 Find the media you re looking for with a standard or advanced search 3 Tag media from the reference library as needed For more information on tagging see Tagging media files on page 77 4 When you select a file in a reference library the Product Information pane displays information about the selected file and a link you can use to purchase the media CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 84 Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library If you have the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media media from existing Sony Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is not installed by default but you can install it from the Vegas CD or download it from the Sony Media Sof
330. ffect name to determine whether the effect is processed before 4 or after E Vegas software pans or crops the event Yideo Event FX Yideo Event FX horses berm TSS Ecser 00 00 00 00 Here the Deform plug in is f Deform b Glow applied before the pan crop E The Glow and Color Curves plug ins are applied after the pan crop ai ee Bi A eaee 00 00 00 00 Removing a plug in 1 Click the FX button on the event track Project Media window file or Video Preview window that has the plug in applied to it The Video FX window appears 2 Click the plug in that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Selected Plug In button ideo Event FX T Yideo Event FX horses o i Cefarm Glow ma aje oh Remove Selected Plug In Preset Untitled w CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 246 gt Modifying a video effects plug in Video effects plug ins are highly customizable You can select from a variety of presets or adjust the settings for custom effects You can also save custom settings to be used again as a new preset 1 Click the FX button e 1 on the event track Project Media window file or Video Preview window that has the plug in applied to it The Video FX window appears 2 Select a preset from the Preset drop down list or adjust the parameters as needed For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help
331. ffect using keyframe animation CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 280 r Animating generated text You can add a generated text event to a project by dragging a text generator from the Media Generator window For more information see Using generated media on page 247 You can then animate the text by adding keyframes Not all attributes of generated text media can be animated using keyframes however You cannot for example morph one text message into a different one Some aspects can be easily and smoothly animated using the keyframe controller such as text color transparency leading tracking and position Other aspects of generated text do not allow interpolated keyframe animation For example if you set the text to One initially and then at five seconds change it to Two the text will suddenly jump to the new value at the five second keyframe This behavior is different from the behavior of other keyframe animation techniques In this example keyframes are used to make a title appear one letter at a time across the screen 1 Drag a text generator from the Media Generator window to the timeline 2 Right click the new event and choose Edit Generated Media 3 Enter the first letter of the title for example T 4 Click the keyframe controller at the 1 000 second mark and enter the second letter for example y The title now reads Ty A new keyframe appears in the keyframe controller at t
332. ffering slider on page 344 e Mute solo some of the events or tracks in the mix e Add more RAM to your computer Disk usage You may experience gapping when data is not being read off the hard drive fast enough Try the following to optimize disk usage e Fully defragment your audio hard drives regularly e Split audio usage between different physical hard drives not just different partitions of the same drive e Run fewer events simultaneously It is not how many tracks you have in the project but how many different events are playing simultaneously that matters e Make sure that you trim out any silent sections of events to minimize the wasted disk access e Use hard drives with fast seek times and spindle speeds of 7200 RPM or greater SCSI drives usually have better prolonged data transfer performance than IDE drives Under Microsoft Windows XP and Windows 2000 operating systems Vegas software can take advantage of SCSI asynchronous reads which can be a big performance advantage CPU usage If you have checked your RAM usage and disk usage and you are still experiencing gapping you can try to adjust how Vegas software utilizes the central processing unit CPU Try the following to optimize CPU usage e Zoom out Ctri fully on the track view while playing so that the screen does not have to scroll to keep the cursor on it e Run fewer DirectX or VST plug ins e Make sure that the peak files are built for all of the au
333. filter check box if you re previewing interlaced video on a noninterlaced display This filter can reduce the artifacts you often see on the edges of moving areas a Note The Apply deinterlace filter check box will be unavailable if your video adapter does not support pixel shading SS oS 8 If you want to adjust color reproduction for video previews use the color management controls a Select the Use color management check box b Select the Use Studio RGB check box if your source media conforms to studio RGB color black 16 and white 235 and you will be previewing on your computer s CRT or LCD monitor When the check box is selected the studio RGB range is expanded to 0 to 255 to conform to a computer display Clear the check box if you will be previewing on a TV monitor or if your source media does not conform to studio RGB color Codec Studio RGB Setting Sony DV On Microsoft DV Off Matrox DV Off MainConcept DV Off Canopus On Apple QuickTime DV Off c From the Monitor color profile drop down list choose the color profile that best matches your display You can obtain ICC ICM color profiles from the display manufacturer or you can create your own if you have a calibration system a 4 Note The Use color management check box will be unavailable if your video adapter does not support gamma adjustment EEE 9 Select the Recompress edited frames check box 10 To replace all custom functions with the default sett
334. formation see Window docking area and floating window docks on page 24 ELL Tip You can also choose Surround Panner from the View menu to display the Surround Panner window Once the Surround Panner window is displayed double click the surround panner for a track or mixer control to view its pan Settings ee Toggle options for constraining pan point movement Surround Panner Assign track bus to LFE channel H Muted channel Rl Active included channel Pan point 1 1 1 o S e e e TL ie DE L oe 1 1 1 Add Channels 0 dB Center 1 Click the speaker icons to mute or include channels Mutine a channel ensures that no audio bleeds through a channel For example you might want to mute all but the center channel when you re panning dialogue to the center channel a Tip click a speaker icon to solo the channel eR 2 Drag the pan point to position the sound within the sound field For more information see Moving the pan point on page 217 3 Click the center speaker icon to include the center channel and drag the Center fader to apply a gain to the center channel Applying a gain to the center channel may make dialogue more present in the mix nn Note When automating panning using keyframes you cannot automate the gain applied using the Center fader For more information see Automating panning on page 218 SS N 4 Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the interpolation path
335. from the Help menu by choosing Show Me How a 4 Tip To disable automatic display of the Show Me How tutorials clear the Show at Startup check box at the bottom of the tutorial window SS a gt INTRODUCTION CHP 1 21 Overview Vegas software is designed to be an easy to use program with many tools that provide power and flexibility when creating and working with multimedia files Many operations menu items and shortcut keys are consistent with other popular Microsoft Windows software applications The following sections provide a graphical tour of the Vegas workspace Main window This is the window that appears when the software is opened The work area is subdivided into three primary areas the track list the track view or timeline and the window docking area You can resize the track list track view and window docking area by dragging the dividers between them cut 1 with fades veg Sony Vegas 6 0 Menu bar File Edit View Insert Tools Options Help Toobar JS aga X YE a a TRE TIR AR av Time display ery E l aP Marker bar 00 00 20 18 lt vrr Ruler 00 00 00 00 l A 00 00 04 23 X A 00 00 03 29 L 00 00 14 23 A 133 EA f C SE harpy Ree OT Level 100 0 u t4 trio Track list Track view Level 100 0 ti li imeline 5 E vocals vol 0 0 dB Pan Center Scrub control Rate 0 00 gt gt T w K gt i 00 0
336. from the drop down list to select which envelope you want to display Removing track envelopes When an envelope is removed the events on the track no longer have automated control and the envelope line no longer displays 1 Select the track s from which you want to remove envelopes 2 From the Insert menu choose either Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes A submenu appears Envelopes that are currently displayed are selected 3 From the submenu click an envelope name The envelope of that type is removed from the selected track Alternatively right click an empty area of a track choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose an envelope type from the submenu to remove that envelope LEE 4 Note When you remove a track envelope from a track and then add it again all points are reset SS FFF Using the Envelope Edit tool You can also edit envelope points using the Envelope Edit tool To use this tool click the Envelope Edit Too button 7 1 The advantage of switching to this tool to edit envelopes is that events cannot be moved when this tool is selected thereby protecting them from changes This effectively locks all of the events and effects in a project while you modify envelopes Selecting and adjusting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope Edit Too button 2s OOOO 029122 2 Click within a track to select it 3 Drag along the timeline to select envelope points 4 Drag the sel
337. ft wWav Standard audio format used on Microsoft Windows based computers Wave Scott Studios wav Standard audio format used with Scott Studios systems Windows Bitmap omp Standard graphic format used on Microsoft Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Format wmv The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web GETTING STARTED CHP 2 n M7 Previewing a media file You may preview files before placing them in your project The Explorer window has a mini transport bar with Play Stop and Auto Preview buttons gt 2 Z 1 When you preview a file its stream is sent to the Mixer window s preview bus for audio files or to the Video Preview window for video files eee ee Tip You can use the same mini transport bar buttons in the Project Media window to preview files in the Project Media list ES UUU 1 Select a file in the Explorer window 2 Click the Play button to listen to the file 3 Click the Stop button m or select a different file to stop previewing the file eee Tip To automatically preview selected files click the Auto Preview button on the Explorer window s transport bar SS E Using the Project Media window Media files both video and audio tend to be the Cae AAT NR ATK RER TA largest files on your hard drive It is therefore no
338. g back and previewing cece eee eee eee 67 Playing VOU project i cas tesa costes cy acai ante aban a a nae a peat ogee tegen wdc UP a 67 CLUDING saes e aae songs mecroe alg eae ray SEES Ae AR eae eRe Ree E EAS 68 Previewing to media player vi acai dare dick was we Se OS ew Oe ee ES 70 Prerendering video PreVICWS 0 ccc eee eens 70 Rendering a project sanonnan anann keane eo Eee eed on aad dened bese Sees 70 CrealinG a IMOView veut erro hee Meg os heehee te eee i Ga ial eles in ee eee ears 71 PUDIISHING a proe 1 aco E ee hee eee eee See eS eee bee eat 71 Using the Media Manager 22000c cece ee eeaeees 73 Creating anew media library e ce eee eee ees 73 Opening Tec iDa V 402 E H 7 tere ee eet ease eee E T E 74 Adding media Tiles to a library 24644420 oeicte dense aw eed hs oa wea has 75 Removing media files from a library e cece eee eee eee 77 TAGGING c eeh 77 CREATING ELS TTT 77 Applying a tag toa media file 2 ccc eee teen eee eeeeeees 78 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 3 Removing a tag from a media file 0 ccc eee eee eee eens 79 Deleting a tag koma IDF ary science doe boy tenet EREE was ARTE ATR AIE ER Sus 79 VIETGING SUDLAGS serrara aea a set east hin Rees ewe eee et aoa pts ease 80 Arranging tags In the tag tree 1 eee eee eens 80 EG tad names OF INNAGSS 6 insert ee eee ha et He ke heats ee EE oe od 80 VIEWING or Creating palettes esee reverent teehee A se ee 80 Saving ta
339. g collections 1 Make a copy of the media library named Sony Tag Tree for Library Development medialib This file is saved in your My Documents Sony Media Libraries folder by default 2 Open the copy of the library 3 Add the loop collection you want to tag to the library CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 82 j 4 Apply the appropriate tags from the tag tree to your media files e Use existing tags whenever possible to ensure your collection is consistent with other collections in the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples family e When adding new tags try to add them within the existing tag tree For example if you wanted to create a tag for a bowed upright bass consider adding it below the existing Basses tag S D Guitars 0g Basses ven B Electric m e e When adding tags consider how the user will search for media In the previous example adding the tag Bowed to a media file means that the user will find that file whether searching for Basses or Bowed If a user s tag tree is rearranged so that Bowed is not a subtag of Basses a search for the Basses tag will not find the file e If you add both tags a search for Basses or Bowed will find the file regardless of whether Bowed is a subtag of Basses This could result in inaccurate search results e Each tag contains a globally unique identifier GUID that preserves information about the tag and its location within the tag tree For example if yo
340. g on the middle of a clip to move the media H H within the event without moving the event itself Trim Ctrl Alt Position the cursor over the boundary between two adjacent Adjacent events press Ctrl Alt and drag Both events are edge trimmed simultaneously _ Slide Ctrl Alt Position the cursor over the middle of an event press Ctrl Alt and Eo drag to simultaneously trim both ends Slide Ctrl Alt Position cursor over a crossfade press Ctrl Alt and drag ona Crossfade crossfade to move it Using a control surface TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software A control surface is a hardware device that uses knobs faders and buttons to control user interface elements that are normally controlled with a mouse Using a control surface lends a tactile feel to your editing sessions Unlike keyboard shortcuts which determine the shortcut s behavior based on the portion of the Vegas window that has focus a control surface s mapped functions work no matter what part of the application has focus You can use one Mackie Control Universal or up to five generic control surfaces with Vegas software For more information about setting up a control surface please see External Control amp Automation tab on page 346 INTRODUCTION CHP 1 Audio signal flow Audio Media Record Monitor Bit Depth Conversion Time Stretch Pitch Shift Input Monitor On or Auto Channel Conversion Re
341. g order 245 Crossfades 112 114 267 Automatic 112 Curve types 113 Manually setting 113 Overlapping files added to timeline 227 Sliding 113 Video 267 Cursor indications 38 Customizing DVD Architect toolbar 334 Customizing keyboard shortcuts 345 Customizing Vegas 329 Frame number display 329 Grid spacing 331 Preferences 336 345 Project properties 333 Rendering settings 311 Ruler 329 Time Display window 331 332 Toolbar 21 Video Preview window 287 Cuts 267 Converting to transitions 271 Cutting events 100 101 Ripple mode 100 Time and events 101 Time selections 101 D Deleting Busses 184 CD layout bar markers 355 Command markers 122 Envelope points 164 Events 109 Keyframes 274 Markers 117 Regions 118 Takes 131 Tracks 142 Deleting media from a bin 52 Digital multitrack setup 200 DirectX plug ins 189 241 Disable resample 173 Disc at once CD burning 351 358 Duplicating Events 103 Generated media events 248 Keyframes 274 Tracks 141 DV capture cards 375 DV format 234 Out of range colors 235 Selecting source media for 234 Setting project properties for 234 Templates for 234 DV tape printing to 323 DVD burning 5 1 channel audio 222 creating with DVD Architect 222 DVD Architect 222 DVD camcorder importing from 55 Dynamic RAM video previews 291 Edge trimming 103 Edit Decision Lists EDL 233 Edit Details window 27
342. g the X Y or Z axis but the event will not rotate w Enable Snapping to Grid Select this button if you want your editing to snap to the grid EZ Edit in Object Space Select this button if you want to edit in the object s space rather than the camera s space For example if a video object is rotated its X axis may not correspond to the X axis of the of the Video Preview window Selecting the Edit in Object Space button in conjunction with the Prevent Movement buttons allows you to move the object along its own X Y and Z axes ag Prevent Movement X Select this button if you want to prevent horizontal movement of the track at Prevent Movement Y Select this button if you want to prevent vertical movement of the track D Prevent Movement Z Select this button if you want to prevent movement of the track along the Z axis closer to or farther from the viewer E Lock Aspect Ratio Select this button if you want the selection box to retain its aspect ratio during resizing When the button is not selected the height and width can be resized independently S Scale About Center oe button if you want the selection box to retain its center point when you resize the box by dragging When the button is not selected the opposite side of the selection box will remain anchored when you drag the edges to resize it fall Prevent Scaling X Select this button if you want to lock the horizontal dimension of the selection box aa Prevent Scaling
343. g to Windows Media Video WMV files Closed captioning makes your final video accessible to a wider audience You can use text commands to add captions line by line to a Windows Media Video WMV file or for longer projects you can add captioning from a script CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 230 r Adding closed captioning line by line 1 Position the cursor where you want the closed captioning 5s text to appear Template Untitled 2 From the Insert menu choose Command The Command ae Command Properties dialog appears Parameter 3 From the Command drop down list choose Text coment SY 4 In the Parameter box enter the closed captioning text you Pt want to display 5 Click OK 6 Repeat steps 1 5 for each line of closed captioning text you want to add 7 Render your file in Windows Media Video format For more information see Rendering a project on page 307 eee Tip Take steps to ensure that the closed captioning displays when the video is played For more information see Displaying closed captioning on page 232 _ a T Adding closed captioning from a script TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Using a script to generate closed captioning involves several steps First you must copy and paste the lines from the script into a spreadsheet You can create the spreadsheet from scratch using the steps that follow or use the sample shell Vegas Caption
344. gas Explorer window cc 3n3 lt _ L L S L S S T 1 Click the Add Files to Media Library button H The Add Files to Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose the folders that will be searched for media a If it isn t displayed automatically click the Add Folder button to display the Browse for Folder dialog b Select the folder you want to search c Click OK ee Tips If you want to change an item in the folder list select it and click the Browse button in the Folders column If you want to remove a folder from the list select it and click the Remove Folder button X eS 3 Repeat step 2 for each folder you want to search 4 Select the Include subfolders check box if you want to search folders within the selected folders 5 Select the Audio Video Images or MIDI check boxes to indicate the types of media you want to add Clear a check box to exclude that type of media file Files that contain audio and video streams will be added if either or both of the Audio or Video check boxes are selected 6 Specify whether you want to search for new files or all files e Select the New files only radio button if you want to search only for new media files Files that already exist in the media library will be skipped e Select the All files radio button if you want to search for all media files in the specified folder New media files will be added and fi
345. ge 163 Default All Restores all video preferences to the default settings CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 L 339 Preview device tab This tab allows you to identify an external monitor for Vegas software to communicate with The selected video device is used to display previews on an external monitor Vegas uses this device when you click the Preview on External Monitor button 21 in the Video Preview window a Note Audio is not output to the external monitor If your project contains complex effects or compositing and you cannot attain full frame rate playback use selective prerendering to prerender the sections of your project that cannot be rendered in real time SE eR CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 340 r Configuring a Blackmagic Design DeckLink If you have a Blackmagic Design DeckLink you can configure it to work with Vegas software 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the Preview device tab 3 In the Device drop down list select Blackmagic Design DeckLink Information about the device displays in the Details area 4 Choose a setting from the When project settings don t match a supported format conform to drop down list to indicate how you want to adjust the video to display properly on your external monitor 5 Select the Recompress edited frames check box to recompress any edited frames in your project before previewing When the check box
346. ging active 130 Deleting 131 Displaying names of 131 Previewing 131 Recording audio as new 203 INDEX Renaming 131 Selecting 130 Events 60 adding transitions 269 Adjusting length 103 Channels 174 Copying 99 Copying and pasting attributes 175 Crossfading 112 114 227 267 Cutting 100 Defined 45 Deleting 109 Duplicating 103 edge trimming with keyboard 105 Editing 99 Empty 103 Envelopes 175 179 Fade in and out 176 Grouping 179 180 J cut 103 L cut 103 Moving by small increments 61 Moving in time 60 Moving multiple 61 Moving single 60 Name changing 131 Pasting 101 102 Pitch shifting 127 Placing 56 57 Playback rate 174 Razor blade 105 Recording into 204 repairing audio video alignment 109 Reversing 136 Selecting multiple 96 Selecting with time 98 Shifting the contents of 107 Shuffling 112 Sliding 108 Slipping 107 Slip trimming 107 Snapping 125 126 Splitting 105 107 Switches 171 173 Trimming 103 Undersample rate 174 viewing media markers 136 Expand track keyframes 64 Expand track layers 270 Explorer window 25 Transport bar 47 Exporting to PSP 314 External Control amp Automation Preferences 346 External monitor 300 preferences 339 secondary Windows display 301 TV 301 k V H via DeckLink 303 viewing video on broadcast monitor 301 Fade in and out 176 Fade to color 163 Fader Assignable
347. ging track height on page 143 height 6 Expand track Displays track keyframes on the timeline For more information see Working with keyframes keyframes in track view on page 276 SI Bypass motion Bypasses motion blur envelope for a track For more information see Using video bus blur tracks on page 152 Available only in the full version of Vegas software KO Track motion Track motion is used to move a video track across a background Picture in picture effects and scrolling title sequences are two simple cases where this tool is important For more information see Adding track motion on page 281 S Track FX Adds track effects plug ins For more information see Using video effects on page 241 G Mute Temporarily suspends playback of the track so that you can focus on other tracks For more information see Muting a track on page 149 il Solo Isolates a track for playback by muting the other tracks For more information see Soloing a track on page 150 Video Track name Allows you name a track To name a track double click the scribble strip and type the scribble strip track s name For more information see Naming or renaming a track on page 142 Determines the opacity transparency of the video track Drag the slider to control the transparency or blending of the track Left is 100 transparent and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the label to enter a specific numeric percentage Determines how the transparency in a vi
348. gion r 4 Tip You can also select a region by pressing a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad or by double clicking a region marker EES ___ _ aaaaS K Navigating to regions You can move the cursor to the start or end of a region by clicking either region marker You may press gt or to move the cursor to the next or previous region markers Right click a region marker to display a shortcut menu that allows you to navigate to the beginning Go to Start or the end Go to End of a region Deleting regions 1 Place the mouse pointer on the region marker s starting or ending point The pointer changes to a hand icon d 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Delete The region is removed from your project The tags are not renumbered as you remove them For example if you have five regions in your project and delete region 3 and 4 the remaining regions are listed at 1 2 and 5 However as you add regions again Vegas software begins numbering the missing sequence first in this case 3 and 4 and then 6 7 8 etc Deleting all regions and markers 1 Right click the marker bar 2 From the shortcut menu choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 19 Working with command markers CHP 4 Command markers add interactivity to a multimedia presentation streamed over the Internet by inserting me
349. gs and properties to media files 2 cee cece eee ee eee eee eeees 81 Tagging for loop developers 0c ce eee eee nett 81 Backing up your media libraries e ees 83 Opening a Reference Library x 04S 6 eee aoee tawntowes ewes x 83 Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library cece eee 84 Seal ching TOF Media leS 214 oi ces5 enneieeie stain Poe teen 2 cen deeb 84 Searching USING a KeVWOIG 2 000 ses otdone cee cee ot deoiwedhaadet dedcea de isedae dso a 84 Searching sMo TAGS cee stids 2 8 23 8 cae sa Gane Saga Sncila ns y s cote ca weer iia E Ran Bin aces meee a eats 85 Sor ng search results ote Hie ce OP bey bE Gee ees ie a haan ae gp bie spe a e ites 86 VIEWING previous searches 2nstcs tas died i tot wes tibceth ceded dae detde ate seater eress 86 Using advanced search Options 5 ss esadas oie rnnr nrnna rnrn nn eee eee ek acted bd 86 PrevieWING Mediae Sr 6 E a Ne ae sae ATR E C beste hese ra eee tea A es 87 MediarelalionsNIDS 35 2426 34 42632556440 ar aaa a teehee see bee 88 Adding media to your project 2 snanu annann eee eee eens 89 Resolving offline media Tiles ce eee eee eee eeeees 89 Customizing the Media Manager WiIndOW 000 cece eee ees 90 Automatically hiding the Search pane 200 cece eee eet eee eee enee 90 Docking and undocking the Search pane 200 eee eee eee eee eee eens 90 RESIZING COMING 5 A neuter H vie chew eee at es cai eina
350. h it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth affects a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth Bandwidth can also refers to the amount of data that can be transferred via a connection such as a network or modem For example streaming media must be compressed due to the limited bandwidth of most Internet connections Beats Per Measure In music theory the time signature of a piece of music contains two pieces of information the number of beats in each measure of music and which note value gets one beat This notion is used to determine the number of ticks to put on the ruler above the track view and to determine the spacing when the ruler displays in measures and beats format Beats Per Minute BPM In music theory the tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat occurs once every second Lower BPM s equal slower tempo and vice versa Bit A bit is the most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or O corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling specifically the PCM format a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples Bit Depth T
351. has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the RealMedia file specified in the Parameter box when users click the RealPlayer video display Displays the Web page specified in the Parameter box when users click the RealPlayer video display Jumps to the time specified in the Parameter box when users click the RealPlayer video display Defining Scott Studios data commands For WAV files using Scott Studios data command markers can be used to define information about the WAV file Command Description SCOTT EOM Calculates when the next queued clip starts playing in a Scott Studios system For more information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation SCOTT Cue In Set the beginning of a file in a Scott Studios System without performing destructive editing For more information please refer to your Scott Studios documentation BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 a 1 2 1 Inserting command markers Command markers appear as blue tags on the command bar which is above the marker bar Right click to place a command marker on the command bar Command bar Marker bar E E Delete al 00 00 20 Delete All in Selection 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the command marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Commana or press C 3 Complete the Command Propert
352. he 1 000 second mark 5 Proceed down the keyframe controller to 2 000 and enter the letter p 6 Proceed down the keyframe controller repeating this process until the title is finished Typing 7 Preview the event in the Video Preview window The word Typing appears one letter per second until finished ideo Event FX ideo Media Generator Sony Text Frame size 720 x 480 Length 00 00 10 00 Preset T SONY Edit Placement Properties Effects Arial Text box Keyframe Controller gt 4 2 00 00 00 00 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 L 281 Adding track motion The Track Motion window accessible by clicking the Track Motion button on any video track is used to move a video track across a background This background can be a solid color another video event or an image Picture in picture effects and scrolling title sequences are two simple cases where this tool is important The gray area in the center of the window covered by the blue gray rectangle represents the actual screen or area that is visible in the movie The area outside of the main screen which is filled with dotted lines is the general workspace The video you are moving can be positioned off of the visible screen and then animated onto and across the screen The dots are markers to help position the video window If snapping is enabled these serve as snapping points The main window allows you to control th
353. he Clear All button 7 To replace all custom functions with the default settings click the Default All button CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE BAS j Configuring a generic MIDI controller If you have a MIDI control surface you can configure it to work with the Vegas interface 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the External Control amp Automation tab 3 Double click the Generic Control entry in the Active control devices list to display the Configure Generic Control dialog 4 To load a configuration from a file click the Open button and browse to the mapping file you want to use 5 To add or change a function do the following a Choose a setting from the View function group drop down list b Select the Learn check box c Select an command in the Host Command list and activate the control on your control surface d You can click the Edit button to fine tune the MIDI message settings Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each command you want to make available on your control surface To remove a function select an item in the Host Command list and click the Reset button To remove all functions click the Reset All button G O N QO Click the Save As button to save your updated configuration file MIDI tab TI This tab is available only in the full version of Vegas software Use the MIDI tab to set options for using MIDI devices with Vegas software To display
354. he full version of Vegas software Low pass filter quality Choose Preview Good or Best to determine the sharpness of the filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve Available only in the full version of Vegas software Recorded files folder Displays the path where recorded audio is stored The Browse button allows you to select a new location to store recordings Free storage space in selected Displays the available disk space where recorded audio is stored folder Start all new projects with Use the project properties that you have specified whenever a new project is created these settings CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 334 Ruler tab This tab allows you to change ruler settings used in your project You can also change ruler settings in track view For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 329 Item Description Ruler time format Choose a ruler time format from the drop down list Ruler start time Enter a value that the ruler will use at the beginning of your project This feature is useful for synchronization purposes Beats per minute Enter the desired number of beats per minute for the project Beats per measure Enter the desired number of beats to occur per measure for the project Note that gets one beat The value entered will determine the time signature used by the ruler when its format is set to Measures and Beats For example if the entered value is 4 then a quarter note gets one
355. he list on the left side of the window ot The thumbnail images on the right side of the window represent Le each of the existing presets for the selected transition Hover oo i your cursor over a preset to see an animated example i Vertical In No J vertical Out No order Border 4 After you ve found the setting that you want to use drag it to ere L IE the position where you want it to occur on the timeline EEE 3 5 The Video Event FX dialog is displayed to allow you to edit the S anon prereanealyelie a Border Border i TE E j transitions settings and a 3 is displayed in the timeline to show you where the transition takes place You can also click this icon to edit the transition s settings Dropping on existing cuts crossfades or transitions e Ifyou drop the preset on an existing transition only transitions within the selection will be changed Cuts and crossfades are preserved e If you drop the preset on an existing crossfade only crossfades and transitions within the selection will be changed Cuts are preserved e If you drop the preset on an existing cut all cuts crossfades and transitions within the selection will be changed Dropping on event edges e If you drop the preset on a transition that is at the beginning or end of an event but does not span two events only single event transitions that occur on the same end of the event within the selection will be changed e If you drop the preset on an even
356. he number of bits used to represent a single sample Vegas software uses either 8 16 or 24 bit samples Higher values increase the quality of the playback and any recordings that you make While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Bus A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed A bus s output can be a physical audio device in the computer from which the signal is heard Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store GLOSSARY APPENDIX B 379 Clipboard The Clipboard is where data that you have cut or copied in Vegas software is stored You can then paste the data back into Vegas software at a different location or paste it into other applications Some data such as audio cannot be pasted into applications such as Microsoft Word or Notepad but the text data from the Edit Details window can be pasted This allows you to then print or format the data The Video Preview window also lets you capture still frames to the Clipboard for use in any image editing program For more information see Understanding the Video Preview window on page 287 Clipping Clipping is what occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32
357. he spacebar and F12 keys to start and pause playback rather than start and stop Select this check box if you want Vegas software to extend marker and region lines across tracks in the timeline When the check box is cleared marker lines are drawn only when Enable Snapping is turned on Vegas sofware builds 16 bit peak files as a default Select this option to build 8 bit peak files instead Turns off the animation applied to windows such as Video FX Event Pan Crop and Track Motion when these windows are opened Select this check box if you want the window docking area to hide automatically Hover over the bottom of the Vegas software window to show the window docking area Select this check box if you want Vegas software to build peak files as needed Vegas software will not build a peak file until a file is visible in the timeline You can open your projects more quickly but there may be occasional pauses as Vegas software builds peaks Clear the check box if you want Vegas software to build all necessary peak files when you open your project Opening a project can take longer but after peak files are built you can scroll through and view your project Select this check box if you want effects to remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power Select this checkbox if you want to have joystick control for editing in Vegas software
358. heck mark in selected in the project the box indicates that the event is selected pg 96 Mute Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s mute switch by clicking the check box A check muted mark in the box indicates that the event is muted pg 171 Loop Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s loop switch by clicking the check box A check mark looped for playback in the box indicates that the event is looped for playback pg 171 Lock Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s lock switch by clicking the check box A check mark locked in the box indicates that the event is locked pg 171 Normalize Displays whether the event is Toggle the event s normalize switch by clicking the check box A check normalized mark in the box indicates that the event is normalized pg 172 Snap Offset Displays when in the event the snap Enter a different value to change the snap offset position in the event offset is positioned pg 126 Markers The Markers category displays information about markers on the project s timeline This category displays two columns the marker s position on the timeline and the marker s name For more information see Working with markers on page 116 Regions The Regions category displays information about regions on the project s timeline This category displays four columns the region s start position end position length and name For more information see Working with region
359. here the video will be imported Click the Browse button if you want to choose a different folder 4 Click the OK button to start importing video After importing is complete the video from the disc is added to the Project Media window Each chapter is imported as a separate file You can then add the imported video to your project just like any other media file CHP 2 GETTING STARTED Bp T Adding media to the timeline Media files may be added to your project from the Explorer or Project Media windows by double clicking them or by dragging them Either method places the media file in an event in its entirety in the timeline Dragging a media file to the timeline You can create a new track by dragging a media file to a blank area on the timeline and dropping it in place Tracks can contain multiple events so you can place different events next to each other on a track a 4 Note Video and audio events cannot be placed on the same track as a 1 Locate a media file in the Explorer or Project Media window 2 Drag the media file to the timeline An event for the media file appears where you released the mouse Dragging multiple media files to the timeline 1 Select multiple media files in the Explorer or Project Media window Select a range of adjacent media files by pressing and clicking the first and last files in the range or select files that are not adjacent by pressing and clicking individual files 2 Right click a
360. his section provides descriptions of the Custom Template options for creating a Video for Windows AVI file For descriptions of the options used to customize other formats use the What s This button E in the specific Custom Template dialog for that format For more information see What sThis help on page 20 Some of the rendering settings are identical to your Project Properties and can be saved as a part of a project template Final render settings override Project Properties settings For more information see Modifying project video properties on page 238 The Custom Template dialog for rendering to an AVI file has three tabs Project Video and Audio Project tab Video rendering quality Higher quality settings result in longer rendering times Good is the default Video tab Include video Select this check box to include the video stream and enable the remaining fields on the dialog If you do not want to include the video stream clear this check box Frame size Frame size contributes to quality and file size The appropriate frame size is determined by the final destination of the movie See your video capture card s documentation for more information The final frame size of the movie can be different from the project s default settings SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 31 3 Frame rate Frame rate is important in determining the quality and size of the final media file The appropriate fram
361. hould also be as low as possible with 15 fps being a good maximum Fast action pans and moving backgrounds e g tree leaves or ocean waves do not compress well Streaming media files must be placed on a special Internet server in order to stream properly SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 31 1 Customizing the rendering process Every media file format has different variables and controls You can use a template to automatically configure a particular format for a particular destination You can also choose to create custom settings for your render by clicking Custom Once you have customized the settings you can create your own template so that you can reuse the custom settings at a later time Render As Save in O FinalRenders v CS E G My Recent Documents My Documents 8 Mu Computer Selected rendering N File name My Vegas Project avi D form at Ma etae Save as type Video for Windows avi Selected template Template usc DV a Click Custom and description a Audio 48 000 Hz 16 Bit Stereo PCM to change Uncompressed video 29 97 fps 720x480 Lower field first y control settings _ Save project as path reference in rendered media or create delete a template C Stretch video to Fill output Frame size do not letterbox Save project markers in media file C Render using networked computers Customizing the Render As settings 1 From the File m
362. ht click a file in the Project Media window 2 Choose Replace from the shortcut menu 3 In the Replace Media File dialog browse for and select the file that you want to replace the current file 4 Click Open The selected file replaces the old file in the Project Media list and any events in the timeline containing the old file are updated to contain the new media file Capturing video You can use the Sony Video Capture application installed with Vegas software to capture video clips from your DV or HDV video camera or via your Blackmagic Design DeckLink card and add them to the Project Media window You can also specify a different third party capture application for video capture HDV video capture is available only in the full version of Vegas software and in Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software a a Tip To specify the video capture application you want to use with the full version of Vegas software or in Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software check the Use external video capture application check box on the Video tab of the Preferences window and browse for the program s executable EXE file To specify the video capture application you want to use with Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software browse for the program s executable using the Browse button next to the Preferred video capture application box on the Video tab of the Preferences window ek 1 If you have not already done so connect your video camera to your video
363. i m B T Parent u Si rth oO Masked track m He Child Luminance CHP 14 Blue USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 264 r The top right example uses luminance to determine the transparency in the mask The white area is completely transparent Since white is made up of 100 values of red green and blue 255 255 and 255 those three colors are all 33 transparent as well In the lower right example blue is the selected transparent index The blue area is 100 transparent and so are all areas that have a value of 255 for blue 0 0 255 including white 255 255 255 Chroma keying Chroma keying or bluescreening is a special case of overlay transparency A color key is a specific color or a range of similar colors in an image that are made transparent allowing a background video to show through The idea is to take a video subject and film it against a solid uniform background color It is critical that the color be smooth and uniformly lit with no shadows and that the color chosen for the background not be used in the subject The most important factors in successful blue screening happen during shooting well before the footage is imported into Vegas software Compression of the source video is also an important consideration While almost all video is compressed in some way highly compressed video does not key well because colors can be smeared together and edges tend to not be very sharp
364. i wares end R T 90 MOVING COMINS aciacime Sa Ga Gee t 08 Seber eee cen eeweahe oheeteeteeetaueuesse 90 Showing Or sie late COIUMING 3 54 54 54 lt 8 eds yer ete dees de de eed eet ae beet ease ee 90 Adding CUSTOM COLUMNAS 3 0 5 Sacss had es cr oe e tabi had fe Se fee fd ath gh th erie we aenie ane 91 Seas E Reel EI Ie al Tn 4 ic0i02 bAectuceweinctgences lt deedee miata ineeseeewdewcendd 91 SMAOWING THUMBNAI respit S38 cae Bane Bagh Sncida ns tye cote ce we eras iia che Rian E ENS 91 Using ING Properties pane lt e e Sa Sa Ba Sa aie Eid aes 4 ea te ale wae eae are ee eee 92 Setting Media Manager Options 000 c eee e eee ees 93 ET taD 2 cial acts a 25 6 3 sum pice a aa eden re ck Race Sara tenga aad otal on a ne eae ere ae ane 93 Media Library taD iscir arate pte ih a o Sa ee ised ties a ae Dw dee Saree ee 93 betra Tare LAD ieee coe tte ue the bes eet Qe eee te tec ema EE 94 ADOUL LAD si ddurseenc hs tag ieuwnoeee bee Sure tan moat s ete ee deweer menses et eek anaes 94 Using the Media Manager with multiple computers 0220000008 94 Basic Editing TechniqueS 002 eee eee eee eee 95 EIS Te pre O10 110 essen rer atte eer ers a eRe eee ee ee ae 95 TABLE OF CONTENTS d Moving the CUISOF TTT 95 CRANGING 1OCUS sree ne tinder iat cea da teste ee teem eeteer tet aes ete 95 Making selections 4 24 3 246 sah tics ee catieedes aedeectee Sadia ta eeeaee hae ets 96 Selecting multiple events 0 0 ee
365. ibrary will be created Click Browse to choose a different location 5 Click the Create button to create the new library CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 74 r Opening a media library The Media Manager window displays the contents of the current media library You can open a different library at any time ey Important When you open a media library the Media Manager tool creates a transaction log file This file is created in the same folder as the medialib file and uses the same base name as the medialib file For example the transaction log file for default medialib would be default_log Idf Do not delete these log files Doing so will prevent you from opening the associated library When the Media Manager tool closes it automatically removes the log file If the application terminates inappropriately close all running Vegas windows restart the Vegas software and close the application to clear the log file SS T 1 In the Media Manager window click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Open Media Library from the menu The Open Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose the folder where the library you want to open is stored e Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop down list e Use the bar on the left side of the window to browse to a folder 3 Select a library from the list 4 Click the Open button to open the selected library The name of the current library is displayed in the upper
366. ich can strongly alter the timbre of a sound Analog When discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time see Quantization ASIO ASIO Audio Stream In Out is a low latency driver model developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG TI ASIO audio drivers are only supported in the full version of Vegas software APPENDIX B Attack The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack GLOSSARY 3783yz Attenuation A decrease in the level of an audio signal Audio Compression Manager ACM The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Windows The ACM can be used by Microsoft Windows programs to compress and decompress WAV files AVI A file format of digital video Vegas software allows you to open edit and create new AVI files Bandwidth Refers to the EQ plug in that is built in Each frequency band has a width associated wit
367. ick Save to save the newly processed media file The new media file is saved and added to the project as a take Bypassing all audio effects From the Options menu choose Bypass All Audio FX to omit all audio effects track bus and assignable effects during playback Bypassing effects allows you to quickly compare your project with and without effects and conserve processing power to avoid playback problems ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 10 L 197 When effects are bypassed you can choose whether bypassed effects remain open When the Keep bypassed FX running check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is selected effects remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power CHP 10 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS CHP 10 199 CHAPTER R baa Recording Audio hi a ar 2 P i m 89 9 s Hl EMEA L T TS H Vegas software can record audio into multiple mono or stereo audio tracks while simultaneously playing back existing audio and video tracks You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware Audio is recorded to a media file on your computer and into an event on the timeline You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection Audio output from your computer during recording is not n
368. idation project is against strict Red Book standards These warnings are not critical and in most cases you will not write an unreadable disc if you proceed Clearing this check box will not suppress critical warnings that will result in an unreadable disc Include wide SCSI devices when Select this check box if you want Vegas software to scan for wide SCSI CD drives when you attempt to extract searching for drives data from or burn CDs When the check box is cleared Vegas software will not scan for wide SCSI devices which can increase compatibility with some USB device drivers that incorrectly identify themselves as wide SCSI Skip drive database autodetect When the check box is cleared Vegas software will use an internal configuration file to determine your drive s drive capabilities on startup capabilities If you encounter problems burning CDs select this check box and Vegas software will test your drive to determine its capabilities Default All Restores all CD preferences to the default settings CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 351 CHAPTER Burning CDs You created your project in Vegas software and now you are ready to write the project to a CD With the CD burning capabilities of Vegas software you can place and arrange audio files to produce professional audio CDs You can burn CDs for multiple or single track projects and build audio CD layouts automatically or manually You can also create video CDs that can be played
369. ideo output effects CHP 14 Black Restore Black and White Border Brightness and Contrast Broadcast Colors Kol 02 Tepa e Bump Map l Channel Blend Grainy Chroma Blur Chroma Kever Color Balance Color Corrector Color Corrector Secondary Color Curves Extreme aT USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 242 yz Adding a video effects plug in You can apply video effects to events tracks files in the Project Media window or to an entire project You can add a plug in by selecting it in the Plug In Chooser dialog or you can drag and drop the plug in from the Video FX or Plug Ins windows Adding a plug in using the Plug In Chooser 1 Click the Video FX button ff in one of the following locations see the illustration Media FX are applied before a media file is inserted into an event on the timeline Every occurrence of this media file in a project has the effect applied to it Media effects can be applied only to video files Event FX are applied to events on the timeline Track FX are applied to the output of a particular track Video Output FX are applied to the final output and affect every event in a project Track FX Event FX Media FX edi video R Ey oe eS TI Level 100 0 Lll Eq fF PA L 6 oF Project Media SoeaBbpaea xs li allmedia O Media Bins FishOVOS wavy ww Video 320x240x32 15 000 Fos 00 00 09 05 Alpha None F Audio
370. ie ee 173 Accessing event properti S 000 c cee eee eee eee 174 AGIUsting audi channel S 4 lt 225 lt 4454000e eee es aida eed bere he eae Seen 174 Copying and pasting event attribUteS e e e e annnars n 175 Using audio event envelopes ASR 0000 cee eee eee eee 175 Setting an audio event S volume 2 ccc eee eee eee eeeeees 176 Setting an event s fade in and Out 2 eee ee eeeeees 176 Using video event envelopes 00 ccc cece eee eee eens 177 Using opacity CNVEIODES is sic sien eles ena ee ene Wed wee eee eae wee wale ie eee Bee es 177 USING velocity envelopes 334 4640 etek e au Gh hee ee ada edad bien dae eo ie eee 178 Grouping EVENS sii N AR a e T E Oo eee nr Me ei aL E Gawd ab intent 179 Creating 4 NEW GrOUPs 445 5 nren AAA ae nese eee onde Be eeebeonus A 179 Adding an event to an existing group e eee eee eens 180 Removing events from a Group lt lt dete kos be eee eh 180 Clearng a QlOUD 2 iceri iipit So s ahace dea kee She cated bt TTT 180 Selecting all members of a group 2 ee eee eee ane eeeeees 180 Suspending grouping temporarily 0 eee eee ee eee eeeees 180 Cutting copying or deleting grouped events 2 0c cece ee eee eee eee ee eeeees 180 TABLE OF CONTENTS B LISIFIG ss MIXE TT 181 Using the Mixer WINdOW 2 ccc eee eee eee nee 181 Viewing the Mixer WINdOW lt lt e eee ee eens 181 Using the Mixer toolbar w
371. ies dialog Command Properties If desired choose a custom template from the Template x Template drop down list For more information see Saving command properties as a custom template on page Command URL Ww 121 Choose the type of command from the Command Comment o O e Choose the type of comma Position 00 00 35 drop down list ostion 1 e In the Parameter box enter parameters to define the behavior of the command e Enter your own notes or comments in the Comments box e Specify the timing of the command in the Position box Otherwise command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position 4 Click OK The new command marker appears on the command bar Editing command properties Double click any command marker to open the Command Properties dialog and edit its contents You can also right click a command marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu Saving command properties as a custom template If you plan to use a command more than once you can save command properties as a template You can then reuse the command properties by choosing the template from the Template drop down list 1 Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog 2 Enter a name for the template in the Template box 3 Click the Save Template button S mnn Note Your metadata command templates are saved in the cmdtemp xml file in the program folder You can edit this file directly to modify your templat
372. iginal crossfade and the new transition effect 00 00 03 25 00 00 04 25 00 00 03 25 a Tip Some transitions also have their own shortcut keys On the numeric keypad press 7 to insert a crossfade to insert a dissolve and to insert a linear wipe Hold while pressing 7 to convert the transition to a cut at the cursor position a Tip Select the Event Fade Lengths option on the View menu to display fade lengths between selected and nonselected events in the timeline You can use this display as a quick indicator of a transition s length ll G GGaoaao aaa E ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 269 Adding a transition to the end of an event Typically a transition occurs between two events on a track but you can also use pomza vl transitions to fade to and from the background whether that is an underlying image video or background color For example you can drag a Clock Wipe transition to the end of a video event and have the wipe go from the video event to black Adding a transition to all selected events If you tend to use the same transitions often you can save yourself some time by adding a transition to all selected events at once 1 Select the events where you want to add the transition 2 From the View menu choose Transitions to display the Transitions window Transitions 3D Blinds Preset iti 1 x 3D Cascad 3 Select a transition from t
373. igning audio tracks to busses If your project contains multiple busses you can assign a track to a specific bus For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 147 TI Multiple audio busses are only available in the full version of Vegas software Adjusting a bus send level You can adjust the level of a track sent to a bus by using the multipurpose slider in the track list For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 147 USING THE MIXER CHP 9 L 1 817 Using assignable effects chains TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Assignable effects allow you to send various levels of multiple tracks to a single audio effect chain Like busses these controls reside in the Mixer window and support plug in chains In addition you can route assignable effects outputs to project busses Click the Insert Assignable FX button in the Assignable Effects in Mixer Window Mixer window to add an assignable effects chain to Automation l Number Name S your project For more information see Adding Audio Mute Pan slider settings Effects on page 189 Solo J Reverb L Reverb S Bus KS y Number Name Number and name of assignable effects H amp S assignment Elo A Sy Double click the name to edit it E Assignable FX E Automation settings The controls in the assignable effects fies ig met AED ae Se ee Phe eet a control list can function as trim controls ed
374. igure an external monitor PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 9 Optimizing the Video Preview window Timing and synchronization are critical aspects of any multimedia production Because complex multimedia projects are challenging for any computer a number of tools are provided to maintain real time playback even though the computer may not be able to process the data quickly enough Reducing preview quality You can adjust the resolution of the Video Preview window and the quality of the preview rendering in order to improve playback Lower resolution previews are less clear but allow more frames to be displayed per second This may be particularly important with projects that use overlays transitions and effects Click the Preview Quality button to choose different preview resolutions e Draft Auto Draft Auto Draft Full Draft Full Preview Auto Preview Auto Preview Full Preview Full Good Auto Good Auto Good Full Good Full Best Auto ls Best Auto Best Full Best Full ee Note To view the effects of the deinterlacing method you chose in your project properties you will need to use the Good or Best quality preview mode The Draft and Preview quality preview modes do not deinterlace E a Prerendering video There are times where nothing but a full high quality preview will do In these cases Vegas software can take the time necessary to selectively render only the po
375. iles are saved with the autosave veg extension and are deleted when you close Vegas software If you prefer not to autosave your project you can clear the Enable autosave check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Vegas software also creates veg bak files in your project folder when you save a project to allow you to return to the project s last saved state Creation of veg bak files is independent of autosaving Using the Make Movie wizard a This feature is available only in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software Once you ve arranged and saved your project Vegas has an easy way to prepare your final file and get it ready for delivery the Make Movie wizard This wizard guides you through the process of saving your project in its final format called rendering burning it to DVD using DVD Architect Studio Video CD or CD ROM publishing it to the Web printing it to your DV camera tape or e mailing it To start the Make Movie wizard choose Make Movie from the File menu and follow the steps for the appropriate task Rendering a project Rendering refers to the process of converting a project into a single new multimedia file and formatting it for the desired playback method media player Internet streaming media CD ROM video tape etc The project file is not overwritten deleted or altered during the rendering process You can return to the original project to make edits or adjust
376. ill be displayed before printing begins You can specify a delay time in the Delay playback countdown timer box and select the Beep each second during countdown check box if you want to count down before sending video to your device e If you re using Crash Recording mode your HDV recorder will start and begin recording after you click the Finish button SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 920 Printing to tape using Video Capture 1 If you have not already done so connect your video camera to your video capture card using the cable provided with the card 2 In the Project Media window click the Capture Video button The Sony Video Capture application Starts mnn Note If your video camera is properly connected the Video Preview window in the center of the application area should display Device connected ES HT 3 Follow the instructions for printing to tape provided in the Video Capture online help To access online help click the Help menu within the Sony Video Capture application and choose Contents and Index The Video Capture online help file displays SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 329 CHAPTER Customizing Vegas software You can customize Vegas software to suit your project needs and working preferences Many of the settings depend on your equipment or studio setup Vegas software can be set to work with the components that you use
377. includes all keyword tag and advanced search criteria In the preceding example the Search Results pane would display only 6 d Guitars files with tags High Tom AND Floor Tom Advanced mnn j C Audio Stream True X Note If you have check boxes selected for parent and child i tags those tags will be treated as an OR relationship regardless of whether Match Any or Match All is selected T E Click the View items not matching search criteria button 71 to display only items that do not match your keyword tag and advanced search criteria CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 80 r Sorting search results Click a column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending order based on that column Viewing previous searches Click the Previous Search button in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate through your recent searches and update the contents of the Search Results pane After viewing previous searches click the Next Search button Y pane to navigate back to your current search in the top left corner of the Search Results Using advanced search options If your media library contains many files and you re searching for a very specific media file the Advanced section of the Search pane can help you zero in on exactly the file you want If you want to perform an advanced search to refine the results of a previous search start by creating a quick search or tag based se
378. index Jump to previous audio CD Comma track region or index Jump to next audio CD track Ctrl Period region Jump to previous audio CD Ctrl Comma track region Set in and out points I in and O out Create time selection while Ctrl Shift drag with dragging on an event mouse CHP 1 a 33 CHP 1 Time selection commands A Note Many of the preceding cursor placement commands when combined with the Shift key are also selection commands EE Description Keys Snap select to event edge Ctrl Shift Alt Left or Right Arrow Select loop region Shift Q Recover previous 5 selection areas Backspace Select left by grid marks Select right by grid marks Mark in out locations Create time selection while dragging on an event Expand selection one frame Select to next audio CD track marker Select to previous audio CD track marker Shift Page Up Shift Page Down I in and O out Ctrl Shift drag with mouse Shift Alt Left or Right Arrow Shift period Shift comma Enter location for end of selection Ctrl Shift G View commands Description Keys Description Keys Increase track height Ctrl Shift Up Arrow Show hide window docking area F11 or Alt Decrease track height Ctrl Shift Down Arrow Show hide track list Shift F11 or Shift Alt Minimize all tracks j Show hide window docking area Ctrl F11 and track list Set track height smaller Shift Recall window layout Alt D then press 0 9 Set track heights to default
379. indow file or Video Preview window to open the Video FX window ideo Track FX Yideo Track FX Video Plug in chain gt o fri effects Pisepia J add nose J o Click a plug in to modify its settings in the lower part of aS LRE al the window L Clear the check box Tint on a plug in to Colo G T Convert to greyscale bypass the plug in Enable particles Drag a plug in Type Dust lw to move it Amount J within the chain Film Effects Sepia Add Moise IS IS 0000 00 00 Bypassing plug ins Video effects plug ins can also be temporarily bypassed turned off by deselecting them clearing the check box on the plug in Since the effects are rendered very quickly in the Video Preview window turning a plug in on and off allows you to see the results of the plug in on your project Changing the plug in order Plug in chain Shift Plug In Left Right Video effects plug ins are applied in the order that Plug In Chooser Video Track FX they appear in the chain You can change this order o Film Effects Sepia add Noise o by dragging a plug in to anew location in the chain aie ep LS Alternately you can click the Plug In Chain button e LR in the Video FX window and reorder the plug gt Filter Packages H Sony Legacy Plug In Broadcast Colors Remove ins in the Plug In Chooser dialog a Sony Add Noise i Sony Black and White K Sony Black Restore i Sony Border i Sony
380. information see Cropping on page 224 3 Move the mouse outside the selection area until it Project 20x480x32 29 970i Frame 268 becomes a rotate icon C Drag to rotate the selection Preview 180x120x32 29 970p__Display _240x160x32 area Alternately you may enter precise rotation values in the Angle degrees box Adding animation Keyframe animation dramatically increases the variety of panning zooming and rotating effects you can create using the Event Pan Crop window A later chapter provides examples of zooming in on a still image and using pan and scan techniques For more information see Animating event panning and cropping on page ei he CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 2296 T Working with still images You can use still images for a number of purposes including slide shows overlay graphics and titles You can insert still images into projects just like any other media files The default length for a still image event when it is first added to a track is five seconds this is an adjustable preference but this duration can be modified by dragging the edges to create a still image event of any length Images cannot be looped but share many characteristics with video files including transparency In addition you can use many of the same tools on image events that you can on video events such as track motion panning and cropping and video effects plug ins For more information see Zooming in on a still i
381. ing Shell txt provided in the Sample Projects folder on the Vegas software CD You can open this tab delimited shell with a spreadsheet application or in the absence of a spreadsheet application any text editor Once the spreadsheet is complete you can copy and paste the lines into the Edit Details window You can set the position for each line of closed captioning during playback Creating a script spreadsheet 1 Create a four column tab delimited spreadsheet 2 In the first column enter 00 00 00 00 in each of the cells as a placeholder You will set the actual position of each line during playback 3 In the second column enter TEXT in each of the cells to specify the command type 4 In the third column enter the text that you want to display as a closed caption Enter each line in its own cell mnn Tip If you have a script you can copy and paste individual lines into the cells TTF 5 In the fourth column enter a label to identify your captions An entry such as Line 001 can help you sort the captions once you paste them into your Vegas project USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 1 00 00 00 00 TEXT But soft What light through yonder window breaks Line O01 2 00 00 00 00 TEXT itis the east and Juliet is the sun Line 002 3 00 00 00 00 TEST Arise fair sun and kill the envious moon Line 003 Pa 00 00 00 00 TEXT Who is already sick and pale with grief Line 004 PS 00 00 00 00 TEXT That thou her maid ar
382. ing action It can also manifest itself in certain computer generated special effects for example in slow motion sequences F2 y Fi frame 1 frame 2 frame on television The basic problem is that there is no standard correct field order Some capture cards use F1 F2 and some use F2 F1 If this were the extent of our troubles we could check out our hardware manual look up the correct field order and that would be that Unfortunately if this information is even available the terminology used can be equally baffling Fl may be called the odd upper or A field or more rarely it may be called the even lower or B field Add into the mix the fact that the first scan line might be numbered 0 or 1 which changes whether the field is considered odd or even and that cropping may change which line is ultimately scanned first and you can see that this is not a very clear cut problem The remainder of this section deals with how to sort this out in Vegas software Fortunately you only have to determine the correct settings once for any particular hardware setup Identifying problems Vegas software refers to the two fields as upper field first and lower field first These are probably the most common terms used to distinguish the two fields and you may find a page in your hardware s manual that says something like Use a field order of lower first In many cases but not all or even most Upper Odd A and Lower Even B TROUBLESHOOTI
383. ing involves mixing visual elements together into a final output Multiple compositing modes are provided from which to choose Masks which are used extensively in television and movies are an important part of creating overlays Together these professional tools can help you polish your productions e lt lt lt lt Note The compositing model in this version of Vegas software differs significantly from the Vegas 4 0 model To reproduce the Vegas 4 0 parent child masking behavior set the compositing mode of the parent track to Multiply and then apply the Mask Generator plug in as a track effect on the parent track a ae Using video effects A great variety of video effects plug ins are provided that are Preset ready for you to drag and drop onto your projects media files tracks and events Previews of the different effect presets appear in the Video FX window In addition to the presets each plug in has individual controls that allow you to customize the effects in precise detail You can also animate video effects using keyframes For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 The mix of video effects applied at different levels to events tracks files etc is important to the final mix of a project For more information see Video signal flow on page 40 In general effects are applied in the following order to files in the Project Media window to events to tracks to the project v
384. ing is applied to the outside edge of the path Both Feathering is applied to both sides of the path e None No feathering is applied Select the Feather box and type a value in the box or click the to display a slider to set the amount of feathering that is applied to the path Fine tuning masks Depending on the source material creating a clean mask can be a tricky exercise There are a few tools and tricks you can use to fine tune a mask Solo the track Click the Solo button in the track list to isolate the masked track This allows you to concentrate exclusively on the mask Toggle effects Turn individual plug ins on and off to isolate effects in a plug in chain Keep in mind that the order of the rE aA cae plug ins in the chain is important in determining the final composited output Isolate channels Isolate individual color channels in the Video Preview HE window by clicking the Overlays button 7 Click the arrow on the button to Grid select the specific channel to be isolated and whether to display this channel in Safe Areas erayscale only Then click the main button to toggle the channel display on and Red off The Alpha as Grayscale option isolates the alpha channel mask and displays Green it in grayscale For more information see Understanding the Video Preview window a a on page 287 Geen as kans Blue as Grayscale se Alpha as Grayscale USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS
385. ing track default 150 Track envelopes 163 Track fader 65 144 Volume automation 156 VST plug ins 189 W Wave64 w64 audio format 310 Web site Accessing help 20 Technical support 17 Troubleshooting resources 367 375 What sThis help using 20 Window docking area 24 Windows Surround Panner 216 INDEX xiv gt Windows Media streaming commands 120 Working with MXF files 57 Z Zoom Edit Tool 62 Zooming 62 INDEX
386. ings click the Default All button CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 342 yz Print device tab This tab allows you to make your selections for printing to tape 1 Note The settings on this tab apply only to DV and DeckLink devices You can choose an HDV print to tape device in the Print Video to HDV Tape wizard Eo Preference Device Details Record engage delay frames Audio tab Description Choose a print device such as a Blackmagic Design Decklink or OHCI compliant IEEE 1394 DV device from the drop down list Displays information regarding the print device specified in the Device drop down list Drag the slider to specify the number of frames it takes your camcorder or deck to switch from Record Pause to Record mode If you re missing frames from the beginning of your file after printing to tape increase the setting If you see duplicated frames at the beginning of your video decrease the setting The Audio tab allows you to set preferences to optimize how your computer s components are used to handle resource intensive audio This tab also allows you to configure Vegas software to the equipment that is connected to your computer Preference Waveform display while recording Normalize peak level dB Import audio at project tempo Preferred audio editor Metronome Default All CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE Description Allows you to display or hide waveforms when recording into an audi
387. ins playback automatically Cursor preview will loop if the Loop Playback mode is enabled Creates automatic crossfades between events when multiple media files are added to the same track across time When this check box is not selected multiple media files are added end to end across time with no overlap For more information see Creating a slide show on page 227 Sets the behavior of the cut to overlap feature The cut to overlap feature allows you to transform a cut from one event to another into a transition The Amount field sets the duration of the extended overlap The Alignment value determines the direction of the extension For more information see Converting a cut to a transition on page 271 Sets the default fade curves for event track and bus track envelopes You can choose separate fade types for audio and video envelopes For more information see Changing an event s fade curve on page 176 Restores all editing preferences to the default settings Description Use these controls to change the default colors used to display tracks in your project Select a track from the Track drop down list and then click the color swatch to display a color picker You can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls or click the eyedropper to sample a color from your screen When you click OK or Apply all tracks that used the selected color are updated Choose an envelope type from the Envelope color preference for drop down list and
388. io Platinum software applications For this reason product features are identified throughout the manual using the following icons Features exclusive to the full version of Vegas Features exclusive to Vegas Movie Studio Features exclusive to Vegas Movie Studio Platinum Note Unless otherwise noted the pictures you ll see of the Vegas application throughout this manual are taken from the full version of Vegas software If you are using other versions of Vegas software your windows and dialogs may appear slightly different eS lt INTRODUCTION CHP 1 A iit Using online help You can access two varieties of help e Online help e What sThis help also referred to as context sensitive help Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press F1 a 4 Note To view online help Internet Explorer 5 1 or later must be installed on your system Internet Explorer 5 1 is included on the Vegas software CD ROM for your convenience E__ CC RC T The online help window has four tabs that you can use to find the information that you need lox Toolbar e ff Back Options Glossary Shortcuts Tabs Contents index Search Favorites UO Introduction i E What s New In Version 6 0 Using Help Technical Support Legal Notices The Vegas Window How Do l Using Vegas Software S Using Hardware Controllers Sony Media Software proudly
389. ion see Audio tab on page 342 EOE E Recording You may record into an empty track a time selection an event or a combination of time and event selection The recording is added to the timeline as new take and saves it to a media file on your hard drive Triggering recording from MIDI timecode is also supported Recording into an empty track 1 Select a track Alternately to record to a new track choose Audio Track from the Insert menu 2 Place the cursor on the timeline where you want to begin recording 3 Arm the track by clicking the Arm for Record button on the track If this is the first time you arm a track for recording in this project you will be prompted to identify the location where the new audio files will be saved For more information see Arming the track for recording on page 201 4 Start recording by clicking the Record button on the transport bar Depending on the recording selection a waveform is created along the timeline as you record into the armed track s GRE Fil 4 p aA music pf G er HO 8 s7 48 33 30 at j te Recorded waveform L Start stop t stop recording recording 5 Stop recording by clicking the Record button again or the Stop button on the transport bar 6 A small dialog opens displaying the name and location of the file or files that were just created Click CHP 11 Done to return to the main workspace RECORDING AUDIO Reco
390. ion Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected 2 Drag the slider to control the transparency or blending of each track Left is i ma RU e sih Gt OI 100 transparent and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the greene not a percent to enter a specific value Selecting the compositing mode Click the Parent Overlay Mode or Compositing Mode button and choose a aE me Ol z ax ZG ie LN l mode from the menu to determine how the transparency in a video track is S a soo generated Since lower tracks show through higher tracks it is the compositing mode of the higher track that determines how much of the SR tk FO lower track shows though The compositing mode of the lowest video track Level 100 0 Li Ge 10 i adjusts its transparency against the background Parent Overlay Mode For more information see Compositing on page 248 Compositing Mode Bypassing motion blur envelopes video only TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software If you applied a motion blur envelope to your video bus track available only in the full version of Vegas software this envelope affects all tracks You can select specific tracks to bypass this envelope by clicking a track s Bypass Motion Blur button 77 1 For more information on motion blur envelopes see Adding a motion blur envelope on page 162 Using track motion video only Use the Track Motion button
391. ion controls You can add up to 25 busses at any time during the development of your project Adding a bus Click the Insert Bus button 27 1 on the Mixer window CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 184 jp Adding multiple busses 1 Click the Audio Properties button on the Mixer window The Project Properties dialog appears with the Audio tab displaying 2 In the Number of stereo busses box enter the desired number of busses up to 25 to appear in the Mixer window Project Properties Video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CD Master bus mode Enter the number Number of stereo busses of busses 3 Click OK to add the specified number of busses and close the Project Properties dialog The new busses appear in the Mixer window Deleting busses from a project You can remove busses from your project at any time When you remove a bus from a project any tracks assigned to it are reassigned to the Master bus Deleting a bus Right click the bus to be deleted in the Mixer window and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting multiple busses 1 Click the Audio Properties button on the Mixer window The Project Properties dialog appears with the Audio tab displaying 2 In the Number of stereo busses box enter the desired number of busses to appear in the Mixer window 3 Click OK All tracks assigned to a deleted bus are reassigned to the Master bus in the Mixer window Routing a bus to another bus If
392. is icon a in the Video FX window Show source frame numbers on Display frame time or timecode numbering on video event thumbnails event thumbnails as Preferred video capture Browse for the application to be launched when you click the Open Video Capture button amp application Action safe area and Title safe Sets the reference overlay safe areas in the Video Preview window For more information see Identifying safe area areas on page 293 Horizontal Grid Divisions and Sets the spacing of the grid overlay in the Video Preview window used in aligning visual elements in a project Vertical Grid Divisions For more information see Changing grid spacing on page 331 Display at project size Sets the Video Preview window to always display the video at full project size Simulate device aspect ratio Determines how the video is displayed in the Video Preview window In short televisions display rectangular pixels and computer monitors display square pixels This can result in a distorted preview although the source media and rendered video is unaffected Background color Sets the background color of the Video Preview window black by default that shows either when there is no visual content or when using a transparent overlay with no background visual content Default track fade colors Sets the default top and bottom colors when adding a Fade to Color envelope to a video track For more information see Working with track envelopes on pa
393. is added to the empty event as a take For more information see Working with takes on page 130 To add an empty event to a track from the Insert menu choose Empty Event You can also make space in a project by inserting a length of time across all tracks To insert a period of time into the timeline from the Insert menu choose Time Trimming events This section describes simple ways to trim events For more information see Using the Trimmer window on page ae E a Tip You can apply a ripple edit after trimming an event For more information see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 ae Trimming an event During the trimming process for a video event both the last thumbnail image on the event and the Video Preview window show the last frame in the event allowing you to edit events very accurately 1 Move the cursor over the edge of the event The cursor changes when properly positioned Z 2 Drag the edge of the event to trim it Trimming Since a multimedia file often has both a video and an audio grouped events component both events are trimmed or extended as a group at the same time unless you ungroup them or temporarily suspend grouping by clicking the Ignore Event Grouping button For more information see Grouping events on page 179 CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 104 r Trimming an event beyond its end You can trim an event beyond its end extending it as a result Once extende
394. is partially transparent For more information see Using generated media on page 247 x BERBER EEE REE ees eee EEE E i Set compositing foes mode for aa in oa overlay track 5 a E EI R E Bv E E E E E E EI 1E Bv E E E LA 00 00 05 00 Panan Ma mm _ S aa a e a a e Ba a a a a Moves Mate S Overlay track Level 100 0 i Gy T 4 Oe Background track Segond ee OI Level 100 0 a I t 4 The following table shows how these two sample tracks are blended using each of the compositing modes Compositing mode Sample Description Add Adds the overlay color values to the background Available only in the full version of Vegas software Subtract Subtracts the overlay color values from the background Available only in the full version of Vegas software Multiply Mask Multiplies the overlay color values by the background color values This makes overlay colors stronger and more present and results in a darker video image The opposite of this mode is Screen Source Alpha Uses the alpha channel to determine transparency in the overlay This compositing mode is based on the alpha channel characteristics of an event or media file If no alpha channel is present in the overlay the Source Alpha compositing mode has no effect Cut Cuts out the overlay color values from the background Available only in the full version of Vegas software Screen Multiplies the inverse of the overlay color values with the
395. is setting is not used for event envelopes ee E USING AUTOMATION 156 Mute automation audio and video TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Mute automation changes a track s mute state throughout your project Mute automation is either on or off with no fade between If you want to use fades apply volume automation When you apply mute automation to a track it s possible to have a track that is muted and soloed simultaneously The mute state overrides the solo state e If a track s Solo button is selected the track is included in the solo group but it will be muted whenever the mute automation is set to mute the track e If the track s Mute button is selected the track is muted regardless of the mute automation settings Adding or removing mute automation 1 Select a track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes or Video Envelopes or right click in the track list and choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu 3 From the submenu choose Mute A check mark is displayed next to the command and an envelope is added to the timeline 4 You can adjust the automation by editing the envelope in the timeline or by using the Mute button in the track header when Show Automation Controls is selected Adjusting mute automation settings 1 Click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls The Mute button is displayed as Sx 2 Click the
396. ist supports a data rate ceiling select this option and enter a maximum data rate for the final file Render alpha channel If the codec you choose in the Video format drop down list supports alpha channel transparency select this option to save this information with the file CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 314 r Create an OpenDML AVI version 2 0 compatible file Select this check box if you want to save your file as an OpenDML file OpenDML files allow you to create files that are limited in size only by the format of your hard disk 2GB using FAT32 or 4GB using NTFS Audio tab Include audio Select this check box to include the audio stream and enable the remaining fields on the dialog If you do not want to include the audio stream clear this check box Audio format This lists the audio rendering codecs that are available Attributes If the codec you choose in the Audio format drop down list supports it select the appropriate attributes for the codec from this list Sample rate The sample rate directly affects the audio s quality The sample rate is defined as the number of times a second that data is sampled in an audio file It is similar to the concept of resolution in an image file The higher the setting you choose the better the quality but the larger the file size Bit depth The bit depth directly affects the audio s quality The bit depth is defined as how much data is used to save
397. it after cutting For more information see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 S nn 1 Select events or a time range For more information see Making selections on page 96 2 Click the Cut button Cutting selected events When cut selected events are removed from the timeline and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Events after cut in post edit ripple mode 00 00 19 23 O0 00 24 29 eee DU 0UZ129 DU 0W 19 29 lL DU 0UZ129 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 101 Cutting a time selection Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard When cutting a time selection auto ripple mode affects the position of material on all tracks or affected tracks after the cut Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Events after cut in post edit ripple mode _ 00 00 19 2 2 L DU 0UZ129 00 00 19 29 Zg L Cutting a time selection and events Events and portions of selected events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Time information is also placed on the clipboard When cutting a combination of time selection and event selection post edit ripple mode affects the position of material on all tracks or the tracks of selected events after the cut Events before cut
398. ith project properties A large range of formats and various types of media files are supported Some settings in a project s properties are simply SS informational details about the project while others video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CD control how your project is handled and its output If you Template NTSC DV 720x480 29 970 fps via x B have multiple projects the settings used for each project are width 720 Field order stored These settings can be saved as templates for future een DMEM Gcicecercae use Frame rate 29 970 NTSC l w To view and modify project properties choose Properties eee a i from the File menu The Project Properties dialog has five usn l Motion blur type Gaussian w tabs Video Audio Ruler Summary and Audio CD An Deinterlace method Blend fields ka overview of each tab and its settings follows Prerendered Files Folder C Documents and Settings spfeiffer Application Datal Sony vega Vi deo ta b Free storage space in selected Folder 24303 2 Megabytes This tab allows you to set different characteristics the Pa e cca project uses to handle the video Also this tab displays information about the video contained in your project For more information see Modifying project video properties on page 238 Audio tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the audio This page also
399. itions and composited tracks to be rendered in a high quality format When the segments are stitched the project is re encoded using the format you chose for your final output in the Render As dialog SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 a 321 8 The Temporary Files Location box displays the path to the folder where the temporary veg project and rendered segments will be saved If you want to use a folder other than the output folder you chose in step 3 you can choose a folder from the drop down list or click the Browse button to choose a folder This folder must be in a shared location LENE 4 Tip Choosing a folder other than the final output folder can help improve performance during the stitching phase when you render a project with uncompressed segments ee Oe 9 Click OK to start rendering Monitoring rendering progress 1 Right click the icon in your system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the Sony Vegas Network Render Service window 2 Select the Progress tab The Progress tab displays a list of the segments that are queued to render the assigned peer and the status 3 Choose Details or Summary from the drop down list in the Progress tab to see more or less information Setting file mappings File mappings help remote renderers find the media used in your project When you import media from a local di
400. ive Take Name Take Start OO 00 07 67 DD UU DUD DU 00 00 04 25 00 00 03 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 25 00 00 04 25 Timecode In 00000767 0000 00 00 OO 00 04 25 DU DU 0 3 70 0000 00 00 DU DU Ud ZR DU DU Ud ZR The Audio CD track list category displays information about the track and index markers placed on the CD layout bar This information is used to burn audio CDs For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 351 Commands The Commands category displays information about commands that are placed along the project s timeline This category displays four columns the command s position along the timeline the command type its parameters and any comments that were entered when the command marker was placed in your project Right click a command entry to display a shortcut menu For more information see Working with command markers on page 119 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 sig Events The Events category displays information about all of the events in your project You may sort any of the information by clicking a column s header The number of columns in the Events category requires that you use the scroll bar to view them all The following table explains each column in the Events category and describes its function Column Description Edit function Track Displays the track number where Move the event to a different location by entering a different track the event
401. ject to a previous state aama Tip From the Edit menu choose Undo All to undo all edits in the history All edits are undone and added to the redo history a T BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 1 B Using redo Cl Pressing Z or clicking the Redo button redoes the last undo performed Repeatedly using the keyboard command or toolbar button continues redoing undos in reverse order from most recent to oldest In addition you may redo the last edit by choosing it from the Edit menu Redoing a series of edits You can view the redo history by clicking the arrow on the right side of the Redo button The top item in the list that appears is the most recent undo edit If you redo a specific edit that appears farther down the list all subsequent edits above it are redone as well When you redo an edit or a series of edits they are added to the undo history again The redo history is cleared when a new edit is performed earing the edit history You can clear both undo and redo histories without closing your project or exiting the software Once the histories have been cleared a new edit history is created as you continue working on the project While clearing the edit history is not usually necessary it can free up disk space To clear the edit history choose Clear Edit History from the Edit menu Adding project markers and regions CHP 4 Several types of project markers are provided that identify part
402. job among several computers e Distributed network rendering splits the video into segments that are rendered by multiple computers In this mode each computer renders a portion of the project and the rendered sections are then reassembled into a single file by the one computer called the stitch host Distributed rendering is a good way to reduce the time it takes to render a project containing a significant amount of processed video video effects transitions panning cropping track motion and compositing However distributed rendering requires increased disk space and network traffic because each segment must be saved before the final output can file be generated Nontemporal video output formats such as DV or uncompressed AVI are also well suited for distributed network rendering because segments can be reassembled without re encoding e Nondistributed network rendering behaves very much like standard rendering but you can choose which computer you want to render the project In this mode each computer renders a complete file from a Vegas project or the loop region If you want to encode the same project to multiple streaming formats and bit rates it is best to queue up multiple nondistributed jobs because streaming formats use temporal compression and you can assign different renderers to different output formats If you have a project or output format with audio only choose nondistributed rendering because only video is rendered i
403. k Check to see if any Vegas software updates have been posted on the Sony Media Software and Services Web site http www sonymediasoftware com download Click Updates to access the Updates page Any updates to the application are posted at this location If software updates do not address the playback problem check these other reasons that your audio playback can gap e Playing back too many tracks simultaneously can overload your hard drives e Not enough physical RAM can cause the Windows operating system to use virtual memory which is slower e Your CPU may not be able to process a complex mix of plug ins e Problematic video card settings For more information see Trouble free video hardware solutions on page 369 The following are some things you can check and do to make sure your system is optimized to prevent gapping APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 369 r RAM usage You could be gapping because virtual memory is being used Virtual memory is a method used by Microsoft Windows to write information to your hard drive to make room in physical RAM This process uses a lot of your computer s resources Try the following to optimize RAM usage e Exit all background applications not in use e Adjust the playback buffering slider on the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog Adjust this slider as low as possible However be aware that setting it too low may cause gaps as well For more information see Adjusting the playback bu
404. k automation mode is set to Off the trim level is added to the track fader For example setting the track volume fader to 3 dB and the trim control to 3 dB produces a gain of O dB When a track uses envelopes the trim level is added to the envelope so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing every envelope point by 3 dB TI To adjust trim levels click the Automation Settings button gt and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected When Show Automation Controls is selected the volume fader and multipurpose slider adjust automation settings E Note The Automation Settings button is not available in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software In these versions of the software the Volume and Pan controls in the track header always function as trim controls for track volume or panning envelopes G oGoGooaSaaaa a T Using the volume fader audio only The fader in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall volume of the track or it can adjust track volume automation settings For more information see Volume or pan automation audio only on page 156 The trim level is added to the volume automation settings so your envelope is preserved but with a boost or cut applied For example setting the trim control to 3 dB has the same effect as decreasing
405. kages Video BS Amplitude Modulation Ri Pitch Shift Hi Flange ah wah Hy Gapper Snipper hd Graphic Dynamics HS Graphic EQ PH Multi Band Dynamics ik Multi Tap Delay His Noise Gate Hy Paragraphic EQ HS Parametric EQ L iiil Pf Resonant Filter PS Reverb Hr Simple Delay Hr Smooth Enhance Hs Time Stretch Pi Track Compresso Pi Track EO BS Track Noise Gate CBS vibrato S Wave Hammer 5 gt CHP 1 29 Video Scopes window Ctrl Alt 2 TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software This window allows you to monitor your broadcast video for image problems Use the scopes to analyze the your video and adjust accordingly with the Brightness and Contrast Broadcast Colors Color Corrector Color Corrector Secondary and Levels plug ins before rendering For more information see Monitoring video with scopes on page 294 ideo Scopes Nectorscope WaveformiHistogram v Ew Vectorscope Normal gt Waveform Luminance Luminance Surround Panner window Ctrl Alt 3 This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software This window allows you to control panning in a 5 1 surround project You can also display the Surround Panner window by double clicking the surround panner on a track or mixer control For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 209 Surround Panner Center Smogthnesg
406. ker to select the track Press period to jump the cursor to the next track or index marker Press comma to jump the cursor to the previous track or index marker Press period to jump the cursor to the next track marker index markers are skipped Press comma to jump the cursor to the previous track marker index markers are skipped Add to any of these keystrokes to select rather than jump For example press E period to select from the cursor position to the next track marker The shortcut keystrokes can be used to jump the cursor while working on a project or during playback Moving track and index markers Track and index markers function just like markers and regions in Vegas software pg 115 You can drag a track or index marker to move it along the CD layout bar Alternately you can use the Edit Details window to make precise adjustments EEE 4 Tip Move both the starting and ending markers for a track by pressing Alt and dragging either of the markers Ee Renaming track and index markers 1 Right click a marker and choose Rename from the shortcut menu that appears 2 Type a new name for the marker and press Enter Deleting track and index markers You can delete a single track or index marker by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu To delete all markers at once right click the CD layout bar and choose Delete All from the shortcut menu CHP 19 BURNING CD
407. l 0 0 dB 6 57 48 39 30 21 12 3 BEE 66 57 48 39 30 21 l2 3 BOR Arm for Record n Fan Center Vol 0 008 II Arm the track first Track is ready for recording Track is ready for recording using the Sound Mapper from a specific device CHP 11 RECORDING AUDIO 202 ____ In addition one of two Record Device Selector buttons appears ba or 1 The button that appears is based on the Audio device type selected in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Button Description bel Stereo This button appears when Use Microsoft Sound Mapper has been selected as the audio device type on the Preferences Audio tab The Sound Mapper allows you to choose how the signal will be recorded Mono left stereo or mono Click this button to view a menu with Stereo Left or Right 4 Mono right 1 Stereo This button appears when Windows Classic Wave Driver has been selected as the audio device type on the Preferences Audio tab When you choose this option you can specify which device e g sound card it Mono left vou will record from on any given track prior to recording Click this button to view a menu with Stereo or Mono and a submenu with all available devices for either option in Mono right Selecting recording settings After the track has been armed for recording select whether the track records the signal in stereo in mono from the left chann
408. l camera or other TWAIN device The images are added to the Project Media list as JPEG image files 1 Make sure your device scanner or digital camera is on and connected to your computer 2 In the Project Media window click the Get Photo button Z The software is started for the device 3 Use the device software to get an image and send it to Vegas e Te software Once the image has been sent the Scanned Files dialog appears e Click Rename to give the new image a more meaningful name e Click Delete to cancel the process of adding the image 4 Click Done The new JPEG file is added to the Project Media window Delete Rename Delete All IY Show after every recording session CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 50 gt Extracting audio from a CD You can extract tracks from a CD and add them to the Project Media window as WAV files e o Important Vegas software is not intended for and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Vegas software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement eee 1 Insert the audio CD 2 In the Project Media window click the Extract Audio fro
409. late cursor position control 343 Keyboard shortcuts 32 Position bias control 343 Pre roll buffer control 343 Scrubbing 68 Transport bar controls 23 Plug in chain Audio hierarchy 39 Changing order 193 244 Creating 190 242 Saving presets 192 246 Plug ins Animating 246 Audio 189 Bypassing 194 244 Copying and pasting event plug ins 175 Events with panning cropping 245 Generators 247 248 Keyframes 246 Masks 257 265 Media generators 247 248 Modifying 246 Ordering 193 244 Removing 194 245 Transitioning into 279 Transitions 268 Video 241 Window 28 Post edit rippling 111 Post roll 205 PQ list See Track list Preference settings 336 345 Audio tab 342 Audio tab advanced settings 343 CD Settings tab 350 Editing tab 349 General tab 336 Preview device tab 339 Print device tab 342 Sync tab 344 Sync tab advanced settings 344 Video tab 338 Preferences Audio Device tab 343 Display tab 349 External Control amp Automation tab 346 Keyboard tab 345 e I Preparing video for broadcast Safe areas 293 Preparing video for television DV format guidelines 234 Prerendering video 289 Pre roll 205 Preset chains 194 195 Editing 195 Organizing 195 Saving from existing chains 194 Presets keyframe 275 Presets saving 192 246 272 Preview split screen 292 Preview fader Adjusting for clipping 185 Adjusting volume 182 Hiding viewing 182 Meter resoluti
410. lays all media that has been previewed in a project containing the selected media Rendered to Displays all media files that were created from the selected media file using the Render As command Rendered from Displays the original media files that were used to create the selected media file if the file was created using the Render As command Chopped to Displays all media files that were created from the selected file using the Chop to New Track command in ACID software Chopped from Displays the original media file that was used to create the selected media file if the file was created using the Chop to New Track command in ACID software Rendered track to Displays all media files that were created from the selected file using the Render to New Track command Rendered track from Displays the original media files that were used to create the selected media file if the file was created using the Render to New Track command Media files matching the selected command are displayed in the Search Results pane 3 Click the Previous Search button to return to the previous contents of the Search Results pane USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 a E E Adding media to your project After you ve added media to your library tagged it and searched for specific files or related media you ve probably found just the right piece of media for your current project You can add media to your project from the Search Results pane by performing any
411. les that already exist in the media library will be searched to determine whether their properties have changed CHP 3 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER c 7 Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For more information about tagging media please see Tagging media files on page 77 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 91 8 Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d Noops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved using a tag thesaurus If you need to modify the thesaurus you can edit the TagThesaurus xml file which is created in your My Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts ge Note Changing the selection of the Add tags and custom properties from files and Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check boxes also changes the settings in the Media Manager Options dialog a ae 9 Click the Search button to start adding files to the library 10 Click the Close button when vou re finished A tag is automatically added to the Tag tree when you sear
412. lly specified in beats per minute BPM Time Format The format in which Vegas software displays the ruler and selection times These include time seconds frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates Time Signature See Beats Per Measure Timecode For more information see Timecode on page 373 Track A discrete timeline for audio or video data Events are placed on tracks and determine when sound or images start and stop Multiple audio tracks are mixed together to give you a composite sound that you hear Multiple video tracks are composited on top of each other to create the final video output Track List The track list appears at the left side of the Vegas workspace and contains the master controls for each track From here you can adjust track volume or transparency add track effects mute or solo tracks and reorder tracks Track View The track view or timeline is the space events appear on tracks u Law u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines u Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications u Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 38y Undo Buffer This is the temporary file created before you do any processing to a project This
413. lows you to use a multimedia keyboard to control playback of a project support Render large Wave files as The WAV format is limited by a maximum file size of 2GB You can choose to render larger files as Wave64 Wave64 files Automatically name regions and When regions and markers are added this option automatically prompts you for a name This does not markers if not playing happen when adding markers on the fly during playback Ignore third party DV codecs Clear this check box to enable third party DV codecs Use Microsoft DV codec Vegas software uses the Sony Media Software DV codec which offers improved DV video quality over the Microsoft codec as a default Select this option to have Vegas software use the Microsoft codec to read DV files instead Strictly conform to AVI2 Select this option to create 100 AVI2 compliant files While these files conform to the standards not all specification applications follow these specifications and some programs may not be able to read them Disable multi processor AVI Suspends dual processor rendering for AVI files Selecting this option does not affect other dual processor rendering operations Allow pulldown removal when Select this option to have Vegas software remove pulldown on DV video files in 24 fps progressive scan 24p opening 24p DV format When this check box is cleared Vegas software will open 24p files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 r 337
414. ly do not burn CDs Burn speed 4 0 vl 2 Choose the movie file you want to use e If you want to render the current project select the Render format radio button a Edit the contents of the File path box to specify the name and location of your rendered file b Choose a template from the Template drop down list to specify the parameters that should be used for rendering your file or click the Custom button to create a new template c Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to use only a portion of your project If the check box is cleared the entire project will be rendered and saved to the Video CD d Select the Stretch video to fill output frame check box if you want your video to be reformatted so it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area letterbox This option is useful when the desired output format does not match the frame aspect ratio of you project Note Clear the Fast video resizing check box if you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but your rendering times will increase significantly elf you want to use an already rendered MPEG file select the Use an existing file radio button and enter the path to the file in the File path box or click the Browse button to locate the file CHP 19 BU
415. m ae 2 Press Enter The Media Manager tool searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window Any file that contains your keywords in the file name or attributes is displayed tags are not searched as keywords USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 L BB Your search terms are displayed in the yellow bar below the Search Results toolbar peSearch Defauk y lt gt we E gt a di a i Clear Guitars tag or Acoustic Guitar tag or Other Guitar tag and EBow T Search terms Keyword gt Mame Fating Beat Count ZS T lal ED 1 ey Ebow Vibration 01 32 gt Z U Ebows Vibration Oz 32 L OG Drum One Shots 3 Ebow Vibration 03 32 cal 7 gf Guitars 4 GU Eho vibration 04 32 TUZ Basses 5 J Ebow vibration 05 32 L E Keyboards 6 GU Eho vibration 06 32 i 7 Ebow Vibration 07 32 Search results B GU Eho vibration 08 28 9 Ebow vibration 09 32 LIES Technical z 10 Ebow Vibration 10 329 A aa im ii Eho vibration 11 32 i2 Eho vibration 12 20 Z2 T P 1 5 ae Vihratinn 13 At 2 s4 13 iteme found out of 1 128 total tems Explorer Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transitions Video FX Media Generators 3 You can refine the search results using any of the following methods e Select tag check boxes e Use the Advanced search controls For more information see Using advanced search options on
416. m CD button The Extract Audio from CD dialog appears Extract Audio from CD Actor Read by track K an L Cancel Cancel End 3 From the Action drop down list choose the method you UE at Lt 0i Audio 00 02 00 03 28 35 03 26 35 Z S pehesh want to use for extracting the CD audio 02 Mudo 032835 063237 0304 02 RER Ie Audio 06 32 37 08 50 45 02 18 08 04 Audio 08 50 45 12 03 48 03 13 03 e Read by track Use this option to choose the tracks 05 Aude 120348 15 14 03 11 04 f he CD 06 Audio 151452 1738 02 23 29 you want to extract trom the 07 aude 173806 220332 0425 2 a l 08 Audio 2208392 2446 07 02 42 50 ka Read entire disc Use this option to automatically ng Audio 234 46 DF 39 94 23 4 35 26 extract all tracks on the disc The entire CD is 7 ee ee extracted into one new file in the Project Media 12 Audio 3646 57 405153 04047 w window Drive e Read by range Use this option to extract audio from speed mx a specified range of time Selected length 00 00 00 4 If you chose either the Read by track or Read by range option specify the track s or range to extract e For Read by track click the track s you want to extract in the Tracks to read list Use the or keys to select more than one track Each track is extracted into a separate file in the Project Media window e For Read by range enter a time in the Range start field and either the Range end or Range length fields The range of audio is
417. m the shortcut menu 3 From the submenu choose the bus where you want to send the selected track A check mark is displayed for each bus send level that is automated for the selected track USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 S HS S F Adjusting bus automation levels 1 Click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls The fader handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose a bus from the menu Siu OA Gre Val 0 3 dE a Bus 4 0 0d8 S 1 Pan Center EY 1 0 0 dG Bus A 0 0 dB 3 Drag the fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the assignable FX chains that you have created Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume The fader behaves differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the send level of the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a bus envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelope one will be created when you adjust the fad
418. mage on page 277 Creating still images for use in Vegas software Many image formats can be imported including BMP GIF JPG PNG TIFF requires QuickTime PSD flattened and TGA If you have the option to create PNG files in your graphics software this is the recommended file type PNG files use lossless compression and can also include alpha channel information which is one of the cleanest methods of creating transparency for overlays an alpha channel can automatically be detected if present in PNG files Fx Note The alpha channel may not be automatically detected in TGA images Right click a TGA image in the Project Media window or an event on the timeline and choose Properties Then in the Media Properties dialog select the type of alpha channel from the list Ne see If you know your media file has an alpha channel and it is not detected properly right click the media file in the Project Media window or an event on the timeline and choose Properties from the shortcut menu Then in the Media tab select the appropriate alpha channel type from the Alpha channel drop down list Premultiplied is the recommended setting You can save this setting so that the alpha channel is properly detected on other media files with the same properties For more information see Setting custom stream properties on page 240 Correcting images for DV pixel aspect ratios For best results when importing still images create images that account f
419. mand bar displays when you add a command to your project Commands add metadata to media files to create effects such as closed captioning For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 115 Pres To be or not to be Brest that is the question Por httpalinediasoftware sonypictures com meter one 00 00 00 0 a0 00 14 29 002875 0000475 0005975 0010477 0012877 L pe ee ee ee ee ee ee t UH HD H F d d d d A l l d l l d jj d A JM d d d id a En m e m m ma ES Ee Ee pe e e L a a L a Va aree INTRODUCTION CHP 1 T aT CD layout bar The CD layout bar displays tracks and indices in an audio CD layout project for disc at once DAO CD burning For more information see Burning CDs on page 351 Track 1 Anywhere but somewhere Track 2 Glass of punch Track 3 Sad but untrue Track 4 So what Track list This area identifies the track order in your project and contains controls used to determine track compositing and mixing For more information see Using the track list on page 64 Track minimize K Selected track and maximize iii overlay mC he OC I Level 100 0 I t Parent child ns Video tracks compositing SEB RE be SO control Level 100 0 ll Ext 4 Track number Ej voiceover A 5 S Vol 15 808 Audio track Pan Center Timeline All arranging and editing is don
420. many characteristics of a video event such as speed color and size Video events can overlay other video events and are visual elements that appear on top of a background video image or color Moving events along the timeline You can move events along the timeline individually or as a group Events may overlap each other or be placed on top of each other You can crossfade overlapping events automatically or with envelopes Moving an event You can move an event along the timeline within a track or move it to a different track 1 Drag the event along the timeline If you move the event along the original track s timeline the event s appearance color remains the same GETTING STARTED CHP 2 61 However you may move the event to a different track When you do the event appears as a simple outline and you will see its original track and position on the timeline Once you release the mouse the event assumes the new timeline position and track color aa bied Original track position Lk a New track and position 2 Release the mouse to place the event Moving multiple events You can move multiple events along the timeline within a track or move them to a different track Selected events do not need to be within the same track Use the key the key or the Selection Edit Tool click the event and choose Select Events to End For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 96 Moving events by sm
421. mating panning You can automate panning on a track or mixer control by adding keyframes Keyframes are similar to envelope points in that they specify a settings state at a point in time However unlike envelope points keyframes appear just below the track to which they apply To add panning keyframes to a mixer control you must first view the mixer control in track view From the View menu choose Show Bus Tracks to view the bus track at the bottom of the track view For more information see Viewing bus tracks on page 188 Turning on panning keyframes Before adding individual keyframes you must first turn on the panning keyframes for the track or bus track 1 Select the track or bus track for which you want to automate panning 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio Envelopes and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu An additional row appears below the track with a single keyframe positioned at the beginning of the project This single keyframe represents the current panning settings for the track F a SHB OHSS QI a Vol 00d d G Bus A O 0dB d G e 4 f i Keyframe Adding panning keyframes With panning keyframes turned on you can add keyframes at any location along the track or bus track 1 Position the cursor where you want to begin panning the track 2 Click the Automation Settings button gt on the track you want to pan and select Show Automation Controls 3 Double click the surround panner to display th
422. mation see Using Automation on page 155 Prevents playback of the bus pg 186 When Show Automation Controls is selected the button is displayed as a and you can use the button to edit mute automation on the bus s bus track Plays only the output of that bus pg 186 Adjusts the bus s volume on two stereo channels pg 185 When Show Automation Controls is selected the thumb is displayed as a S and you can use the fader to edit volume automation on the bus s bus track Tip Right click the thumb and choose Pre FX or Post FX from the shortcut menu to specify whether the bus level is applied before or after the bus effects chain Name of the bus Double click the name to edit it pg 186 Drag to ajust the overall panning of the track When Show Automation Controls is selected the thumb is displayed as a J and you can use the Slider to edit pan automation on the bus s bus track Allows you to select the device that the bus uses for playback Displays the Bus FX window and allows you to adjust the audio effects plug ins Displays the playback level of the bus pg 185 Adding busses to a project Bus control in Mixer Window Playback Bus device E f Bus S Pan slider___cef eT InF InF 7517 J 0 0 Bus onal ie d G 15 71 Fader 214 72 7 rass Meter 39 aS Name Automation Mute Bus settings Ga 1 8 1 Solo Bus control showing automat
423. me fader audio Only 0 00 cece eee eee eee eens 144 Using the multipurpose slider audio only 2 00 cee eee eee eee ees 145 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects Chains 0 00 cece eee eee eee eens 146 Assigning audio tracks to busses 26 2 ed bb dcedareeiwa dt wanaceiad wa eae Waa Saat eae 147 Adjusting the composite level video only 00 cece eee eee eee eee eens 148 Selecting the compositing mode e e e e eee eee eeees 148 Bypassing motion blur envelopes video only 02 e eee eee eee eee ees 148 Using track motion video only v2scseedaw is hare ere ee deirdre shee ee dee deeded 148 Phase inverting a track audio Only 2 ce eee eee 148 UATE eT as TE oraren wig erapee erate ag ey gwen e oar eater eer ere ter e SUwre Sent 149 Muting all audio or video tracks e 149 e ee eke air 2 2 2 6 o5 nfe d noe S eees ee Bee Raia aia ca ain nore wei ec ero aude Neen Rao Bae SE 150 Setting default track properties 0 cc ees 150 Track automation envelopes 64 00 sie eed es eS ee ee eae bene ea oes 150 Using audio DUS TACKS 9 RT R eae ete end ee se ete tk bate aa oe ee Be 151 Adding envelopes to an audio bus track 00 c cee 151 Adding effects to audio bus tracks 0 eee eee eee eae eeeees 151 Muting or soloing an audio bus track 2 0c eens 151 Resizing audio DUS tracks eee sph ok oot Soe Sat ect tesh Send oooh nanan 151 Usma VIGCO DUS Le ten
424. me for 5 1 surround projects behaves almost identically to stereo projects The controls in the track headers and Mixer window can function as trim controls that adjust the overall volume of the track bus or assignable effects chain or they can adjust volume automation settings For more information see Track automation on page 155 Adjusting track volume You can adjust track volume using the Vol fader in the track header the same way you do in stereo projects Click the Automation Settings button on the track header and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want to adjust trim levels SG OSGeo LF Val 3 0 dB ill Bus 12 0 dg a C RIE T 4 Track header in trim mode Select Show Automation Controls if you want to adjust volume automation The fader handle is displayed as a w in automation mode ST OG eo S 1r Vol 00d Bus A 0 0098 9 5 e amp E Track header in automation mode WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 2913 Adjusting assignable effects send or bus send levels You can adjust send levels for busses or assignable effects chains using the multipurpose fader in the track header Click the fader label and choose an assignable effects chain or bus from the menu The fader in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall send level of the track or it can adjust send level automation settings Click the Automation Settings button on
425. me rate the event would also be in slow motion but its duration would remain unchanged at five seconds Stretched video has a zigzag line between thumbnails Video can also be compressed sped up and shortened in length by using this method 00 00 40 00 00 45 a N ee P 3 T 00 00 50 _ When stretching video events or slowing video down a set number of frames are extended across a period of time For example if you take source footage at 30 frames in a second and slow it so that only 15 source frames run during that same second an additional 15 frames must be created to maintain the project s 30 fps frame rate Simply duplicating frames is the easiest way to do this A more sophisticated method is to resample the frames of an event allowing Vegas software to interpolate and redraw these intervening frames For more information see Resample video only on page 173 and Resampling video on page 232 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 130 r Working with takes A take is a version of a scene or audio recording as in Scene 10 Take 7 which means the seventh time that scene number ten has been shot A number of takes can be included in the same location event of the project You can then rapidly switch between these separate takes to see which one fits into the project the best Although this is what takes are designed for you can actually use any media files you want as a take even completely different sounds or s
426. me selection The event is then filled with the newly recorded material The audio file that is recorded to your hard disk is the full duration of the time selection The event only contains a portion of the full recorded performance and can therefore be trimmed both shorter and longer and repositioned within the event 00 00 01 28 m Time selection bar ira aaa HHE defines the recorded SMM ba 16 G ee OI audio file s duration ee 12 31 02 HE T Pre roll Post roll Punch in Punch out CHP 11 RECORDING AUDIO 206 T Triggering from MIDI timecode TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Recording can be triggered and synchronized by an external MIDI device that outputs generates MIDI timecode MTC When triggering from MIDI timecode you should have your audio devices connected together via a master digital word clock The word clock keeps the audio hardware locked together eliminating the need for the software to constantly vary its playback rate to stay synchronized The incoming timecode is only used for an absolute time reference For more information see Sync tab on page 344 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and go to the Sync tab 2 From the Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings drop down list select the device that you want to trigger Vegas software 3 Click OK The Preferences dialog closes 4 Click the Arm for Record button on the desired track s
427. ments and render it again later Rendering a video file can take quite a bit of time depending on the complexity of your project the speed of your CPU and the final format you have selected For longer projects you might want to plan to render your movie overnight or when you are not using your computer The process for rendering a project is essentially the same regardless of the final format of the rendered file ee gt TI Note When you route busses to hardware outputs the outputs from those busses will not be included in the mix when you render your project This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software pm LEE 4 TI Note For specific information on 5 1 surround projects see Rendering surround projects on page 221 This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software EE CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 308 p ___ 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears C Save in O FinalRenders 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to save the Pee rendered file My Recent Documents 3 Type a new name in the File name box if necessary 4 In the Save as type drop down list choose the appropriate format For more information see Selecting a My Documents file format on page 309 3 g 5 In the Template drop down list select the appropriate My Computer template N N File name My Vegas Proj
428. ming or downloading via the Web The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web More about the MPEG format MPEG renders can sometimes take more time than renders with some other formats MPEG video files can be played back on most computer systems MPEG video files can also be burned to CDs or DVDs for playback in standalone VCD SCVD and DVD players Sony Media Software cannot guarantee the compatibility of MPEG files with VCD DVD authoring software or VCD SCVD and DVD standalone players Consult your specific authoring software s documentation for information on what constitutes a valid file and then customize the MPEG rendering properties to match r aaa Note For information on preparing files for DVD Architect projects please see the DVD Architect documentation nS o oisi CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 310 r More about the Wave64 and Perfect Clarity Audio formats The Wave64 w64 and Perfect Clarity Audio pca formats are proprietary formats developed by Sony Media Software to work around some limitations inherent in other formats Currently neither is compatible with many other applications and may not be playable in other media players but both are excellent choices for Sony Media Software projects e Wave64 files work around the maximum file size limitation inherent in the WAV format The Wave64 format has no maximum file size and is useful in
429. n Marking tracks automatically Vegas software can examine the events in your project and mark the audio CD tracks for you Once the tracks are marked you can adjust them manually if necessary For more information see Moving track and index markers on page 355 1 Lay out your project with two second pauses between tracks 2 From the Tools menu choose Lay Out Audio CD from Events The new audio CD track markers appear on the CD layout bar above the timeline The name of the media file for each event is used to name the tracks BURNING CDS CHP 19 a 355 Marking tracks manually You can make a time selection and then mark that selection as an audio CD track 1 Make a time selection that includes the audio for the new track 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio CD Track Region The markers for the new audio CD track appear on the CD layout bar Marking indices You can create an index marker in much the same way as you create track markers 1 Position the cursor where you want the index mark to appear 2 From the Insert menu choose Audio CD Track Index The new index marker appears on the CD layout bar 00 00 07 00 Working with tracks and indices Once you have marked your tracks and indices you can edit move rename or delete them as needed Navigating to and selecting tracks and indices Several shortcuts are provided for navigating to and selecting audio CD tracks on the CD layout bar Double click a track mar
430. n 3 Select your burning options Erase RW disc before burning If you re using a rewritable CD select this check box to erase the CD before you begin burning Close disc when done burning Select this check box to close the CD after burning Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Eject disc when done Select this check box to eject the CD automatically when burning has completed Burn selection only Select this check box to burn only the audio within the loop region 4 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 5 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning 6 Click the Start button a Warning Clicking the Cancel button after the disc writing process has begun will render your disc unusable SSS EeESFsfsessFsFsFF 7 When the writing process is complete a confirmation message displays Click OK to clear the message Closing a track at once CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn CD and choose Track at Once Audio CD from the submenu The Create CD dialog appears 2 Click the Close Disc button 3 When the disc is closed a confirmation message displays Click OK to clear the message CHP 19 BURNING CDS 358 r Burning a disc disc at once 1 From the T
431. n see All enabled f snap to Grid cira Changing grid spacing on page 331 EEE SIE e Snap To Markers controls snapping to markers This command Grid Spacing gt applies to markers regions command markers and CD layout Ruler Eormat markers For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 115 Quantizing to frames The Quantize To Frames command in the Options menu takes snapping one step further With this feature enabled everything snaps to the starting edge of individual project frames Quantizing affects how you can move events place markers make selections and position the cursor Quantizing to frames means that the position of markers regions events and the cursor are limited to the start of an individual video frame 00 01 13 14 00 01 13 17 Track zoomed in so that one thumbnail one frame CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 126 Using the event snap offset Each event in your project has a snap offset flag that can be moved along the length of the event The flag is the white triangle that is located in the lower left corner of each event This flag allows you to designate where snapping occurs This is useful if you need to align the snap with a beat in the event instead of the edge Snap offset fla Soo p g Shap offset 0 000 Shap offset 50 000 1 Place the mouse pointer on the snap offset triangle The pointer changes to a hand icon dh 2 Drag the sn
432. n see CD Settings tab on page 350 Adding a still image sequence TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software If you ve exported a video clip as a still image sequence using another application a 3D rendering application for example the sequence can be added to the Project Media window and treated as a single media file Each image in the sequence will be displayed for one frame in the event 1 Click the Import Media button amp in the Project Media aR window The Import Media dialog appears ae gt 2 2 Choose the folder where the sequence you want to open E Machinery ai_00000 tga Machinery ai _O0006 tga Machinery ai _0001 zt a Machinery a_O0001 tga 8 Machinery si_OO007 tga e Machinery ai_000131 is stored a Machinery ai_OO002toa ba Machinery ai_OO008 tga fa Machinery ai_O0014 t oe ja Machinery ai_O0003 tga a Machinery ai_00009 tga_ a Machinery ai_O0015 t 3 Select the first Image in the sequence or the Image you a Machinery a_O0004 tga a Machinery ai_O0010 tga lt l Machinery ai_O0016 t want to start the event a Machinery ai_O0005 tga a Machinery ai_O0011 taa lt l Machinery ai_O0017 t 4 Select the Open still image sequence check box File name L 5 In the Range field enter the number of the last image you f y T want to open For example if you d selected AnimationOne_00001 tga in step 3 you could enter 120 a in this box to create a new image
433. n Trimmer from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Select Parent Media button in the Trimmer window The subclip s original media file is opened in the Trimmer and the portion of the media that represents the subclip is selected Removing red eye from stills a This feature is available only in Vegas Movie Studio and Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software CHP 5 1 Right click a still image on the timeline or in the Project Media window and choose Red Eye Reduction from the shortcut menu 2 Click and drag to create a selection around the red portion of the eye 3 Click the or buttons to change the magnification of the image or roll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom around the cursor position 4 Drag to position the selection box over the portion of the eye you want to correct Drag the borders of the selection box to adjust its size Vegas automatically adjusts the portion of the image in the selection box to remove red eye a Tip Right click a selection box and choose Delete from the shortcut menu to remove it NE Readjust the selection box as needed and repeat this procedure for each red eye in the image 2 Note If an image is used multiple times in your project removing the red eyes once will affect all instances of the image TT ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 13H Using the Edit Details window TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software The Edit De
434. n be used to display headlines show captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Several command types are included that you may add to a streaming media file Some command types are exclusive to either the Windows Media or the RealMedia player Command Player type URL Windows Media and RealMedia Text Windows Media WMClosedCaption Windows Media WMTextBodyText Window Media WMTextHeadline Windows Media Title RealMedia Author RealMedia Copyright RealMedia HotSpotPlay RealMedia HotSpotBrowse RealMedia HotSpotSeek RealMedia Description Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s internet browser to change the content being displayed With this command you enter the URL that displays at a specific time during the rendered project s playback Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that will display during playback Note To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9 choose Captions and Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu and then choose On if Available from the submenu Displays the entered text in the captioning window that is defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text in the text window that is defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text in the headline window that is defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text on the RealPlayer s title bar
435. n one respect from printing to tape from the timeline no audio is sent through the preview device As shown in the illustration above the audio is routed to the sound card and then on to the mixer if present and speakers This allows you to mix your audio on better speakers than are typically found in television monitors Before printing to tape you may wish to preview the audio through the television monitor speakers to ensure a good TV mix You can use the print to tape feature to send the full video and audio to the external monitor Follow the steps for printing to tape from the timeline pg 323 but do not set the camcorder to record Both the video and audio are sent through the 1394 card to the external monitor Optimizing preview quality Keep in mind that complex effects and or transitions may not play back in real time from the timeline What effects can and cannot be played back depends on the speed of your computer You may want to prerender more complex portions of a project For more information see Prerendering video on page 289 mnn Note The compression settings used to create the prerendered video must be identical to your captured files for timeline playback to work N PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 F 303 Viewing on an external monitor via DeckLink TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can send video directly from the timeline to a video monitor c
436. n the first phase of a distributed job Both distributed and nondistributed rendering jobs can be queued to be performed as computing resources become available so you can render multiple projects or render the same project in multiple formats Rendering using a computer other than your main editing computer allows you to continue working without waiting for the render job to complete Setting up your computers for network rendering The computer that initiates and manages a network render is considered the owner of the job Each networked computer that you use for rendering is called a renderer The computer that reassembles rendered segments in a distributed rendering job is called the stitch host The computer that is designated to perform a nondistributed network render job is called the render host To use network rendering effectively we recommend the following e 256 MB RAM in each renderer e 100 Mbps switched local area network e Your media files and output file must be in shared folders preferably on a dedicated file server All renderers must have permission to read write create and delete files in the shared folders Before network rendering begins a copy of your project will be saved in the shared output folder for use by the renderers This version will have all media paths remapped based on the Network Render Service file mappings For more information see Setting file mappings on page 321 SAVING RENDERING AND PRI
437. n the ruler Relative to cursor Adds each imported file to the Vegas timeline and offsets the timestamp value by the cursor position For example if you position the cursor at 00 00 10 00 before importing a BWF file with a timestamp of 00 00 30 00 the media would be added to the timeline at the forty second mark on the ruler 6 Click Open The WAV file is added to your project Importing video from a DVD camcorder You can use Vegas software to import video from a finalized Sony DVD Handycam camcorder disc mnn Note Before importing video you ll need to finalize the disc For information about finalizing a disc please refer to your camcorder s documentation S S DS VGooe lt u eee Important 5 1 channel audio will be downmixed to stereo when importing ee RE a Tip The Sony Handycam USB driver that is included with DVD based camcorders can prevent Vegas from recognizing a USB connected camera If you use the Add Remove Programs Control Panel to uninstall the Sony DVD Handycam USB driver component Vegas will be able connect to the camera and import video SE F 1 From the File menu choose Import and then choose DVD Camcorder Disc from the submenu The Import DVD Camcorder Disc dialog is displayed 2 From the Source drop down list choose the disc that contains the video you want to import 3 The Destination box displays the folder w
438. n this example adding the Snare tag to a media file would mean that a search of 4 for Audio Drum One Shots or Snare would find your tagged media If the ees fa E user rearranged the tag tree so that the Snare tag did not appear below the lt D Audio a Audio and Drum One Shots tags searching for Audio or Drum One Shots L 2 0 Drum One Shots would not find your tagged media If you add all three tags to your media file a search for Audio Drum One LQ Floor Tom Shots or Snare would find your tagged media even if the tag tree had been rearranged though this behavior is not always desirable Removing a tag from a media file You remove tags from media by dragging a tag from the tag list to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Remove Tag Mode button is selected i e Tip If you want to see which tags are associated with a file as you re adding or removing tags use the Properties pane in the Search Results pane or drag the Tags column in the Search Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time oe 1 Select media files in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key
439. nann teens 367 eane neBa LT eee eee eee ar A 367 Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working COrmrecv 7 nonn r n eens 367 Why do hear gaps in my audio playback 0 cee eee eee 367 Why do mono events increase 6 dB when panning a track hard e eee eee 368 Why do buffer underruns occur during a test or real write toa CD 000 ee eee 368 Why can t work with footage captured using an MJPEG card 00 0c eens 369 Trouble free video software solutionS e eee eee 369 Trouble free video hardware solutions e e ees 369 VIGECO SUDSYV n Sede acacia hide n a 40ack aia how Oe arate aoe vere aon Asan dene eae Sew ES 369 Sae ASK 3 5 ut ocak wees cn ee et a Shetek ek Se TTT 370 CPULand RAM Memory i a 3 00d naceae weds baud dace ee aaa a wee teeter toe ed aaa ae 370 Audio proxy files SfapO 0 0 0 ccc eee ee ee eee eee eens 371 Interlacing and field order 2 0c cece eee eee eens 371 lI cessera eect R tye wee EM Oaa eas ceeded beer eats 373 SMPTE TIMECODE Types 622556 5ccbaade does erin dade ote ett eo OS Ee Hee SEE he 373 TABLE OF CONTENTS 16 y Timecode in Vegas software acts ch kee ahahaha Poo bo eee ede dnatee dey dees 374 Troubleshooting DV hardware ISSUES 00200 e eee eee a eens 3 5 CHOSSAIY a auch tac Swat wen awe hau geun TA 377 NNN ONG E as ps pa aston eam isa eae gs Sage ws na ae ae ee ee i TABLE OF CONTENTS 17 CHAPTER eee Introduction
440. nd Y offsets are independently encoded in the image color channels e Height Map Uses the parent image as a guide to offset the pixels in the composited child tracks The gradient of the image in the parent track is used to determine the amount of offset for the image displayed at that location much like how light bends through a lens e Bump Map Uses the parent image as a guide to add texture and lighting to the composited child tracks The texture of the bump map is applied to the composited child tracks light sections of the map represent high areas and dark sections represent low areas 3D Compositing TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software With 3D compositing you can move video tracks anywhere in space to simulate realistic motion and lighting With 2D compositing and in previous versions of Vegas software you can move video or images along the X or Y axes and you can rotate video along the Z axis With 3D compositing you can move or rotate along the X Y or Z axes to create distance depth and perspective There are two basic rules to 3D compositing 1 When you have a 2D track in the track list 3D tracks below that track are rendered in 3D and then composited as a 2D image 2 A 2D track at the root level flush to the left of the track list acts as a barrier to interaction between 3D tracks In the following examples both text tracks have been rotated in 3D the hot track is r
441. nd drag the files to the track view timeline 3 When you release the mouse a shortcut menu appears Select a placement option from the menu e Add Across Time e Add As Takes lt You will see one event on the track The other events are listed at takes beneath the the topmost event For more information see Working with takes on page 130 Video Only and Audio Only allow you to isolate either the video or audio and add that stream from a multimedia file either across tracks across time or as takes ee O Tip A left click drag and drop automatically inserts files across time However you can cycle through placement modes by right clicking without releasing the left mouse button while performing the drag and drop operation eS GETTING STARTED CHP 2 a B7 Double clicking a media file This method places the event at the cursor s position in the selected track If the selected track is a video track and you double click an audio event or vice versa a new track is created for the event Once an event is placed you can move it from one track to another or change its position on the timeline Inserting a video file with associated audio Media files with video frequently include associated audio When you insert a media file into the timeline the associated audio is automatically inserted into a separate audio track below the video track The two associated events are grouped together and behave as
442. ndow you can zoom in and out on a still image In this example four keyframes are used to zoom in on faces in an old photograph and zoom back out again A generated color gradient event masks the edges of the image during the zoom to enhance the effect For more information see Using generated media on page 247 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button t on the still image event 2 Click the keyframe controller to position the cursor for the second keyframe 3 Click the Add Keyframe button Resize and move the selection area to zoom in on a portion of the image 4 Click the keyframe controller to position the cursor for the third keyframe 5 Click the Add Keyframe button Resize and move the selection area to zoom in on a different portion of the image 6 Click in the keyframe controller near the end of the event to place the final keyframe 7 Click the Add Keyframe button Z 8 Right click in the selection area and choose Restore from the shortcut menu The selection area is zoomed out to include the full image for the last keyframe CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 278 i 9 Preview the event in the Video Preview window Adjust the settings in the Event Pan Crop window as you preview the zoom effect First keyframe Second keyframe Third keyframe Last keyframe ideo Preview kad Ex video Preview oO B Ex 7 Best Auto HH SL as ideo P
443. ness 100 Smoothness slider 2 Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the spatial interpolation path leading up to this keyframe Three keyframes with and the same three keyframes smoothness 100 with smoothness 0 F 7 InF ane InF ae Z 1 ee ee eet ee T aaa Ia a a a InF Inf 3 InF InF A Add Channels 0 dB Center FR A Add Channels 0 dB Center E Locking keyframes to events If you want keyframes to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline choose Lock Envelopes to Events from the Options menu WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 a DD 1 Hiding keyframes 1 Select the track for which you want to hide keyframes 2 From the View menu choose Show Audio Envelopes and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu Deleting keyframes Right click a keyframe and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Rendering surround projects 5 1 surround projects are rendered to produce six monaural files AIFF WAV W64 or PCA or a single 5 1 channel file AC 3 WMA and WMV You can then use an authoring application to create the final DVD Video or 5 1 channel music project from the rendered files a e Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format with respect to the LFE channel For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 210 a From
444. ng any changes these are also the settings that are used to create a final rendered movie file e Select a preset template from the Template drop down HR list to automatically configure the remaining video controls in this dialog Many popular formats are included but you should consult your hardware manuals if you have any questions You can also save your own custom template Click the Match Media Settings button L amp to set your project properties to match the properties of a media file of your choosing video Audio Ruler Summary Audio CE Template NTSC DY 720x480 29 970 fps v N width 720 Field order Height 450 Pixel aspect ratio Frame rate 29 970 NTSC w Full resolution rendering quality Good Motion blur type Gaussian e The values in the Width and Height boxes set the frame size of your final movie e Choose an option from the Field Order drop down list to set the field order Choose None Progressive for video to be viewed on a computer monitor For DV output choose Lower Field First If the output is jittery or shaky or your hardware s manual specifies it choose Upper Field First For more information see Interlacing and field order on page 371 e Choose the pixel aspect ratio for the final movie s destination from the Pixel aspect ratio drop down list For more information see Pixel Aspect Ratio on page 383 e Choose a frame rate for the final movies destination from the Frame
445. ng back and previewing You can play back your project in two ways directly from the timeline from within the software or by mixing the entire project to a preview file Playing your project The transport bar allows you to play back your entire project or portions of your project based on a time selection or the current cursor position GE gt il N p If your project includes video make sure the Video Preview window is displayed for playback from the View menu choose Video Preview or press 6 Playing an entire project 1 Click the Play From Start button 1 gt to begin playback at the beginning of the project 2 Click the Stop button S to stop playback Most of the time you will only want to preview a small portion of the project to perfect a section You can do this by creating a time selection Playing a time selection 1 Place the mouse pointer above the ruler on the marker bar The mouse pointer Loop bar changes to include a left right arrow cursor 2 Drag to select the time region To increase or decrease the time selection drag ya _ EEE its start and end points The time selection is highlighted and the loop bar appears above the ruler on the timeline 3 Click the Play button gt to begin playback Only the non muted tracks and events within the time selection play back 4 Click the Loop Playback button to continually play back the events within the time selection Click the b
446. ng bus meter resolution on page 185 You can also adjust the Preview fader to correct clipping in the same way you adjust a bus For more information see Adjusting a bus for clipping on page 185 USING THE MIXER CHP 9 L 1 8 3 Using busses TI Multiple audio busses are only available in the full version of Vegas software A bus is a master control for the audio signal mix of one or more tracks You can assign tracks to play back on a specific bus For more information see Assigning audio tracks to busses on page 186 However to assign a track to a bus you must have more than one bus in your project Each project has a Master bus as a default but you may add up to 25 additional busses to the Mixer window A bus is the last stage in the signal s flow through Vegas software For more information see Audio signal flow on page 39 You can configure each bus to use a specific hardware output For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Automation settings Mute Solo Fader Name Pan Playback device Bus FX Meter The controls in the bus control list can function as trim controls or automation controls for bus volume panning and muting Click the button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected if you want the bus control to function as a trim control Adjusting a trim control affects the entire track Click the button and choose Show Automation Controls to adjust automation settings For more infor
447. ng file during playback or capture this can interrupt the video software and cause problems Make sure that a different disk drive is being used for virtual memory other than the one from which you are capturing or playing your video If you have enough space use C for virtual memory and use a physically distinct drive for capturing and playing back video e Make sure you have the latest drivers for your video card and capture card and the latest updates and patches to all relevant software One caveat to this is that you shouldn t try to fix a program that is working correctly Many times patches and updates fix relatively minor bugs that only affect a small number of users If you are not experiencing any problems it is probably best not to upgrade unless the manufacturer recommends it e Uncompressed video may be high quality but it results in very large files with very high data rates Selecting a more appropriate compression scheme codec will definitely improve the situation If you are creating movies that need maximum quality however this may not be an option Trouble free video hardware solutions Even with a fast computer video is still a hardware challenge On the other hand it is definitely possible to properly configure a 400 MHz Pentium to work with large video files There are three parts of your PC that are important and the speed of your CPU is not necessarily the most critical The following list is arranged from the most
448. nly in the full version of Vegas software You can use AAF Advanced Authoring Format files to exchange projects between applications For example if your postproduction facility uses a tool other than Vegas software you could provide your project as an AAF file If you intend to import an AAF file into your current Vegas project please note the following usage guidelines and plan your project accordingly Audio and video cuts are preserved All video transitions are imported as crossfades Audio and video effects are ignored The AAF Video Speed Control effect is preserved and mapped to the Playback rate setting in the imported event s properties e If you import an AAF file that has embedded wave or AIFC audio the files will be extracted to the same folder as the AAF file when you import the project 1 From the File menu choose Import and then choose AAF from the submenu The Import dialog displays 2 Navigate to and select an AAF file to add to the Project Media list You can use or to select multiple files 3 Click Open The AAF file is added to your project Importing broadcast wave files TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use Broadcast Wave Format BWF files to exchange audio between audio editors or broadcasting platforms Broadcast Wave Format files are similar to standard wav files but they contain additional metadata including timestamps that tell the software
449. nn annn 292 Showing the video at the cursor position and the contents of the clipboard 293 Changing the selection for displaying split screen VIEWS 2000 cece eee eens 293 Identifying safe areas 1 eee eee teen eee e eee eeaaes 293 VIEWING INEO a aaa a eat d ania ded aha ab aviw taut ew ee eae aie eae ae 294 Isolating color channelS 00000 cee eee eee eee eee eee eee 294 Monitoring video with SCOPES 0 ccc eee eee eee eee 294 Displaying chrominance using the vectorscope monitor 00 e e e es 295 Displaying luminance using the waveform Monitor 00 cece eee ees 296 Displaying color levels and contrast using the histogram monitor 0000000000 297 Displaying RGB components with RGB parade monitor 0000 cece eee eee ees 298 Adjusting video scope SEIINGS e hed be pitaides eos So hothdewdanedh ad ead ene 299 FrevieWING IN d Dayer 026 aT eta seu e cs cw eee bate base ona tee ea eee Sal oad 300 Using an external ien e os c6ti246sedie ebay ee ob eee alee oe ee ae 300 Configuring an external MONItOr 2 lt e e eee eee eee eee 300 Previewing video on a secondary Windows display n eee 301 Viewing on a broadcast monitor via IEEE 1394 FireWire e e ccc eee eee 301 TABLE OF CONTENTS esses 13 Viewing on an external monitor via DeckLink 1 0 0 0 0 ccc es 303 Saving Rendering and Printing Projects 05 305 Saving a D
450. not using the Media Manager you may want to turn it off to conserve processing power or memory Select this check box to use a compatible mode to check the capacity of the media when you insert a disc Selecting the check box can prevent a hang that can occur with some external drives When the check box is cleared the software will use the standard method which is slightly faster CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 338 gt Preference Description r raa AAF Export Use frame unit for Select this check box if you want to use frame units for audio tracks when you export audio your project as an AAF file When the check box is cleared audio will be exported as sample units Selecting the check box will improve compatibility with other applications for project interchange some applications will not import your project correctly when frame units are used for video and sample units are used for audio Clear the check box only if your project contains audio only or if you know the application that will import your AAF file supports frame units for video and sample units for audio This setting has no effect when you export your project as an AAF and choose Avid Legacy AAF File from the Save as Type drop down list Avid legacy AAF files are always exported using frame units for audio Recently used project list Select the number of files to be listed at the bottom of the File menu Temporary files folder Select a location for all tempo
451. nsert menu choose Region or press R 3 Type a name for the region and press Enter If you do not want to name the region simply press Enter Region markers display at the beginning and end points of a time selection Region start Region end Right click the marker bar new section El oiceover thew section Marker Loop Playback P bar ee s ee I ee EE T Set Selection to view 00 I al L Set Selection to Project Select Loop Region Markers Regians Insert Marker Delete All Moving regions Drag a region marker to reposition it To move both region markers start and end markers at once hold while dragging a region marker CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 118 r Naming regions 1 Place the mouse pointer on the left region marker you want to name or rename The pointer changes to a hand icon d 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box appears next to the region marker 2 Introduction 4 Type the regions name aa 5 Press or click anywhere in the track view to set the name Selecting regions You may select the events across all tracks within the region for editing or playing back 1 Right click one of the region markers to display a shortcut menu am S 2 introduction Go Tao Z G ar ieee _ Selected region Go to End z x Select Region Rename Delete 2 From the shortcut menu choose Select Re
452. nt your control movements Select this check box if you want to reduce the number of envelope points keyframes after recording is finished For more information see Recording automation settings on page 167 Set controls to default values Select this check box if you want controls to return to their default values when set the track s automation when automation is turned off recording mode to Automation Off Automated effect parameters do not have default settings and will retain their last set values when you turn automation off When the check box is cleared controls will retain their last set values when you turn automation off Available devices Choose a device from the drop down list and click Add to choose the control surfaces that will be available to Vegas software Adding a device loads its default profile Active control devices Lists the control devices that you ve added Double click a device name to customize its behavior Default all Restores all control surface preferences to the default settings CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 m 347 Connecting a control surface You can use one Mackie Control Universal or up to five generic control surfaces with Vegas software Perform the following steps for each device Connect the MIDI Out port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI In port on your control surface Connect the MIDI In port on your MIDI interface to the MIDI Out port on your control surface Configure Vegas soft
453. nto longer ones OQuadraphonic A mixing implementation that allows for four discrete audio channels These are usually routed to two front speakers and two back speakers to create immersive audio mixes Quantization Audio The process by which measurements are rounded to discrete values Specifically with respect to audio quantization is a function of the analog to digital conversion process The continuous variation of the voltages of a analog audio signal are quantized to discrete amplitude values represented by digital binary numbers The number of bits available to describe these values determines the resolution or accuracy of quantization For example if you have 8 bit analog to digital converters the varying analog voltage must be quantized to 1 of 256 discrete values a 16 bit converter has 65 536 values Quantization is to level as sampling rate is to time GLOSSARY APPENDIX B 385 Quantization Noise A result of describing an analog signal in discrete digital terms see Quantization This noise is most easily heard in low resolution digital sounds that have low bit depths and is similar to a hiss while the audio is playing It becomes more apparent when the signal is at low levels such as when doing a fade out See also Dithering Quantizing MIDI The correction of rhythms to align with selected note lengths or beats in a MIDI sequence Quantizing Video Limiting all editing to frame boundaries For more information
454. ntrol s last setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 171 Working with Events CHAPTER Events are windows into media files in a project and are the most basic unit of editing in Vegas software Media files that are inserted into the timeline are automatically contained within an event Trimming and editing an event does not affect the source media file in any way Setting event switches Event switches are important functions that are used to determine the basic behavior of events You can set switches for a single event or multiple events at the same time 1 Right click an event 2 From the shortcut menu choose Switches and choose the desired switch from the submenu Active switches have a check mark next to them Choose an active switch on the menu to turn it off eee Tip You can also set switches in the Edit menu in the Edit Details window or by right clicking an event and choosing Properties SSS Mute Use the Mute switch to mute an event This prevents the event from playing back Lock The Lock switch locks an event to prevent it from being moved or edited Loop You can loop an event so that you can extend it along the timeline by dragging the right edge of the event Notches appear in the top of the event to mark where the media in the event ends and then repeats Looping notches for E kjem pegal binii rb l Selected
455. nts Time stretching and compressing events is the process of using the same amount of source media to fill a shorter or longer event While this can be done to both video and audio events the two cases are fundamentally different Press and drag the edge of the event toward the center of the event to compress shorten it or drag the edge out away from the center to stretch lengthen it You can see the results of the time compression or stretching by viewing the properties of the event Right click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu Time compressing stretching an audio event affects the Time stretch pitch shift settings while Time compressing stretching a video event affects the Playback rate setting ee Tip You can time compress stretch several events at once by grouping them first You can also apply a ripple edit after time compressing or stretching events For more information see Grouping events on page 179 or Applying post edit ripples on page 110 SS Time compressing stretching video Time stretching video allows you to fill a given duration with a set amount of actual video sometimes called fit to fill For example if you have a five second video event and you want this event to fill an eight second slot press and drag the edge of the event to eight seconds The resulting video is in slow motion but the contents footage remain the same If you had used a velocity envelope to slow the video to the sa
456. nu 282 Track name 64 65 Changing 142 Track view 23 Track at once CD burning 351 357 Tracks 62 141 153 Adding empty 141 Arming for recording 65 Assigning plug ins to 189 242 Assigning to a bus 65 147 186 Automating parameters 155 158 Color changing 143 Compositing modes 64 249 251 Default properties 150 Deleting 142 Duplicating 141 Height changing 143 Height setting default 150 inserting empty 141 Making compositing child 64 258 Mixing to a single track 153 Multipurpose slider 65 Muting 64 65 149 Naming renaming 142 Number 64 65 Organizing 142 143 Panning 214 Phase inverting 65 148 Reordering 142 Resizing 143 Scribble strip 64 65 142 Selecting 98 Soloing 64 65 150 Track effects 64 189 196 241 246 Track FX button 65 Track keyframes 64 276 277 Track layers 270 Track motion 64 281 286 View buttons 64 65 View options 143 Volume fader 65 144 Transition adding to all selected events 269 Transitions 267 Adding 268 Animating 273 n oiii From auto crossfades 268 From cuts 271 Modifying 272 Using 268 Window 27 Transparency 177 And overlays 264 Transport bar 23 67 68 Keyboard shortcuts 32 Triggering recording from MIDI timecode 206 Trimmer window 25 132 137 Audio editor opening from 136 Events placing on track 133 Opening a file in 132 Overview 132 Regions and markers adding 135 Subclips 136 Three point editing
457. o a new position below its track Duplicating keyframes Hold and drag a keyframe to a new position below its track Editing keyframes 1 Double click a keyframe to open the Surround Panner window 2 Adjust the panning settings as desired and close the window CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 220 gt Changing keyframe interpolation curves To control how the pan is interpolated between keyframes right click a keyframe and choose an interpolation curve type from the shortcut menu Keyframe interpolation curves control how the pan occurs over time The keyframe color changes according to the interpolation curve you have chosen Keyframe Interpolation curve Description Hold No interpolation takes place The Keyframe s settings are maintained until the next keyframe Panning is interpolated in a linear path Panning is interpolated in a fast logarithmic path Panning is interpolated in a slow logarithmic path Panning is interpolated along a smooth natural curve Adjusting the Smoothness slider The Smoothness slider controls the perceived motion of sound within the sound field among three or more keyframes When you drag the Smoothness slider to 0 Vegas software interpolates the changes between keyframes along a linear path As you increase the smoothness value the path between keyframes grows more curved and smooth 1 Double click a keyframe The Surround Panner window appears Surround Panner Center Smooth
458. o pre volume right click the multipurpose slider and choose Pre Volume from the shortcut menu OR WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 e 1 42 Assigning audio tracks to busses If your project contains multiple busses you can assign a track to a specific bus This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 Click the Bus button m in the track list to display a drop down list of available busses This button appears only if the project contains multiple busses For more information see Adding busses to a project on page 183 2 From the drop down list choose the bus for the track s output OEZ 89 val 1 7 dB s Master Microsoft Sound Mapper Fei 4 5 dB lt Bus Microsoft Sound Mapper Select a bus for playback Adjusting bus send levels When a track is routed to a bus you can control the level of tracks sent to the bus using the multipurpose slider The multipurpose slider in the track header can function as a trim control that adjusts the overall send level of the track or it can adjust bus send automation settings For more information see Adjusting bus automation levels on page 159 1 Click the Automation Settings button and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected 2 Click the label on the multipurpose slider and choose an assignable effects chain from the menu Do oO Vol 1 7 dB Ill 3 Drag the FX fader to control the level of the track sent to each of the TOE re
459. o track Sets the maximum level that is used when normalizing an event When this check box is selected ACID loops are automatically stretched to match the project tempo specified on the Ruler tab of the Project Properties dialog when you add them to the timeline or preview from the Explorer window When the check box is cleared tempo information is ignored Displays the path of the audio editor that you can start directly from Vegas software to perform destructive edits to audio Allows you to use a default metronome sound or to select custom sound files to be used as the metronome beats Restores all audio preferences to the default settings CHP 18 e 3143 Audio Device tab Preference Audio device type Default playback device Default stereo and front playback device Default rear playback device Default center and LFE playback device Playback buffering seconds Default audio recording device Automatically detect and offset for hardware recording latency Default All Description Choose a driver type from the drop down list The Microsoft Sound Mapper is the default setting If you want to activate specific sound cards choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or ASIO and choose a device from the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop down list ASIO audio drivers are only supported in the full version of Vegas software For more information see Routing busses to hardware on page 184 Choose the devi
460. o video output effects clicking this button displays the Plug In Chooser If you ve already set up video output effects clicking the button displays the Video Output FX window Muting the video output Click the Mute button o in the bus track header to mute all video output Bypassing video effects and envelopes Click the Bypass FX and Envelopes button amp in the bus track header to bypass all video output effects and bus track envelopes Resizing video bus tracks You can drag the horizontal splitter between the track list and bus tracks to increase or decrease the space allocated to bus tracks Perform any of the following actions to resize individual bus tracks Drag a bus track s bottom border to set its height Click Minimize to minimize a track vertically Click Maximize to zoom in vertically so a bus track fills the lower portion of the timeline After minimizing or maximizing a bus track click either the Minimize or Maximize button again to restore a bus track to its previous height e Press Ctrl Shift 4 when the bus track area has focus to resize all bus tracks at once WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 L 153 Rendering to a new track Rendering or mixing multiple tracks to a single track can be a good method of decreasing the complexity of a project and speeding up future renders The original tracks and their events are unaffected when you render mix to a single track Typically you would use thi
461. oblems If you receive an error message that indicates the Network Render Service cannot start when you start the application you may need to resolve DNS suffixes on your computer 1 Open a DOS window a From the Start menu choose Run to display the Run dialog b In the Open box type CMD c Click OK A DOS window is displayed 2 Type ipconfig at the command prompt Your Windows IP Configuration information is displayed Note the Connection specific DNS suffix setting 3 Update your computer s DNS suffix a Right click My Computer on your desktop and choose Properties from the shortcut menu or press the Windows key Pause to open the System Properties dialog b Select the Computer Name tab c Click the Change button to display the Computer Name Changes dialog d Click the More button to display the DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name dialog e In the Primary DNS suffix of this computer box type the DNS suffix you recorded in step 2 4 Click OK to close all dialogs and restart your computer SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 L 319 Using nondistributed network rendering 1 Save your project n o Note In order to use network rendering with nested projects the nested project must contain only media from folders that do not require remapping Before nesting your Vegas project update the project so that all media in the project is added from a network folder or a local shared folder tha
462. ocation drag the column header to the desired location A red indicator shows where the column will be dropped ACID Type Beat Count Tempo Rara oop l 16 100 000 D3 oop e B LE 85 000 E3 i Showing or hiding columns 1 Right click the column headings and choose Column Chooser from the shortcut menu 2 Drag the columns you want to see from the Column Chooser dialog to the Search Results pane 3 To hide a column right click a column heading and choose Remove this Column from the shortcut menu USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 L 91 Adding custom columns You can add custom columns to the Search Results pane to store additional information about media files When you add custom columns they are added to the current library only For example if you wanted to keep track of which removable hard drive contained a media file you could create a custom Drive Number column to assign any numeric rating to a media file You could then use the Advanced section of the Search pane to search using the Drive Number value When adding media to a library you can choose to add this information by selecting the Add tags and custom columns from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog 1 Right click the column headings and choose Custom Columns from the shortcut menu The Custom Columns dialog displays 2 Click the Add New Column button l to add a custom column A new entry is added to the list 3 In the Name box type the nam
463. of the Preferences dialog the Microsoft DV codec will be used If the Ignore third party DV codecs check box is selected and the Use Microsoft DV codec check box is cleared on the General tab of the Preferences dialog the Sony Media Software DV codec will be used You can render using a third party DV codec by choosing a specific codec from the Video format drop down list on the Video tab of the Custom Template dialog CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 300 T Previewing in a player You can create a full quality preview that automatically plays in the appropriate media player You can preview the entire project or select a portion 1 To preview a portion of the project create a selection containing the portion you want to preview 2 From the Tools menu choose Preview in Player Preview in Player 3 Select the type of preview file to create Select a Preview as template or click Custom to configure any compression Template ME options Description Audio 64 Kbps 44 100 Hz Stereo P Video 30 fps 320x240 AV VG Compression 4 To preview just a portion of the project verify that Render loop region only is selected To create a preview of the entire project clear this check box Stretch video to Fill output frame size tdo not letterbox 9 b Click OK A progress bar displays the progress of the render When finished the file automatically plays in the appropriate media player Using an external monit
464. of the following actions e Dragging a file from the Search Results pane to the project timeline The file is added wherever you drop It mnn Tip You can also drag files from the Search Results pane to the Windows desktop a folder or to another application that is an OLE object linking and embedding drop target E lt lt lt lt lt lt Double clicking a media file in the Search Results pane if the Double click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box is selected in the Media Manager Options dialog The file is added to the track list e Right clicking a media file in the Search Results pane and choose Add to Project from the shortcut menu The file is added to the track list If the file is offline yov ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement For more information see Resolving offline media files below Resolving offline media files An offline media file is a file that is no longer available to the Media Manager Media may be classified as offline if you eject removable storage after adding a file to your library or change a file s name or location CHP 3 1 Add media to your project or preview media files If any of the files are not accessible the Resolve Offline Media dialog is displayed with a listing of offline files and their status Icon Status Description T Offline The file listed in the Offline File column cannot be found
465. of the significant differences between editing applications third party EDL files may not bring all of the project data into Vegas software Among other differences events are inserted into the timeline on a single track all transition effects are replaced with crossfades and only four audio tracks can be imported CHP 13 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 234yz Working in DV format Vegas software is optimized for DV editing If your project is destined for tape or television the DV format is an excellent choice The Sony Media Software DV codec provides video with excellent image quality even over multiple generations and provides audio that is better than CD quality If you start with well shot DV footage and stay within the DV format throughout the editing process you can output broadcast quality video programs This section provides guidelines for working in the DV format Selecting source media Wherever possible use DV source video clips You can capture video from DV cameras and decks using an IEEE 1394 card with no quality loss You can also convert analog footage to DV using a media converter or by passing the video through a DV camcorder Setting project properties Set your project to match the DV format of your final output This provides a true WYSIWYG view of the project when you use an external monitor for previewing This also prevents you from stretching output or changing field order unnecessarily You can match the projec
466. oints Hold and click a segment to select all points on the path The pointer is displayed as a Hold Alt Shift while clicking an anchor point to invert the selection state of each anchor on the path The pointer is displayed aS a p Drag a segment between two anchor points to modify the tangents on each side of the segment The pointer is displayed aS a p Hold while clicking an existing point in a closed path to show or hide the tangents The pointer is displayed asa Drag a tangent control to manipulate the curve Both sides of the tangent control move about the anchor point The pointer is displayed asa K Hold while dragging a tangent control to split the halves of the control and adjust them independently or join the two halves of the control if the tangent was previously split Use to create control points Click to create an anchor point Drag before releasing the mouse button to modify the tangents of the new point Click the first or last point of an open path to close the path The tool is displayed as a amp Drag before releasing the mouse button to move the entire path Click between two anchor points to create a new point The tool is displayed as a g If all paths are closed click to create a new path Use to remove control points Use to adjust control point tangents Click a point to display tangent controls or click the center of a tangent control to reset it Drag center of the tangent control to manipula
467. oints keyframes are unaffected Use Touch mode for touching up sections of your recorded automation settings 1 Click the Automation Settings button gt in the track header and select Show Automation Controls 2 Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Touch from the menu The icon in the track header is displayed as a w amp 3 Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click the Play button to start playback 4 When you re ready to start editing adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust Envelope points keyframes are updated at the cursor position and when you stop adjusting the control the original settings are preserved 5 Click Stop to end playback and stop recording automation Overwriting recorded settings in Latch mode In Latch mode envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes Use Latch mode to overwrite automation settings with new values 1 Click the Automation Settings button in the track header and select Show Automation Controls 2 Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Latch from the menu The icon in the track header is displayed as a x 3 Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click
468. oject Move left by grid marks Move right by grid marks Go to Jump to Marker or select corresponding region Move one frame Center in View Jog left right when not in edge trimming mode or during playback INTRODUCTION Keys Home End Ctri Home or W Ctril End Page Up Page Down Ctrl G 0 9 keys not numeric Keypad Alt Left or Right Arrow F3 F9 Description Scrub playback Build dynamic RAM preview Keys J K L pg 69 Shift B pg 291 Preview in player Ctrl Shift M Prerender video Shift M Generate MIDI timecode F7 Generate MIDI clock Shift F7 Trigger from MIDI timecode Ctrl F7 Preview cursor position Numeric keypad 0 Specify the length of time that will play using the Cursor preview duration field on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog Toggle external monitor preview Alt Shift 4 Description Keys Delete selection Delete Split event s S Trim crop selected events Ctrl T Normal Edit Tool Ctrl D Switch to next editing tool D Switch to previous editing tool Shift D Open in audio editor Ctrl E Description Keys Move left to marker s Ctrl Left Arrow Move right to marker s Ctrl Right Arrow Move left to event edit Ctrl Alt Left Arrow points including fade edges Move right to event edit Ctrl Alt Right Arrow points including fade edges Nudge cursor one pixelon Left or Right Arrow timeline when Quantize to Frames is turned off Jump to next audio CD track Period region or
469. omize time display settings including what time the window displays and colors are used in the display For more information see Using the Time Display window on page 331 You can move the Time Display window from its docked position above the track list to float on the workspace or dock in the window docking area Docked position Floating window Docked in window docking area 24p widescreen veg Sony Vegas 6 0m ime Display G 4 00 04 06 06 File Edit View Insert Tools Options Help 00 s 0 d s 06 s 06 4 Es g E 00 01 06 06 Time Display Mixer Video Preview a write on Gb ote tee GC Y Level 100 0 _lil T A Ruler The ruler is the timeline for your project You may specify how the ruler measures time seconds measures and beats frames etc For more information see Changing the ruler format on page 329 eee eee L f r NE Aae eee G Marker bar The marker bar is the area where you can place name and position markers and regions along the project s timeline These informational tags can serve as cues or reminders highlighting important events in your project For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page 115 pater one East two SSedinn E r 9 00 00 00 00 ooo tae esos 28 ooo aes L e ee ee ee ee ee ee ee oe ee F Se ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee O j O oe ee eee ee ee ee eee Command bar The com
470. ommon location For more information see Saving a project with media on page 306 rr a Te Renaming a project using Save As After you have been working with your project you can use the Save As command in the File menu to save a copy of a project with a new name This is useful for backing up different versions of a project For more information see Creating a copy of a project using Save As on page 306 Getting media files CHP 2 You can add media from a variety of sources to your project You can add audio and video files record audio into a track capture video from a video camera or extract music from your own CD You can also create media such as text overlays backgrounds and credit rolls from within the software For more information see Using generated media on page 247 ee O Note To have pulldown fields automatically removed when opening 24 fps progressive scan DV video files in the full version of Vegas software select the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog To open your 24p DV video files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i clear this check box a SEE a Note When you add an ACID loop to the timeline it is automatically stretched to match the project tempo as specified on the Ruler tab of the Project Properties dialog If you want to ignore tempo information clear the Import audio at project tempo check box on the Audio tab of the Preferenc
471. on 182 Previewing split screen view 292 Previewing video secondary Windows display 301 Previews 67 Full quality 289 In media players 70 Optimizing 289 Prerendering 289 Resolution 289 Transitions 272 Printing to DV tape 323 to HDV tape 326 Printing to tape preferences 342 using Video Capture 328 Printing video to tape 323 Project Media window 26 47 Adding media 48 Adding still image sequences 51 Capturing video 48 Extracting CD audio 50 Getting images 49 Replacing media in events 48 Project playback Entire 67 Media player 70 Time selection 67 Project property settings 333 334 Audio CD tab 334 Audio tab 333 Matching video settings of existing file 44 238 Ruler tab 334 Summary tab 334 Video tab 333 Project references in media files 58 Projects Creating 43 nesting 66 New Project wizard 43 publishing to the Web 71 Renaming 45 Rendering 307 314 rendering 70 Saving 45 305 307 Saving as EDLs 233 Proper use of software 361 Properties Events 174 Media file 239 Project 44 333 334 Track defaults 150 Properties pane 92 Proxy files audio 371 PSP exporting to 314 Publishing a project 71 Pulldown removal 45 336 Configuring 52 Punch in 102 205 Quantizing to frames 125 Quick start 43 71 RAM cache for previews 291 Razor blade 105 RealMedia rm commands 120 File format 309 file format 70 Recapturing offline
472. on You can also record multiple takes for an event so you can maintain multiple versions of an event that you may play back and edit n o V Tip Select a media bin before recording if you want to automatically add your recorded audio to a media bin To save track effects with your recorded files create an effects package of the track effect settings and apply the chain to the event as a non real time event effect S N Arming the track for recording Whether recording into an existing track an empty track a selected event or a time selection you must prepare a track for recording You can arm multiple tracks prior to recording 1 Click the Arm for Record button in the track list The first time you arm a track to record in a project the Project Recorded Files Folder dialog displays Recorded Files Folder Ci Program Files Saam y D E s 2 Browse to the location where you want to save your recorded audio files Free storage space in selected Folder 15 586 7 3 Click OK a 4 Tip You can change the location where recorded files are saved at any time For more information see Specifying where recordings are stored on page 206 eee Once a track is armed a record meter appears in the track list Depending on your hardware a record gain fader may also appear Project Recorded Files Folder L Do not prompt For the record folder in new projects BB music 5 bB Ol Siew oe Ol SH 1 OF BO vo
473. on _ and choose Select Right Half Select Left Half or Select All to indicate which portion of the Video Preview window you want to use to display unprocessed video or the contents of the clipboard When the Split Screen View button L is selected the cursor is displayed as a Drag a rectangle in the Video Preview window to create a custom selection Identifying safe areas The Video Preview window displays the entire video frame data However most television monitors do not display all of this data Previewing the video on a television monitor is the only way to verify what frame information will display You should also note that individual television monitors vary in what they display While there is no substitute for previewing on a television safe areas are a good method of estimating the extent of the masking 1 Click the down arrow next to the Overlays button 7 sated and choose Safe Areas 2 Click the Overlays button to toggle the safe areas display on or off The display shows two areas e The safe action area is the frame area that is visible on a television screen e The safe title area is a suggested area to limit the extent of titles It is always smaller than the safe action area LT 4 Tip To customize safe area sizes choose Preferences on the Options menu and on the Video tab enter the Action safe area and Title safe area values as a percent of the frame size ASN oie ee Nu Display 350124032 For
474. on Position i v 11 06 You can control the position of the overlay in the main window by dragging the T 720 00 selection box or editing the controls on the left side of the window However the eight BI Position Orientation and Rotation controls in the window are invaluable when you pee 32 1 need precision in resizing moving or rotating the overlay ROLACIOM ET The Smoothness box allows you to modify the smoothness of the interpolation v Offset 0 00 curve among three or more keyframes El keyframe Smoothness 100 00 You can use the Workspace controls to adjust the magnification and viewable area Type Li i ci of the workspace Use the Snap Settings controls to adjust the grid in the Zoom 50 00 workspace X Offset 396 00 Y Offset 5 145 00 El Snap Settings Grid Spacing 40 Rotation 15 2D Shadow This creates a simple drop shadow that appears under the entire window or only under the opaque nontransparent parts of the overlay You can control the size and offset of the shadow as well as the shadow color A shadow is especially effective under a picture in picture window or to emphasize text and titles Use the Eyedropper tool to select a specific color from anywhere on the screen The shadow effect creates a drop shadow under an object window or title A shadow is especially effective under a picture in picture window 1 Select the 2D Shadow row in the keyframe controller When the 2D Shadow r
475. on and display size You can choose a lower resolution to drop fewer frames during playback Choose an Auto option to display the preview at the current Video Preview window size choose a Full option to display the preview at project size Note If your project properties are set to either the Blend or Interpolate deinterlace method you will not see the effects of deinterlacing in Draft and Preview quality preview modes Deinterlacing only occurs in the Good and Best quality preview modes Overlays Options include safe areas grids and individual channels Copy Snapshot to Copies the contents of the frame to the clipboard Clipboard Save Snapshot to File Saves the contents of the preview window as a JPEG or PNG The new image file is automatically saved to the Project Media window pg 227 Using the Video Preview window shortcut menu Right click the Video Preview window to adjust the following options e Choose Default Background Black Background or White Background to set the background color for the window Simulate Device Aspect Ratio displays the output in square pixels This can prevent distortion of the preview when using sources with rectangular pixels This does not affect the final render Show Toolbar toggles the toolbar at the top of the window Show Status Bar toggles the information display at the bottom of the window Preview Device Preferences displays the Preview Device tab of the Preferences dialog allowing you to conf
476. on either side of the cut to create the crossfade SE ee eC Converting a crossfade or transition to a cut 1 Click to position the cursor within the transition 2 Hold while pressing the 7 key on your numeric keypad The transition will convert to a cut using the Cut to overlap conversion settings on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to determine where the cut occurs CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 272 Previewing a transition The easiest way to preview a transition is to set the loop region to the duration of the transition and then loop the playback This allows you to adjust the transition while it is playing and make changes in real time 1 Double click the transition This automatically creates a time selection equal to the length of the transition 2 Click the Loop Playback button to turn loop playback on The selection area bar is dark blue when loop playback is turned on 3 Click the Play button gt To preview complicated transitions you may want to build a dynamic RAM preview or prerender the effect For more information see Building dynamic RAM previews on page 291 or Prerendering video on page 289 Modifying a transition All of the transitions include several presets that create standard transitions If a preset doesn t meet your needs you can customize a transition to suit your taste a 4 Tip You can also animate the parameters of a transition with keyframes
477. on in the chain or select a plug in and click either the Shift Plug In Left or Shift Plug In Right button 4 Click OK to close the Plug In Chooser dialog CHP 10 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 194 Bypassing plug ins on the chain You can bypass plug ins on the chain by clearing the check box on a specific plug in or by right clicking the plug in and choosing Bypass from the shortcut menu The plug in remains bypassed until you enable it again Bypassing a plug in prevents it from being processed on the mixer track or bus Audie Plug In ee Track 3 i f i Effect enabled Effect bypassed un o Track Moise Gate LIS Track EO lZ Track Compressor LO To enable the plug in again click its Re XW check box or choose Bypass from Move Right the shortcut menu L Track Moise Gate Track EQ Rele 100 Track Compressor You can bypass plug ins from the appropriate FX window or from the Plug In Chooser dialog Removing plug ins from a chain You can remove plug ins from a chain in either the appropriate FX window or the Plug In Chooser dialog Removing a plug in from the chain in the FX window 1 Click the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX button The appropriate FX window Audio Plug In or Video Track FX appears TI Assignable effects are available only in the full version of Vegas software 2 Select the plug in that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Selected Plug In
478. only available if the project contains multiple busses For more information see Adding busses to a project on page 183 1 Click the Bus button on the assignable effect control A menu displays R Reverb all the busses in your project Sid t Sy I Master LG 2 Choose the bus to which you want to route the assignable effects chain m I Bus E t InF Inf The assignable effects chain displays the letter of the bus to which it is a D 18 pa 36 EE 54 routed Automating busses and assignable effects TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can automate busses and assignable effect chains in the track view You can view each of these controls on bus tracks at the bottom of the track view and to add envelopes to automate functions such as volume pan and assignable effect chain input output levels For more information see Using Automation on page 155 If you have the full version of Vegas software you can also add envelopes to automate effect parameters for plug ins that support automation For more information see Adding or removing effect automation envelopes on page 159 Viewing bus tracks From the View menu choose Show Bus Tracks or press U The bus tracks appear at the bottom of the track view A bus track appears for each bus or assignable effect chain in your project Adding track envelopes Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Rem
479. onnected to a Blackmagic Design DeckLink card Your system must conform to all DeckLink system requirements to use the card with Vegas software For more information about DeckLink system requirements and for DeckLink support information please refer to the Blackmagic Design Web site aaae Note Vegas software allows you to use one external video device at a time The external monitor display will be unavailable during video capture a ae 1 Use the Preview Device tab in the Preferences dialog to configure your DeckLink card 2 Select the Preview on External Monitor button G in the Video Preview window e When playback is stopped the external monitor will match the display of the Video Preview window e When you start playback the Video Preview window will be blank and the video is played on the external monitor CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 305 CHAPTER E v K d C ta N R gZ sete Saving Rendering a 47 and Printing Projects E gt P lt ga wd Vegas software allows you to save and render projects into many different multimedia formats When you render your Vegas project the project itself is not altered but rather can be rendered in any number of different formats This chapter explains saving a project and using the Save As and Render As functions In addition you will find reference information for the rendering o
480. ons usually form a smooth waveform Waveform Display A section inside of the Trimmer window or on an audio event that shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range is 32 768 to 32 767 For 24 bit sounds the range is 8 388 607 to 8 388 607 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the left most point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file Zero crossing A zero crossing is the point where a fluctuating signal crosses the zero amplitude axis By making edits at zero crossings with the same slope the chance of creating glitches is minimized Vegas software simulates zero crossings by applying short 10 mS default fades to trimmed audio Zipper noise Zipper noise occurs when you apply a changing gain to a signal such as when fading out If the gain does not change in small enough increments zipper noise can become very noticeable Vegas software fades are accomplished using 64 bit arithmetic thereby creating no zipper noise GLOSSARY APPENDIX B Index Numerics 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack 222 5 1 Surround See Surround A A B roll See Tracks Track layers AAF importing 54 Add channels panning model 146 217 Adding empty tracks 141 Adding media to a bin 52 Alignment fixing audio video 109 Alpha channel 263 In images 22
481. ontent or DV Widescreen for 16 9 content All templates use 128 Kbps audio The 512 Kbps templates are useful when you want to minimize file size and the 896 Kbps templates will produce higher quality video especially in scenes with high motion video ee Note The settings for the selected template are displayed in the Description box SS Sas sS S _ _ gt sa 7 Select the Render loop region only check box if you only want to render a portion of your project If the check box is cleared the entire project will be rendered to a new file 8 Select the Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox check box if you want to reformat your video so it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area letterboxing This option is useful when the desired output format does not match the frame aspect ratio of your project 9 Click OK Your movie file MAQOnnnn MP4 and thumbnail file MAQOnnnn THM are created and transferred to the appropriate folder on the PSP system CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 316 Rendering with networked computers TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Network rendering allows you to designate a specific computer to render the entire output file or you can distribute a single rendering
482. ools menu choose Burn CD and choose Disc at Once Audio CD from the submenu The Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog appears 2 From the Drive drop down list use the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 3 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns 4 Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning So Note Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc pms 5 Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box Burn CDs begins recording audio to your CD immediately e Test first then burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the test if it is successful e Test only do not burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD 6 Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to
483. oose the appropriate template for rendering your video or click Custom to select custom settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 ae O Notes If you are working with a 24p progressive scan project or you have the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you will need to insert pulldown by choosing the appropriate 24p DV template from the list To use the video footage later choose the NTSC DV 24p inserting 2 3 3 2 pulldown template If you are not working with a 24p progressive scan project and you cleared the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you can use any DV template aaa T e To print only the portion of your project that you selected in step 2 select the Render loop region only check box SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 324 p 4 Click Next The Leader and Trailer dialog displays 5 Use the Leader and Trailer dialog to set up the data that will be printed before and after your project a From the Leader test pattern style drop down list choose a test pattern type and video format b Type a value in the Test pattern duration box to determine the length of the test pattern To print without a test pattern enter 0 c Select the Play 1 kHz tone with test pattern check box to add an audio test tone that will play along with the te
484. ope Colors Icon color saturation Icon color tint CHP 18 Description Sets events that are trimmed longer than their source media to automatically loop When this option is not selected extended events repeat the final frame of a video file Prevents pitch shifting when you stretch an audio event When selected a loop region does not persist when there is no time selection This means that when you click the timeline and move the cursor destroying the any previous time selection the loop region is also reset to zero By default this option is not selected and loop regions persist until modified or until a new time selection is created Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the speed that will be used for scrubbing the timeline with the JKL Keys or with a multimedia controller Sets a fast fade on the edges of audio events 10ms by default to soften potentially harsh beginnings and endings Sets the default duration of inserted still image files e g BMP PNG Sets the default time created between CD tracks when using the Add Media as CD Tracks command in the Project Media window For more information see Adding media as CD tracks to a new project on page 353 Enter a value in the edit box to specify the length of the time Vegas software will preview when you preview the cursor To preview the cursor press the O key on the numeric keypad Vegas software creates a temporary selection centered over the cursor and beg
485. or You can feed video directly from the timeline to a television monitor or secondary Windows display With this feature you can free up valuable space in the Vegas window by viewing a full screen preview of your project on a different display or you can make your final editing decisions on a broadcast monitor which differs significantly from a computer monitor before printing the project to tape This feature supports video output only audio is not output to the external monitor a Note If you intend to deliver your project in an interlaced format previewing on a computer monitor is not a substitute for previewing on an interlaced broadcast monitor OE ee 4 Note Vegas software allows you to use one external video device at a time The external monitor display will be unavailable during video capture ee Configuring an external monitor Prior to previewing on an external monitor you ll need to configure your system to use this feature From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Preview Device tab to configure an external monitor Your video will be sent to this device when you click the Preview on External Monitor button 21 in the Video Preview window For more information see Setting preferences on page 336 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 L 301 Previewing video on a secondary Windows display TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software If your Windows de
486. or the pixel aspect ratio of your desired output format Vegas software does a good job stretching images to fit the output format but some distortion occurs if the pixel aspect ratio for the source format does not match the destination format To calculate pixel aspect ratio correction use this formula Output frame pixel width X Output format pixel aspect ratio Still image pixel width For example this is the formula for NTSC DV format 720 DV screen frame pixel width X 9091 DV pixel aspect ratio 655 pixel width Use these figures as a guide when creating images e Full frame pixel aspect corrected still images for use in NTSC DV projects are 655x480 e Full frame pixel aspect corrected still images for use in PAL DV projects are 787x576 USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 L 237 Capturing a timeline snapshot You can create still images of a single frame of your project Once saved the snapshot can be used just like any other still image Yideo Preview En edhe IS Best Auto H 5 A Project 720x460x32 29 9701 Frame 737 Previews 160x120 29 970p Display 240x 160x32 1 Position the cursor on the frame of the project you wish to capture as a still image 2 Click the Save Snapshot to File button 97 on the Video Preview window The Image Filename dialog appears 3 Select a file format JPEG or PNG and enter a name for the new still image file 4 Click Save The image is added to the Project Media win
487. ormat that allows wave files that are practically unrestricted by file size Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Microsoft Windows based computers This option renders both audio and video into one file Wave Microsoft wav The standard audio file format used on Microsoft Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio only format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Video wmv The Microsoft standard used for streaming audio and video media via the Web GETTING STARTED CHP 2 eee GY At More detailed instructions for rendering to a specific format appear later in this manual For more information see Saving Rendering and Printing Projects on page 305 Creating a movie To create a movie you render the project into an appropriate media file output The final output format depends on the destination of the new media file Some examples are AVI MOV and WMV 1 From the File menu choose Render As 2 In the Render As dialog box choose the appropriate option from the Save as type drop down list 3 Click Custom to select custom compression settings The default compression options are set automatically according to your project s properties For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 4 Enter a name and browse for a destination for your file 5 Click OK Publishing a project From the File menu
488. oss corners to flip the track 6 Click the Make Compositing Child button 4 on the tracks you want to mi oh x group to create a compositing group For more information see Understanding Level 100 0 4 the parent child track relationship on page 248 oH me El dG OC Click the Parent Composite Mode button on the parent track and choose 3D Source Alpha Parent track motion affects the parent track and all child tracks Gd level 67 8 i a at SH Reese o Click the Parent Motion button a on the parent track The Track Motion dli Ls window is displayed Sx Rhee o Pa re nt i ck Oh i i amp 1 il ey t 4 Motion h d Sa La Ta fs G A 1 ow KS afe La G DAt S ia mt 1 2 Sl lt SI El dG G d Ea 4 a ee ens G the right parent track motion on track 1 will a S affect tracks 1 through 6 owt sie G mt 9 Parent track motion applied to track 4 will affect only tracks 4 through 6 Choose a setting from the Layout drop down list to choose the workspace display you want to use The Layout setting allows you to see your track from various points of view Adjust the selection area to change the viewable area of the track and its position in space Guides are displayed in bold to indicate how the track will be moved or rotated Dragging the track Rotating left to right around the Y axis Rotating forward or backward around the X axis Rotating aroun
489. otated toward the user and the cool track is rotated away from the user USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 253 In the first example the two tracks intersect along their rotation axis In the second example adding a 2D track above the cool track causes it to be rotated in 3D and composited as a 2D image so the hot text is displayed above it without intersecting Single track 3D motion GED ON 1 Click the Track Motion button on the track that contains the overlay that you want to animate The Track Motion window is displayed 2 From the Compositing Mode drop down list choose 3D Source Alpha Track Motion Track 2 Preset Untitled Layo DR N StS RIS amp E 30 Source Alpha E T Custom Add Subtract Multiply Mask Source Alpha Cut Screen Overlay Hard Light Dodge Burn Darken Lighten Difference Difference Squared A v 00 00 29 29 00 00 59 28 AAAA SUU UU Lal a a anode EE UL EE E 1 E 00 00 00 00 3 Choose a setting from the Layout drop down list to choose the workspace display that you want to use The Layout setting allows you to see your track from various points of view 4 Adjust the selection area to change the viewable area of the track and its position in space Guides are displayed in bold to indicate how the track will be moved or rotated Moving closer to or farther from viewer Drag across corners to flip the
490. our original project without disrupting in progress network render tasks 2 From the File menu choose Render As 3 Use the Render As dialog to choose the file format and location where you want to save your file The location of the output file must be in a shared folder 4 Select the Render using networked computers check box in the Render As dialog and then click the Save button The Network Render dialog is displayed 5 Select the Distribute Rendering check box in the Network Render dialog 6 From the Stitch Host drop down list choose the computer you want to use to assemble the rendered segments 7 Choose a file format for your rendered segments e Select the Use Final Render Template check box if you want to render segments using the format you chose for your final output in the Render As dialog Use this option when you re working with uncompressed or DV files Using the final rendering template for rendered segments makes the final stitching process fast because the segments can be copied and assembled without being re encoded e Clear the Use Final Render Template check box and choose settings from the Save as Type and Template drop down lists if you want to render segments using a format other than your final output format Use this option when you re rendering to a format that uses temporal compression such as QuickTime RealMedia or Windows Media Rendering segments as uncompressed or DV AVI files allows trans
491. our workstation Check to make sure that the appropriate MJPEG codec is installed on your PC Trouble free video software solutions There are literally dozens of possible configurations of hardware for editing video on a PC While it is impossible to go into detail for each and every system the following explains some of the concepts behind the various settings in Vegas software Editing and playing back full frame 30 fps video is one of the most demanding activities for any computer The hardware you use is an important part of the equation but there are a number of things you can do to optimize your PC for video The following list is arranged from the most to the least important e Close all other applications When capturing video or playing it back it is critical that no other applications interrupt this process Close any applications that are not vital This includes screen savers task schedulers and even virus detection software You can ensure that you have closed all unnecessary applications by pressing Alt Delete selecting the individual applications and clicking the End Task button to close them Certain processes are required and should not cannot be terminated for example Explorer e Check your virtual memory Windows operating system uses virtual memory when RAM is low This is a method for Windows to use the hard disk to create more memory and is sometimes called a paging file If Windows tries to write to the pagi
492. out disrupting the natural frequency response of the source material If the emphasis flag is set for a track any CD player that has a de emphasis circuit will impart the high frequency cut on the track Be aware that Vegas software cannot impart the pre emphasis boost on a track it can only set the emphasis flag Endian Little and Big Little and Big Endian describe the ordering of multi byte data that is used by a computer s microprocessor Little Endian specifies that data is stored in a low to high byte format this ordering is used by the Intel microprocessors Big Endian specifies that data is stored in a high to low byte format this ordering is used by the Motorola microprocessors Envelopes Audio and Video Envelopes as used by Vegas software are a way of automating the change of a certain parameter over time In the case of volume you can create a fade out which requires a change over time by adding an envelope and creating an extra point to the line that indicates where the fade starts Next you pull the end point of the envelope down to inf For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 163 GLOSSARY APPENDIX B G Equalization EQ The process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level EQ has various uses The most common use in Vegas software is to simply adjust the subjective timbrel qualities of a sound Event Media files that have been dragged onto the timeline in Veg
493. ove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate envelope type from the submenu Modifying track envelopes You can modify a track envelope for a bus or assignable effect in the same way you do with any other track For more information see Working with track envelopes on page 163 USING THE MIXER CHP 9 189 p Adding Audio 10 Effects g P ine wey You can use audio effects or plug ins to improve the quality of the audio in a production or to create special artistic effects Vegas software supports a variety of DirectX and VST plug in effects from both Sony Media Software and third party vendors Using audio effects There are three ways to use audio plug ins track effects bus effects and assignable effects You can access these plug ins by clicking the Track FX Bus FX or Assignable FX buttons The combination of these various methods of applying audio effects is important to the final mix of a project For more information see Audio signal flow on page 39 Track FX Bus FX Assignable FX T ST OHG 8 CO x Yoli 1 7 dB i Pant Center lt Track Fx SK Ral 9 L Dim Output jg Insert FX ge Insert Bus Ho mm 5 0 0 Li A oo oo 0 0 e Track effects are applied to all events in a single track e Bus effects are applied to a bus including the Master bus When you add plug ins to a bus the tracks that are assigned to the bus are processed by the plug in s Since multiple tracks
494. ow is selected shadow controls are displayed in the Track Motion dialog Select the 2D Shadow check box to apply the shadow so you can see the results of your shadow in the Video Preview window or clear the check box to bypass the shadow UU 0U0 700 00 OOO 14 29 Position 17 2D Shadow 2D Glow sn rn CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 294 r 2 Use the 2D Shadow controls on the left side of the window to set the color and appearance of the shadow Blur type a number in the box or click the button to display a slider you can use to soften the edge of the shadow Set to 0 for a hard edge or increase the setting to feather the edge of the shadow e Intensity type a number in the box or click the button to display a slider you can use to establish the transparency of the shadow s blurred edge Decrease the setting for a translucent shadow or increase the setting for a more opaque shadow Color click the down arrow next to the color swatch to display a color picker Use the sliders or edit boxes in the color picker to set the shadow color or use the eyedropper tool 7 to sample a color from your screen 3 Adjust the size position of the shadow by dragging the box in the workspace or using the Position Orientation and Rotation controls on the left side of the window For more information about manipulating the selection box see Controlling track motion on page 281 Track Motion Track
495. page 102 Changing crossfade curves You can change the crossfade curves that are used to fade in and out between two events Right click a crossfade to choose a different crossfade curve K SS l amp SS e RZ E PES Pex ES MEIN Wit XX 1 Right click anywhere in the crossfade region to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Fade Type and choose the desired fade type from the submenu mnn Tip If you use the same crossfade curve frequently you can set it as a default for all new audio or video crossfades For more information see Editing tab on page 349 eee Sliding a crossfade You can slide a crossfade between two events without affecting the total length of the two overlapping events This process is similar to sliding and slipping events For more information see Slipping and sliding events on page 107 Press while dragging the overlapping area between two events The slide crossfade cursor appears CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 114 As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the crossfade position changes effectively trimming the edge of the event in the direction you drag You can use this technique when you want to maintain the length of two combined events but want the transition to occur earlier or later Two events with a 10 00 0429 crossfade P 00 00 14 29 Sliding the crossfade to the left
496. page 86 e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow OR the Guitar tag e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display only media that matches all of your keyword tag and advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow AND the Guitar tag e Click the View items not matching search criteria button to display only items that do not match your keyword tag and advanced search criteria Searching using tags In the Search pane select the check box for each tag you want to find The Media Library searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window E lt OL Tagz Ea EE y aOg Drum One Shots Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display all media that contains any keyword tag or advanced search criteria In the example to the right the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the tag High Tom OR the tag Floor Tom Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that
497. pe a number in the box or click the button to display a slider you can use to establish the transparency of the glow s blurred edge Decrease the setting for a translucent glow or increase the setting for a more opaque glow Color click the down arrow next to the color swatch to display a color picker Use the sliders or edit boxes in the color picker to set the glow color or use the eyedropper tool 7 to sample a color from your screen Adjust the size position of the glow by dragging the box in the workspace or using the Position Orientation and Rotation controls on the left side of the window For more information about manipulating the selection box see Controlling track motion on page 281 Track Motion Track 7 EJ Preset Untitled ka x Source Alpha DR aj sf Fa E fi fr ZD Glow Buri Intensity Color 2 2 a a Position a ns Cropped video at ee on c T width Height Orientation Angle Rotation Angle Glow Position 20 Shadow 17 20 Glow S w gt B 00 00 00 DU 4 To animate the glow click in the 2D Glow row of the Keyframe Controller to set the cursor to a later time and adjust the glow settings Creating a picture in picture effect Picture in picture is an easy effect to reproduce using track motion 1 Insert the background video into a track 2 Insert the overlay video into another track just above the background video track 3 Click the Track Motion bu
498. pple editing is turned off the same operation would not affect the overall duration of the project Roll Originally a conventional studio typically had two source decks that were used to play back video to a final destination or output deck These two source decks were commonly referred to as the A and B rolls In Vegas software a video track can be configured to display an A and a B roll which appear as sub tracks The concept is extended further in Vegas software to include a transition roll between the A and B rolls For more information see Understanding track layers on page 270 Ruler The ruler is the area above the tracks that shows the horizontal axis units APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 386 r Sample The word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings e A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e A sound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this manual we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording e The act of recording
499. pple will occur and the direction the affected events will Oaz aaa 9 Ad oe ee move 17T MR From the Edit menu choose Post Edit Ripple and choose a command from the submenu Affected Tracks ripples only the track s where you performed the edit Affected Tracks Bus Tracks Markers and Regions ripples the track s where you performed the edit and ripples any keyframes or envelopes on those tracks This command also ripples any markers regions CD layout markers and command markers in the project All Tracks Markers and Regions ripples all tracks and all keyframes and envelopes on those tracks This command also ripples any markers regions CD layout markers and command markers in the project The timeline is rippled after the edit according to the option you choose LEE 4 Tip You can press F after an edit to ripple the affected tracks or you can press F to ripple markers keyframes and envelopes too To ripple everything after an edit press Ctrl F SR Applying a post edit ripple automatically 1 Click the arrow button next to the Auto Ripple button d and choose a ripple type Affected Tracks ripples only the track s where you performed the edit Affected Tracks Bus Tracks Markers and Regions ripples the track s where you performed the edit and ripples any keyframes or envelopes on those tracks This command also ripples any markers regions CD layout markers an
500. pplied Recalculating the normalization When you normalize an event the event is analyzed and the volume is raised based on the waveform s highest peak and then adjusts the rest of the event accordingly If you have adjusted the edge of an event to exclude the formerly highest waveform peak you may Highest peak used want to recalculate the event s normalization for recalculating the normalization Highest peak used for normalization before editing lt i Event edited after normalization 1 Right click the event to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Properties The Properties dialog opens WORKING WITH EVENTS CHP 8 L 17 3 3 Click Re calculate to normalize the event again a 4 Tip You can set the maximum decibel level used to calculate the event during normalization For more information see Audio tab on page 333 ee Maintain aspect ratio video only Video and image files of various sizes and formats can be included in a single project The project itself may have a different frame size aspect ratio from the source media files This is not a problem but you must specify how these differences are handled If the length to width ratio of the source media and the project s frame size are the same e g source media at 320x240 and project frame size of 640x480 no aspect ratio distortion occurs If the ratios are not the same the source material may become distorted str
501. process Choosing a capture format If you will be delivering your project in standard definition SD via DVD or DV tape you can use the camera s built in down conversion if available to convert your HDV video to the DV format Use the camera s Options menu to set the camera to output DV and you can capture and edit video in the same way that you normally use DV in Vegas projects with no need for intermediate files If you will be delivering your project in a high definition HD format in both SD and HD formats or as SD 24p video capture HDV clips and convert them to an intermediate format after capturing Creating intermediate files If you ve captured HDV clips converting to an intermediate lower resolution format will streamline the editing process and allow you to preview your project 1 Start a new project 2 Add your captured HDV clips MPEG 2 transport streams to the timeline 3 Render your clips to an appropriate intermediate format You can verify a template s codec by looking at the Video format drop down list on the Video tab of the Custom Template dialog If you re performing frame rate or frame size conversion ensure the Video rendering quality is set to Best on the Project tab of the Custom Template dialog Destination Intermediate Format HDCAM over HD SDI Render an avi file that uses the Sony YUV codec The frame rate and frame size should match your HDCAM master Digital Betacam or XDCAM Render
502. ptions available This chapter also describes the different options for delivering your projects such as printing to tape burning a Video CD or burning a multimedia CD Saving a project A Vegas project is saved as a small VEG file This file contains all of the information needed to recreate your project source file locations trimming track and bus plug ins volume and panning envelopes bus assignments assignable effects settings etc This is not the same as creating a final media file which is done with the Render As command a Note The option is also provided of saving a project as an Edit Decision List EDL For more information see Creating an EDL on page 233 EEE OO 1 Click the Save button The first time a project is saved the Save As dialog appears In subsequent saves the Save As dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any changes Select Vegas Project File veg from the Save as type list default Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project Type the project name in the File name box Click Save Qn A W N CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 306 gt gt Creating a copy of a project using Save As After you have been working with your project you can use the Save As command in the File menu to create a copy of the small project file with a different name Since multim
503. r a file For more information see Rendering a project on page 307 Ne You can make a time selection and add each frame in the selection to the cache Once the frames are cached all video frames can display in a selection 1 Select a region containing the frames you want to cache 2 From the Tools menu choose Build Dynamic RAM Preview Vegas software plays through the time selection and builds the cache frame by frame CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 292 Using split screen previewing TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Click the Split Screen View button L in the Video Preview window to turn split screen previews on or off Split screen previews allow you to split the Video Preview window so you can see your affected and unaffected video or your video and the contents of the clipboard at the same time Use split screen previews to fine tune video effects or to match colors for color correction ee Note The Video Preview window temporarily enters split screen preview mode when you slip trim a video event This temporary split screen mode allows you to see the event s first and last frame as you trim You can toggle this preview mode by selecting or deselecting the Video Event Edge Frames option on the View menu S N Previewing affected and unprocessed video 1 Click the down arrow next to the Split Screen View button _ 8 and choose FX Bypassed from the menu
504. r add the files to your project and update the media library with the replacement files Customizing the Media Manager window Much of what you see in the Media Manager window can be customized to suit your preferences Automatically hiding the Search pane Click the push pin button J in the title bar of the Search pane if you want to save space in the Media Manager window by automatically hiding the search pane e The push pin is displayed as a WJ when the Search pane is anchored in the Media Manager window e The push pin is displayed as a 77 when the Search pane is set to hide automatically When the Search pane is set to hide automatically you can hover over the Search tab on the left edge of the Media Manager window to show the pane When you move your mouse away from the Search pane it hides automatically Docking and undocking the Search pane You can undock the Search pane from its location in the Media Manager window to float it over the Vegas window or you can change the docking position of the pane within the Media Manager window To undock and move the Search pane drag its title bar to the desired location Resizing columns You can resize the columns in the Search Results pane by dragging the splitter between columns to the desired size To resize a column automatically double click a splitter Name Rati K ACIE MUSIC 5 sPROMO 04 pca Moving columns To move a column in the Search Results pane to a different l
505. rO CCl iia 4 s4 d ieee ea ba sas ee a ee 305 Creating a copy of a project using Save AS eee eee eens 306 Saving a Project with Medid eriari wwe TS ai aod bast esta a dine ne otek ee Ge ed aoe e 306 AULOSAVING a erel vada be Che Sha S AERA hat Gyl ated ae ee ee a ee es 307 Using the Make Movie wizard 0 000 c cece eee eee eee eens 307 Rendering a project lt eee eee eens 307 Selecting a tie 1OnMalia cs sel oi eet ee ta wawieecstawdw sco deed e 309 Viore about the MPEG Tonal lt RRR a E STET eet hra donde bine 4 eed REAR RRR ATE 309 More about the Wave64 and Perfect Clarity Audio formats 0000c cee eee eee 310 Wiore about VIdCO en nT 42 wss o ate hd nick Sembee die Gig Gg Ba dd eee ana oars 310 Customizing the rendering PrOCe SS 00 cee eee eee eee 311 Customizing the Render As SettingS 000 ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee 311 Saving custom settings as atemplate 0 0 eee eee eee 312 Creating custom rendering settings for AVI files e e e cece ee eeee 312 See tab whch eh eed Sou eee eee he SUG GRA Ae Oe ie eS a Mes ce Sty 312 VEO Es a Re PR ra Pa a re eRe Cee eee ee ae S 312 Audo taD iernare ien a ice tas el a ee eek ack aces are awe atin tl ais ease bgra bares 314 EXDORING a MOVIE lO ai PSP sews oa T S TRR RR L Oe ee od BEY oo R 314 Rendering with networked computerS 0 000 cece eee eee eee 316 Setting up your computers for network rendering 0 ccc ee
506. rame controller 2 Click the Delete Keyframe button Navigating in the keyframe controller Use the keyframe navigation buttons First Previous Next and Last to quickly jump to a keyframe Alternately press or to move to the previous or next keyframe Modifying keyframes After you create your keyframes you can move them copy and paste them and change the interpolation curves between them Moving keyframes You can move a keyframe within the keyframe controller by dragging it to a new position For track level keyframes you can also move the keyframes in the track view For more information see Working with keyframes in track view on page 276 Copying and pasting keyframes Keyframes on the controller can be copied pasted and duplicated 1 Right click a keyframe 2 From the shortcut menu choose Copy 3 Right click the keyframe controller at the position where you want to paste the keyframe 4 From the shortcut menu choose Paste Duplicating keyframes 1 Right click and drag a keyframe to a new position 2 From the shortcut menu choose Copy A duplicate keyframe is created at the new position You can also duplicate a keyframe by holding the key while dragging it ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 27 B Changing the interpolation curve The interpolation curve determines the rate at which Vegas software animates between two keyframe settings You can right click a keyfram
507. rary files Free storage space in selected Displays the available disk space in the folder specified in the Temporary files folder box folder Default All Restores all general preferences to the default settings Video tab The Video tab in the Preferences dialog controls the display of video media video events and video tracks Preference Description Dynamic RAM Preview max MB Determines the size of the RAM cache for building dynamic RAM previews in the Video Preview window Dynamic RAM previews are only available in the full version of Vegas software For more information see Building dynamic RAM previews on page 291 Maximum number of rendering This setting specifies the maximum number of threads that will be used for rendering files threads Increasing the setting will not increase performance beyond the number of available processors for example if you have a single processor computer choosing 2 will not improve rendering performance Decrease the setting if you have a multiprocessor or multicore computer and want to limit processor use or turn off multithreaded rendering For example if you had a dual processor hyperthreaded computer choosing 3 would allow you to keep one thread available for other tasks while rendering Note Not all video plug ins are capable of multithreaded rendering Plug ins that do not support multithreaded rendering are displayed with this icon a in the Plug In Manager and Plug In Chooser windows and with th
508. rate drop down list For more information see Frame Rate Video on page 381 e Choose a rendering quality level from the Full resolution rendering quality drop down list For most projects Good is the recommended setting If you have critical material where nothing but the highest quality rendering will do select Best Please note that rendering time may increase dramatically as large amounts of extra processing is required for the Best setting TI e Some effects and transitions can involve motion or animation The Motion blur type drop down list allows you to select whether the frames are blurred slightly to create the illusion of motion on individual frames This can make computer generated animation appear more smooth and natural Gaussian is the best choice in most situations where blurring is required Available only in the full version of Vegas software e The Deinterlace method drop down list provides several options relating to interlacing Source video from a television is interlaced When Vegas software renders effects it needs to deinterlace the two fields that make up a frame You can choose the exact method used in this list If you choose the None option the fields are left interlaced If you choose the Blend option contents are used from both fields which is a good choice for high detail low motion material If you choose the Interpolate option a single field is used at a time which is good for low detail high motion material e
509. rded Files C Program Files Sony Vegas 5 01 Music Recording 1 way Delete removes selected file Rename changes the name of a selected file Delete All removes all files in dialog Show after every recording session done Done Done returns to track view When a check mark appears in this box Vegas software displays this dialog after each recording session eee Note The Recorded Files dialog does not appear if you are triggering from MIDI timecode as this would interrupt the synchronizing Instead files are automatically named and saved according to your preferences A asSsS sS gt S gt sao K Recording into a time selection By making a time selection you specify where along the timeline to record The time selection also determines how 00 00 04 10 mm long the software records Any selected events that occur 3 x poo ee Or bia within the time selection are split and the recorded data is De a ee e placed into the time selection Recorded waveform The event s waveform is displayed as it is recorded and automatically stops recording when the cursor reaches the end of the time selection Recording into an event By recording into an event you automatically create a new take containing the recorded material that is the same duration as the selected event The edges of the selected event serve as the punch in and out points that are used for recording Recording into an event allows you
510. ream Use the scopes to analyze the your video and adjust accordingly with the Brightness and Contrast Broadcast Colors Color Corrector Color Corrector Secondary and Levels plug ins before rendering Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose which scope you want to display Choose setting Display video scopes settings ideo Scopes Vvectorscope Wwaveform Histagrar e SN Tg Update scopes while playing Vectorscope Mormal gt Waveform Luminance PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO CHP 16 n 208 G Note If your video hardware will add a 7 5 IRE setup click the Settings button and select the 75 IRE Setup check box in the Video Scopes Settings dialog Black will be displayed as 7 5 in the waveform monitor If your video hardware does not adda 7 5 setup clear the check box and black will be displayed as 0 a T Displaying chrominance using the vectorscope monitor The vectorscope monitor in the Video Scopes window allows you to monitor the chrominance color content of your video signal The monitor plots hue and saturation on a color wheel The vectorscope displays targets for broadcast legal saturations of red R magenta Mg blue B cyan Cy green G and yellow Y1 Individual colors in your video signal are displayed as dots in the vectorscope A dot s distance from the center of the scope represents its saturation and the angle of the line from the dot to the center of the scope represen
511. review Best Auto H Gh Project 720x480x32 29 970i Frame 2 076 Preview 360x240x32 29 970p Display 360x240x32 y Best Auto H SL Project 720x480x32 29 970 Frame 2 045 Preview 360x240x32 29 970p Display 360x240x32 Project 720x480x32 29 970i Frame 2 045 Preview 360x240x32 29 970p isp Display 360x240x32 Project 720x480x32 29 970i Preview 360x240x32 29 970p Frame 2 076 Display 360x240x32 Using pan and scan Another way to use keyframe animation in the Event Pan Crop window is panning or pan and scan Pan and scan is a technique commonly used when film is converted for television Movie screens and film are usually wider 2 35 1 than television 1 33 1 When you transfer the film to video you have four choices 1 squash the film horizontally to fit distorting it in the process 2 crop it possibly losing information on the sides 3 letter box it so the top and bottom have black areas and the picture is shorter overall and 4 pan and scan Pan and scan is a variation of cropping where someone goes through the movie and moves the crop area back and forth to follow the action or subject 1 Click the Event Pan Crop button 1 on the event The Event Pan Crop window appears 2 Confirm that the Stretch to fill frame check box is selected 3 Right click the selection area and choose Match Output Aspect from the shortcut menu A Select a starting position size an
512. rganizing your plug ins Plug In Chooser Track 3 Within the Plug in Chooser o ffrack Noise Gate frack EQ Track Compressor o ee dialog you can create folders fow ERS R to organize the plug ins i Amplitude Modulation fP Sound Forge Pan ese This can help you organize Pi chorus PE Sound Forge Volume New Folder i b PY f l 8 a Pi Distortion Hie Time Stretch arge numbers OF plug ins on Third Party either Pfi Track Compressor SEENEN Y L Automatable off Flangel Wah wah Be Track E your system ou can create G Track Optimized FX Pe Hange w ah wa i Track EQ f ld d h d l o Ee Gapper Snipper PA Track Noise Gate olders and then rag p ug io Se HS Graphic Dynamics CBS vibrato ins to the folders i Fx Packages Hi Graphic EQ Hie Wave Hammer 5 1 Pfi Multi Band Dynamics ie MiilkinT am Malas CHP 10 ADDING AUDIO EFFECTS 196 r Automating effects parameters TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Automation allows you to control audio and video levels panning and effect parameter automation over time You can create fades apply stereo panning and add effects that come and go as you please Automation is represented on the Vegas timeline as an envelope or set of keyframes You can create automation by adding envelopes or keyframes to your tracks including bus tracks or you can record automation parameters by adjusting controls in the Vegas interface or on a control surf
513. ries depending on the selected automation recording mode For more information see Automating 5 1 surround projects on page 167 Adding a motion blur envelope Ti This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Motion blur can help you make computer generated animation look more realistic For example if you use track motion or event pan crop to move a clip across the frame each frame is displayed clearly when no motion blur is applied Turning on motion blur adds a motion dependent blur to each frame to create the appearance of smooth motion in the same way a fast moving subject is blurred when you take a photograph with a slow shutter speed a 4 Note Motion blur significantly increases your rendering time Adjust the envelope to apply motion blur only where necessary OO T 1 Right click the video bus track choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and then choose Motion Blur Amount from the submenu 2 Add and adjust envelope points as necessary to set the time interval that will be used for blurring Increasing the value emphasizes the blur effect For example setting the envelope to 0 means no blurring will occur setting the envelope to 1 second means that each frame will be blurred for one half second before and after the frame 3 The motion blur envelope affects all tracks To bypass motion blur for a track select the Bypass Motion Blur button in the track header 4 To change blur typ
514. right corner of the Search Results pane QOO r ale es GO ai af Mame Rating Comments ACID Type 29 NY Dance Pro Pro Loop 30 E NY Dance Fro Fro Loop 31 E NY Dance Fro Fro Loop a2 E NY DANCE sPROM Loop 33 a Ni DANCE sPROM Loop IR Zi a ated A USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 e 7 B Adding media files to a library Before you can search or organize your media files you ll need to add them to a media library If you have the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media media from existing Sony Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library Use the Reference Library drop down list in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine which library is opened when you click the Switch to Reference Library button m For more information on Media Manager options see Setting Media Manager options on page 93 o O V Note The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is not installed by default but you can install it from the Vegas CD or download it from the Sony Media Software Web site http mediasoftware sonypictures com reference ps ee Tip If the Save media usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the Vegas Preferences dialog you can add individual files to a library by previewing the files in the Ve
515. roject markers and regions The difference between the two is that project markers and regions affect a project while media file markers and regions are embedded in and saved with a media file For more information see Adding project markers and regions on page L The markers and regions you add in the Trimmer are only temporary You must save them by clicking the Save button E in the Trimmer window if you want to use them again after you close the project After the markers and regions are added and saved to the media file they are available when you open the media file in an audio editor program or in the Trimmer a 4 Note You cannot save markers to read only media files Change a file s properties to make the file writable before saving markers SS Automatically saving Trimmer markers and regions with media Marker Region files j Ma 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences B A g T a RE ee E eee 2 On the General tab select Automatically save trimmer markers and regions with media file Adding regions as takes Once regions are saved with a media file either in the Trimmer window or in another application you can add the regions as takes to the timeline from the Explorer window In the Explorer window click the arrow next to the View button and select Region View from the drop down list A single media file may contain a number of separate regions You can select these regions individually or as groups and in
516. roject on the timeline and need to render a MPEG2 transport stream and print it to HDV tape 1 Load your HDV project 2 To print just a portion of your project make a time selection in the timeline 3 From the Tools menu choose Print Video to HDV Tape The HDV Print to Tape Device page is displayed 4 Choose your HDV camera or deck from the Device drop down list 5 Click Next The HDV Print to Tape Select Format File page is displayed 6 Choose render settings a Select the Render format radio button b In the File path box type the path to the file you want to render or click the Browse button to browse to the folder you want to use and they type a file name c From the Template drop down list choose the setting that matches your destination format This list will include only formats that are supported by the selected device Information about the selected rendering template is displayed in the Description box d Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to print only the portion of your project that you selected in step 2 e Select the Delete file after print check box if you want to delete the rendered file after the print to tape operation is finished 7 Click Next The HDV Print to Tape Device Control page is displayed 8 Select the Manual or Use device control radio button to indicate whether Vegas software will have control of your HDV recorder e Select Manual if your HDV device is not OHCI
517. rom the submenu or shortcut menu 4 You can adjust the envelope by editing the envelope in the timeline or by adjusting the slider in the track header when Show Automation Controls is selected Adjusting the composite level automation settings TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 Click the Automation Settings button 7 and select Show Automation Controls The slider handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Drag the slider to control the transparency or blending of each track Left is 100 transparent and right is 100 opaque You can also double click the percent to enter a specific value Mn fa oe tr Q Level 85 3 Lll Ea M F e When the track automation mode is set to Off the slider adjusts the send level of the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has a composite level envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the slider will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track has a composite level envelope and the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the slider edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have an envelope one will be created when you adjust the slider CHP 7 USING AUTOMATION 162 gt z If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the slider during playback the behavior va
518. ronization offset is displayed se Note The amount of offset is displayed when the Active Take Information option is selected on the View menu Very small offsets that are below the resolution of the timeline may be displayed as 0 00 Set the project time format to samples to see the offset amount ESS OC CC C To restore synchronization right click the audio or video event you want to synchronize choose Synchronize from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu Command Description By Moving Moves the event you clicked so it is synchronized to its corresponding audio or video event By Slipping Slips the contents of the event you clicked so the audio and video are synchronized The events do not move but the contents of the event you right click are shifted forward or backward to restore synchronization Deleting events CHP 4 Deleting an event removes it from its track Multiple events can be deleted and time selections can be used to modify the process Ripple editing also applies to delete actions Deleting operates exactly like a cutting operation but the removed information is not placed on the clipboard For more information see Cutting events on page 100 1 Select the events to be deleted 2 Press Delete BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 110 7 Applying post edit ripples You can apply a post edit ripple that affects either the edited track s the track s and certain proj
519. roperties based on a media file You can automatically set your project video properties to match an existing video file 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 On the Video tab of the Project Properties dialog click the Match Media Settings button amp 3 Browse for a media file that has the settings you wish you use for the project 4 Click Open The frame size frame rate pixel aspect ratio and field order of this file are automatically detected and the project properties are set to match ee Tip To save this information for future use enter a name in the Template box and click the Save Template button ta If your projects typically use these settings select the Start all new projects with these settings check box ae 5 Click OK to save the new project properties GETTING STARTED CHP 2 nnn A Saving a project When you save your work it is saved in a project file Project files are not rendered media files 1 From the File menu choose Save The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears In subsequent saves the dialog is bypassed your existing file name is retained and your project is updated to include any implemented changes 2 Select the drive and folder where you want to store the project 3 Type the project name in the File Name box 4 Click Save e O V Tip Select the Copy and trim media with project check box to save the project file and copies of the media files to a c
520. rowse to the Extras folder via Windows Explorer you can play the HD version and output it to your computer s display a home theater or a projector SS l l n If you re planning to render to a format that supports high definition video or print to an HD tape via a Blackmagic Design Decklink card replace your HDV intermediate file with the original transport stream after you re finished editing and before you render na Note If your intermediate files were rendered using the CineForm HD codec you won t need to replace the intermediate files with the transport streams ae Right click the HDV intermediate file in the Project Media window 2 Choose Replace from the shortcut menu CHP 13 Browse to the MPEG 2 transport stream that corresponds to the intermediate file and then click Open USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 238 Modifying video properties Modifying project video properties You can access project video properties by clicking the File menu and choosing Properties or by clicking the Project Video Properties button on the Video Preview window Many of these settings are identical to the settings found on the Project tab of the Custom Template dialog Final render properties set up in the Custom Template dialog override the following Project Properties settings For more information see Video tab on page S12 These properties control all of the default settings for your project Without maki
521. rt cut transition Ctrl numeric markers and regions keypad CHP 1 INTRODUCTION 36 Trimmer commands a 4 Tip Many of the shortcuts that apply to the timeline e g cursor placement selection commands etc also work in the Trimmer a Description Keys Description Keys Add Media From Cursor A Sort Trimmer history H Add Media to Cursor Shift A Clear Trimmer history Ctrl Shift H Transfer time selection from timeline to T Remove current media from Trimmer Ctrl H Trimmer after cursor history Transfer time selection from timeline to Shift T Save markers regions S Trimmer before cursor Toggle selected stream audio video Tab Toggle automatic marker region saving Shift S both Toggle audio video stream height Ctrl Shift Up Open in audio editor Ctrl E Down Arrow Track Motion window shortcuts Description Keys Change 3D layout 1 6 not numeric keypad Lock aspect ratio A Scale about center C Edit in object space O Prevent movement X Y and Z Prevent scaling Shift X Shift Y and Shift Z Enable snapping F8 Enable rotation Shift F8 Surround panner commands TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software For finer more precise movements on the shortcuts in this section add the key Description Keys Constrain motion to a line through the center of the surround panner Constrain motion to a constant radius from the center Shift drag the pan point only when Move Freely
522. rtions of your project that need extra processing These sections are prerendered and short files are created to use for previews The prerendering can take anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes depending on the length and complexity of the video Once these temporary files have been created they are used whenever those sections of the project are played back increasing playback quality and performance As long as no changes are made to the events in the prerendered sections the newly created files continue to be used for previews even if changes are made to other sections of the project 1 To prerender a portion of the project create a selection containing the portion you want to prerender 2 From the Tools menu choose Selectively Prerender Video The Prerender Video dialog appears CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 290 r 3 Select the type of prerender file to create in the Prerender as drop down list Click Custom to configure any custom compression options eT TI Note You ll need to choose a rendering template that inserts pulldown fields to create a standard DV file if your project properties are set to 24p or if you selected the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Use the NTSC DV 24p inserting 2 3 3 2 pulldown template if you intend to use the file on the Vegas timeline This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software R
523. s 53 Scanned images 49 Still image sequences 51 Inserting Command markers 121 Empty events 103 Markers 116 Media 56 Regions 117 Time 103 Video files with associated audio 57 Inserting empty tracks 141 Installation 18 System requirements 17 Interlace 371 Deinterlacing 238 Field order 238 313 371 Reduce interlace flicker 173 Inverting Audio event 172 Audio track 148 Invert track phase 65 INDEX vi gt H Isolate channels 262 Isolating color channels 294 J cut 103 K Keyboard commands 31 37 Cursor placement 32 95 98 Edit 32 Event 34 Miscellaneous 37 Playback 32 Project file 31 Selection 33 Track view 35 Trimmer window 36 View 33 Window view 31 Keyboard preferences 345 Keyboard shortcuts customizing 345 Keyframe animation 246 273 Event panning and cropping 277 Generated text 280 Track motion 283 Video effects 279 Keyframe controller 273 Navigating 274 Keyframe presets 275 Keyframes 218 221 Adding 274 Changing relative spacing 275 Deleting 274 In track view 64 276 277 Interpolation curves 275 Modifying 274 presets 275 Ripple editing 111 Keying 264 Labeling busses See Naming busses Labeling tracks See Naming tracks L cut 103 Level slider See Composite level slider LFE channel 209 212 Locking events 171 To track envelopes 166 To track keyframes 277 Loop playback 98 Looping events 171 INDEX
524. s the Add Noise plug in The Add Noise plug in adds static or noise to a video sequence When added to a simple solid colored background with a monochrome setting and animated a pattern is produced that is similar to a television that is not tuned to any station 1 Add an Add Noise plug in to an event For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 242 The Video FX window appears with the keyframe controller at the bottom of the window 2 Add two keyframes to the event for a total of three including the one at the beginning New keyframe attributes are copied from the previous keyframe Click the first keyframe to select it Drag the Noise level slider to O Click the last keyframe to select it Drag the Noise level slider to 0 Click the second keyframe to select it From the Preset drop down list select Grainy Oo oOo O Hold and drag the second keyframe to duplicate it Position this new keyframe between the second and final keyframes The effect is off at the first keyframe and smoothly transitions to a grainy effect at the second keyframe at which point the effect remains constant until the third keyframe Then the effect gradually fades out until it reaches a minimum value at the last keyframe Keyframe 1 Keyframes 2 and 3 Keyframe 4 Noise None Noise Grainy Noise None ae Z EE iil HERE Lie aeo 00 00 00 00 eS N A Z The results of gradually transitioning into an e
525. s adds 7 5 IRE setup to convert black to 7 5 IRE Consumer video hardware typically does not add 7 5 IRE setup and most professional hardware allows you to turn 7 5 IRE setup on or off PAL video and NTSC video in Japan do not add setup Refer to your video hardware documentation to determine whether your hardware adds 7 5 IRE setup 1 Click the Settings button in the Video Scopes window 2 Select the 7 5 IRE Setup check box in the Video Scopes Settings dialog Black will be displayed as 7 5 in the waveform monitor If your video hardware does not add 7 5 setup clear the check box Studio RGB display RGB values on your computer can range from 0 to 255 Studio RGB values range from 16 to 235 If you want to limit the display of the Video Scopes window to studio RGB standards perform the following steps 1 Click the Settings button 29 in the Video Scopes window 2 Select the Studio RGB 16 to 235 check box in the Video Scopes Settings dialog Whether you need to use the Studio RGB 16 to 235 setting depends on the codec you will use to render your video before printing to tape Suggested settings follow Refer to the codec s documentation to determine whether the Studio RGB 16 to 235 check box should be selected Codec Studio RGB Setting Sony DV On Microsoft DV Off Matrox DV Off MainConcept DV Off Canopus On Apple QuickTime DV Off If the Use Microsoft DV codec check box is selected on the General tab
526. s and Contrast i Sony Broadcast Colors Color Curves i Sony Bump Map Convolution Kernel th Sony Channel Blend P Sony Chroma Blur Pe Sony Chroma Kever mie Sony Color Balance 2 Drag a plug in from the window to one of the following locations e file in the Project Media window event e track list or empty section of a track e Video Preview window video output effects 3 Modify the effect in the Video FX window and close the window when you are finished For help on the different controls in the Video FX window click the Plug In Help button to access online help CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 244 r Working with video effects plug in chains You can apply plug ins in chains of two or more for even greater flexibility A plug in chain is a sequence of all of the plug ins to be applied to a media file event track or project The same plug in can be added to a chain more than once Use the same steps to add additional plug ins to a chain as you use to add a single plug in For more information see Adding a video effects plug in on page 242 After you apply a plug in chain the video is processed by each plug in in order The plug ins are cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange their order to achieve the desired effect To view and work with a plug in chain click the Video FX button eg for the event track Project Media w
527. s by telephone please call 608 256 5555 About your rights in Vegas software Vegas software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement The End User License Agreement is first presented to you when you install the software Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the software For your reference a copy of the End User License Agreement for Vegas software is located at http www sony com mediasoftware About your privacy Sony Media Software respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http mediasoftware sonypictures com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software Vegas software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Vegas software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and condi
528. s feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them When you render multiple tracks any envelope or track effects that you have applied are rendered into the new track The original source files remain unaffected and the new track s are saved to a new file When working with DV files select a DV template to avoid any loss of quality For more information see Working in DV format on page 234 ey Note Every video render that uses compression results in a loss of quality from the original source material To minimize loss of quality minimize the number of video renders that use compression eS en 1 Click the Solo button for the tracks that you want to mix down If no tracks are soloed the rendered track will match the Master Bus output Create a time selection if you want to mix down a portion of your project Video tracks will be rendered into a single video track and audio tracks will be rendered into a single stereo audio track 2 From the Tools menu choose Render to New Track or press M The Render to New Track dialog appears 3 Complete the dialog as follows e From the Save in drop down list select the drive or folder to save the new media file o Type a file name in the File name box e From the Save as type drop down list choose the file format e g wav for audio or avi for video e From the Template drop down list choose a format from the template list Alternately click Cu
529. s of your project serve as cues and provide additional functionality e Markers are points that you mark along the project s timeline They are typically used to mark locations in the project for later reference or to mark timing cues e Regions are ranges of time that you mark along the timeline Regions identify ranges of time for your reference and can function as permanent time selections e Command markers are markers that enable metadata in streaming media files These markers can be used to display headlines or closed captions link to Web sites or perform any other function you define For more information see Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files on page 229 In addition these markers can be used to embed Scott Studios data information which is used extensively in broadcasting e CD layout markers are markers that indicate tracks and indices for an audio CD layout These marks are used to create tracks and index points when burning an audio CD For more information see Understanding tracks and indices on page 351 eee ee ee Tip You can use ripple editing to automatically move markers and regions as you edit in the timeline For more information see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 E BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 116 Working with markers Markers are useful for identifying and navigating to specific locations in longer projects As you place markers in your project they are automatically numbered
530. s on page 110 LOE ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 a 377 Adding new track keyframes You can add new track keyframes to an existing track level effect by double clicking the track keyframe area Editing track keyframes Double click a track keyframe to open the associated window and adjust the settings To change a keyframe interpolation curve right click the keyframe and choose a curve type from the shortcut menu Locking track keyframes to events When track keyframes are locked you can move events along the track and the keyframes move along with them Only keyframes that occur within the selected events move Select the Lock Envelopes to Events button to lock track keyframes to the events on the track Hiding track keyframes If track view becomes too cluttered you can hide track keyframes from view From the View menu choose Show Video Envelopes and choose Track Keyframes from the submenu to hide track keyframes Sample uses for keyframe animation The following section provides several examples of how keyframe animation can be used with features such as event panning and cropping video effects plug ins and generated text events Animating event panning and cropping You can combine event panning and cropping tools with keyframe animation to create several special effects For more information see Cropping video on page 223 Zooming in on a still image By using keyframe animation in the Event Pan Crop wi
531. s on page 117 Selected Events The Selected Events category is visually identical to the Events category except that the Edit Details window only displays information about events that are selected in your project CHP 5 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 140 SS Customizing the Edit Details window You may arrange and delete columns from each category and save the changes to a personal template One template is available from which you may create your own display options 1 From the Show drop down list choose the category that you want to customize 2 Drag a column s header to the new position The cursor changes to a column icon Ne as you move the column If you want to remove the column from the display drag the icon off the Edit Details window Release the mouse to drop the column in its new position 3 The Template drop down name changes to Untitled Enter a new name in the Template drop down Edit Details vif x Show Events w My Custom Display 4 Click the Save button W on the Edit Details window to save the custom display mnn Tip You can delete a custom display by selecting it from the template drop down list and clicking the Delete button x SS H ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 141 CHAPTER Working with Tracks Tracks contain the media events on the timeline of a project There are two types of tracks in a Vegas project video and audio Each type of track has its
532. s or to select nonadjacent tracks 2 Right click and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 142 r Deleting a track You can delete a track from your project and all of the events contained on it You can delete one track or select multiple tracks to delete 1 Select the track that you want to delete To select multiple tracks click each one while pressing to select a range of adjacent tracks or to select discontinuous tracks 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete a Tip You can also delete a track by selecting it and pressing Delete inn S Naming or renaming a track Every track in your project has a scribble strip where you can type a name for the track The track name may be up to 255 characters long If the scribble strip is not visible you may need to increase the height or width of the track by dragging the track s edge to reveal it For more information see Changing track height on page 143 1 Double click the scribble strip Any existing name is highlighted on the i E Overlay ay P fk i Strip Level 100 0 L Fa m H 2 Type the new track name 3 Press to save the track s name Double click and type track name Organizing tracks Vegas software is flexible in how tracks can be organized You can arrange and resize tracks to fit your particular needs Reordering tracks When you create tracks they are arranged in the order that they were added It is
533. s the east and Juliet is the sun Line 002 3 O0 00 50 20 TEXT Anise Fair sun and kill the envious moon Line 003 d O0 01 03 26 TEXT Who is already sick and pale with grief Line 004 B 00 01 30 27 TEXT That thou her maid art Far more Fair than she Line 005 6 O00 01 39 06 TEXT Be not her maid since she is envious Line 006 7 O0 01 44 29 TEXT Her vestal livery is but sick and green Line OOF B O0 01 54 24 TEXT 4nd none but Fools do wear it cast it off Line 008 Setting closed captioning timing 1 Position the cursor shortly before where you want the first caption to occur KR W N 5 Press K to insert each subsequent caption Select the row for the first caption in the Edit Details window Click the Play button to start playback When playback reaches the place where the first caption should TEXT But soft What ight through yonder window breaks occur press K The first caption is inserted at the cursor position updates the Position setting in the Edit Details window on na and selects the next caption S 6 Render your file in Windows Media Video format For more information see Rendering a project on page CHP 13 uy USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES 232 JE Displaying closed captioning You may use one of two methods for displaying the closed captioning when the video is played e Instruct your audience to turn on captioning In Windows Media Player 7 and 8 from the View menu choose Now Playing
534. same device that you chose for Generate MIDI Timecode settings Trigger from MIDI Timecode Sets the input software or device and frame rate used when triggering from MIDI timecode settings E Note When Sync is active Vegas software is triggering from MTC media files are not closed i e cannot be edited outside of Vegas software when Vegas software is not the active application You will also not be prompted to rename or delete recorded takes as this may interrupt the synchronization S ee Oo Setting advanced Sync preferences From the Sync tab you can access advanced settings by clicking Advanced The Advanced Sync Preferences dialog has three tabs MTC Input MTC Output and MIDI Clock Output The display of these tabs is dependent on your selections in the Sync tab See the following sections on each tab for more information CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 l 3418 MTC Input This tab displays only if you choose a device in the Trigger from MIDI Timecodes settings drop down list on the Sync tab Preference Description Free wheel for timecode loss When selected Vegas software continues to play for a specified period of time without chasing if timecode is lost Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent losses in timecode monitoring If losses in timecode are frequent troubleshooting should be done on your hardware to find the cause of the problem Free wheel slack time seconds Specifies the amount of time th
535. sc if your drive supports burning this material DN OO T Adding pauses Each audio CD track in your project should have a two second pause following it This default setting is based on the Red Book specification for audio CDs The exception to this standard is a continuous recording such as a live concert CD For a continuous recording you can omit the pauses after tracks for continuous playback For more information see Red Book specification on page 385 ee Note The Red Book specification also requires a two second pause at the beginning of an audio CD If the first track in your project begins before the two second mark a ruler is added offset to ensure the project begins with the required two second pause SE O T If you use the Add as CD Track command to add tracks from the Project Media window the appropriate pauses are added automatically However if you are laying out your project manually you must create these pauses between audio CD tracks Two second pauses Track 1 Glass of punch Track 2 Anywhere but somewhere Track 2 Can you see w 01 00 08 58 Sade G KR 9 Val 0 0 dB I Pan Center lt BI 1 Position the cursor where you want to insert the pause 2 From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears aa 3 Enter two seconds in the Amount of time to insert box Amount of time to insert 4 Click OK Two seconds are inserted in the timeline at the cursor positio
536. see Quantizing to frames on page 125 Red Book specification The Red Book defines the specifications of every audio compact disc in every music store throughout the world Red Book specifications define not only the information within the disc digital audio recorded at 44 1 kHz but also the disc size itself and the way in which the audio is arranged Region A subsection of a sound file denoted by a start and end point You can define any number of regions in a sound file Rendering The process by which Vegas software saves the project to a specific file format like AVI or WMA Resample The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If an audio file is resampled at a lower rate Vegas software decreases sample points As a result the file size and the frequency range are reduced When resampling to a higher sample rate Vegas software interpolates extra sample points in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When down sampling one must be aware of aliasing see Aliasing Vegas software automatically resamples all audio to the project s sample rate Ripple Ripple Editing A type of editing where events are moved out of the way to make room for newly inserted events as opposed to simply being overwritten When a one minute event is ripple inserted into a project the duration of a project lengthens by one minute If ri
537. sert them as takes into the timeline This is especially useful when loop recording numerous takes to a single file For more information see Working with takes on page 130 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 136 r Viewing media markers and regions in events From the View menu choose Event Media Markers to toggle the display markers and regions that are saved in a media file These markers are displayed in the timeline in events that refer to the media file Media markers and regions cannot be edited within the event However when you edit the markers in markers and regions in the Trimmer window or in an external audio editor the event will reflect your changes Media markers in Trimmer Media markers in event a kayak avi C Media_Files Wideoi v x h il 00101120 00 U 1120 H p E OO 00 00 00 OOOO 05 00 l l a Il 0310500 a inal gt gt NEB HA lt 00 00 10 09 Explorer Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transitions wide gt ee Tip When media markers are displayed you can use them as snap points for positioning the cursor and for edge trimming if Snap to Markers is selected on the Options menu If a media file s frame rate does not match your project frame rate frame quantization will occur after the snap if Quantize to Frames is selected on the Options menu EO Opening a file in an external audio editor from the Trimmer The Trimmer allows you to open your selected audio editing application e g Sound
538. setting pms If you want to adjust volume automation settings on the bus s bus track click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls For more information see Adjusting volume or pan automation settings on page 157 The fader handle is displayed as in Automation mode You can adjust the volume of several busses simultaneously by selecting the busses and adjusting any of their faders If you select an assignable effect along with the busses the output fader of the assignable effect moves along with the bus volume faders Changing bus meter resolution You can select a meter resolution at which a bus displays the signal levels that are being mixed When you change the meter resolution on this control the other meters assignable effects and preview automatically change to match To change bus meter resolution right click a meter and choose a meter resolution from the shortcut menu Adjusting a bus for clipping If the volume level is set too high it may cause clipping The clipping displays in red at the top of the meter with the clipping value displayed in decibels dB Adjust the fader and click the red clipping value to reset the meter Continue to adjust the fader and reset the meter until you eliminate the clipping You can set the meter to remember and display the highest and lowest levels by right clicking and selecting Hold Peaks and Hold Valleys CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 186 r Muting a bus
539. settings on the Project Properties dialog s Ruler tab For more information see Ruler tab on page 334 CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 330 r The following are the different time units available hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and ff frames Time format name Units Samples numbered starting with zero Time hh mm ss sss Seconds sssss sss to three decimal places Time amp Frames hh mm ss ff Absolute Frames frames are numbered starting with O Measures amp Beats measures beats ticks where 64 ticks 1 beat Feet amp Frames 16mm 40 fpf feet frames where 40 frames 1 foot Feet amp Frames 35mm 16 fpf feet frames where 16 frames 1 foot SMPTE Film Sync IVTC 23 976 fps Video hh mm ss ff available only in the full version of Vegas SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps hh mm ss ff available only in the full version of Vegas SMPTE EBU 25 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video hh mm ss ff SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio hh mm ss ff Audio CD Time hh mm ss or hh mm ss ff when zoomed in tightly Editing the ruler offset The ruler doesn t necessarily need to start with zero at the far left side You can enter an offset to change the orientation of the ruler in a project One use of this is to create a lead in into a project A five second offset would mean that the ruler would start at 5 seconds and would be at 0 five seconds into the project a Note You
540. size Ctrl Save window layout Ctrl Alt D then press 0 9 Zoom in time incremental Up Arrow Show hide envelopes Ctrl Shift E Zoom in time until each video Alt Up Arrow View event media markers Ctrl Shift K thumbnail represents one frame Zoom out time incremental Down Arrow View active take information Ctrl Shift Zoom in on audio waveforms Shift Up Arrow View waveforms and frames Ctrl Shift W Zoom out on audio waveforms Shift Down Arrow View video event buttons Ctrl Shift C Zoom in Ctrl Up Arrow View event fade lengths Ctrl Shift T Zoom out Ctrl Down Arrow View video event edge edit frames Ctrl Shift O INTRODUCTION 34 jp Event commands Description Keys Move or trim selected event s left right Numeric keypad 4 6 one pixel Move or trim selected events one frame Numeric keypad 1 3 left right Description Keys Enter edge trimming mode and select Numeric keypad 7 or event start move to previous event edge In this mode 1 3 4 and 6 on the numeric keypad trim the selected event edge Hold Ctrl while pressing 1 3 4 or 6 to time compress stretch or hold Alt while pressing 1 3 4 or 6 to slip trim or hold Ctrl Alt while pressing 1 3 4 or 6 to slide a transition or crossfade Enter edge trimming mode and select Numeric keypad 9 or event end move to next event edge In this mode 1 3 4 and 6 on the numeric keypad trim the selected event edge Move selected event s left right on grid Ctrl n
541. sk the file paths saved in your project are often valid only on the local machine This can be the case even if the media resides in a shared folder Use the File Mappings tab to map local folders to universal paths ee Note In order to use network rendering with nested projects the nested project must contain only media from folders that do not require remapping Before nesting your Vegas project update the project so that all media in the project is added from a network folder or a local shared folder that is mapped to the same drive letter on all renderers and the render host eS Adding a file mapping 1 Right click the icon in your system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the Sony Vegas Network Render Service window Select the File Mappings tab The tab displays a list of local folders and their universal paths Click a blank row in the table In the Local box type the path to the local folder c media for example Qn A W N In the Universal box type the UNC path or mapped drive letter to the folder renderer media for example CHP 17 SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 322 p __ E Note Before you start rendering verify that the remote renderer has access to the folder and is logged in On the renderer choose Run from the Start menu to display the Run dialog In the Open box type the UNC path to the folder renderer media in our previous example
542. sktop is extended across multiple displays you can one of those displays to preview the timeline with no A V synchronization drift for ADR and foley work If you intend to deliver your project in an interlaced format previewing on a computer monitor is not a substitute for previewing on an interlaced broadcast monitor To use a Windows display as a monitor you must have the following e A multiple output graphics card that supports 3D acceleration or multiple graphics cards you could install AGP and PCI video cards in your system for example e A CRT LCD or projector connected to your computer s secondary video output e The Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor check box must be selected on the Settings tab or the Display Properties dialog Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Display aa Note Vegas software allows you to use one external video device at a time The external monitor display will be unavailable during video capture Onn H Follow the steps below to set up your preview 1 Use the Preview Device tab in the Preferences dialog to configure the display you want to use as a video preview monitor 2 Select the Preview on External Monitor button G in the Video Preview window e When playback is stopped the secondary display will match the display of the Video Preview window e When you start playback the Video Preview window will be blank and the video is played on the secondary display
543. so in some cases you may want to rearrange their order to achieve the desired effect o O TI Note If you re working with a 5 1 surround project you can use distinct plug in settings for each channel separate EQ settings for the front and surround speakers for example using effect automation Add multiple instances of the plug in to the track effects chain and select the Enable check boxes in the FX Automation Chooser for the channels you want each instance of the plug in to affect 5 1 surround is available only in the full version of Vegas software nnn T Creating a plug in chain Audio tracks have a built in plug in chain with three default plug ins applied as a default For bus effects and assignable effects however you must first create a plug in chain Creating a bus effects plug in chain 1 Click the Bus FX button on a bus in the Mixer window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 2 Select a plug in and click OK The Audio Plug In window displays with your selected plug in as the first in the new plug in chain 3 Adjust the settings for the plug in to create the desired effect and click the Close button 211 in the upper right corner to close the window Creating an assignable effects plug in chain rN This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 Click the Insert Assignable FX button on the Mixer window The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 2 Select a plug in and click OK
544. ss 4 to trim one pixel left or press 6 to trim one pixel right or hold Ctrl Shift while rolling the mouse wheel Depending on the current zoom level the trim duration will vary ee Note Pressing 5 on the numeric keypad exits edge trimming mode If you are not in edge trimming mode 1 3 4 and 6 on the numeric keypad to nudge events on the timeline by frame 1 and 3 or by pixel 4 and 6 eS Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary Splitting events You are allowed to create multiple independently functioning events from a single event by splitting it Splitting creates a new ending point for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event Splitting an event does not alter the original media The ep a e l di fil z o f 4 h b i j d f One event original media file s information is there but is omitted for ean playback based on where the event s starting or ending point x occurs on the timeline Split position When split the two new events are flush against one another Sidi ATI E E E Th nts can be m independently Ladiuuialdia e two events can be moved independently pie Splitting an event l i E h The two new events 1 Select the event s to be split For more information see L Sani Making selections on page 96 RBE independently 2 Place the cursor at the timeline position where the split will occur 3 From the Edit menu choose Split or press S CHP 4 BASIC
545. st pattern d Type values in the Leader black duration and Trailer black duration boxes to set the length of blank space that will be printed before and after your video To print without a leader or trailer enter 0 in the appropriate box 6 Click Next The Device Setup dialog appears Choose the device control mode e Select Manual to cue the device manually and set it to record Use this option if your IEEE 1394 DV device is not OHCI compliant or if the application is unable to obtain device control of your DV recorder e Select Crash Recording to cue the device automatically based on a timecode value Enter the timecode where recording should begin in the Device timecode box The device must support OHCI 1394 DV device control to use this option 7 Click Finish If you have not already prerendered portions of your project that cannot be rendered and printed to tape in real time will be selectively prerendered The selected video begins printing to the device A progress meter appears indicating the percent completed a If you re using Manual mode a dialog will be displayed after rendering is finished You can specify a delay time in the Delay playback countdown timer box and select the Beep each second during countdown check box if you want to count down before sending video to your device b If you re using Crash Recording mode your DV recorder will start and begin recording after rendering is finished Printing to a tape
546. standard frame rates for video 29 97 for NTSC used in US North and Central America parts of South America and Japan 25 for PAL used in many parts of the world including Europe and much of Asia or 24 for film Frequency Spectrum The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the frequency range is basically 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum Hertz Hz The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS Insertion Point The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where pasted data is placed or other data is inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the timeline Inverse telecine Telecine is the process of converting 24 fps cinema source to 30 fps video television by adding pulldown fields Inverse telecine then is the process of converting 30 fps television video to 24 fps cinema by removing pulldown APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 382z Markers Saved locations in the sound file Markers can be displayed in the Trimmer window for sound files that contain them but more often markers and regions are used
547. sted in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may also add separators on the toolbar to organize the buttons to suit your preferences You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on the dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 In the Available toolbar buttons list use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and then select it 3 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order 4 Click Add The new button is added above the selected button in the Current toolbar buttons List SS Note You may also double click a button to add it to the toolbar S H 5 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and close the dialog Removing buttons from the toolbar You may remove buttons and separators from the main toolbar If you have added buttons to the toolbar removing unused or unwanted buttons allows you to maximize the toolbar s space 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to remove 3 Click Remove The button is removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and will not appear on the toolbar 4 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and exit the dialog CHP 18 CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE 336 __ Setting preferen
548. stom to set custom rendering settings For more information see Customizing the rendering process on page 311 e Select Render loop region only if you only want to render the time selection area e Select Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox to adjust the aspect ratio so the output frame is filled on all edges When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area letterboxing 4 Click Save to render to a new track As the tracks are being rendered mixed down a small dialog appears displaying the progress of the render A status bar also appears in the lower left portion LLL 12 n Rendering myproject avi r 4 Tip You can cancel the rendering process by clicking the Cancel button on the status bar NE After the new track is rendered it appears at the top of the track view If you render the entire project you may delete or mute the other tracks from the project since they are all contained on the new track CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 LJ CHAPTER 155 Using Automation Automation allows you to control audio and video levels panning and effect parameter automation over time You can create fades apply stereo panning and vary effect parameters throughout your project Automation is represented on the Vegas timeline as an envelope or set of keyframes You can create automation
549. t nae TT always easy to move them around and impractical to nede Sns 1 Gin 2 o00 wav 1 Wave Sound store multiple copies of these files You can add Sere cone eens i l s 3 e 57 Owsl 013 000 way ave Soun media files to the Project Media window to organize c Blazuz 000 av anen them before any editing begins Once you begin 5 570ws 011 000 wav 1 Wave Sound 1 O00 avi 1 video Cli working on a project all files you add to the 6 Q 570us 014 000 avi oe a i 7 ci 570wsl 013 000 avi 1 Video Clip timeline are automatically included in the Project 8 570ws1 012 000 avi 1 Video Clip Media list From the View menu choose Project a 570ws 011 000 avi 1 video Clip Ein 10 570wsl 009 000 avi 1 Video Clip y Media to open this window if it is not already ai a visible Video T20x480x24 29 970 fps 00 00 45 24 Alpha None Field Or Explorer Trimmer Project Media Media Manager Transitions gt Using Project Media views You can control the information that is displayed in the Project Media window by clicking the Views button and selecting a view The purpose of each view is explained below View Description List Displays a simple listing of the file name of each file in the Project Media window Detailed Displays all the properties for each file The information is presented in a table format You can customize the information displayed Reorder columns fields by dragging the col
550. t a window from docking when you drag it hold the key To expand a docked window so it fills the docking area click the Maximize button L Click again to restore the window to its previous size e To remove a window from the docking area or a floating dock click the Close button INTRODUCTION CHP 1 e 2 B Explorer window Alt 1 The Explorer window is similar to the Microsoft Windows Explorer Use the Explorer window to select media files to drag to the project timeline or add to the Project Media window You can also use the Explorer to perform common file management tasks such as creating folders renaming files and folders deleting files and folders Use the Start Preview and Auto Preview buttons to preview files before adding them to the project Preview selected media files before placing them in the project gt agja m L a Type FLAG AVI 68 15MB Video Clip TRAFFIC AY 46 73MB Video Clip L My Documents Select drive or folder Network Meighbr EJ Favorites B MEDIA L Project L ScreenshotP FIRE10 a 1 DOME Au CAPITOL MT STOPLIGHT AVT UNTITLED Av 46 73MB 45 44M 45 44M 20 55MB 12 28MB Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Video Clip Select media to place in the project by dragging or double clicking CHURCH4 AVT 6 10MB Video Clip TR Add media to the Project Media window by right clicking a file and choosing
551. t fade in or out event fade ins outs and single event transitions that occur on the same end of the event within the selection will be changed e If you drop the preset on an event edge with no fade all other event edges event fade ins outs and single event transitions that occur on the same end of the event within the selection will be changed a Note To change the length of the transition for cuts that are converted to transitions use the Cut to overlap conversion settings on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog sO O lt S S SS SS SS S S S S S T CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 270 r Adding a transition progress envelope TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Normally a transition progresses from 0 to 100 in a linear fashion over the length of the transition A transition progress envelope gives you complete control over a transition you can hold reverse and repeat individual transitions 1 Right click a transition 2 From the shortcut menu choose Insert Remove Envelopes and then choose Transition Progress from the submenu An envelope is added to your transition 3 Add points and adjust the fade curves as desired For more information see Using the Envelope Edit tool on page 165 In the following example the transition starts progresses to 50 reverses direction and then finishes SOE es ee ie EEEE E EEEE
552. t far more fair than she Line 005 6 00 00 00 00 TEXT Be not her maid since she is envious Line O06 7 00 00 00 00 TEXT Her vestal livery is but sick and green Line 007 C6 00 00 00 00 TEXT And none but fools do wear it cast it off Line O08 PS 00 00 00 00 TEXT Itis my lady it is my love Line 009 000 00 00 00 TEXT that she knew she were Line 010 471 00 00 00 00 TEXT Line 011 Note The final caption displays in the Microsoft Windows Media Player until the end of the video To clear the final caption sooner add a final command with no text as shown above Se Copying and pasting captions into Vegas software 1 Select the cells in the spreadsheet and copy them A W N Switch to Vegas software and choose Edit Details from the View menu The Edit Details window appears From the Show drop down list choose Commands Right click the gray box in the upper left corner and choose Paste from the shortcut menu The spreadsheet data is pasted into the Edit Details window Click the column header for the Comments column This sorts the captions by line number Right click to paste the spreadsheet Click the Comments column header contents into the Edit Details window to sort the captions by line number Edit Details Edit Details G show Show Commands Untitled vi x Position Command Farameters Comment 00 00 04 15 TEXT But sort What light through yonder window breaks Line 001 1 2 OO 00 19 25 TEXT It i
553. t is mapped to the same drive letter on all renderers and the render host S Your original project does not need to be saved in a shared folder Before network rendering begins a copy of your project will be saved in the shared output folder see step 4 for use by the renderers This version will have all media paths remapped based on the Network Render Service file mappings For more information see Setting file mappings on page 321 After rendering begins you can continue to make edits to your original project without disrupting in progress network render tasks If you want to render only a portion of your project create a time selection that includes the portion you want to render From the File menu choose Render As 4 Use the Render As dialog to choose the file format and location where you want to save your file The location of the output file must be in a shared folder Select the Render loop region only check box in the Render As dialog if you want to render the selected portion of your project Select the Render using networked computers check box in the Render As dialog and then click the Save button The Network Render dialog is displayed From the Render Host drop down list choose the URL of the renderer you want to use to render your project The Temporary Files Location box displays the path to the folder where the temporary veg project will be saved If you want to use a folder other than
554. t on your computer s performance Effect automation envelopes are bypassed during record monitoring a RECORDING AUDIO CHP 11 209 CHAPTER SE Working with 5 1 g Surround K mc i Ji EI r ii ad T as a L a w Met Vegas software allows you to create 5 1 channel mixes to prepare audio for DVD Video TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software Note Vegas software plays and mixes uncompressed 5 1 channel audio Authoring software such as the Sony Media Software 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack is required to encode 5 1 channel audio to AC 3 for use in DVD authoring What is 5 1 surround 5 1 surround isa standard format consistin of three speakers dC TOSS the front and two speakers in the rear 8 The 1 i ixth ch l call low h h h levels in th i e 1 is a sixth channel ca ed O frequency effects LFE that enhances the bass evels in the mix 5 1 surround includes five main channels and a sixth channel for low frequency effects Center Right LFE Y m K Left Right Surround Surround The LFE channel is commonly used in motion pictures to enhance low audio frequencies for effects such as explosions or crashes Audio in this channel is commonly limited to a range from about 25 Hz to 120 Hz Unlike the five primary channels the LFE channel adds no directional information Depending on the speaker setup and audio levels the sound assigned to the LFE channel may b
555. t settings to a video source file by using the Match Media Settings button amp in the Project Properties dialog For more information see Setting video properties based on a media file on page 44 and Modifying project video properties on page 238 Selecting templates Always select a DV template when performing any of the following tasks in a DV project e prerendering video pg 289 e rendering to a new track pg 153 e printing video to tape from the timeline pg 323 e rendering a project pg 307 When prerendering video or rendering to a new track a DV template not only optimizes playback performance but also helps you avoid needless recompression of DV footage DV material is recompressed only when necessary Cuts only DV sequences are not recompressed when you output the project to DV from the timeline or in Video Capture The DV templates are designed to provide high quality pixel aspect correct DV compliant renders when rendering a project or printing to tape from the timeline Do not select an uncompressed setting when choosing rendering or print to tape options An uncompressed setting produces a large file that will not print back to DV tape from Video Capture or from the timeline USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 n 238 Eliminating out of range colors The DV format allows color values to exceed karane broadcast NTSC and PAL color level standards If We Video Event Fx 570ws 007 you have a scene whose
556. tadata into streaming media files As your video plays any number of other actions can be programmed to occur These commands are a part of the Microsoft Windows Media and RealMedia streaming formats Most frequently these actions add text or open a related Web site where the viewer can find more information about the topic at hand The specific commands available vary depending on the final format of your project ee Note Windows Media Player 9 will ignore metadata commands unless the Run script commands when present check box is selected on the Security tab of the player s Preferences dialog Be sure to instruct your audience to select this check box before playing your file SS T You can use command markers to add closed captions to your project For more information see Adding closed captioning to Windows Media Video WMV files on page 229 Command markers can also indicate when an instruction function will occur in a WAV file being used in a radio broadcast environment Scott Studios data The following two sections define the markers for both streaming media and Scott Studios files ee O Note While streaming media files can be played on any hard drive or CD ROM they require a special streaming media server provided by your Internet service provider to stream properly across the Internet EE BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 120 r Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file command markers ca
557. tails window displays a database for all of the media in your project It shows information about how the files are being used and allows you to modify many of those properties You may sort add or change information rearrange columns and edit items in the project This window provides an alternate method for working with events audio CD track list items command markers markers and regions after they are placed in your project You can dock the Edit Details window in the window docking area or float it on the workspace For more information see Window docking area and floating window docks on page 24 Viewing the Edit Details window To view the Edit Details window choose Edit Details from the View menu or press Alt 4 The Show drop down list allows you to view categorized project information You can edit most entries by double clicking them or by right clicking them to display a shortcut menu Edit Details Shows Events Track Right click an entry to display a shortcut menu or double click i an entry to edit it Start 00 00 07 7 OO 00 33 07 00 00 15 54 0000 00 00 DU DU DU UU 0000 11 58 00 00 19 59 0000 37 58 0000429 0000 11 58 0000 00 00 00 00 19 59 0000 27 60 Use the scroll bar to view other columns in the window Audio CD track list Number of Takes 1 icefield 00 00 33 00 00 11 S 00 00 00 00 00 06 oo 00 031 Paste Choose Active Take ShiFk T Act
558. te the curve Both sides of the tangent control move about the anchor point The pointer is displayed as a Drag the point at either end of the tangent control to manipulate that half of the curve The pointer is displayed asa Hold while dragging a tangent control to split the halves of the control and adjust them independently or join the two halves of the control if the tangent was previously split USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 262 Setting path options 1 2 3 Select a path with the Normal Edit tool gt l Expand the Path heading on the left side of the window to set options for the selected path Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose the selected path s masking behavior Positive The area inside the path is visible in your video output Negative The area outside the path is visible in your video output The area inside the path is transparent Disabled The path is bypassed Select the Anti alias box and choose Yes or No from the drop down list to indicate whether you want to apply an anti alias filter to smooth the edges of the path Select the Opacity box and type a value in the box or click the to display a slider to set the opacity of the area inside the path Select the Feather type box and choose a setting from the drop down list to fade the edges of the path In Feathering is applied to the inside edge of the path e Out Feather
559. ted freely on the screen Docked window Floating window p ete Best auto HQ Mixer 44 16 Video Preview Master ef RI Best auto H GL t HO Inf Inf va Project 720x480x32 29 970i Frame 820 Preview 360x240x32 29 970p Display 360x240x32 ij Project 720x480x32 29 970 Frame 820 Previews S60x240x32 29 970p Display 360x240x32 CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 288 y Preview Quality Split Screen View Overlays Video Output FX Video Preview ER Save Snapshot to File Project Video Properties Preview on External Monitor Copy Snapshot to Clipboard roject 720x480x332 29 970 Frame 820 Properties status bar fp cview s6ox240x32 29 970 Display 360x240x32 Button Description Project Video Displays the project s properties pg 238 Properties Preview on External Sends the preview out to an external monitor This only functions if your hardware supports this Monitor feature pg 339 Video Output FX Opens the Video Output FX window for adding video effects plug ins for the entire project pg 241 Split Screen View Turns split screen previews on or off Split screen previews allow you to split the preview window so you can see your affected and unaffected video or your video and the contents of your clipboard at the same time Available only in the full version of Vegas software Preview Quality Changes the preview resoluti
560. ter events on the track When not in post edit ripple mode adding a selection from the Trimmer has no effect on the position of other events For more information see Editing events on page 99 ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES 134 jp Adding selections at the cursor 1 Open a media file in the Trimmer 2 Make a time selection in the Trimmer 3 Select the track in the timeline where the selection will be added 4 Position the cursor in the timeline at either the start or end point where you want to add the selection 5 Add the selection to the timeline in one of the following ways e Click the Add Media from Cursor button or press A to insert the event after the cursor e Click the Add Media up to Cursor button or press A to insert the event before the cursor Alternately you can drag the selection from the Trimmer to the Drag from the to a project timeline Trimmer track lt r Sp Note Post edit rippling if enabled applies to clips inserted seo from the Trimmer For more information see Editing events a on page 99 Mian Filling a time selection on the timeline You can select a range of time on the project timeline and then fill it with the same length selection from the Trimmer 1 Create a time selection in the timeline where you want to add the event This sets the duration and position of the event that you will create 2 Open the media file you want to use to fill the time sele
561. the Play button to start playback 4 When you re ready to start editing adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust Envelope points keyframes are updated at the cursor position until you stop playback 5 Click Stop to end playback and stop recording automation USING AUTOMATION CHP 7 169 Editing individual envelope points or keyframes Editing individual envelope points or keyframes gives you fine control over your recorded settings 1 Click the Automation Settings button gt on the track you want to edit and select Show Automation Controls 2 Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch from the menu 3 Select the parameter you want to edit e For a track envelope select the envelope tool and click the envelope point you want to edit You can right click a point and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to display an effect s property page e For a keyframe click the Expand Collapse Track Keyframes button to expand track keyframe rows and then double click a keyframe to open its property page For more information see Using video effects on page 241 4 Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust The selected envelope point keyframe is edited and all others are unaffected For track envelopes you can also edit the envelope directly in the timeline S
562. the button is not selected the opposite side of the selection box will remain anchored when you drag the edges to resize it fall Prevent Scaling X Select this button if you want to lock the horizontal dimension of the selection box faa Prevent Scaling Y Select this button if you want to lock the vertical dimension of the selection box ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION CHP 15 n LLC Using keyframes in track motion Keyframes are what create the motion in the track motion feature You can create modify and remove keyframes in the keyframe controller in the same way as with any other feature that uses keyframes In addition for track motion and 3 D track motion you can use keyframe presets to save and recall the settings of the selected keyframe row at the cursor position For more information see Using keyframe animation on page EEE The keyframe controller in the Track Motion window has three attributes that can be animated position shadow and glow Each effect can be animated independently The shadow and glow effects can be turned on and off Each effect has its own set of controls that appear on the left hand side of the window You can access these controls by clicking the respective item on the keyframe controller S668 s Tip If any controls described in this section are not visible on the screen enlarge the Track Motion window by dragging the lower right corner until all controls are revealed ES E Positi
563. the current library as a restore point or as a template to create new libraries a Note When you back up your library the Media Manager automatically performs database management that can reclaim free space and improve performance SS Teh 1 Click the Media Library Actions button 7 and choose Back Up Media Library from the menu The Back Up Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your backup 3 In the File name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 4 Click the Save button To restore the backup at a later time open the backup file Opening a Reference Library A reference library contains information about media from an outside source or vendor If you have the Sony Loops and Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media media from existing Sony Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library You can also use a reference library to search media files that you aren t part of your collection For example if you re unable to find the perfect loop for a Vegas project in your own collection you could use the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library to search the entire Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples catalog and purchase a new loop library You can use the Media Re
564. the output folder you choose in step 4 you can choose a folder from the drop down list or click the Browse button to choose a folder This folder must be in a shared location 9 Click OK to start rendering 10 To add a project to the queue open the project and repeat steps 1 through 8 CHP 17 You can choose a different renderer for each project or time selection if you want to render the files concurrently on separate computers If you choose the same renderer the rendering jobs will be queued to run sequentially on that computer SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 320 r Using distributed network rendering 1 Save your project A Note In order to use network rendering with nested projects the nested project must contain only media from folders that do not require remapping Before nesting your Vegas project update the project so that all media in the project is added from a network folder or a local shared folder that is mapped to the same drive letter on all renderers and the render host LE T Your original project does not need to be saved in a shared folder Before network rendering begins a copy of your project will be saved in the shared output folder see step 4 for use by the renderers This version will have all media paths remapped based on the Network Render Service file mappings For more information see Setting file mappings on page 321 After rendering begins you can continue to make edits to y
565. this tab choose Preferences from the Options menu then click the MIDI tab Preference Description Make these devices available for Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to use as a MIDI output for a control surface MIDI output Make these devices available for Select the check box for each MIDI device that you want to be available for a control surface MIDI input Default All Restores all MIDI preferences to the default settings VST Effects tab Preference Description Default VST search folder Displays the location where the software looks for VST effects Alternate VST search folder X Click Browse to choose an alternate location where VST effects can be found Select VST effects to be available Select the VST effects that you want available for use as Vegas audio plug ins Only the VST effects as audio plug ins located in the default or alternate search folders appear in this box CUSTOMIZING VEGAS SOFTWARE CHP 18 e 349 Editing tab Preference Enable looping on events by default Preserve pitch when stretching audio events Collapse loop region when no time selection is present JKL shuttle speed Quick fade length for audio events ms New still image length seconds Default time between CD tracks Cursor preview duration seconds Automatically overlap multiple selected media when added Cut to overlap conversion Envelope fade types Default All Display tab Preference Track colors Envel
566. time range during playback 1 Click the Play gt or the Play From Start 1 button to begin playback 2 Press I where you want the time selection to begin 3 Press 0 where you want the time selection to end 4 Click the Stop button S to stop playback Using shortcuts for time selections These shortcuts can speed up the process of making precise time selections Description Shortcut Set time selection duration equal to an Double click the event event s duration Extend selection to the end of the Ctrl Shift Alt Right Arrow currently selected event edge Extend selection to the beginning of the Ctrl Shift Alt Left Arrow currently selected event edge Drag a time selection on an event without Ctrl Shift drag on the event selecting deselecting the event E aaas Tip Press to recall the last five time selection areas I Looping playback If you want to play back the time range click Play gt to play only the events within the time range Click the Loop Playback button or press Q to toggle loop playback on and off Vegas software continually plays back the portion of the timeline within the time selection when loop playback is toggled on Selecting events and a time range Selecting a time range does not automatically Time selection select events Excluding locked events all items within the time range play back and are affected by Edit menu commands However you may select 00 00 04
567. timeline 3 Insert a video event just below the mask track This is the background video behind the mask and is the event that is masked 4 Click the Make Compositing Child button 4 located in the track list of the background video lower track This makes the lower track the child of the mask track the parent track In the following example the white circle is a BMP image file Black is 100 opaque and white is completely transparent SI lt ay S ot Lod SI Video Preview G bevel 100 0 dH BS T 4 Ex one 3 lt Rest fR H lt C Compositing Child indicator 10 Ce T E Level 100 0 Li Fat 4 Child button Project 720x480 29 970 Frame 831 F i 240 160x52 Masks can also be partially transparent By using gradients and grayscale images you can achieve smooth blending Black is still 100 transparent and white is opaque but the grays in between are only partially opaque 9 2 BA ote G Of ideo Preview pg Level 100 0 ui Fy at p Ex efe Best Auto H amp a mo x CO 1 Level 100 0 ll t 4 Project 720x480 29 970 Frame 87 Preview 180x120 29 970p Display 240x160x32 The effects of the masks are very clear in these examples but this is not how they would actually be used in a real production Masks are commonly used to isolate a portion of the video from an effect Masks do not need to be black and white or grayscale nor do they need to be still images a S
568. timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timeline but the event moves in the direction you drag ee O Tip You can also slip or slide grouped events at the same time or slide a crossfade between two events For more information see Grouping events on page 179 or Sliding a crossfade on page 113 SS TF Shifting the contents of slipping an event Press Alt while dragging an event The slip cursor appears As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but have the event play a different section of the source media file Slip trimming an event Press Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears As you drag the event edge the media moves with the event edge CHP 4 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES 108 y gt Sliding an event Press while dragging an event The slide cursor appears As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the event position changes You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length but have the event play a different section of the source media file at a different point in your project Tip You can apply a ripple edit after slip trimming or sliding an event For more informa
569. ting at and End at boxes to indicate the exact frames you want to record much like punch in audio recording When you click Finish recording will begin and end automatically at the specified timecode positions ee Note When using Auto Edit mode use a striped tape to ensure continuous timecode over the portion of the tape where you plan to record E Select the Preview only check box if you want to preview the your print to tape operation without engaging the deck s record head when you click Finish Use Preview only mode to double check and adjust your Start printing at and End at timecode settings as needed SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS 326 p ____ 7 Click Finish If you have not already prerendered portions of your project that cannot be rendered and printed to tape in real time will be selectively prerendered The selected video begins printing to the device A progress meter appears indicating the percent completed o O V Note The tone that you can include in the leader is fixed at 20 dB If you need a different tone level to match your audio mix create a test pattern and tone clip that is calibrated to your record deck SS eee Printing to HDV tape from the timeline T This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software and in Vegas Movie Studio Platinum software Use this procedure when you re creating an HDV p
570. tion VegSrv60 exe on the computer you will use to initiate network rendering If you do not start the service before starting a rendering job it will start automatically but it will not be visible Right click the icon in the system tray and choose Show from the menu to display the window Select the Renderers tab This tab allows you to edit the list of computers running the render service ee O V Note A computer will be displayed on the Renderers tab only if you have logged on to Windows and the Vegas Network Render Service is running If the computer is not in an area you can monitor easily you can use Ctrl Alt Delete to lock the computer after logging on and starting the service nnn E Click the Host box of a blank row in the table and then type the IP address or name of the computer you want to use as a renderer To find your computer name right click My Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to display the System Properties dialog Click the Computer Name tab and your computer name is displayed in the Full computer name entry SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS Action Progress 9 Fenderers File Mappings Options Log VIEW Basic Status Ready connecting i Hast koanney mynet met Pott Aa 4 Status Ready 4 Press to connect to the renderer If the connection is made the Status column will display Ready Troubleshooting initiation pr
571. tion see Applying post edit ripples on page 110 The original media file pot iap2isi4isiei7isio The event on the timeline 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 0000 00 06 O0 00 00 07 00 00 00 08 00 00 00 03 with original frames 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 04 A DU 00 00 09 Slipping the event two frames to the right Slip trimming the event 00 00 0004 dose 00 00 00 06 00 00 00 07 00 00 00 08 00 00 00 09 two frames to the right 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 09 Sliding the event two O0 00 00 04 frames to the right BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 L 1 09 Detecting and repairing audio and video synchronization problems When audio and video events are not aligned Vegas software will highlight the events in the timeline so you can see synchronization problems at a glance The software determines whether events are synchronized by comparing grouped and overlapping events e An event in a group is compared to other events in the same group of the opposite media type that were created from the same media and the events with the most overlap are used to calculate synchronization If no events overlap the closest events are used to calculate synchronization e An event that is not in a group is compared to events of the opposite media type that were created from the same media and the events with the most overlap are used to calculate synchronization If no events overlap no synch
572. tion dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In Vegas software most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of O dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB Device Driver A program that enables Microsoft Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Microsoft Windows software to control sound card recording and playback APPENDIX B GLOSSARY 380 r Digital Signal Processing DSP A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimi
573. tion of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2006 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories PNG file format Copyright 2006 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 20021231 Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Sony AVC AAC THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
574. tions as a trim control for track panning envelopes pms 2 Drag the Pan slider to control the position of a track in the stereo field If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted CHP 6 WORKING WITH TRACKS 146 y gt You can further control the panning by right clicking the multipurpose slider and selecting an option from the shortcut menu e The Add Channels panning model is most useful for panning BE Ma hene E G er SC stereo source material This model makes the stereo image Yok 0 596 appear to move as a unit between the speakers As the fader is eS re Add Channels 0 dB Center moved from the center to a side more and more of the signal gaia aay sire from the opposite side is folded into the side you are panning Sua Bist towards until at the extreme both channels are fed at full re intensity into a single channel This panning model uses a Theater linear panning curve e The Balance panning model is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the right and left channels in stereo source material In this model moving from the center to a side the opposite side starts at a base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level The signal in the side you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to 0 dB This panning model uses a linear panning curve e The Constant Power panning model is most us
575. tions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices Vegas Vegast DVD DVD Architect Vegas Movie Studio Vegas Movie Studiot DVD DVD Architect Studio ACID Music Studio ACIDized Super Duper Music Looper Jam Trax Sony Sound Series Chopper Groove Mapping Groove Cloning Media Manager CD Architect Sound Forge Audio Studio Acoustic Mirror Noise Reduction Wave 64 Wave Hammer and XFX are trademarks or registered trademarks of Madison Media Software Inc or its affiliates in the United States and other countries PlayStation is a registered trademark and PSP is a trademark of Sony Corporation Entertainment Inc HDV and HDV logo are trademarks of Sony Corporation and Victor Company of Japan Limited JVC All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countries Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and
576. to establish a pre roll before recording which gives you time to prepare before recording starts Because the entire recording is saved to the media file not just the material between the edges of the take you are not limited to the recorded material contained in the length of the new take You can adjust the edges of the event or slip the contents of the event if necessary For more information see Shifting the contents of slipping an event on page 107 The existing event that you record into is not affected or deleted Instead the event now contains two media files each listed as a separate take in the event For more information see Working with multiple recorded takes on page 206 1 Place the cursor before the event to allow for pre roll 2 Press and click the event to select it E aaas Tip You can record into multiple events by pressing and making selections EE RECORDING AUDIO CHP 11 e 208 3 Click the Arm for Record button on the event s track When recording into multiple selected events arm their respective tracks at this time 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar to begin recording 5 Click the Record button again or the Stop button on the transport bar to stop recording Recording into an event with a time selection Recording into a time selection allows for a pre and post roll during recording The time selection is adjustable to increase or decrease the pre and
577. to move a video track over another track i e picture in picture For more information on adding track motion see Adding track motion on page 281 Phase inverting a track audio only TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software The Invert Track Phase button inverts the audio track at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting a track while creating little audible difference is occasionally useful for matching transitions when mixing audio on separate tracks or fine tuning a crossfade You can also phase invert an audio event If an event on a track is inverted and you invert the track the event is doubly inverted restored to its original state For more information see Invert phase audio only on page 172 WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 6 L 1 49 Muting a track The Mute button in the track list temporarily suspends playback of the track so that you can focus on another track When a track is muted it appears grayed out on the track view You can mute more than one track at a time The Mute button can mute a track or change its mute automation state For more information see Mute automation audio and video on page 156 To mute a track click the Automation Settings button gt and verify Show Automation Controls is not selected Next click the Mute button To mute several tracks select the tracks and click the Mute button on any of the selected tracks Click the Mute button ag
578. to the least important Video subsystem Many graphics cards video boards primary display cards on a PC cannot handle full screen full frame rate video While this leads to jerky hesitating playback it may not actually be a serious problem A common video configuration is to have a separate video capture card and a primary display card In this case the playback using the primary display on the computer may be jerky but when you finally output the video to tape and view it on your television monitor there may not be any problems If you are not creating movies to go back to the television or VCR and you are experiencing stuttering playback you should consider using a smaller frame size 320X240 and frame rate 15 fps APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 370 r Hard disk The second most common problem is slow hard disks Until recently fast expensive SCSI AV hard disks were required to properly capture and play back video on a PC Slow hard disk problems also manifest themselves with jerky video playback although the stutters are less frequent and of longer duration than if the video subsystem is the problem Slower hard disks e g 5400 RPM IDE can cause an occasional dropped frame DV enthusiasts have fewer problems due to the low data rate 3 6 MB sec of that format The following section outlines some recommendations arranged in order of importance e Buy a dedicated video drive This is easily the most important piece of hardware a
579. tom properties from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Saving tags to files affects only the current media library and libraries that you create after saving the tags If you have multiple libraries you can add embedded tags and custom columns to existing libraries by opening the desired library and rescanning your media folders with the Add tags and custom properties from files check box selected in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Embedded file properties are also updated when you preview or add media to a project Follow these steps to save tag information in your media file s 1 Perform a search to find the files you want to tag 2 In the Search Results pane select media files for which you want to save tags and properties e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 3 Click the Save Tags and Properties to File s button H in the top right corner of the Search Results pane Information about tags associated with the file or information that you edited in the Search Results pane is saved to the selected files Tagging for loop developers If you develop collections of loops and samples you want to make sure you tag your media so users can find your loops easily and so your tagging is consistent with other existin
580. ton adds a bus to your project You can route tracks or assignable effects chains to the bus pg 186 Available only in the full version of Vegas software Using the Mixer Preview fader The Preview fader allows you to adjust the volume and monitor output levels of media files when you preview them from the Explorer or Project Media windows or play them back from the Trimmer window The Preview fader also controls the metronome volume For more information see Using the metronome on page 203 Viewing hiding the Preview fader s a Mixer 48 000 Hz 16 bit Em fee gL Dim Output gs Insert Fx 27 Insert Bus The Preview fader is hidden as a default to GR ac A P make more room for other busses and assignable i 268 L maiori maito r A A I t Assignable Fx effects chains To view or hide the Preview isa ae fader simply right click anywhere within the a j Mixer and choose Show Preview fader from the i anar shortcut menu E L Downmix Monitor Output SS Dim Output Ctrl Shift F 12 1 1 73494 Adjusting the Preview fader 45 See c v 751 RTE C1 You can adjust the Preview fader while you are L ee ey previewing a media file from the Explorer cine ee i window Drag the fader up or down or press while dragging to move in smaller increments Double click the fader to reset it You can select a preferred meter resolution at which the Preview fader displays the media file s volume level For more information see Changi
581. track CHP 14 Dragging the track Rotating left to right around the Y axis Rotating forward or Rotating around the backward around the Z axis X axis USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 254 yp 5 Use the buttons at the top of the dialog to allow or prevent movement or scaling For more information see Changing editing options on page 256 eT Tip Right click the workspace to display a shortcut menu that displays commands to restore center or flip the selection box You can also force the box to match the source media s aspect ratio or your project s output aspect ratio Matching the output aspect ratio can prevent black bars from appearing when you use source media such as photographs that does not match your project s aspect ratio a a 6 The 3D track motion occurs instantly and the results are updated in the Video Preview window 7 Use the keyframe controller at the bottom of the Track Motion window to establish distinct track motion settings throughout the duration of the track During playback immediate frames are interpolated to create smooth motion Expand the Keyframe interpolation heading on the left side of the window and drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the interpolation For more information see Using keyframe animation on page 273 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS CHP 14 e 2 BB Composited group 3D motion 1 4 5 Moving closer to or farther from viewer Drag acr
582. transform plug ins Composite Level Post Compositing Track FX Normal Track Track Motion See Track Signal Flow Diagram Composite Mode including 2 to 1 transform Lower Tracks Lower Tracks or Background or Background Composited track signal flow INTRODUCTION CHP 1 L 41 About your rights in Vegas software Vegas software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement The End User License Agreement is first presented to you when you install the software Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the software For your reference a copy of the End User License Agreement for Vegas software is located at http www sony com mediasoftware About Your Privacy Sony Media Software respects your privacy and are committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http www sony com mediasoftware Proper Use of Software The Vegas software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing
583. trols Click the Automation Settings button and choose Automation Write Touch or Automation Write Latch from the menu Automation Recording Track Icon Description Mode Automation Write Touch t Envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope points keyframes are unaffected Automation Write Latch w Envelope points or keyframes are created when you change a control setting and recording continues until you stop playback When you stop adjusting the control the control s current setting overwrites the existing envelope points keyframes USING AUTOMATION 168 j 4 Click to position the cursor in the timeline and click the Play button to start playback 5 Adjust the control that corresponds to the envelope point or keyframe you want to adjust During playback adjusting a control will create envelope points or keyframes at the cursor position As long as you re adjusting the control new envelope points keyframes will be created for each change of the play cursor s position 6 Click Stop to end playback and stop recording automation Editing sections of your recorded settings in Touch mode In Touch recording mode envelope points or keyframes are created only while a control is being adjusted When you stop adjusting the control automation recording stops and the existing envelope p
584. ts its hue For example if an image has a blue cast the distribution of dots in the vectorscope will be concentrated toward the blue portion of the color wheel If the image includes out of range blue values vectorscope display will extend beyond the blue target You can use the vectorscope to calibrate color between scenes Without calibration you may see noticeable color differences between scenes from multicamera shoots 1 From the View menu choose Video Scopes to toggle the display of the Video Scopes window 2 Choose Vectorscope from the drop down list 3 Position the cursor in the frame you want to analyze If the Update Scopes While Playing button iil is selected you can monitor your video during playback 4 The vectorscope monitor displays the chrominance of the video signal Frame Vectorscope display of frame ideo Scopes verson HE Vectorscope Normal 7 CHP 16 PREVIEWING AND ANALYZING VIDEO 296 _____ 5 Hover over a portion of the monitor to display the chroma value at the pointer position ideo Scopes i Vectorscope Normal 7 Chroma value Displaying luminance using the waveform monitor The waveform monitor in the Video Scopes window allows you to monitor the luminance brightness or Y component of your video signal The monitor plots luminance on the vertical axis and the width of the current frame on the horizontal axis If you
585. tton on the upper overlay track 4 In the Track Motion window position and resize the track area CHP 15 ADDING VIDEO TRANSITIONS AND MOTION 286 r The illustration below shows some of the relevant parts of this procedure Note the shadow cast by the overlay video This is added by selecting the 2D Shadow check box on the keyframe controller The Video Preview window displays the results Track Motion Track 2 G Source Alpha 5 R a a al oa fx GL E Position x 194 63 Yi 117 99 Width 317 79 Height 211 86 Orientation Angle 0 0 E Rotation E Angle 0 0 1 i l l K x Offset 0 00 Offset 0 00 E Keyframe Smoothness 100 00 Type Linear Workspace Snap Settings Position IY 2D Shadow M 2D Glow ja om E amp So 00 00 00 06 Tip While overlay picture in picture windows are often completely opaque you can fade them in and out using opacity envelopes For more information see Using opacity envelopes on page 177 S aoaa T Animating the overlay You can animate many aspects of an overlay using the keyframes at the bottom of the Track Motion window 1 Insert a video event onto the timeline 2 Click the Track Motion button in the track list 3 In the Track Motion window resize the overlay by dragging the handles at the edges of the overlay 4 Drag the middle of the overlay to position it This will
586. tware Web site http mediasoftware sonypictures com reference After installing the library go to the Media Manager Options dialog click the Media Library Actions button i and choose Options from the menu and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop down list Searching for media files You can use the Media Manager tool to search the current media library for media files using keywords or tags ei Tips You can use the Search results limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search results limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify the results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches SE ee Searching using a keyword 1 Select the Quick text search check box in the Search pane and type a keyword or keywords in the edit box ee Tip You can separate search terms using quotation marks and other operators If quotes or wildcard characters are not applied an is automatically added before and after each search ter
587. tware must generate the intervening frames e o o ejeje ej ejo Without resampling the intervening frames are simply the previous frame repeated o elel e eje o amp With resampling the intervening frames are interpolated from the source frames It is similar to a crossfade effect between the original frames USING ADVANCED VIDEO FEATURES CHP 13 e 2323 Resampling at either the event or project level perform the same function There are few cases where resampling may be particularly important e When the frame rate of the source media for an event is slower than the project s frame rate For example when you are using a source media file that has a 10 fps rate in a 29 97 fps rate project resampling is recommended e When changing the speed of a video event For example when slowing a clip to 30 using a velocity envelope resampling is recommended e When creating vertically scrolling titles When any of the above situations are true there are only ten frames of source material for every second of project time When the project is rendered there must be roughly thirty frames in each second The frames must be created between the source media frames sometimes known as padding The easiest way to do this is to simply duplicate the previous frame This can result in less than smooth video playback Resampling allows Vegas software to interpolate the intervening frames more smoothly Using Edit Decision Lists EDL
588. u saved the Bowed tag to a media file the file Bowed tag would be added to a user s media library when the file is added If the Basses tag did not exist in the user s library it would also be created e Because tags have unique identifiers tag information and location is preserved In the previous example the Bowed tag would be added to the correct location in the user s media library even if the user had translated all the tag names to a different language or otherwise renamed the Basses tag In this case the new tag would be added but higher level tags that were renamed by the user would be unaffected 5 Save the tags to your media files a Delete the Scan date time tags from the tag tree b If you ve searched the collection click Clear to remove all search criteria and ensure all media files are displayed in the Search Results pane c Select all files in the Search Results pane d Click the Save Tags and Properties to Files button a Tip You can also right click a selected file and choose Save Tags and Properties to Files from the shortcut menu Oe 6 Distribute your media files You may optionally include the medialib file USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 3 L 83 Backing up your media libraries Media Manager software automatically saves your library as you make changes so you don t need to tell the application explicitly to save your library as you re working However you can create a backup of
589. u want to change the track s volume or pan setting throughout the track edit the envelope in the timeline Adjusting volume or pan automation settings TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software 1 If you want to change volume or pan settings by recording automation click the Automation Settings button and select Show Automation Controls The fader slider handle is displayed as a in automation mode 2 Drag the Vol fader to control how loud a track is in the mix or drag the Pan slider to control the position of the track in the stereo field The fader and the slider behave differently depending on the track automation recording mode e When the track automation mode is set to Off the fader adjusts the volume of the entire track and the slider pans the entire track In this mode the automation control acts as a second trim control e When the track has a volume envelope and the track automation mode is set to Read the fader slider will follow the envelope during playback but cannot be adjusted e When the track automation mode is set to Touch or Latch the fader slider edits the envelope setting at the cursor position If the track does not have a volume pan envelope an envelope will be added when you adjust the fader slider If multiple tracks are selected all selected tracks are adjusted If you adjust the fader slider during playback the behavior varies depending on the selected automation
590. u work with are referred to as media files and events e Files are objects that are stored on your hard disk In Vegas software you will work with media files such as music and video files These files are neither operated on nor changed You can access files from the Vegas Explorer window e Events are periods of time on the timeline that act as windows into media files either whole or in part When you drag a media file onto the timeline you automatically create an event that contains that file s contents An event can contain video audio still images or generated media The event window may contain only a small portion of a much larger media file A single media file can be used repeatedly to create any number of different events since each event can be trimmed independently Ol1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The original media file An event trimmed from the original media file B are eee Si ae er a ere ahaa awe ee ee a ee ee ee eee ees eee eer ee ea er BI i i L a i The event as it appears in the Vegas timeline Audio events are created from audio files on your computer e g WAV MP3 or can be a part of a video file e g AVI You can change many characteristics of an audio event such as speed volume and equalization Audio events can be mixed with other audio events Video events are created from video files captured to your computer typically AVI MOV QT or images BMP JPEG PNG or TGA You can change
591. ubclip Loop region or panig Selection area _ Zoom controls 01 24 19 188 DU DU DU DT Loop Playback Cursor Add media Add media controls navigation from cursor up to cursor You can open any number of files in the Trimmer at the same time selecting the one you currently want to work on from the Trimmer history drop down list From the View menu choose Trimmer or press Alt 2 to display the Trimmer window if it is not already visible You can dock the Trimmer window in the window docking area or float it over the work area For more information see Window docking area and floating window docks on page 24 Opening a file in the Trimmer 1 Right click an event A shortcut menu appears 2 Choose Open in Trimmer You can also drag files to the Trimmer from the Explorer or the Project Media windows Double clicking a file to open it in the Trimmer You can set the software to open a file in the Trimmer when you double click the file in the Project Media or Explorer windows 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the General tab 3 Choose Double click on media file loads into Trimmer instead of tracks ADVANCED EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 5 L 1 323 Moving frame by frame in the Trimmer window As you navigate through a video file in the Trimmer the exact frame that the cursor is over in time is displayed as in a thumbnail image under the cursor When using the left and right arro
592. ug in name that is displayed in the Plug In Chooser The presetName variable should use the preset name that is displayed in the Preset box in the FX window 4 Save the script CHP 20 USING SCRIPTING USING SCRIPTING CHP 20 367 PEPEN Troubleshooting Troubleshooting resources Visit the Sony Media Software Web site to access product updates look for answers in the knowledge base contact customer support or participate in an online forum http www sonymediasoftware com Common questions Why are some of my DirectX plug ins not working correctly Vegas software is a nondestructive time based editor As a result there are certain types of DirectX plug ins that perform poorly in Vegas software These types of plug ins are roughly classified as any plug ins that output a different amount of time than what goes in This includes all plug ins such as time compress expand gapper snipper and pitch shift without preserving duration However these types of effects plug ins may perform suitably as bus effects but only if just one bus is used in the project Plug ins that require a lot of pre buffering such as Sony Media Software Acoustic Mirror when using long impulse files may also perform poorly Also make certain that the plug ins you use in Vegas software are DirectX plug ins and not DXi plug ins DXi plug ins are not supported in the application and do not perform properly Why do I hear gaps in my audio playbac
593. ume or transparency is being affected Using automatic crossfades The automatic crossfade feature turns the overlapping portions of two events into a smooth crossfade This feature is turned on as a default Click the Automatic Crossfades button tA or press Ctrl Shift X to turn automatic crossfades on and off Events before crossfade Events after crossfade A F T Drag one event to eed overlap the other An option is provided for creating automatic crossfades when you add multiple media files to a track For more information see Automatically crossfading inserted events on page 57 BASIC EDITING TECHNIQUES CHP 4 113 Manually setting a crossfade An automatic crossfade is not inserted if a shorter event is placed on top of and within the same time frame of a longer event In this case the longer event begins playing then the shorter event plays and then the longer event resumes playing at the timeline position You can manually create a crossfade to fade in and out of the shorter event 1 Place the mouse pointer on one of the shorter event s handles The envelope cursor appears 5 2 Drag the handle to the desired position Events without crossfade This is a fast and effective method of inserting a voiceover on top of a background music track although the music fades out completely or to replace a bad section of audio For more information see Punching in and crossfading events on
594. umeric keypad Trim left right when in edge trimming F3 F9 4 6 mode Move selected event s left right by the Alt Right Arrow Exit edge trimming mode Numeric keypad 5 project frame period numeric keypad 4 6 Move selected event s left right by the Ctrl Alt Right Arrow Select next take T first selected event s length numeric keypad 4 6 Move selected event s up down one Numeric keypad 8 2 Select previous take Shift T track Event editing commands Description Keys Description Keys Slip move media within Alt drag inside the Raise pitch one octave Shift event without moving the event Slip Trim move the media with the edge as it is trimmed Slide trim both ends of event simultaneously Slide Crossfade move crossfade event Alt drag edge of event Ctrl Alt drag middle of event Ctrl Alt drag over a crossfade Lower pitch one semitone Lower pitch one cent Lower pitch one octave Trim Adjacent trim selected Ctrl Alt drag edge of Reset pitch event and adjacent event event simultaneously Stretch compress the media Ctrl drag edge of Select next take in the event while trimming event Open in audio editor Ctrl E Raise pitch one semitone not numeric keypad Raise pitch one cent Ctrl Event selection commands Description Range selection Multiple selection Keys Shift click range of objects Ctrl click individual objects Select all Ctrl A Unselect all Ctrl Shift A Select all events in group Shift G
595. umn label to a new position Hide a column by dragging the column label off of the Project Media window To display a hidden column right click the Project Media window choose View from the shortcut menu and choose the column name from the submenu Sort the files in the Project Media list according to a category by clicking the column label for that category Use the Comments field to add your own annotations to a file s entry in the Project Media list Double click the field to enter text This information is saved with the project and Is not saved with the media file itself Thumbnail Displays the first frame of a video file CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 48 oO Adding media to the Project Media list You can add media to the Project Media list without adding it to the timeline by importing the file For more information see Importing media on page 53 Adding media to the Project Media list from the Explorer window 1 Navigate to and select a file to add to the Project Media list You can use or to select multiple media files 2 Right click the file and choose Add to Project Media list from the shortcut menu The selected file is added to the Project Media window Replacing media in the Project Media window You may replace a file in the Project Media window with a different file When changing the media file that an event contains every occurrence of the event on the timeline is updated with the new media file contents 1 Rig
596. undo buffer allows the ability to revert to previous versions of the project if you decide you don t like changes you ve made to the project This undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or when you choose Clear Edit History from the Edit menu Undo Redo These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state when you don t like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them The ability to undo redo is only limited by the size of your hard drive See Undo Buffer Undo Redo History A list of all of the functions that have been performed to a file that are available to be undone or redone The undo redo history gives you the ability to undo or redo multiple functions To display the history list click the down arrow on the Undo amp or Redo button Video for Windows AVI See AVI Virtual MIDI Router VMR A software only router for MIDI data between programs Vegas software uses the VMR to receive MIDI timecode and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC WAV A digital audio file format developed by Microsoft and IBM One minute of uncompressed audio requires 10 MB of storage Waveform A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variati
597. up to 99 in the order that they are placed Markers appear as orange tags above the ruler You may name them and reposition them along the project s timeline Markers l Right click the marker bar p usic bi Zhgleenver gt Loop Playback i 00 00 10 00 00 30 Set Selection to view Set Selection to Project Select Loop Region Markers Regions Insert Region Delete All Inserting a marker at the cursor 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Marker or press M 3 Type a name for the marker and press Enter If you do not want to name the marker simply press Enter Inserting a marker during playback During playback press M The marker appears on the marker bar You may name the marker after it has been set Naming or renaming a marker 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker you want to name or rename The pointer changes to a hand icon qm 2 Right click to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Rename A text box opens next to the marker 00 00 10 Ade 4 Type the marker name 5 Press to set the marker s name You can also double click an existing name or double click the space just to the right of a marker to rename it Moving markers You can reposition a marker by dragging it on the marker bar Navigating to markers You can jump the cursor to any marker on the timeline by clicking the marker You can
598. urement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio the ratio is 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI A standard interface protocol for connecting devices to your computer The SCSI bus can accept up to seven devices at a time including CD ROM drives hard drives and samplers GLOSSARY APPENDIX B SMPTE is the acronym for the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices The timecode is calculated in Hours Minutes Seconds Frames where Frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Typical frame rates for SMPTE timecode can be 24 25 29 97 or 30 frames per second depending on your local standards SMPTE Drop Frame Timecode A method of measuring time in video Drop frame involves skipping two frame numbers no frames are actually dropped every ten minutes to compensate for the difference between NTSC 29 97 fps video and 30 frame counts per second Telecine The process of creating 30 fps video television from 24 fps film cinema See inverse telecine and pulldown Tempo Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usua
599. urve The color values of the layers in the composite group are subtracted and then the subtracted values are squared Wee The resulting image will have less extreme changes in color values as the colors approach black RGB 0 0 0 and more extreme changes in color values as colors approach white RGB 255 255 255 Available only in the full version of Vegas software Adjusting opacity with the composite level slider Sioa aa reo Youcan precisely control the transparency or blending of the overlay with the Level 100 0 u Bye composite level slider Left is transparent and right is 100 opaque You can k also double click the current value to enter a specific numeric percentage S p p g Composite level slider CHP 14 USING VIDEO FX COMPOSITING AND MASKS 2852 z Using a 2 to 1 transform plug in to customize compositing Click the Parent Composite Mode a or Composite Mode button and choose Custom from the menu to use plug ins to control how the parent track modifies the tracks in its composite group TI Custom compositing is available only in the full version of Vegas software The included Displacement Map Height Map and Bump Map plug ins can create interesting lens mirror water fire and other light bending effects These plug ins are explained below e Displacement Map Uses the parent image as a guide to offset the pixels in the composited child tracks along the horizontal and vertical axes The X a
600. used to compress a media file The codec directly determines the size and quality of the movie as well as its compatibility with various playback devices The final destination for the movie dictates the choice of codec Many of the codecs used for specific rendering formats are updated periodically by their creators For information about specific codecs contact the codec s manufacturer Each codec is a small program that may have additional custom controls used to fine tune the output Click Configure to adjust these parameters manually Quality slider If the codec you choose in the Video format drop down list supports it use this slider to adjust the quality of the compression applied by the codec Interleave every This control allows you to specify how often the audio and video streams are interleaved Interleaving relates directly to how the data is saved in the file For example during the rendering process the audio data is written in between the video data based on the frame setting that you specified Interleaving allows for optimal playback of the AVI file Keyframe every If the codec you choose in the Video format drop down list supports compression keyframes select this option to set compression keyframes to adjust the quality of the compression More keyframes typically produce higher quality video but a larger file size and thus a higher data rate Data rate If the codec you choose in the Video format drop down l
601. uses a linear panning curve e The Constant Power pan type maintains a constant volume as you move the pan point from channel to channel This pan type which uses the constant power panning curve is most useful for panning monaural source media e The Film pan type allows you to pan between pairs of speakers using a constant power panning curve As you drag the pan point to the center speaker the sound becomes diffused through the front and rear speakers When the track is panned fully to the center speaker there is no sound from the front and rear speakers CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 218 r Using the grid to monitor panning The grid in the Surround Panner window helps you to visualize how your panning will sound The grid s spacing changes to match the current pan type The vertical lines represent the points where the left to right signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively at the far left line the left channel is 6 0 dB louder than the right channel The horizontal lines represent the points where the front to rear signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively As you adjust the Center fader the lines move forward or backward to compensate for the center channel gain ee O Note The grid assumes that you re using a correctly set up surround system matched speakers and ideal positioning Variations in your monitoring system will cause inconsistencies between the graph and perceived output as Auto
602. uter to be available as a renderer Automatically run Select this check box if you want to start the service automatically after logging in to the Windows operating after login system Exit service when Select this check box if you want to keep the service running after closing the window If the check box is window is closed cleared the service is minimized to the system tray when you close the window Exit Vegas when idle Select this check box if you want to close the instance of Vegas software that is launched by the network render service when no jobs are in the queue If the check box is cleared the application continues running until you close it or exit the service Remove completed Choose a setting to indicate how long jobs should be maintained on the Progress tab of the Sony Vegas jobs from progress Network Render Service window display after Default segment Choose a Setting to indicate the number of frames per segment when using distributed rendering length Adjusting this value can increase performance slightly depending on the complexity of the project and your specific rendering computers If the setting yields more than 90 segments for a rendering job the segment length for that job is automatically increased to limit the number of segments SAVING RENDERING AND PRINTING PROJECTS CHP 17 iz Printing video to tape Once you have rendered your project you have several options for printing your project to tape you
603. utton again to toggle this feature off 5 Click the Stop button S to stop playback By looping the playback you can repeatedly watch the same section of the project over and over as you make changes to filters and effects in real time You can define selection areas automatically depending on what you would like to preview For more information see Selecting a time range on page 97 and Time selection commands on page 33 CHP 2 GETTING STARTED G8 r Playback reference The following table describes all the transport bar buttons and their keyboard equivalents You may use these playback functions at any time while working in your project a 4 Note The use of many multimedia keyboards is also supported for controlling playback SS E Button Keyboard Function R Begin recording into record enabled tracks Ql Turn on off loop playback during time selection playback i gt Begin playback from the start of the project p Begin playback from cursor position T Pause playback cursor stops and holds at pause position or Stop playback cursor stops and returns to prior cursor position ld Home Place cursor at the beginning of project Ctrl End Place cursor at the end of the project Tip You can use the spacebar to stop or pause playback depending on your preference From the Options menu choose Preferences and on the General tab select Make spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop to change the s
604. velope remains in place when you move the events in the track However track envelopes can be set to move with the underlying events thus preserving the timing of envelope points in relation to events To lock all of the envelopes in a project to the events in which they occur click the Lock Envelopes to Events button or from the Options menu choose Lock Envelopes to Events You can turn this feature off by clicking the button again The original event E Music Val 0 0 de Dan Center l LRE si i Moving the event with OME G t OC I Lock Envelopes to Events Yo 0 006 tt turned on Pan Center U j Lal L l ie Music DG dev G m Moving the event with S TE 7 a aN baad oh i Lock Envelopes to Events turned off USING AUTOMATION Dan Center eres CHP 7 a 167 Automating 5 1 surround projects TI 5 1 surround is available only in the full version of Vegas software In a 5 1 surround project you can automate the center channels volume and surround panning using keyframes For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 209 Automation recording modes Automation recording allows you to edit envelope and keyframe settings by using the controls in the Vegas interface When combined with a control surface you can create fades and adjust control parameters with a level of control that only a tangible control
605. vent s fade in and out You can also change the type of curve that the event uses to control the fade in or out 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event The pointer changes to the envelope cursor 5 2 As you drag the cursor the opacity envelope appears Both the time in the event and the opacity level are displayed as you drag CHP 8 WORKING WITH EVENTS 178 r Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow sharp or smooth that an event uses to increase or decrease the opacity over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu LE 4 Tip If you use the same fade curve frequently you can set it as a default for all new video event envelopes For more information see Editing tab on page 349 ee Using velocity envelopes TI This feature is available only in the full version of Vegas software You can use velocity envelopes to change the speed of a video event over time To view a velocity envelope right click the event choose Insert Remove Envelope and then choose Velocity from the submenu 1 Right click an event choose Insert Remove Envelope and then choose Velocity from the submenu The velocity envelope appears on the event as a blue line 2 To increase the speed drag the envelope up To slow the video down drag the envelope down
606. w keys this allows you to edit with frame accuracy Make sure Animate video frames in Trimmer is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog to use this feature Making selections in the Trimmer After you have opened a media file in the Trimmer you may select a segment of it and place it in your project Make a time selection to select a segment in the Trimmer in the same way you do in the project timeline For more information see Selecting a time range on page 97 You can make a selection during playback by using the keyboard Press 1 or I to mark the start of the selection and press 0 or I to mark the end If you know the exact timecode of the point where you want to begin and end a time selection you can enter it into the boxes at the lower right corner of the Trimmer window Oil hl K US ede Ge gt uE K H amp 0000 2314 0 01 10 1 E Double click to enter a value T T T Start End Length SSS 4 Tip Press to recall the last five time selection areas in the Trimmer ae Adding selections to the timeline CHP 5 You can use the Trimmer window to do traditional three point and two point editing These editing techniques allow you to add smaller sections of files to the timeline Post edit ripple mode affects how a selection is added to the timeline from the Trimmer When the Auto Ripple button 77 is selected adding a selection from the Trimmer selection affects the position of la
607. ware to use your control surface RF OU N gt Use the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog to select the device to which your control surface is connected For more information see MIDI tab on page 348 5 Add your device on the External Control amp Automation tab a Note For information about your specific device please refer to the manufacturer s documentation a Configuring a Mackie Control Universal The Mackie Control Universal is fully supported by Vegas software An overlay is available from Mackie that you can use to label the buttons and controls with their mapped functions in Vegas software The overlay identifies the default control mapping You can also customize the buttons and controls on the Mackie Control Universal When you use the default mapping the Mackie Control is divided into several functional areas 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 2 Select the External Control amp Automation tab 3 Double click your Mackie Control Universal in the Active devices list to display the Configure Mackie Control dialog 4 To add or change a function do the following a Select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list b Select an item in the Available host functions list c Click the Assign button 5 To remove a function select an item in the User defined surface control mappings list and click the Clear button 6 To remove all functions click t
608. where to add audio on the Vegas timeline 1 From the File menu choose Import and then choose Broadcast Wave from the submenu The Import Broadcast Wave dialog displays 2 Navigate to and select a WAV file to add to the Project Media list You can use or to select multiple files 3 From the Arrange drop down list choose a setting to indicate how you want to arrange audio events on the timeline Setting Description Add across tracks A separate track is created for each BWF file you import Add across time All selected BWF files are added to a single track 4 If you chose Add across tracks in step 3 choose a setting from the Order tracks drop down list to indicate how you want to arrange the tracks in the track list Setting Description By timestamp Sorts tracks chronologically using the timestamp in each file You can display a file s timestamp at the bottom of the Import Broadcast Wave dialog by selecting a file Alphabetically by Sorts tracks alphabetically using the names of the files you import filename GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L BB 5 Choose a setting from the Positioning drop down list to indicate where imported audio will be added to the timeline Setting Description Use ruler time Adds each imported file to the Vegas timeline at the exact position indicated by its timestamp For example if you import a BWF file with a timestamp of 00 00 30 00 the media would be added to the timeline at the thirty second mark o
609. wtee tela ea teed eed eee ed ed eins 190 Adding plug ins to a plug in chain 0 ee eee eens 191 Saving customized plug in presets nssr eee eee eee eee eee nee 192 Arranging the order of pIUG INS 2 ccc eee eee eee ee eeees 193 Bypassing plug ins on the chain warcadnaind des Smal eees ee Sees ee RECs ee eee es 194 Removing plug ins from a chain lt e e edi tated ei nrnna eee eae ie se 194 Savno PUG Chas 2 223 ot ot a a tre eure Sure cee eee Eo eee eee 194 Editing saved plug in chainS lt 195 Organizing YOUN eae Na 195 Automating effects parameterS 0 0c cece eee eee eee eee 196 Applying non real time event effectS 0 ccc eee eee 196 Bypassing all audio effects escaai er raker Sa eee ae oa el Ghd Bee 196 Re eT see AUO as cast hardnwtal eee es ee ees 199 Setting Up your eqUiIpMEent lt lt lt da tab e ead nnn 199 ASIC SELIM 00 te EE 0 nee a tak Gene ates oe bao E RE eno ph gait add aa a ae a tes gen 199 SECDE serene enra Sach AEA EDE DTE ees Case ee eee ee eetecou cones 200 TABLE OF CONTENTS aa Setup with digital multitrack x 3 045 202 lt e detente teecuaek buy cheenes 200 Preparing tO record snan annann eee eens 201 Arming the track for FECOrdING siortee unease badd a te ee eels be gard gare aod seeks Waele 201 selecting recording Settings e eciee det hee ceed ele tee i ete ela 202 TSTS LG TIMICTRONON IG sekar Sane ie pia ne ar adaennted ty 2 anal aaa e de ate
610. y of file formats including AAF and broadcast wave which are discussed separately below 1 From the File menu choose Import and then choose Media from the submenu ee Tip You can also click the Import Media button amp in the Project Media window eee NE The Import dialog displays 2 Navigate to and select a media file to add to the Project Media list You can use or to select multiple files ee O Tip To limit the files displayed in the dialog choose a file type from the Files of Type drop down list or enter and an extension in the File name box For example enter wav to display all wave files in the current folder or enter guitar wav to display all wave files that have the word guitar in the file name C T o O V Tip If you select an image from a still image sequence you can select the Open still image sequence check box to import all images in the sequence as a single entry in the Project Media window In the Range box enter the number of the last image you want to open For example if you d selected AnimationOne_00001 tga in step 2 you could enter 120 in this box to create a new Project Media entry using AnimationOne_00001 tga to AnimationOne_001 20 tga This feature is only available in the full version of Vegas software R 3 Click Open The media file is added to the Project Media list CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 5p Importing AAF files TI This feature is available o
611. you can use the fader to edit volume automation on the chain s bus track Meter Displays the incoming and outgoing signal level to the assignable effects chain Lock Unlock Fader Locks the faders so the left and right Channels channels of stereo files always move together Click again to unlock the faders CHP 9 USING THE MIXER 198 rr H Tip To use the output fader to control the wet dry mix of the assignable effects chain set each plug in to 100 wet Use the output effects return fader to balance the dry track signal with the wet plug in signal eS You can work with assignable effects controls in much the same way you work with busses Use the same methods described earlier in this chapter for adjusting volume adjusting for clipping muting soloing and renaming For more information see Working with busses on page 185 Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains You can adjust the level of a track that is sent to an assignable effects chain using the multipurpose slider in the track list For more information see Assigning audio tracks to assignable effects chains on page 146 Routing assignable effects chains to busses When you add assignable effects to your project you can assign them to a specific bus for output The bus mixes the assignable effects chain s plug ins along with any tracks that may be routed to the same bus For more information see Audio signal flow on page 39 This option is
612. you ll see black bars on the sides or above and below the image To create a crop rectangle that matches the project frame aspect right click the image and choose Match Output Aspect from the shortcut menu eee Creating titles Most video projects include titles and credits There are two ways to add text to your project You can use the titling engine text generator or you can use an external image editing program to create titles For more information see Using generated media on page 247 Creating titles from images While every software application is slightly different the general procedure for creating titles with a transparent background is as follows 1 Start your image editing application 2 From the File menu choose New Set the dimensions of the new image to be the same as the frame size for the project For more information see Correcting images for DV pixel aspect ratios on page 226 Make the default canvas background color a solid color The background will be transparent in the final image so any solid color works 3 Select the Text tool and enter the text for your title e Note Size and position your titles carefully to fit within the Title Safe Area or the titles may extend beyond the edges of your television For more information see Identifying safe areas on page 293 es 4 From the File menu choose Save As 5 From the Save as type drop down list choose TGA PNG PSD or BMP PNG is recomm
613. you want to control with an envelope You can use the Select All and Select None buttons to quickly change your selections to all or none of the parameters E Note If you re working with a 5 1 surround project you can select the Enable check boxes to determine which channels will be affected by the plug in An automation envelope is added to the timeline for each selected channel so you can enable or bypass the plug in during the project If you want to use distinct plug in settings for each channel separate EQ settings for the front and surround speakers for example you can add multiple instances of the plug in to the track effects chain and select the Enable check boxes for the channels you want each instance of the plug in to affect a FA Automation Chooser Track 1 x Track Noise Gate Track EQ Track Compressor tesonant Filter o Select the plug in parameters that you want bo automate using track envelopes Frequency j OK Resonance Filter Order Bypass Select All Wet Dry Select None 5 Click OK to close the FX Automation Chooser Envelopes are displayed on the track for parameters that you selected in the FX Automation Chooser To control which effect parameter envelopes are displayed on the track click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose an envelope from the menu Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes USING AUTOMATION CHP 7
614. ype Beat Count Tempo 267 Loop is 16 CG9 115 000 D 268 Loop gt 16 gt 115 000 A 269 Loop gt S 115 000 D 270 Loop gt 6 9 115 002 R 271 l nnn gt 16 9 115 000 M 2 Set parameters for each of your search criteria If the item displays an edit box type the parameter you want to search for If the item is displayed as a hyperlink click the value to display a control you can use to set the value Choose whether you want to display files that match any or all of your search criteria e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that matches all of your search criteria Select the check boxes for the advanced search criteria you want to include in your search or clear a check box to exclude that item Previewing media CHP 3 You can use the transport controls in the Media Manager window to preview media files 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to preview e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file Start playback e If the Auto Preview button is selected
615. zed specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed DirectX Application Programming Interface A set of interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia development A DirectX plug in such as the Sony Media Software Noise Reduction DirectX plug in uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services DMSS API Because DMSS is a standard API a DirectX plug in can be used in any application that supports DMSS Dithering The practice of adding noise to a signal to mask quantization noise see also Noise Shaping Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen Dynamic Range The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor For example orchestral music has a wide dynamic range while thrash metal has a very small always loud range Emphasis A rudimentary noise reduction process that involves a boost in the high frequencies during the recording of the CD and a complimentary cut in the same frequencies during the playback of the CD The result reduces high frequency noise with

Vegas 6.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents